GIFT  OF 


TREASURY  DEPARTMENT 
UNITED  STATES  COAST  GUARD 


INSTRUCTIONS 

FOR 

UNITED  STATES 
COAST  GUARD  STATIONS 

1921 


WASHINGTON 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 
1921 


r 


TREASURY  DEPARTMENT, 
Washington,  February  15,  1921. 

The  following  Instructions  for  Coast  Guard  Stations  are 
promulgated  for  the  government  of  those  concerned,  and  shall 
be  strictly  observed. 

J.    H.    MOYLE, 

Assistant  Secretary. 
3 


44243G 


- 

..•:.-:  .:. 

INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COASl?  GUARD  STATIONS. 

CHAPTER  I. 
GENERAL  INSTRUCTIONS. 

1.  The  "  Instructions  for  Coast  Guard  Stations  "  shall  have 
the  force  and  effect  of  regulations. 

2.  In  these  Instructions  the  terra  "  out  of  commission  "  shall 
mean  the  period  during  which  a  majority  of  the  station  crew 
by  order  of  Headquarters  is  discharged  or  granted  leave  of  ab- 
sence without  pay.     At  all  other  times  a  station  shall  be  consid- 
ered as  "  in  commission." 

3.  The  officer  in  charge  of  a  Coast  Guard  station  shall  be 
responsible   for  the  proficiency   of   the   crew   in  their   various 
duties. 

4.  He  shall  keep  on  hand  sufficient  quantities  of  gasoline  and 
lubricating  oils  for  the  station  power  boats  in  order  that  they 
may  be  ready  at  all  times  for  instant  and  prolonged  service. 
No  excuse  for  a  failure  to  have  power  boats  available  owing 
to  the  lack  of  these  essentials  will  be  accepted.     He  is  enjoined 
to  use  economy  in  the  expenditure  of  gasoline,  but  no  restric- 
tion is  placed  upon  such  expenditure  if  the  interests  of  the 
public  service  would  suffer  thereby. 

5.  He  shall  report  in  writing  to  Headquarters  any  serious 
accident  to  the  station  buildings,  equipment,  station  boats,  and 
motors,  or  any  explosion  of  gasoline  about  the  station  premises 
or  in  any  power  boat,  whether  or  not  the  same  results  in  in- 
jury to  any  person,  either  connected  with  the  Coast  Guard  or 
outside  of  it,  or  in  damage  to  any  boat  or  other  property,  private 
or  public,  setting  forth  the  facts  in  detail,  and  shall  make  an 
entry  of  all  such  matters  in  the  log. 

6.  Should   additional   assistance  become   imperatively   neces- 
sary on  occasion  of  a  wreck  when  the  station  is  in  commission, 
he  is  authorized  to  employ  such  additional  number  of  compe- 
tent  men  as   are  absolutely   needed,  who  will  be  entitled  to 
receive   such    compensation    as   their    services   are    reasonably 
worth,  the  period  and  value  of  their  services  to  be  stated  and 
certified  to  by  the  officer  in  charge. 

5 


FOR  COAST  GtfARD  STATION'S. 

7.  (1)  When  necessary  to  facilitate  or  hasten  the  conveyance 
of  the  boat  or  beach  apparatus  to  the  scene  of  a  wreck,  the 
officor.m  enarge  is  .authorized  to  secure  the  use  of  horses,  carts, 
and  other  vehicles,  or  tugs,  for  the  services  of  which  reasonable 
compensation   will  be   allowed.     If  practicable,   the   officer   in 
charge  shall  make  arrangements  with  owners  of  horses,  carts, 
and  tugs  for  their  use  at  reasonable  rates  when  required. 

(2)  When  such  expense  has  been  incurred  he  shall  prepare 
one  original  and  four  memorandum  copies  and  transmit  to 
the  district  superintendent  one  original  and  three  memoran- 
dum copies  of  vouchers  therefor,  on  Form  2867,  in  favor  of 
the  persons  or  firms  performing  the  service,  to  which  he  shall 
attach  a  statement  setting  forth  fully  the  necessity  for  and 
extent  of  the  service  rendered.  A  bill  for  the  services  of  a  tug 
shall  not  include  a  charge  for  efforts  to  float  a  stranded  vessel, 
lightering  cargo,  or  other  service  performed  at  the  request  of 
the  master  or  owner  of  the  vessel,  but  shall  be  confined  solely 
to  assistance  in  towing  or  maneuvering  with  the  service  boat, 
under  direction  of  the  officer  in  charge. 

8.  The  officer  in  charge  shall  make  a  full  report  on  Form 
2631  of  every  case  of  resuscitation  or  attempted  resuscitation 
of  a  person  apparently  drowned  or  insensible  from  other  causes, 
answering  specifically  every  question  on  the  blank  and  adding 
any  other  pertinent  information.    Should  a  physician  be  present, 
he  shall  be  requested  to  append  to  the  report  any  remarks  and 
observations  that  he  may  consider  in  the  interest  of  medical 
science. 

9.  The  officer  in  charge  shall  make  a  full  report  to  Head- 
quarters of  any  property  cast  ashore  and  recovered  by  his  crew 
that  is  of  a  distinctly  personal  character  or  bears  identifying 
marks  by  which  the  owner  may  be  traced.    Members  of  station 
crews  have  no  right  of  ownership  in  property  recovered  from 
the  sea  or  found  on  the  beach.    All  such  property  for  which  no 
rightful  owner  can  be  found  shall  be  disposed  of  as  directed  by 
Headquarters. 

10.  The  officer  in  charge  shall  not,  except  in  case  of  emer- 
gency, transfer  any  article  of  permanent  equipment,  such  as  a 
boat  or  beach  wagon,  to  another  station  for  any  period  without 
previous  authorization  from  Headquarters.     When  any  article 
of  equipment  or  supply  is  transferred  to  another  station  the 
officer  delivering  it  shall  prepare  five  copies  of  the  invoice  (Form 
2556),  retain  one  copy,  and  forward  three  copies  to  the  con- 
signee and  one  copy  to  Headquarters.    The  consignee  shall  re- 


INSTRUCTIONS  tfOR  COAST  GITAKD  S^ATlOtfS.  7 

ceipt  three  copies  on  receipt  of  the  articles,  retain  one  copy,  re- 
turn one  copy  to  consignor,  and  forward  one  copy  to  Headquar- 
ters. The  consignee  and  consignor  shall  each  file  one  receipted 
copy.  The  transfer  shall  be  entered  in  the  log  and  in  the 
"  Record  of  public  property  "  of  each  station,  giving  dates  of 
transfer  and  authority.  The  temporary  transfer  of  small  quan- 
tities of  supplies,  such  as  oil,  forage,  and  the  like,  which  it  is 
intended  to  return  shall  be  entered  in  the  log  only  and  no  receipts 
need  be  taken.  The  temporary  transfer  and  use  of  service  horses 
and  vehicles  for  service  purposes  shall  be  entered  in  the  log 
only. 

11.  The  officer  in   charge  shall  be  polite   and  courteous  to 
visitors,  but  shall  not  permit  them  to  handle  any  gear  or  appa- 
ratus nor  deface  or  damage  any  station  property  by  writing, 
carving,  scratching,  or  other  means.    He  shall  detail  a  member 
or  members  of  the  crew  to  show  visitors  about  the  station,  but 
shall  not  take  or  permit  others  to  take  visitors  out  in  a  station 
boat  without  authority  from  a  superior  officer. 

12.  Petty  officers  who  desire  promotion  to  the  grade  of  war- 
rant officer  may  make  application  therefor  to  Headquarters,  and 
surfmen  who  desire  to  be  rated  petty  officers  may  make  appli- 
cation therefor  to  their  district  superintendent.    All  such  appli- 
cations shall  be  in  writing,  and  shall  bear  the  recommendations 
of  the  officers  through  whom  they  are  forwarded. 

13.  The  name  and  residence  of  each  person  attached  to  the 
station,  the  name  and  address  of  his  next  of  kin,  and  the  ad- 
dress of  a  person  on  leave  of  absence  shall  be  entered  on  the 
first  page  of  the  log. 

14.  Enlisted  men  shall  be  addressed  either  by  their  last  name 
or  by  their  number  as  shown  in  the  watch  and  patrol  bill,  as  No. 
1,  No.  2,  etc. 

15.  Enlisted  men  shall  not  be  required  to  perform  any  per- 
sonal services  for  the  officer  in  charge. 

DUTIES  or  THE  OFFICER  IN  CHARGE  AS  INSPECTOR  OF  CUSTOMS. 

24.  The  officer  in  charge  of  a  Coast  Guard  station  shall  exer- 
cise his  power  as  an  inspector  of  customs  with  reference  to 
.merchandise,  presumably  of  foreign  origin,  cast  ashore  from 
wrecks,  or  forming  the  cargo  of  vessels  stranded  or  driven  ashore 
by  stress  of  weather,  or  of  vessels  anchoring  within  the  customs 
limits  of  his  station. 


8  INSTRUCTIONS  FOB,  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

25.  He  shall  promptly  notify  the  collector  of  customs  of  the 
district  of  any  casualty  to  a  vessel  with  merchandise  presum- 
ably of  foreign  origin  and  exercise  supervision  over  the  cargo 
until  a  regular  customs  officer  arrives  to  take  the  necessary 
action  toward  forwarding  it  to  its  destination  or  to  the  nearest 
port  of  entry,  as  may  be  determined  by  the  ^wners  or  under- 
writers. 

26.  He  shall  keep  a  correct  account  of  the  dutiable  cargo  of 
a  stranded  vessel  forwarded  on  account  of  its  perishable  nature, 
or  for  any  other  reason,  to  its  destination  or  to  the  nearest 
port  of  entry  in  a  lighter  or  other  vessel  before  the  arrival  of 
a   customs   officer,   making   out   and   signing   duplicate   lighter 
manifests   (customs  blank  No.  5913)  of  the  cargo  on  board  of 
such  lighter  or  vessel,  one  of  which  he  shall  deliver  to  the  master 
thereof  and  the  other  to  the  collector  of  the  port  to  which  the 
lighter  or  vessel  is  bound. 

27.  He  shall  exercise  a  watchful  care  over  such  portions  of 
the  cargo  as  may  be  landed  or  come  on  shore  from  stranded 
vessels,  in  order  to  preserve  the  same,  as  far  as  possible,  for  the 
owners  thereof,  as  also  to  protect  the  revenue;  and,  with  this 
in  view,  dutiable  goods  and  valuable  merchandise,  other  than 
combustibles  or  explosives,  may,  for  security,  be  stored  within 
the  station ;  but  the  boat  room  must  not  be  encumbered  \vith 
articles  which   might  prevent   the  instant   availability  of  the 
apparatus. 

ACTION  AT  WRECKS. 

31.  Officers  in  charge  of  adjacent  stations  when  called  upon 
shall  at  once  proceed  to  render  assistance  unless  actually  en- 
gaged with  another  disaster  or  about  to  be  so  engaged.     If  their 
assistance  is  not  requested,  they  shall  keep  themselves  in  readi- 
ness to  respond  promptly  to  any  subsequent  call,  and  the  officer 
in  charge  of  the  station  nearest  the  wreck  shall  post  a  lookout 
within  signal  distance  of  the  scene  of  operations  to  receive  and 
transmit  such  request. 

32.  (1)  At  a  station  which  has  telephonic  communication  the 
officer  in  charge  of  the  station  nearest  to  which  a  wreck  or  other 
marine  casualty  occurs  shall  immediately  notify  the  officers  in 
charge  of  adjacent  stations  of  the  circumstance  and,  if  neces- 
sary, request  their  assistance. 

(2)  At  a  station  which  has  no  telephonic  connection  with  an 
adjacent  station  the  officer  in  charge,  upon  the 'occurrence  of  a 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  9 

marine  casualty  during  the  day,  shall  notify  the  officer  in  charge 
of  such  adjacent  station  by  flag  or  distant  signal,  if  within 
communicating  distance  by  such  means ;  if  the  casualty  occurs 
at  night,  he  shall  immediately  fire  a  red  rocket.  He  then  shall 
proceed  to  the  wreck,  firing  red  rockets  at  intervals  of  8  or  10 
minutes,  until  his  supply  is  exhausted  or  until  answered  by  the 
patrol  from  such  adjacent  station  by  hand  lights  or  from  the 
station  by  a  white  rocket.  A  patrolman,  upon  seeing  a  red 
rocket,  shall  answer  it  with  a  red  Coston  light  and  immediately 
hasten  to  his  own  station  and  report  to  the  officer  in  charge 
thereof,  who  shall,  if  the  signal  was  from  another  station,  fire  a 
white  rocket  and  hold  himself  in  readiness  to  respond  to  a 
signal  for  assistance,  posting  a  lookout  as  required  in  the 
preceding  article. 

33.  The  signal  for  assistance  at  night  from  adjacent  stations, 
where  other  and  better  means  are  not  available,  shall  consist 
of  two  red  rockets  fired  in  quick  succession  if  the  assistance  of 
one    station   is   desired,   or  of   three   rockets   if   assistance   is 
wanted  from  more  than  one  station.     Each  officer  in  charge  of 
a  station  who  is  liable  to  call   for  assistance  in  this  manner 
from   adjacent   stations   shall  have  a   previous  understanding 
with  the  other  stations^as  to  which  shall  answer  his  two-rocket 
signal  and  which  shall  answer  his  three-rocket  signal.     The  sta- 
tion or  stations  called  shall  answer  with  a  white  rocket  and 
proceed  at  once  to  the  scene  of  the  casualty.     Rockets  shall  not 
be  used  for  any  other  purposes  than  those  specified  in  this  and 
the  preceding  article. 

34.  The  officer  in  charge  of  a  station  who  first  arrives  at  a 
wreck  with  his  boat  or  apparatus  shall  at  once  proceed  to  land 
the  persons  on  board,  if  necessary  and  possible,  unless  the  con- 
ditions are  such  that  the  assistance  of  another  crew  is  indis- 
pensable".    If  two  or  more  units  of  the  Coast  Guard  are  at  the 
scene  of  a  disaster,  the  senior  officer  present  shall  have  charge 
of  the  operations. 

35.  In  attempting  a  rescue  the  officer  in  charge  of  a  station 
shall  select  such  apparatus — lifeboat  or  surf  boat,  breeches  buoy, 
or  life  car — as  in  his  judgment  is  best  suited  to  cope  effectively 
with  prevailing  conditions.     If  the   device  first   selected  fails 

•after  such  trial  as  satisfies  him  that  further  attempts  with  it 
are  useless,  he  shall  resort  to  another,  and  shall  not  desist  from 
his  efforts  until  by  actual  trial  the  impossibility  of  effecting 
a  rescue  with"  any  of  the  means  at  hand  is  demonstrated.  The 


10  XNSTRtTCTIOHS  £OH  COAST  GWA&D  STATIONS, 

statement  of  the  officer  that  he  did  not  try  to  use  the  boat 
because  the  sea  or  surf  was  too  heavy  will  not  be  accepted; 
attempts  to  launch  must  be  actually  made,  unless  the  con- 
formation of  the  coast — as  bluffs,  precipitous  banks,  etc. — is 
such  as  unquestionably  to  preclude  the  use  of  a  boat. 

36.  On  arriving  at  a  wreck  the  preservation  of  life  shall  be 
the  first  consideration  of  the  officer  or  surfman  in  charge,  and 
he  shall  on  no  account  take  aboard  goods  or  merchandise  which 
may  endanger  the  safety  of  his  boat  or  the  lives  of  those  in- 
trusted to  his  charge.     Should  anything  be  put  into  the  boat 
against  his  remonstrance,  he  is  authOKized  to  throw  it  over- 
board. 

37.  In  establishing  communication  with  a  wreck  by  means  of 
a  gun  throwing  a  line-carrying  projectile,  the  larger-sized  shot 
lines  shall  be  used  when  the  distance  and  other  conditions  per- 
mit.   When  it  is  found  necessary  to  use  a  No.  4  line,  a  larger 
line  shall  be  sent  out  by  it  for  use  in  hauling  off  the  whip;  and 
if  a  No.  7  line  has  been  successfully  thrown  to  a  vessel  judged 
to  be  300  yards  or  more  from  the  shore,   a  No.  9  or  other 
stronger  line  shall  be  sent  out  to  carry  the  whip. 

38.  The  standard  charge  of  powder  for  the  Lyle  gun  in  prac- 
tice or  drill  with  the  beach  apparatus  is  2  ounces.     In  actual 
service  4  to  6  ounces  of  powder  may  be  used  for  a  No.  4  or 
No.  7  line  and  5  to  6  ounces  for  a  No.  9  line.     The  maximum 
charge  of  6  ounces  shall  not  be  exceeded  except  under  extraordi- 
nary circumstances,  nor   until   at  least   two   trials  with  that 
charge  have  failed  to  carry  the  line  the  required  distance.     In 
such  cases  charges  of  7  to  8  ounces,  but  in  no  case  more  than 
8  ounces,  may  be  used. 

39.  If,  upon  boarding  a  stranded  vessel,  there  is  found  to  be 
no  immediate  danger  of  loss  of  life  and  the  conditions  of  sea 
and  weather  warrant  an  attempt  to  float  the  vessel,  the  officer 
and  crew   shall  render  the  master  every   assistance  in   their 
power  to  that  end,  bearing  in  mind  that  the  lines  and  gear  be- 
longing to  the  beach  apparatus  are  to  be  used  only  in  landing 
imperiled  passengers  or  crews. 

40.  When  the  master  of  a  stranded  vessel  contracts  or  bar- 
gains with  any  person  or  company  to  get  her  afloat  or  dis- 
mantle her,  or  sells  her  or  turns  her  over  to  the  wreck  commis- 
sioner or  to  any  agent  of  the  owner  or  underwriters,  the  re- 
sponsibility of  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  station  as  regards 
the  property  shall  cease,  except  as  to  customs  duties  on  the 


INSTRUCTIONS  fOR  COAST  GtfARD  STATIONS.  11 

cargo,  etc.,  unless  the  services  of  the  crew  are  required  by  sub- 
sequent danger  or  casualty. 

41.  While  the  saving  of  property  is  an  important  function  of 
the  Coast  Guard,  second  only  to  the  saving  of  human  life,  and 
officers  and  crews  are  required  to  make  every  reasonable  effort 
to  that  end,  they  shall  not  neglect  the  regular  duties  of  their 
stations,  particularly  the  patrols  and  watches,  in  order  to  per- 
form labor  on  board  a  stranded  vessel  not  in  immediate  danger 
of  total  loss  when  such  labor  can  be  performed  by  her  crew 
or  by  other  persons  available  for  hire ;  and  the  master's  neglect 
or  refusal  to  secure  such  assistance  at  the  earliest  opportunity 
shall  be  deemed  to  relieve  the  station  crew  from  further  re- 
sponsibility.   In  no  case  shall  a  station  crew  or  portion  thereof 
remain  on  board  a  vessel,  when  removed  from  the  station  limits, 
to  man  the  pumps,  lighter  cargo,  etc.,  unless,  in  the  judgment  of 
the  officer  in  charge  of  the  station,  the  crew  of  the  vessel,  with 
the  aid  of  such  other  help  as  is  procurable,  is  unable  to  keep  her 
afloat.     In  case  the  vessel  can  be  kept  afloat  without  their  aid, 
they  shall  return  to  the  station  and  resume  their  regular  duties 
as  soon  as  possible. 

42.  When  a  working  party  is  employed  on  board  of  a  wreck, 
the  officer  in  charge  shall,  on  the  approach  of  bad  weather,  exer- 
cise the  same  vigilance  for  saving  life  as  in  the  case  of  a  vessel 
just  stranded. 

43.  The  bodies  of  drowned  persons  found  in  the  surf,  on  the 
beach,  or  on  a  wrecked  vessel  shall  be  properly  cared  for  until 
they  can  be  turned  over  to  friends  or  to  the  proper  local  authori- 
ties.    If  they  can  not 'be  positively  identified,  a  description,  as 
complete  in  detail  as  possible,  shall  be  entered  in  the  log,  and 
a  copy  immediately  sent  through  the  proper  channel  to  Head- 
quarters, with  any  information  obtainable  as  to  the  possible 
identity  of  the  drowned  person.     A  station  crew  may  aid  in 
recovering  the  bodies  of  drowned  persons  when,  in  the  opinion 
of  the  officer  in  charge,  such  work  will  not  interfere  unduly  with 
their  regular  duties. 

44.  If  articles  of  value,  trinkets,  or  anything  else  that  may 
assist  in  its  identification  are  found  upon  a  body,  they  shall  be 
carefully  preserved  and  turned  over  to  the  coroner  or  other 
proper  civil  officer  and  duplicate  receipts  taken  therefor,  one 
of  which  shall  be  retained  by  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  station 
and  the  other  forwarded  to  Headquarters. 


12  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

PATROLS  AND  LOOKOUTS. 

51.  Where  patrols  are  maintained  in  two  directions,  the  pa- 
trol for  the  second  half  of  the  period  shall  ordinarily  be  made  in 
a  direction  opposite  to  that  in  which  it  was  made  during  the 
first  half.    When  practicable,  the  watch  and  patrol  bill  shall  be 
so  arranged  that  the  same  person  shall  not  make  the  patrol  in 
the  same  direction  on  successive  nights. 

52.  The   lookout  shall  be  stood  at  or  in  the  watch  house, 
station  lookout,  or  other  place  where  the  best  view  of  the  coast 
and  surrounding  waters  may  be  obtained.     This   place  shall 
be  designated  by  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  station,  with  the 
approval  of  the  district  superintendent.    The  lookout  shall  not 
leave  his  post  for  meals  or  other  purposes  until  properly  re- 
lieved, except  when  necessary  to  give  an  alarm  of  a  wreck  or 
other  casualty. 

53.  When   two  or  more  stations  are  within   communicating 
distance,  patrols  covering  the  same  or  similar  periods  of  time 
shall  be  made  in  the  same  direction  from  each  of  those  stations. 
Where   the  distances   to  be   covered   are  short,   two   or   more 
patrols  each  \vay  may  be  required  in  each  watch. 

54.  On  those  portions  of  the  coast  where  the  limits  of  the 
patrol  can  not  be  seen  from  the  station,  the  beach  shall  be  con- 
sidered sufficiently  patrolled  during  daylight  if  the  limits  are 
brought  in  sight  at  least  three  times. 

55.  A  complete  record  of  patrols  and  lookouts  shall  be  made 
by  means  of  checks,  time  detectors,  or  telephone,  or  by  such 
other  means  as  may  be  prescribed  by  Headquarters. 

56.  When  a  surf  man  has  made  his  regular  patrol  and  his 
time  has  not  expired,  he  shall  continue  to  patrol  the  beach 
until  it  is  time  to  call  his  relief.     During  his  watch  on  the 
beach  a  surf  in  an  shall  not  remain  at  the  station  longer  than 
is  necessary  to   get   warm   or  trim   his   lantern.     Should   any 
person  fail  to  return  at  the  expiration  of  his  patrol,  the  next 
patrolman  shall  set  out  at  the  regular  time,  witnout  awaiting 
the  arrival  of  his  predecessor. 

57.  (1)  A  person  on  lookout  watch  shall  make  impressions  on 
the  dial  of  the  time  detector  or  watchman's  clock  at  intervals 
of  30  minutes. 

(2)  A  surf  man  on  patrol  shall  make  impressions  upon  the 
dial  of  the  time  detector  with  keys  located  at  such  points  as  the 
officer  in  charge  may  determine,  with  the  approval  of  the  dis- 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  13 

trict  superintendent.  If  two  or  more  points  are  to  be  visited 
by  the  patrol,  a  different  key  shall  be  placed  at  each  and  used 
in  turn. 

58.  Where  the  entire  beach  between  two  stations  is  not  cov- 
ered by  the  patrols  a  key  post  shall  be  placed  at  the  limit  of. 
each  prescribed  patrol,  and  the  surfmen  shall,  by  use  of  watch- 
men's clocks,  make  records  of  their  visits  thereto. 

59.  Where  adjacent  stations  are  so  located  that  their  patrol 
limits  join  each  surfman  on  patrol  shall  carry  a  check  bearing 
his  crew  number  and  the  name  or  number  of  his  station,  which 
he  shall  deposit  in  the  prescribed  place,  to  be  taken  up  by  the 
next  surfman  from  the  adjacent  station  and  delivered  to  the 
officer  in  charge  thereof,  except  that  the  last  patrolman  in  the 
morning  shall  not  so  deposit  a  check.     The  officer  in  charge  of 
each  station  shall  return  the  checks  so  received  to  the  proper 
halfway  point  by  the  first  patrolman  of  the  next  night  reaching 
there. 

60.  A  surfman  failing  to  find  the  check  which  should  be  at 
the  halfway  point  shall,  in  the  absence  of  telephonic  communica- 
tion at  that  point,  proceed  to  the  next  station  and  ascertain  the 
cause  or  failure  to  deposit  the  check  and,  if  possible,  notify  the 
officer  in  charge  of  this  station  by  telephone  of  his  action.     If 
such  surfman  be  the  first  patrolman  of  that  watch,  the  officer  in 
charge  of  the  station  shall  at  the  appointed  time  take  the  second 
station  lookout  himself  and  send  out   the  second  patrolman. 
Where  telephonic  means  of  communication  are  provided  between 
the  halfway  point  and  the  next  station  a  surfman,  when  unable 
to  find  the  required  check,  shall  so  inform  the  officer  in  charge 
of  the  station  concerned,  who  shall  have  the  intervening  beach 
patrolled  at  once. in  search  of  the  missing  patrolman. 

61.  Where  telephone  facilities  exist  they  shall  be  used  by  a 
surfman  to  report  his  arrival  at  the  patrol  post  or  halfway 
house  to  the  station  lookout,  as  well  as  any  information  perti- 
nent to  the  service,  such  as  vessels  anchored  or  passing  danger- 
ously near  the  coast.     Should  he,  after  repeated  calls  at  reason- 
able intervals,  fail  to  secure  a  response,  he  shall  return  to  the 
station  and  immediately  report  to  the  officer  in  charge  his  in- 
ability to  communicate  with  the  station  lookout. 

62.  The  officer   in   charge   shall   preserve   the   patrol   checks 
with  the  utmost  care  in  a  place  where  they  will  be  accessible 
only  to  himself  or,  in  his  absence,  to  the  person  in  charge.     He 
shall  particularly  caution   the  surfmen  against  their  loss  or 


14  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS, 

abuse,  holding  them  liable  therefor,  and  in  case  of  loss  lie  shall 
Investigate  the  circumstances  forthwith  and  report  the  facts  to 
the  district  superintendent.  No  surfman  shall  have  in  his  pos- 
session any  unauthorized  check  or  time-detector  key.  Should 
the  officer  in  charge  discover  any  unauthorized  check  or  time- 
detector  key  in  the  possession  of  a  surfman  he  shall  imme- 
diately report  all  the  circumstances  to  the  district  superintend- 
ent, who  shall  forward  the  report  to  Headquarters  and  recom- 
mend that  charges  be  preferred  against  such  surfman. 

63.  When  not  in  use  the  time  detectors  and  keys  therefor 
shall  remain  in  a  place  accessible  only  to  the  officer  in  charge  or, 
in  his  absence,  the  person  in  charge.    He  shall  not  show  the 
keys  nor  communicate  the  numbers  of  those  in  use  to  any  person 
other  than  a  commissioned  officer.     He  shall  frequently  visit 
the   key   posts,   station   lookout,   and  watch   house,   and   shall 
change  the  keys  at  least  once  a  week  at  irregular  intervals, 
and  oftener  if  deemed  necessary  to  insure  the  integrity  of  the 
patrol.     The  dates  of  such  visits  and  the  condition  of  the  posts 
and  keys  shall  be  noted  in  the  log,  but  not  the  fact  of  exchange 
or  the  number  of  keys  exchanged.     On  each  visit  he  shall  care- 
fully inspect  the  posts,  safes,  chains,  and  keys ;  if  any  be  found 
broken,  mutilated,  or  tampered  with,  he  shall  immediately  re- 
port all  ascertainable  facts  to  the  district  superintendent,  who 
shall    forward    the   report    to    Headquarters   with    his   recom- 
mendation.    He  shall  make  every  effort  to  discover  the  offender 
and  obtain  proof  of  his  guilt.     Only  one  key  shall  be  kept  in  a 
key-post  safe,  lookout,  or  watch  house  at  a  time,  and  two  keys 
bearing  the  same  number  or  making  identical  impressions  shall 
not  be  in  use  at  the  same  time  at  any  one  station. 

64.  At  4  p.  m.  each  day  the  officer  in  charge  shall  wind  the 
patrol  clocks,  mark  and  remove  the  old  and  insert  and  mark 
new  dial  cards,  using  one  of  the  keys  in  his  possession  for  this 
purpose.     Before  inserting  a  dial  card  he  shall  see  that  there 
is  no  surplus  edge  beyond  the  printed  dial,  in  order  that  it  may 
revolve  freely  in  the  case.    He  shall  indicate  by  red  ink  circles 
on  each  card  removed  the  impressions  made  by  himself  and 
mark  on  the  back  thereof,  with  ink,  the  date   (for  example, 
January  1-2,  1920;  January  2-3,  1920)  and  the  number  of  the 
station.      Having   properly    marked   the    card,    he    shall    thor- 
oughly examine  it  to  see  that  all  required  impressions  have 
been  made  thereon  by  the  lookout  and  patrol.     At  the  end  of 
each  week  he  shall  forward  all  the  dials  that  have  been  used, 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  15 

with  the  transcript  of  the  log  for  the  corresponding  week,  to 
the  district  superintendent. 

65.  If  upon  examination  the  officer  in  charge  discovers  any 
discrepancy  in  the  record  of  lookouts  and  patrols,  as  shown 
by  the  impressions  on  a  dial,  not  properly  accounted  for  by  the 
surfman  immediately  upon  its  occurrence  or  upon  his  return 
from  patrol,  as  prescribed  in  article  57,  he  shall  enter  all  the 
facts  connected  therewith  in  the  log,  and  if  the  failure  was,  in 
his  judgment,  due  to  fault  or  negligence  shall  impose  such 
punishment  in  conformity  with  the  regulations  as  he  deems 
proper.     He  shall  report  all  the  circumstances  to  the  district 
superintendent. 

66.  Each  officer  and  each  surfman  shall  be  accountable  for 
the  care  and  preservation  of  the  patrol  clocks  in  his  possession. 
The  surfman  on  lookout  or  patrol  shall  at  all  times  protect  the 
clock  from  dampness,  carrying  it  under  his  coat,  if  necessary, 
and  shall  avoid  jarring  or  striking  it  against  any  object  and 
prevent  sand  entering  the  keyholes.    Upon  each  surfman's  visit 
to  a  key  post  he  shall  carefully  inspect  the  post,  key,  safe,  and 
all  fastenings,  and  if  any  is  found  broken,  mutilated,  or  tam- 
pered with,  he  shall  report  the  fact  to  the  officer  in  charge 
immediately  by  telephone  or  upon  his  return  to  the  station. 
The  stopping  of  a  patrol  clock,  its  failure  to  sound  the  marking 
of  the  dial  card,  or  any  observed  irregularity  in  or  damage  to  it 
shall  likewise  be  reported  promptly  to  the  officer  in  charge. 

67.  A  surfman  on  patrol  shall  not  deviate  from  the  prescribed 
route  along  the  beach,  except  when  necessary  for  his  personal 
safety,  and  he  shall  endeavor  to  retain  an  unobstructed  view  to 
seaward  when  forced  to  retire  inland.    Riding  on  a  bicycle,  on 
cars,  in  boats,  or  other  private  or  public  conveyances  shall  not 
be  permitted  unless  specially  authorized  by  Headquarters. 

68.  A  surfman  upon  his  return  from  patrol  shall  not  retire 
until  his  relief  is  dressed  and  ready  with  the  necessary  equip- 
ment to  take  the  beach.    Ten  minutes  is  sufficient  for  a  man  to 
prepare  himself  to  go  on  patrol,  and  a  longer  time  shall  not  be 
allowed. 

69.  In  addition  to  the  time  detector  or  patrol  checks  pre- 
scribed in  articles  57,  58,  and  59,  each  surfman  on  patrol  shall 
carry  a  signal  holder  and  not  less  than  three  red  pyrotechnic 
signals  of  approved  type  in  fit  condition  for  use,  a  lantern  hav- 
ing a  clear  glass  globe,  lighted  or  unlighted,  as  he  may  prefer, 
a  supply  of  matches  carefully  protected  from  dampness,  and 
such  other  articles  as  may  be  prescribed. 


16  INSTRUCTIONS  FOB,  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

70.  When    a    surf  man    on    patrol    discovers    a    wrecked    or 
stranded  vessel  he  shall  at  once  fire  a  red  pyrotechnic  signal  oJ 
approved  type  and  shall  immediately  notify  his  station  by  port 
able  telephone  or  flash-light  signals,  using  the  readiest  available 
of  these  means  of  communication.     The  station  lookout  shall 
answer  by  firing  one  red  pyrotechnic  signal,  unless  quicker  re 
sponse  can  be  made  by  telephone  or  flash-light  signals.    A  surf 
man  on  patrol  receiving  no  answer  to  his  signal  or  call,  shall 
if  within  easy  reach  of  a  telephone  call  box,  notify  his  statior 
by  that  means  arid  hasten  to  the  station  to  assist  with  the  boal 
or  other  apparatus. 

71.  A  surfman  on  patrol  who  discovers  a  vessel  dangerouslj 
near  the  shore  or  a  shoal  shall  immediately  burn  a  red  pyro- 
technic signal  as  a  warning,  and  if  he  be  provided  with  a  flash 
light  torch  he  shall  endeavor  to  get  in  communication  with  hei 
by  means  of  it  and  inform  her  of  her  position. 

72.  If  a  vessel  be  discovered  dangerously  near  the  shore  or  g 
shoal  during  the  day,  she  shall  be  warned  by  hoisting  the  propei 
International  Code  signals.     In  order  that  all  members  of  tin 
crew  may  be  thoroughly  qualified  to  give  such  warnings,  eacl 
officer  and  surfman,  including  temporary  surfmen  and  substi 
tutes,  shall  make  a  study  of  the  coast  line  embraced  within  th< 
patrol  limits  of  his  station,  as  shown  by  Government  charts  anc 
verified  by  frequent  soundings  and  by  taking  bearings  of  shoals 
headlands,   lighthouses,   buoys,    and   other   daymarks.     Before 
sending  a  new  surfman  or  a  substitute  upon  patrol  the  officer  ir 
charge  shall  instruct  him  on  what  bearing  or  at  what  distance 
offshore  an  approaching  vessel  shall  be  warned  of  her  danger. 

SUKFMEN. 

80.  Surfmen,  temporary  surfmen,  substitutes,  and  the  cook  01 
temporary  cook  shall  reside  at  the  station  while  it  is  in  commis 
sion,  and  none  of  these  persons  shall  absent  himself  therefron 
except  when  on  duty,  leave,  or  liberty. 

81.  (1)   A  surfman  on  lookout  shall  keep  in  a  rough  log  ? 
record  of  each  vessel  passing  the  station,  noting  its  class,  nam< 
(if  known),  time  of  passing,  and  direction  in  which  proceeding 
He  shall  also  enter  in  the  rough  .log  all  telephone  connections 
made,  all  telephone  messages  received  and  sent,  and,  if  long 
distance  calls;  from  whom  received  and  to  whom  sent,  and  th< 
time  of  each.    He  shall  sign  the  rough  log  at  the  end  of  his 
watch. 


INSTRUCTIONS  POB,  COAST  G1TABB  STATIONS.  17 

(2)  Pie  shall  not  sit  down,  lie  down,  sleep,  read,  entertain 
visitors,  or  do  anything  else  that  will  tend  to  interfere  with 
the  proper  discharge  01  his  duties.    He  shall  immediately  report 
to  the  officer  or  other  person  in  charge  of  the  station  all  occur- 
rences which  involve,  or  seem  likely  to  involve,  danger  to  or 
loss  of  life  or  property.    He  shall  not  leave  the  lookout  unless 
properly  relieved. 

(3)  He  shall  not  take  into  the  lookout  any  book,  paper,  pam- 
phlet, or  other  reading  matter,  or  any  chair,  stool,  bench,  or 
other  seat,  nor  shall  he  permit  any  such  article  or  articles  or 
any  person  not  connected  with  the  service  in  the  lookout  while 
he  is  on  watch. 

82.  When  any  member  of  a  station  crew  discovers  a  vessel 
wrecked,  stranded,  or  in  distress  he  shall  at  once  report  the 
fact  to  the  officer  or  surfman  in  charge;  if  on  patrol,  he  shall 
De  governed  by  the  provisions  of  article  70  and  immediately 
report  to  the  officer  or  surfman  in  charge. 

SWIMMING  QUALIFICATIONS. 

83.  (1)   It  shall  be  the  duty  of  all  officers  in  charge  of  stations 
to  see  that  every  enlisted  person  attached,  except  the  cook, 
unless  permanently  excused  by  Headquarters,  shall  demonstrate 
his  ability  as  a  good  swimmer  by  passing  the  following  tests, 
sach  of  which  shall  be  performed  as  a  single  exercise  and  not 
separated  into  its  component  parts  with  intervals  of  rest  be- 
tween : 

a.  To  swim  100  yards,  dive  properly  from  the  surface,  and 
swim  50  yards  on  his  back. 

b.  To  dive  from   the  surface  of  the  water  and  bring  up   a 
10-pourid  object  from  a  depth  of  at  least  7  feet.  • 

c.  To  carry  a   supposedly   drowning  person   of  at  least   his 
Dwn  weight  20  yards  with  a  two-hand  carry  and  20  yards  with  a 
wie-hand  carry. 

d.  To  swim  50  yards  dressed,  with  shoes,  trousers,  and  coat 
3n,  and  at  the  end  of  the  50  yards'  swim  to  remove  those  arti- 
cles in  the  water  without  touching  bottom. 

(2)   The  officer  in  charge  will  be  expected  to  use  proper  dis- 
cretion in  conducting  the  tests,  and  shall  not  require  men  to 
undergo  them  under  unfavorable  conditions  or  to  remain  too 
long  at  a  time  in  the  water  or  in  wet  clothing.    He  shall  not 
34079—21 2 


18  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

require  any  member  of  a  crew  to  undergo  all  four  tests  in 
immediate  succession,  or  in  any  one  day,  unless  the  person 
desires  to  do  so  and  the  officer  in  charge  regards  it  as  safe  and 
expedient.  The  officer  may,  however,  require  each  applicant  to 
undergo  tests  (a)  and  (&)  at  any  one  time. 

(3)  Petty  officers  and  surf  men  shall  keep  themselves  in  good 
swimming  practice.  To  this  end  each  officer  in  charge  of  a  sta- 
tion is  enjoined  to  require  his  crew  to  practice  swimming  when 
the  conditions  are  favorable,  paying  particular  attention  to  the 
means  which  would  be  employed  in  saving  drowning  persons. 

84.  (1)  Provided  the  temperature  of  the  air  and  water  and 
the  condition  of  the  weather  are  favorable,  the  officer  in  charge 
shall  require  every  applicant  for  original  enlistment,  or  for  re- 
enlistment,  except  as  stated  below,  to  undergo  these  tests  before 
enlistment  or  reenlistment.  When  the  tests  can  not  be  made 
prior  to  enlistment  or  reenlistment,  they  shall  be  made  at  the 
earliest  opportunity  thereafter.  When  the  tests  are  conducted 
in  any  case  after  enlistment  or  reenlistment  and  the  results  are 
unsatisfactory,  the  officer  in  chargfe  shall  report  the  facts  to  the 
district  superintendent,  who  shall  refer  the  matter  to  Head- 
quarters with  appropriate  recommendation.  xVpplicants  for  re- 
enlistment  who  have  qualified  in  these  tests  during  a  former 
enlistment,  and  those  who  have  been  permanently  excused  by 
Headquarters  from  undergoing  them,  shall  not  again  be  re- 
quired to  undergo  the  swimming  tests  as  a  qualification  for  re- 
enlistment,  but  it  must  be  shown  by  the  records  of  the  Service 
that  the  tests  were  successfully  passed  by  all  such  applicants  or 
that  the  applicants  were  permanently  excused  by  Headquarters. 

(2)  A  man  required  to  qualify  as  a  good  swimmer  under  the 
provisions  of  article  83  may  be  permanently  excused  by  Head- 
quarters from  undergoing  the  swimming  tests  because  of  his 
age,  or  length  of  service,  or  upon  the  recommendation  of  a  medi- 
cal report.  Upon  satisfactory  evidence  to  Headquarters  that 
such  man  "  has  been  able  to  swim  well,"  he  will  be  regarded  as 
a  good  swimmer  and  will  be  entitled  to  an  honorable  discharge 
if  otherwise  qualified  therefor  under  the  Regulations.  In  every 
case  covered  by  this  article  the  medical  report  must  be  obtained 
from  a  proper  medical  officer  and  shall  indicate: 

a.  The    physical    ailment    or    constitutional    difficulty    which 
makes  it  inadvisable  for  the  man  to  undergo  the  swimming  tests. 

b.  Whether  such  ailment  or  constitutional  difficulty  is  inci- 
dent to  service. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  19 

tf'C.  Whether  it  is  permanent. 

(1.  What  ill  effects,  if  any,  would  likely  result  if  the  man 
should  undergo  the  swimming  tests  when  the  temperature  of  the 
water  and  air  is  suitable. 

(3)  When  a  person  is  permanently  excused  from  taking  the 
swimming  tests  but  is  not  regarded  as  a  good  swimmer  under 
the  provisions  of  paragraphs  (1)  and  (2)  of  this  article,  he  is 
entitled  to  an  ordinary  discharge  only.  Such  a  man's  mark 
for  proficiency  in  rating  shall  be  less  than  "  2.75  "  and  his  dis- 
charge shall  carry  the  notation  :  "  Not  a  good  swimmer,  but 
permanently  excused  from  undergoing  the  swimming  tests  by 

Headquarters'  letter  of ,  19__."  Such  a 

person  may  be  recommended  for  reenlistment  if  otherwise  quali- 
fied therefor. 

85.  (1)  A  person  discharged  by  direction  of  Headquarters  by 
reason  of  failure  to  qualify  as  a  good  swimmer  shall  be  given 
an  ordinary  discharge,  and  the  reason  for  such  discharge  shall 
be  indicated  in  the  space  provided  for  the  purpose  by  using  the 
following  notation :  "  Inaptitude  for  the  service.  Not  a  good 
swimmer."  The  discharge  shall  also  carry  the  notation :  "  Is 
not  recommended  for  reenlistment  as  a  petty  officer  at  a  station 
or  as  a  surfman  until  he  qualifies  as  a  good  swimmer,"  and  in 
all  such  cases  the  mark  for  proficiency  in  rating  shall  be  less 
than  "  2.75  "  if  he  be  a  petty  officer  and  less  than  "  2.5  "  if  of  a 
lower  rating. 

(2)  In  every  case  where  a  man  required  to  qualify  as  a  good 
swimmer  under  the  provisions  of  article  83  is  discharged  (ex- 
cept under  the  conditions  enumerated  in  articles  84  (3)  and 
85  (1) ),  and  such  man  has  not  qualified  as  a  good  swimmer 
by  passing  the  required  tests,  or  is  not  regarded  as  a  good 
swimmer  under  article  84  (2),  he  shall  be  given  an  ordinary 
discharge,  and  the  discharge  shall  carry  the  notation :  "  Is  not 
recommended  for  reenlistment  as  a  petty  officer  at  a  station 
or  as  a  surfman  until  he  qualifies  as  a  good  swimmer."  Where 
a  man  is  about  to  be  discharged  under  the  conditions  set  forth 
in  this  article  and  his  record  is  such  that  he  would  be  entitled 
to  an  honorable  discharge  except  for  the  fact  that  he  is  not  a 
good  swimmer,  and  the  circumstances  and  conditions  of  his 
case  appear  to  warrant  that  he  be  excused  altogether  from  tak- 
ing the  tests  or  given  additional  time  to  qualify  in  them,  the 
district  superintendent  shall  bring  the  matter  to  the  attention 
of  Headquarters  with  a  statement  of  the  facts  and  make  suit- 


20  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

able  recommendations,  in  sufficient  time  for  appropriate  action 
by  Headquarters. 

(3)  A  person  who  is  not  recommended  for  reenlistment  be- 
cause of  failure  to  qualify  as  a  good  swimmer  shall  not  be  re- 
enlisted  for  duty  at  a  station,  except  as  cook,  without  authority 
from  Headquarters. 

86.  (1)  When  an  enlisted  man  has  qualified  as  a  good  swim- 
mer by  passing  the  prescribed  tests,  the  following  entry  shall 
be  made  in  the  blank  space  at  the  bottom  of  page  4  of  all  copies 
of  his  "  Enlistment  contract  and  record  "  : 

"  Qualified  as  a  good  swimmer  at  Station  No.  ____  ,  ________ 


(2)  When  an  enlisted  man  has  been  permanently  excused 
from  undergoing  the  swimming  tests  and  is  regarded  as  a  good 
swimmer  under  the  provisions  of  article  84  (2),  the  following 
entry  shall  be  made  on  his  "  Enlistment  contract  and  record  "  : 

"  Regarded  as  a  good  swimmer  by  authority  of  Headquar- 
ters' letter,  ____________________  ,  19_..." 

(3)  When  an  enlisted   man   has  been  permanently  excused 
from  undergoing  the  swimming  tests,  but  is  not  regarded  as  a 
good  swimmer  under  the  provisions  of  article  84   (2),  the  fol- 
lowing entry  shall  be  made   on   his   enlistment  contract  and 
record  : 

"Not  a  good  swimmer,  but  permanently  excused  from  taking 
the  swimming  tests  by  authority  of  Headquarters'  letter, 
____________________  ,  19  ___  » 

(4)  Upon  each  reenlistment  the  particular  entry  applicable 
to  his  case  will  be  repeated  in  the  new  "  Enlistment  contract 
and  record  "  of  every  enlisted  man  at  a  Coast  Guard  station. 

87.  In  the  case  of  each  enlisted  man  whose  "  Enlistment  con- 
tract and  record  "  does  not  carry  one  of  the  entries  indicated 
in  article  86,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  officer  in  charge  of  the 
station  to  which  the  man  is  attached  to  see  that  the  man  under- 
goes at  the  earliest  practicable  date  the   swimming  tests  in 
which  he  has  failed  to  qualify. 

88.  Ample  opportunity  shall  be  given  the  personnel  to  engage 
in  swimming,  both  for  pleasure  and  practice,  but  officers  in 
charge  of  units  should  take  suitable  precautions  to  safeguard 
the  lives  of  men  under  their  command  by  prohibiting  swimming 
immediately  after  meals,  in  contaminated  waters,  arid  waters 
unsafe  for  diving.     If  practicable,  a  pulling  boat  should  be  kept 
ready  and  manned  in  the  vicinity  of  the  swimmers. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  21 

CARE  AND   PRESERVATION  OF  PROPERTY. 

91.  No  unauthorized  changes  shall  be  made  in  any  building 
at  a  station. 

92.  The  officer  in  charge  shall  each,  month  make  an  examina- 
tion of  the  foundations  of  all  buildings,  and  shall  see  that  sand 
is  kept  below  the  sills,  joists,  etc.     He  shall  see  that  the  skirting 
around  the  foundations  is  sound,  promptly  renewing  any  de- 
cayed boards. 

93.  He  shall  see  that  gutters  and  down  spouts  are  kept  clear 
of  trash,  leaves,  or  sand. 

94.  He  shall  see  that  the  floors  are  kept  clean  and  oiled  at 
frequent  intervals  with  the  prescribed  preparation. 

95.  He  shall  see  that  all  sashes  are  kept  in  good  operative 
condition,  renewing  sash  cords  when  necessary. 

96.  He  shall  see  that  all  locks,  knobs,  and  hardware  generally 
vare  set  up  snug,  and  shall  not  permit  anything  to  get  loose. 

97.  He  shall  frequently  inspect  the  roofs  for  leaks,  and  make 
f  prompt  repairs  before  damage  occurs. 

98.  He  shall  see  that  barns  and  stables  are  kept  in  good  sani- 
tary condition  and  in  good  repair. 

99.  He  shall  see  that  boathouses,  inclines,  etc.,  are  kept  in 
thorough  repair  and  clear  of  sand  and  other  obstructions. 

100.  He  shall  see  that  all  buildings  not  continuously  in  use 
are  thoroughly  aired  at  frequent  intervals. 

101.  He  shall  see  that  the  launchways  are  kept  clear  of  sand 
and  other  obstructions,  and  that  the  launching  carriages,  boat 
•wagons,  etc.,  have  all  moving  parts  thoroughly  clean  and  oiled. 

102.  The  officer  in  charge  shall  immediately  report  to  Head- 
quarters the  loss,  theft,  or  destruction  of -any  article  of  value, 
giving  the  attendant  circumstances  and,  if  possible,  the  date 
when  the  article  was  received.     Such  articles  shall  not  be  re- 
ported by  a  board  of  survey,  but  entered  as  "  lost,"  "  destroyed," 
etc.,  with  date  of  occurrence,  in  column  of  "  Remarks  "  in  the 
"  Record  of  public  property." 

103.  All  new  cordage  of  any  kind  upon  being  received  at  a 
station  shall  be  stretched,  all  kinks  worked  out,  and  then  meas- 
ured and  properly  rolled  or  coiled,  and  their  respective  lengths 
entered  in  the  -record  of  public  property. 

104.  The  officer  in  charge  shall  see  that  the  screens  furnished 
for  windows  and  doors  of  the  station  and  detached  kitchen  and 
pantry  are  kept  in  place  and  screened  doors  kept  closed  at  all 


22  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

times  when  their  use  is  necessary.  He  shall  use  every  effort  to 
keep  all  living  and  sleeping  quarters,  kitchens,  dining  rooms, 
pantries,  and  food  free  from  flies,  mosquitoes,  roaches,  and  ver- 
min. He  shall  see  that  all  screens  for  windows  and  doors  fit 
properly  and  are  kept  in  good  repair,  and  shall  make  requisition 
for  the  material  necessary  therefor. 

105.  (1)   When  a  field  assistant,  construction  and  repair,  for- 
wards  a    recommendation   for   construction   and   repair   work 
which  he  recommends  be  performed  entirely  by  a  station  crew, 
he  shall  submit  therewith  to  Headquarters,  through  the  district 
superintendent,  a  full  and  complete  description  of  the  proposed 
work  and  a  schedule  of  materials  required  for  the  same,  both  in 
triplicate,  together  with  proposals  for  furnishing  the  materials. 
In  the  absence  of  instructions  to  the  contrary,  the  foregoing 
procedure  will  terminate  the  field  assistant's  connection  with 
the  matter. 

(2)  In  forwarding  such  recommendations  and  proposals  to 
Headquarters,  the  district  superintendent  shall  make  such  com- 
ments as  he  deems  necessary. 

(3)  If  any  of  these  proposals  is  accepted  by  Headquarters, 
the   district   superintendent   will  be   advised   accordingly,   and 
thereupon  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  station  will  be  directed 
by  the  district  superintendent  to  have  the  work  performed  by 
the  station  crew  as  soon  as  practicable  after  the  materials  have 
been  properly  delivered  at  the  station. 

106.  When  so  requested  by  a  field  assistant,  construction  and 
repair,  the  officer  in  charge  shall  see  that  the  members  of  his 
crew  render  such  assistance  as  may  be  practicable  to  such  field 
assistant  in  the  prosecution  of  his  work  at  the  station,  when  it 
will  not  interfere  with   the  regular  station  duties,  wreck  or 
rescue  work,  or  with  reasonable  hours  for  rest. 

107.  He  shall  see  that  the  beach  apparatus  and  every  part 
thereof  is,  after  actual  service  or  drill,  thoroughly  cleaned  and 
free  from  sand  and  dirt  and  restored  to  its  proper  place  in  the 
house  in  readiness  for  instant  use;  that  all  metallic  parts  are 
dried  and  wiped  with  an  oiled  cloth  and  all  lines  and  hawsers 
thoroughly  dried  at  the  first  opportunity;   that  lanterns  and 
torches  are  filled  and  trimmed,  and  that  the  proper  number  of 
signals,   water   lights,    charges   of  powder,   etc.,   are   in   their 
places. 

108.  When  a  station  is  placed  out  of  commission,  he  shall 
see — 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GITARP  STATIONS.  23 

(a)  That  the  station  and  everything  belonging  thereto  is  in 
the  best  possible  condition  as  to  cleanliness  and  for  preserva- 
tion. 

(&)  That  the  crew  remove  all  their  clothing  and  personal 
effects,  except  the  mattresses,  pillows,  and  bedding  of  those 
members  who  intend  to  return  when  the  station  is  next  placed 
'in  commission,  from  the  lockers  and  station  premises  and  de- 
liver the  locker  keys  to  him. 

(c)  That  the  mattresses,  pillows,  and  bedding  left  are  clean, 
protected  from  moths,  inventoried,  neatly  stowed,  and  that  a 
copy  of  the  inventory  is  given  to  him  and  another  retained  by 
the  owner  of  the  articles. 

(d)  That  toilets  and  privies  are  thoroughly  cleaned  and  dis- 
infected, and  that  the  water  supply  for  toilets  not  in  use  is 
drained  and  shut  off,  and  that  every  precaution  is  taken  to  pre- 
-yent  water  pipes  freezing  and  bursting. 

(e)  That  all  refuse  is  burned,  buried,  or  removed  to  a  safe 
distance  from  the  station. 

(/)  That  all  bright  and  exposed  metal  work  of  apparatus 
and  working  tools  is  free  from  rust,  wiped  off,  and  oiled;  that 
all  fire  extinguishers  are  ready  for  use  and  placed  where  they 
will  not  freeze  or  deteriorate  from  cold,  and  that,  where  no 
danger  from  freezing  exists,  fire  buckets  and  barrels  are  filled. 

(g)  That  all  water  is  drained  from  the  water  jackets  and 
pipes  of  the  engines  of  power  boats  dismantled  or  laid  up  and 
of  hoisting  and  pumping  engines  and  pumps,  and  that  all  boat 
.bilges  are  clean  and  dry. 

109.  The  hand  signal  torch  shall  be  protected  from .  moisture 
and  excessive  heat,  as  these  are  detrimental  to  the  dry  batteries 
and  the  operation  of  the  torch.  The  fiber  sleeve  should  be 
interposed  between  the  metal  case  and  the  contact  spring  when 
the  torch  is  not  in  use  in  order  to  prevent  draining  the  battery. 
The  dry  battery  should  be  removed  from  the  case  as  soon  as  the 
battery  becomes  exhausted,  in  order  to  protect  it  from  swelling 
in  the  case.  Spare  dry  batteries  should  be  kept  in  a  moderately 
heated  dry  place. 

PAINTING  STATIONS. 

121.  The  following  paints  will  be  used  when  needed  for  i&- 
painting  the  buildings  at  Coast  Guard  stations : 

OUTSIDE. 

NJ  (a)  Outside  white  paint,  mixed:  For  walls  of  buildings,  in- 
cluding trim ;  also  fences  and  flagpoles.    The  walls  of  unpamted 


24  ISrSTKtrCTlONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

buildings  and  fences  constructed  of  rough  lumber  should  be 
whitewashed. 

(&)  Green  paint,  mixed:  For  underside  of  porch  roofs  and 
for  blinds. 

(c)  Light    lead-color   paint,    mixed:    For    porch    floors    and 
treads  of  outside  steps  and  for  repainting  all  painted  floors  in 
buildings. 

( d )  Red  roof  paint,  mixed :  For  roofs. 

INSIDE. 

(a)  Inside  white  paint,  mixed:  For  inside  trim. 

(&)  Regulation  straw-color  paint,  mixed:  For  plastered  and 
ceiled  walls  when  painted. 

(c)  Light  green  paint  (Navy  No.  34),  mixed:  For  plastered 
and  ceiled  walls  when  painted. 

((Z)  Varnish,  hard-o il  finish :  For  ceilings  that  are  to  be  kept 
bright. 

(e)  Floor  oil:  For  all  finished  floors  and  treads  of  stairs  not 
painted. 

122.  Buildings  wrhich  have  not  been  painted  will  not  now  be 
painted.     Shingles  on  roofs  and  walls  that  have  not  been  stained 
or  painted  will  not  now  be  stained  or  painted. 

123.  Repainting. — Repainting  of  entire  buildings  will  not  be 
done  without  permission  from  Headquarters,  but  touching  up 
should  be  done  when  needed  to  keep  the  surfaces  properly  pro- 
tected from  the  weather.     When  parts  are  dirty  or  dingy  they 
shall  not  be  painted  for  the  purpose  of  giving  a  clean  appearance 
so  long  as  the  old  paint  is  sufficient  to  protect  the  parts.     Such 
parts  shall  be  scrubbed  as  often  as  necessary,  and  no  paint 
shall  be  applied  until  the  old  paint  is  worn  thin.    This  applies 
to  the  exterior  of  buildings  as  well  as  to  the  interior.     In  cases 
•where  the  paint  is  at  present  excessively  thick,  cracked,  peel- 
ing,  or  blistered  it  shall  be  scraped  off  and  surfaces  sand- 
papered before  any  more  paint  is  applied.     When  a  blowtorch 
is  used  care  shall  be  taken  regarding  fire  risks,  and  the  torch 
must  not  be  inverted  while  lighted. 

124.  Shingles. — Where  shingles  on  buildings  have  been  stained 
by  the  application  of  regular  shingle  stain  the  same  treatment 
will  be  continued. 

125.  Floors. — For  scrubbing  the  floors   a  strong  solution  of 
soap  powder  may  be  used ;  otherwise  soap  may  be  used  in  the 
ordinary  manner.    No   soda  or  cleaning  materials  should  be 
used  other  than  those  above  mentioned. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  26 

126.  Wliitewash. — Whitewash  should  be  prepared  as  follows: 
Slake  half  a  bushel  of  unslaked  lime  with  boiling  water,  keeping 
it  covered  during  the  process;  strain  it  and  add  a  peck  of  salt 
dissolved  in  warm  water;  3  pounds  of  ground  rice  put  in  boiling 
water  arid  boiled  to. a  thin  paste;  half  a  pound  of  powdered 
Spanish  whiting  and  a  pound  of  clear  glue  dissolved  in  warm 
water;  mix  these  well  together  and  let  the  mixture  stand  for 
several   days.     Keep   the   wash   thus  prepared   in   a   kettle   or 
portable  furnace  and  when  used  put  it  on  as  hot  as  possible 
with  painter's  or  whitewash  brushes. 

127.  Windows. — All  window  sashes  must  be  kept  well  puttied. 
•When  it  is  found  that  the  old  putty  is  cracked  it  should  be  en- 
tirely  removed   and   sashes   allowed   to   become  perfectly   dry, 
after  which  they  will  be  primed  with  white-lead  paint,   and 
•when  paint  has  dried  sufficiently  to  become  sticky  the  sashes 
may  then  be  reputtied,  replaced,  and  paint  and  putty  allowed 
to  harden  together.    When  putty  becomes  hard  it  may  then  be 
painted.   ,In  so  doing  care  must  be  used  not  to  get  paint  on 
the  glass  and  make  a  ragged  appearance. 

128.  Gutters    and   down   spouts.— Gutters    and    down   spouts 
shall  be  painted  outside  the  same  color  as  the  adjacent  parts 
of  the  buildings  to  which  they  are  attached.     The  inside  surface 
of  gutters  shall  be  painted  with  red  roof  paint. 

129.  Scrubbing  and  cleaning. — To  clean  painted  woodwork  or 
.other   painted    surfaces,    scrub    with    clean,    fresh    water    and 
soap.     If  necessary,  a  small  amount  of  sal  soda,  ammonia,  or 
washing  compound  may  be  put 'in  the  water.    After  scrubbing, 
wipe  off  with  clean  water  and  cloth. 

130.  Preparation  of  work  for  painting. — Paint  will  not  adhere 
to  nor  dry  upon  wood  or  metal  which  is  not  perfectly  clean 
and  entirely  free  from  moisture,  dust,  soot,  and  grease.    The 
surface  to  be  painted  must  be  thoroughly  dry,  and  no  painting 
should  be  done  in  rainy  or  foggy  weather  or  just  after  a  frost. 
'Dust  and  soot  must  be  removed  'by  brushes  and  cloths  and  by 
washing  with  hot  soft  water  and  soap. 

131.  Puttying.— Before  painting,   all  nail  holes,  cracks, .etc., 
should  be  carefully  puttied. 

132.  Preparation  of  plastered  walls  for  painting—  The  walls 
must  be  thoroughly  dry  and  brushed  free  from  all  dust  and 
loose  particles  of  mortar.     They  should  then  be  primed  with 
two  or  three  coats  of  linseed  oil,  and  when  they  are  dry  the 
colored  finishing  coats  should  be  put  on. 


26  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

133.  Washes. — Before  applying  a  new  coat  of  wash,  all  loose 
or   peeling   sections   of  washes  previously   applied   should   be 
scraped  off.     Surfaces  should  be  scraped  when   necessary   to 
keep  the  wash  from  becoming  excessively  thick. 

134.  Instructions  for  applying  paint. — Paint  should  be  put  on 
by  strokes  parallel  with  the  grain  of  the  woou.    Long,  smooth 
pieces   like   window   and   door  casings   should  be   finished  by 
drawing  the  brush  carefully  along  the  whole  length  if  prac- 
ticable or  by  smoothing  on  to  the  painted  surface  as  the  work 
progresses,  so  that  there  may  be  no  breaks  in  the  lines.    If  the 
brush  is  held  too  obliquely  to  the  work  it  will  leave  the  paint 
in  thick  masses  wherever  it  is  first  applied  after  being  dipped 
into  the  pot,  and  the  surface  will  be  daubed  but  not  painted. 
A  second  coat  should  not  be  put  on  until  the  one  previously 
applied  has  become  thoroughly  dry  and  hard,  which  will  never 
be  the  case  so  long  as  it  is  sticky  in  the  least  to  the  touch.    Each 
coat  should  be  of  the  same  thickness  throughout,  otherwise  the 
work   when   completed   will  have  an   unfinished  and   slovenly 
appearance.     Paint  put  on  too  thin  after  priming  will  crack 
in  drying;  if  put  on  too  thick,  it  will  blister,  wrinkle,   and 
peel  off.     In  using  the  brush  where  there  is  sufficient  space, 
draw  long  strokes  to  extend  the  color  in  a  smooth  and  uniform 
manner.     Where  the  space  is  contracted  or  rough  the  paint 
should  be  laid  on  in  dabs  for  the  purpose  of  getting  it  into  the 
recesses  and  places  where  the  surface  is  unequal,  and  then  care- 
fully smoothed  out. 

135.  Care  of  paints. —  (1)  Paints  shall  be  kept  in  a  dry  place 
and  driers  or  varnish  in  tins  or  bottles.    The  paint  remaining 
in  a  partially  empty  keg,  pail,  or  tin  can  should  be  covered 
with  oil  and  a  cover  placed  over  the  same.    Paint  shall  never 
be  left  to  dry  or  left  exposed  to  the  air  or  weather. 

(2)  When  paint  is  opened  for  use  it  should  be  thoroughly 
stirred  so  that  there  is  no  thick  paint  remaining  in  the  bottom 
of  the  can.  The  paint  should  be  kept  well  stirred  while  it  is 
being  applied  in  order  that  it  may  be  kept  of  uniform  thick- 
ness. Should  the  paint  in  the  pot  become  too  thick  while  it  is 
being  applied  it  may  be  thinned  by  the  addition  of  linseed  oil 
and  turpentine  or  petroleum  spirits  in  proper  quantities. 

136.  Varnishing. — In  using  varnish  great  care  should  be  taken 
to  have  the  surfaces  quite  clean,  washing  them  if  necessary. 
The  cans  should  be  kept  corked,  the  brushes  free  from  oil  and 
dirt,   and  the  work  protected  from  dust  or  smoke.     Varnish 
should  be  applied  in  very  thin  coats  laid  on  in  the  direction  of 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  27 

the  fibers  of  the  wood  and  sparingly  at  the  angles.  No  second 
or  subsequent  coat  of  varnish  should  be  applied  until  the  pre- 
vious one  is  permanently  hard,  otherwise  the  drying  of  the  un- 
der coat  will  be  stopped.  The  surface  of  natural  wood  which 
is  to  be  varnished  should  be  "  filled "  before  the  varnish  is 
applied  to  prevent  it  from  being  wasted  by  sinking  into  the 
pores  of  the  wood. 

137.  Use  and  care  of  brushes. — Large  paint  brushes  should 
be  used  for  priming  and  painting  over  large  surfaces  which 
require  considerable  quantities  of  paint.  Small  brushes  should 
be  similarly  used  for  smaller  surfaces.  Separate  brushes  should 
be  used  for  each  color.  If  there  is  a  shortage  of  brushes  and 
it  is  desired  to  use  them  for  a  different  color,  wash  them  in 
linseed  oil  and  turpentine  and  then  with  soap  and  water.  The 
oil  or  turpentine  used  for  washing  should  be  saved  for  mixing 
paint  of  the  same  color.  It  is  important  to  properly  swell  a 
new  brush  before  putting  it  to  use,  but  under  no  circumstances 
should  it  be  put  into  water  to  soak,  for  this  will  cause  the  brush 
always  to"  work  flabby,  and  if  the  bristles  are  of  fine  grade  the 
brush  will  twist  out  of  shape.  The  best  method  of  swelling  the 
head  of  a  brush  that  has  dried  out  is  to  separate  the  bristles 
carefully  and  pour  a  tablespoonful  of  water  on  the  brush  end  of 
the  handle  and  then  stand  the  brush  with  the  bristles  up  until 
the  water  has  been  absorbed.  This  will  swell  the  head  and  make 
it  as  firm  as  when  made.  Brushes  which  have  been  used  must 
not  be  left  to  dry  with  the  paint  in  them.  They  must  be  kept 
soft  by  immersing  them  in  enough  linseed  oil  to  cover  the  bristles 
within  one-half  inch  of  the  binding.  Place  sufficient  linseed  oil 
in  a  can,  pail,  or  jar  and  hang  or  suspend  the  brushes  in  the 
oil,  the  bristles  to  be  free  of  the  bottom.  Brushes  standing  in 
water  with  bristles  and  ferrules  wholly  immersed  will  soon  be 
unfit  for  use.  When  through  using  brushes  and  they  are  to  be 
laid  away  for  some  time,  they  should  first  be  washed  in  turpen- 
tine, then  with  soap  and  water  until  all  paint  is  removed,  and 
then  thoroughly  dried. 

BOATS. 

140.  Boats  at  Coast  Guard  stations  shall  be  classed  as  fol- 
lows : 

CHAEACTEEISTICS. 

Motor  lifeboat— Pointed  stern;  self-bailing ;  self-righting; 
provision  for  sails. 


28  INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Lifeb oat.— Machinery  omitted ;  characteristics  same  as  motor 
lifeboat ;  eenterboard  added. 

Motor  &-B  surf  boat. — Pointed  stern ;  soIMmiling ;  full  bilge, 
shallow  draft;  light  construction  for  transportation  on  wagon 
and  launching  through  surf. 

S-B  surf  boat. — Machinery  omitted;  characteristics  same  as 
motor  S-B  surfboat ;  water-ballast  tank,  centerboard,  and  pro- 
vision for  sails  added. 

Motor  surfboat. — Pointed  stern ;  air  tanks ;  full  bilge,  of  light 
construction;  without  self -bailing  feature. 

Surfboat. — Machinery  omitted;  characteristics  same  as  motor 
surfboat ;  centerboard  arid  provision  for  sails  added. 

Whaleboat. — Pointed  stern ;  round  bilge ;  fine  lines  for  easy 
rowing;  designed  as  pulling  and  sailing  boat  only;  centerboard 
and  provision  for  sails. 

Motor  launch. — Square  stern ;  full  bilge  and  lines;  heavy  con- 
struction, arranged  as  a  substantial  service  boat. 

Launch. — Machinery  omitted ;  characteristics  same  as  motor 
launch ;  centerboard  and  provision  for  sails  added. 

Motor  dinghy. — Square  stern;  full  bilge;  for  light  service. 

Dinghy. — Machinery  omitted ;  provision  for  sails  added. 

Motor  dory. — Transom  stern ;  raking  stem ;  flat  floor,  with 
pronounced  fore-and-aft  sheer  and  typical  dory  lines. 

Dory. — Machinery  omitted ;  provision  for  sails  added. 

Motor  boat. — Miscellaneous  types  of  boats  designed  or  pur- 
chased from  time  to  time,  not  of  above  classes.  To  be  in  the 
above  groups,  a  boat  must  be  in  good  condition  for  the  service 
indicated  by  the.  classification;  boats  originally  of  the  kinds 
described,  but  used  only  as  work  boats  or  station  boats  for  mis- 
cellaneous service,  come  under  this  general  group  of  "  motor 
boats." 

Boat. — Miscellaneous   types,    machinery   omitted ;    otherwise, 

characteristics  as  described  above. 

• 

GENERAL  INSTRUCTIONS. 

141.  All  boats  shall  be  kept  clean,  in  good  condition,  and 
properly  fitted  with  all  necessary  equipments  for  performing 
efficient  service  and  securing  the  safety  of  their  crews.  The 
full  equipment  of  boats  shall  be  kept  in  them  at  all  times  and 
neatly  stowed,  excepting  boat  covers  and  those  tools  and  spare 
parts  furnished  for  repairing  machinery  which  could  not 
ordinarily  be  used  at  sea. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST   GUARD  STATIONS.  29 

142.  Upon  returning  from  service  or  drill  each  boat  and  its 
equipment  shall  be  thoroughly  dried  and  put  in  order  at  the 
first  opportunity.     Deck  hatches  of  self-bailing  boats  shall  be 
kept  open  during  daylight  and  the  interiors  thoroughly  aired 
and  dried  while  the  boat  is  in  the  boathouse. 

143.  Care  must  be  taken  to  prevent  the  accumulation  of  oil, 
gasoline,  and  water  in  the  bottoms  of  all  motor  boats,  and  the 
biiges  must  be  cleaned  out  frequently. 

144.  Boats   that   are  ordinarily   kept  in   the  water  shall  be 
carefully  inspected  each  day  and  the  water  line  kept  free  of 
marine  growth. 

145.  Each  man  shall  keep  his  life  preserver  on  his  thwart. 
Each  man  shall  keep  the  shoulder  strings  of  his  cork  life  pre- 
server crossed  and  knotted  at  the  proper  length  and  the  waist 
strings  tied  loosely  in  front  with  a  slipknot. 

146.  The  officer  in  charge  and  every  other  member  of  the  crew, 
except  the  man  operating  the  engine  of  a  motor  lifeboat,  shall 
wear  a  life  preserver  on  all  occasions  of  drill  or  actual  service 
in  boats.     The  life  preserver  for  the  man  operating  the  engine  of 
a  motor  lifeboat  shall  be  kept  near  at  hand  when  not  worn. 
If  the  men  are  required  to  work  on  board  a  wreck  and  the  life 
preservers  become  impediments,  they  may  be  removed  while  on 
board,  but  must  be  put  on  before  entering  the  boat. 

147.  The  life  preserver  for  each  person  shall  be  marked  with 
his  watch  number  on  the  inside 'of  the  middle  of  the  back. 

148.  The  after  thwart  of  each  boat  shall  be  designated  as 
No.  1,  the  next  forward  thwart  as  No.  2,  and  so  on.     The  odd- 
numbered  men  will  take  positions  on  the  starboard  side  and 
even-numbered  ones  on  the  port  side.    The  No.  1  and  the  No.  2 
men  shall  pull  on  the  after  thwart 

149.  The   oars   shall   be   numbered   from    aft   forward,    each 
stroke  oar  being  numbered   I,   the   oars  for   the  thwart  next 
forward  II,  and  so  on.     The  numbers  shall  be  marked  in  roman 
numerals  on  the  loom  3  inches  from  the  handle  on  each  side, 
so  that  the  number  shall  be  up  when  the  oar  is  lying  flat  on  the 
blade.     The  oars  for  each  side  shall  be  kept  on  each  outboard 
side  of  the  thwarts,  with  the  blades  forward. 

150.  A  boat  shall  never  be  left  alongside  a  vessel  or  wreck 
without  a  boat  keeper ;  in  rough  weather  there  shall  be  at  least 
two  boat  keepers, 


30  INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

INSTKTJCTrONS    SELF-BAILING    SUKFBOAT    WITH    BOAT    WAGON. 

155.  The  boat  wagon,  with  the  boat  loaded  upon  it,  shall  be 
kept  in   the  boat  room  with   the  bow  out  toward  the  doors. 
Drag  ropes  of  2-inch  manila  rope  shall  be  fittrcl  to  the  eyes  on 
the  rear-axle  braces,  having  one  loop  in  each  rope  large  enough 
to  pass  easily  over  a  man's  shoulder ;  and  two  other  drag  ropes 
shall  be  fitted,  one  on  each  side,  to  the  forward  crosspiece  of 
the  hounds,  with   two  loops  on  each   rope.     Side  lashings  of 
whip-line  stuff  sufficiently  long  to  make  fast  around  the  gun- 
wale of  the  boat  shall  be  fitted  into  the  eyes  on  the  rear  axle. 
A  check  rope  of  whip-line  stuff  1$  fathoms  long  shall  be  spliced 
around  the  after  rear  axle  on  the  left  side  for  taking  a  turn 
around  the  bilge  keel  of  the  boat  to  prevent  its  running  down 
the  reach  when  unloading. 

156.  The  boat  shall  never  be  dragged  over  the  ground  with 
the  water-ballast  tank  valve  open,  as  the  sand  will  be  forced 
into  the  tank.    If  sand  accumulates  in  the  tank,  it  must  be  re- 
moved.    This  may  be  done  by  taking  out  the  valve  and  using 
a  piece  of  hoop  iron  or  a  long-handled  spoon.    Forward  and  aft 
of  the  valve  well  removable  sections  of  the  deck  will  be  found, 
under  w^hich  are  handholes  in  the  tank,  through  which  the  sand 
can  be  pushed  to  the  valves.    When  allowed  to  accumulate  it 
often  is  impracticable  to  remove  the  sand  from  the  outside, 
therefore  the  tank  should  be  flushed  with  clear  water  after 
each  launching  in  surf  containing  sand.     Securely  screw  in  the 
hand  plates  before  replacing  the  deck.     (This  paragraph  does 
not  apply  to  boats  numbered  higher  than  1460.) 

BOAT  EQUIPMENT. 
SELF-BAILING  SURFBOAT. 

161.  A  medical  kit,  fitted  into  an  oiled  canvas  bag,  and  a 
boat  compass  shall  be  kept  ready  at  all  times  and  shall  be  car- 
ried in  the  boat  which  is  being  used  for  drill  or  service.    Coston 
signals  and  a  flashlight  torch,  in  oiled  canvas  bags,  shall  be 
carried  in  all  boats  engaged  in  wreck  or  rescue  work. 

162.  Care  shall  be  taken  that  articles  of  equipment  are  se- 
cured so  that  they  can  not  get  adrift. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  31 

163.  Each  self-bailing  surfboat  shall  be  provided  with  the 
following  equipment: 

One  set  of  oars. 

Two  spare  oars. 

One  steering  oar. 

One  painter. 

Two  boat  hooks— one  forward,  one  aft. 

One  set  of  rowlocks  and  two  spare  rowlocks. 

Two  boat  hatchets,  one  forward  and  one  aft,  kept  in  pockets 
on  the  inside  of  the  boat  and  secured  with  a  lanyard  2  feet 
long  spliced  in  a  hole  in  the  end  of  the  handle  of  each.  An  eye 
6  inches  long  will  be  spliced  in  the  other  end  of  the  lanyard  to 
slip  over  the  hatchet '  after  the  lanyard  is  passed  around  the 
inside  gunwale,  thus  securing  the  safety  of  the  hatchet. 

Two  boat  stretchers  for  each  thwart.     . 

Heaving  stick  and  line,  to  be  stowed  forward. 

One  foghorn. 

One  "  water  light." 

One  lantern. 

One  medical  kit  fitted  into  an  oiled  canvas  bag. 

One  electric  signal  torch. 

One  set  of  Coston  signals,  when  engaged  in  wreck  or  rescue 
work. 

Spars  and  sails,  if  furnished. 

A  life  preserver  for  the  officer  in  charge  and  each  member 
of  the  crew. 

Eight  spare  life  preservers,  two  secured  on  the  under  side 
of  each  thwart. 
r  One  anchor  secured  to  the  bottom  boards  amidships. 

One  anchor  line,  the  length  to  be  according  to  the  depth  of 
water  in  the  vicinity  of  the  station,  but  not  less  than  15  fathoms. 

One  hand  grapnel  with  15  fathoms  of  1^-inch  line  stowed 
forward. 

One  5-gallon  water  breaker,  filled,  secured  against  the  for- 
ward bulkhead  (not  required  on  the  Great  Lakes). 

Two  canvas  drogues  and  fittings;  one  stowed  aft  and  one 
forward  on  the  rail. 

-'  One  24-foot  wigwag  flag  in  a  cover,  secured  aft  (to  be  at- 
tached to  a  boat  hook  when  needed). 

Two  semaphore  signal  flags. 

:  Righting  lines  of  18-thread  rnanila,  18  feet  long  in  the  clear, 
will  be  spliced  around  the  inside  gunwales,  one  on  each  side 
of  the  boat  abreast  of  each  thwart.  The  ends  of  these  lines  will 


32  INSTHUCTIOtfS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

be  provided  wtih  cedar  floats,  4*  inches  long  by  3  inches  in 
diameter,  tapered,  and  confined  at  each  end  by  a  Matthew 
Walker  knot ;  one  to  be  worked  before  and  the  other  after  the 
float  is  put  on.  The  righting  lines  will  be  kept  neatly  coiled 
on  the  thwarts,  but  not  stopped. 

Life  lines  of  15-thread  manila,  without  floats,  will  be  looped 
from  gunwales  at  equal  distances  on  both  sides,  the  bights  to 
be  sufficiently  long  in  the  waist  to  reach  the  water  line,  to  be 
used  as  stirrups  in  climbing  into  the  boat. 

i 

SELF-BAILING    MOTOE    SURFBOAT, 

164.  This  type  of  boat  shall  be  provided  with  the  same  equip- 
ment as  is  prescribed  for  the  self-bailing  surfboat  and  the  fol- 
lowing additional: 

One  rudder. 
One  tiller. 

One  fire  extinguisher  of  approved  type  for  extinguishing 
burning  gasoline. 

Equipment  required  by  law  for  this  class  of  boat. 

MOTOR    LIFEBOAT. 

' 

165.  This  type  of  boat  shall  be  provided  with  the  same  equip- 
ment, except  the  righting  lines,  as  is  prescribed  for  the  self- 
bailing  surfboat  and  the  following  additional : 

One  rudder. 
One  tiller. 

Two  fire  extinguishers  of  approved  type  for  extinguishing 
burning  gasoline. 
One  bell. 

One  3-inch  manila  hawser. 
One  breast  life  belt. 
Equipment  required  by  law  for  this  class  of  boat. 

PAINTING   BOATS. 

171.  All  boats  shall  he  painted  in  accordance  with  the  fol- 
lowing standard  scheme  as  nearly  as  their  design  will  permit : 
O)   Surfaces  finished  bright  with  approved  spar  varnish: 
1.  Gunwales,  guards,  wood  towing  and  quarter  bitts,  masts, 
and  spars, 


INSTEUCTIONS  FOE  COAST   GUAUD  STATIONS.  33 

2.  Thwarts  to  knees.     (If  the  boat  has  side  air  cases  or  com- 
partments, only  that  portion  of  thwarts  between  inboard  sides 
of  the  air  cases  or  compartments  shall  be  kept  bright.) 

3.  Such   trimmings,   gratings,   portable   stretchers,   moldings, 
hand  grabs,  etc.,  of  oak,  mahogany,  ash,  or  other  similar  hard- 
wood as  were  finished  bright  when  the  boat  was  originally 

ited. 

4.  Water  breakers  and  flagstaffs. 

5.  Boat  hooks  and  oars  shall  be  kept  bright,  without  varnish. 

( b )  Surfaces  to  be  white : 

1.  Outside  of  boat  above  water  line,  including  tops  and  out- 
sides   of  end   compartments  and   engine   inclosures   above  the 
sheer  line.     The  water  line  for  painting  shall  be  about  4  inches 
above  the  actual  water  line  of  boats  30  feet  long  and  over,  and 
about  2  inches  above  the  actual  water  line  of  boats  less  than  30 
feet  long.     (See  art.  171  (c)  3.) 

2.  Inside  of  boat  above  sheer  line  of  top  of  thwarts  or  side 
compartments.    This  includes  outsides,  above  the  sheer  line  or 
top  of  thwarts,  of  engine  compartment  and  other  compartments 
when  such  compartments  project  appreciably  above  the  gunwale 
of  the  boat,  and  present  the  equivalent  of  white  deck  houses 
above  the  sheer. 

3.  The  inside  of  all  compartments  not  ordinarily  exposed  to 
view,  as  compartments  below  the  deck  of  self-bailing  boats; 
and  the  inside  of  other  compartments,  such  as  engine  compart- 
ments, to  improve  the  lighting. 

(c)  Surfaces  to  be  regulation  straw  color: 

1.  All  inboard  surfaces  exposed  to  weather  up  to  the  sheer 
line  of  top  of  thwarts  or  side  air  compartments,  except  parts 
finished  bright.     This  includes  tops  of  side  and  end  compart- 
ments unless  they  come  above  the  gunwale ;  ends  of  thwarts ; 
and  the  outside  of  engine  inclosure  when  it  is  below  the  gun- 
wale line  or  projects  only  slightly  above  it. 

2.  Woodwork  in  engine  compartments  from  bottom  up  to  a 
line  1  foot  above  walking  flat  or  engine  bed,  except  in  motor 
lifeboats  with  midship  engine  compartments,  where  straw  color 
shall  extend  up  to  about  3  feet  above  the  walking  flat. 

3.  All  surfaces,  inside  and  outside,  of  small  working  boats, 
such  as  pulling  dories,  skiffs,  scows,  or  scooters, 

34079—21—3 


84  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

(d)  Bottom  painting: 

All  station  boats  regularly  kept  afloat  shall  be  well  painted 
on  bottoms  with  an  approved  green  antifouling  copper  paint,  as 
follows : 

1.  Once  each  year  if  located  on  Great  Lakes  or  on  other  fresh 
water.     Ordinary  green  paint  may  be  used  on  boats  on  fresh 
water,  in  the  discretion  of  the  district  superintendent. 

2.  Twice  each  year  if  located  on  Pacific  coast  or  the  Atlantic 
coast  north  of  New  York. 

3.  Three  times  each  year  if  located  south  of  New  York  on  the 
Atlantic  coast. 

4.  All  station  boats  regularly  kept  out  of  water  shall  be  painted 
on  bottoms  as  often  as  protection  of  the  surfaces  requires  it,  in 
the  judgment  of  the  officer  in  charge. 

5.  Copper  paint  must  in  all  cases  be  of  the  best  quality.     It 
shall  be  applied  with  the  greatest  care  so  that  no  spots  are 
missed,  in  order  to  prevent  damage  by  worms.    Wooden  freeing 
trunks  of  self -bailing  boats  shall  be  thoroughly  coated  on  inside 
with  the  same  kind  of  paint  from  deck  to  bottom  whenever  the 
bottom  is  painted. 

(c)  Canvas  spray  hoods,  tarpaulins,  boat  covers,  etc.,  shall 
not  be  painted. 

'  (f)  Each  boat  shall  be  marked,  on  each  bow  with  the  legend 
"  U.  S.  COAST  GUARD  "  in  solid  black,  plain  block  letters,  and 
on  each  side  of  the  stern  with  the  legend  "  STATION  NO.  - 
(the  number  so  painted  on  the  boat  to  be  the  number  of  the 
station).  Small  boats  with  square  sterns  shall  have  the  station 
number  painted  on  the  stern  and  not  on  the  sides  thereof.  The 
size  and  positions  of  the  markings  shall  be  in  accordance  with 
the  standard  instructions  issued  by  Headquarters. 

172.  Boat  number  plates. — Every  Coast  Guard  boat  under  40 
feet  in  length  shall  bear  a  boat  number  plate.  It  shall  be  clearly 
visible  and  neatly  screwed  to  the  top  of  the  after  permanent 
thwart  at  its  starboard  end,  or  for  a  boat  without  thwarts  to  the 
bulkhead  forming  the  after  cockpit,  the  plate  to  be  on  the  after 
side  near  the  starboard  cockpit  coaming.  Boat  number  plates 
may  be  painted  or  varnished  with  the  same  preparation  as  the 
parts  to  which  they  are  attached,  but  care  shall  be  taken  not  to 
fill  up  the  plates  and  to  keep  the  numbering  clear  and  legible, 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  35 

BRASS  WORK. 

173.  All  impainted  brass  work  in  boats  shall  be  kept  bright. 

GASOLINE  P]NGINES  FOR  BOATS  AND  OTHER  PURPOSES. 

181.  Electric  ignition,  starting,  and  lighting  systems  shall  be 
kept  as  clean  and  dry  as  possible.     Magnetos,  dynamos,  coils, 
ammeters,  and  similar  apparatus  should  never  be  taken  apart, 
as  all  ordinary  adjustment  can  either  be  made  from  the  outside 
or  by  removing  cover  plates.     Care  should  be  taken  to  prevent 
short  circuiting  of  batteries  or  grounding  of  wires,  as  these  are 
sometimes  causes  of  fire  or  explosion.     Keep  switches  turned 
"  off  "  whenever  current  is  not  required  in  a  circuit.    Dry  bat- 
teries should  be  stowed  in  a  wooden  box  or  rack  and  kept  free 
from  moisture. 

182.  Care  of  gasoline  engines. —  (1)   Gasoline  engines,  and  all 
appurtenances,  shall  be  kept  in  the  highest  possible  state  of 
efficiency  and  preservation.    To  this  end,  when  not  in  use,  they 
must  be  kept  clean,  covered  in  bad  weather,  thoroughly  drained 
in  cold  weather  to  prevent  freezing,  and  frequently  examined 
to  detect  loosening  of  bolts  and  other  connections. 

(2)  Every  engine  at  stations  in  commission  shall  be  started 
at  least  once  each  day  to  insure  proper  working  order.  When 
water  jackets  are  empty  an  engine  shall  not  be  allowed  to  run 
more  than  30  seconds,  and  thereafter  must  be  allowed  to  cool 
before  running  again,  unless  jackets  have  in  the  meantime 
been  filled.  Under  no  circumstances  shall  cylinders  or  pistons 
be  overheated  by  running  engines  without  water.  Whenever 
conditions  permit,  arrangements  should  be  made  whereby  water 
may  be  circulated  in  engines  of  boats  out  of  water,  thus  making 
possible  a  longer  running  period  than  that  prescribed  above. 
A  full  supply  of  gasoline,  oil,  and  grease  shall  be  kept  in  tanks 
find  lubricating  systems.,  so  that  power  boats  may  at  all  times 
be  ready  for  instant  use.  At  stations  not  in  commission  it  will 
be  sufficient  if  engines  of  power  boats,  kept  in  condition  for  use, 
are  turned  by  hand  a  full  revolution  once  in  two  days. 

(o)  When  under  way  prompt  attempt  shall  be  made  to  remedy 
trouble  if  misfiring,  pounding,  or  overheating  occurs.  Careful 
attention  shall  be  given  lubrication,  and  hand  oiling  should  be 
done  at  regular  intervals.  Oil  leaks  should  be  prevented  and 
engines  kept  wiped  and  as  clean  as  possible  when  running,  and 
thoroughly  cleaned  at  end  of  each  run. 


36  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

(4)  Instructions  furnished  by  manufacturers  or  Headquar- 
ters for  care  and  operation  of  specific  makes  of  gasoline  en- 
gines, including  electrical  and  other  apparatus,  shall  be  strictly 
observed. 

183.  With  the  variation. in  types  of  engines  now  in  use  it  is 
impossible  to  give  definite  instructions  for  starting,  running, 
and  stopping  which  will  apply  in  all  cases.  The  following  re- 
marks do,  however,  apply  to  all  engines : 

(a)  Do  not  start  on  a  trip  without  knowing  the  state  of  oil 
and  gasoline  supply. 

(0)  Carburetors. — In  cold  weather,  or  when  engine  is  cold, 
more  gasoline  is  required  than  in  warm  weather  or  after  engine 
has  heated  to  normal  running  temperature. 

(c)  Never  attempt  to  start  a  gasoline  engine  without  first 
noting  the  position  of  the  spark  control ;  it  must  be  in  the  re- 
tard position,  so  that  explosion  will  occur  late. 

(d)  Never   allow  an  engine  to  "race"    (run  idle  at   speed 
greater  than  maximum  load  speed).     Such  practice  is  danger- 
ous and  liable  to  result  in  serious  damage  to  the  engine. 

(e)  It  is  better  to  stop  by  cutting  off  ignition  than  gasoline, 
as  the  first  method  leaves  cylinder  charged  with  an  explosive 
mixture  ready  for  the  next  start. 

(if)  Power  boats  left  with  no  one  on  board  should  have  gaso- 
line shut  oft!  at  tank  and  circulating  water  shut  off  at  sea  cock. 

(#)  Too  rich  mixture  results  in  overheating,  loss  of  power, 
and  waste  of  gasoline.  It  also  causes  black  exhaust  smoke. 

(h)  Too  lean  mixture  causes  back  firing. 

(t)  Too  much  oil  causes  excessive  carbon  deposit  in  cylinders. 
It  is  usually  indicated  by  white  or  light  blue  exhaust  smoke. 

(j)   Too  great  advance  of  spark  causes  pounding. 

(fc)  Insufficient  advance  of  spark  causes  loss  of  power  and 
overheating. 

(/)  Only  good  gasoline  engine  cylinder  oil  should  be  used,  and 
the  grade  should  be  as  heavy  as  the  type  of  engine  and  season 
will  permit  (heavier  oil  can  be  used  in  summer  than  in  winter). 

USE    OF    ETHER. 

186.  Danger,  as  well  as  expense,  attends  the  use  of  ether  for 
priming  gasoline  motors  to  facilitate  starting.  As  serious  delay 
is  sometimes  experienced  in  starting  motors  in  cold  weather 
with  the  low  grades  of  gasoline  now  furnished,  the  use  of  ether 
will  not  be  entirely  prohibited,  but  shall  be  restricted  as 
follows : 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  37 

(a)  It  shall  never  be  used  except  in  case  of  emergency  when 
the  boat  is  needed  to  answer  an  actual  call  for  assistance,  and 
then  only  after  attempts  to  start  the  motor  in  the  usual  manner 
have  failed. 

(b)  The  ether  is  to  be  mixed  with  at  least  four  times  its 
quantity  of  gasoline,  and,  thus  diluted,  introduced  into  cylin- 
ders through  priming  cups  by  means  of  a  suitable  small  squirt 
can.    It  shall  not,  under  any  circumstances,  be  placed  in  gaso- 
line tanks. 

(c)  The  officer  in  charge  shall  have  personal  charge  of  ether 
furnished  to  a  station,  shall  see  that  it  is  safely  kept  in  tightly 
closed  bottles  or  cans,  plainly  labeled,  and  that  extreme  precau- 
tion, because  of  its  highly  volatile  and  inflammable  properties,  is 
exercised  in  handling.     He  shall  be  responsible  for  its  proper 
use. 

187.  When  laying  up  for  winter. — When  laying  up  an  engine 
all  bright  parts  should  be  covered  with  heavy  oil  or  grease. 
Vaseline  is  excellent  for  this  purpose.  Half  a  pint  of  heavy 
lubricating  oil  should  be  poured  in  each  cylinder  on  top  of  the 
piston,  and  the  engine  should  be  turned  over  a  few  times  so  as 
to  spread  it. 

DRILLS. 

191.  (1)   Drills  shall  be  held  at  all  Coast  Guard  stations  in 
commission  as  follows: 

Fire  drill. — One  each  week,  sometimes  at  night. 

Boat  drill. — Two  each  week. 

Signal  drill. — Five  each  week. 

Resuscitation  drill. — One  each  week  (one-half  hour). 

Beach  apparatus  drill. — One  each  week. 

(2)  The  crews  of  Coast  Guard  stations  shall  be  proficient 
in  the  following  subjects :  Motor-boat  laws,  pilot  rules  ( regula- 
tions for  preventing  collision),  Coast  Guard  Regulations,  com- 
pass. At  least  once  each  week  the  officer  in  charge  shall  deter- 
mine the  proficiency  of  each  member  of  the  crew  in  these  sub- 
jects by  means  of  the  questions  and  answers  in  the  appendix 
of  this  book. 

192.  No  drills  shall  be  held  on  Saturday,  which  shall  be  de- 
voted  to   general   cleaning   about   the   station.     When   circum- 
stances permit,  Saturday  afternoon  shall  be  regarded  as  a  half 
holiday. 

194.  Drill  shall  be  held  between  8  a.  m.  and  noon  when  prac- 
ticable. Boat  drills  and  signal  drills  shall  each  consume  not 


38  INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

less  than  one  hour.  Resuscitation  drill,  and  instructions  (in 
motor-boat  laws,  pilot  rules,  Coast  Guard  Regulations  and  com- 
pass) shall  each  consume  not  less  than  one-half  hour.  The 
number  designating  the  person  engaged  in  a  drill  shall  be  the 
number  shown  in  the  watch  and  patrol  bill. 

195.  If  the  weather  on  any  day  be  unsuitable  for  any  of  the 
prescribed  drills,  the  officer  in  charge  may  substitute  others  on 
the  schedule,  but  the  required  number  of  each  kind  of  drill 
must  be  held  each  week  unless  prevented  by  wreck  work,  foggy 
or  stormy  weather,  or,  in  the  case  of  boat  drills,  by  high  surf. 
When  drills  are  substituted  for  others,  when  they  are  omitted, 
or  wrhen  less  than  the  prescribed  time  is  devoted  to  boat,  signal, 
or  resuscitation  drill,  an  entry  of  the  fact  and  the  cause  thereof 
shall  be  made  in  the  log. 

196.  Drills  omitted  on  account  of  wreck  duty  need  not  be 
made  up,  but  all  other  drills  omitted  shall  be  made  up  in  the 
afternoon  in  the  week  in  which  the  omission  occurred,  if  pos- 
sible. 

197.  In  general,  the  afternoons  of  drill  days  shall  be  devoted 
to  the  work  of  upkeep  about  the  station  premises. 

FIRE  DBILL. 

201.  At  fire  drill  each  member  of  the  crew  shall  at  once  re- 
pair to  his  station  and  quietly  and  rapidly  perform  his  allotted 
duties.    All  unnecessary  noise,  singing  out,  and  confusion  shall 
be  avoided. 

202.  The  signal  for  fire  drill  shall  be  the  verbal  alarm  EIRE! 
This  alarm  will  be  given  by  the  officer  in  charge,  who  shall 
designate  the  scene  of  the  supposed  fire  immediately  after  giving 
the  alarm.     (In  case  of  actual  fire,  the  person  discovering  it 
shall  at  once  give  the  alarm,  designating  its  actual  location.) 

203.  At  fire  drill  and  in  case  of  actual  fire  the  following  duties 
shall  be  performed  by  the  members  of  the  crew,  who  are  desig- 
nated by  their  watch  and  patrol  numbers : 

Officer  in  charge. — Shall  have  general  supervision  at  the  scene 
of  the  fire ;  direct  operations ;  see  that  each  member  of  the  crew- 
performs  his  allotted  duties ;  maintain  order ;  and  do  everything 
in  his  power  to  extinguish  the  fire.  He  shall  be  provided  with 
an  ax. 

No.  1. — Shall  provide  and  attach  nozzle  to  hose  and  tend 
nozzle;  assist  in  leading  out  hose. 

No.  2. — Lead  out  hose  and  attach  to  pump  or  hydrant ;  keep 
hose  clear. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  39 

No.  8. — Provide  fire  extinguisher  at  scene  of  fire. 

No.  4. — Lead  out  and  attach  suction  hose ;  man  brakes. 

No.  5. — Remove  powder  from  station ;  man  brakes. 

No.  6. — Place  pump  in  position;  assist  to  lead  out  and  at- 
tach suction  hose ;  man  brakes. 

No.  7. — Place  pump  in  position ;  man  brakes. 

No.  8.' — Provide  blanket  and  fire  extinguisher  at  scene  of  fire. 

No.  9. — Assist 'to  lead  out  and  connect  hose;  provide  lire  ex- 
tinguisher at  scene  of  fire. 

204.  Where  stationary  pumps  are  installed  it  will  not  be  neces- 
sary to  provide  and  attach  the  suction  hose  or  place  the  pump 
in  position,  but  the  men  assigned  those  duties  shall  at  once  man 
the  brakes. 

205.  Where  fire  hydrants  connected  with  city  water  mains  are 
installed  Nos.  4,  5,  6,  and  7  shall  perform  the  following  duties: 

No.  4- — Assist  to  lead  out  and  connect  hose ;  keep  hose  clear. 
No.  5. — Remove  powder  from  station ;  assist  keeper.. 
No.  6. — Provide  bucket  of  water  at  scene  of  fire. 
No.  7. — Provide  bucket  of  water  at  scene  of  fire. 

206.  When  the  drill  is  over  or  the  fire  extinguished  the  officer 
in   charge  shall  give  the  command  SECURE!    when  each  man 
shall  return  what  he  provided  to  its  proper  place.     The  crew 
shall  then  be  mustered  by  the  officer  in  charge  and  each  man 
required  to  recite  his  duties  at  fire  drill,  after  which  the  crew 
shall  be  dismissed. 

BOAT  DRILL. 

211.  Boat  drills  shall  consist  in  launching  and  landing 
through  the  surf  and  in  at  least  one -half  hour  of  sustained  ex- 
ercise of  the  men  in  handling  their  oars,  as  directed  in  the  pre- 
scribed beat  drill.  The  drill  shall  include  sailing,  when  prac- 
ticable. Drills  shall  be  held  with  both  the  pulling  and  motor 
suriboats  and  with  the  motor  lifeboat  when  any  or  all  of  these 
types  of  boats  are  furnished  at  a  station.,  Preference  shall  be 
given  to  drills  with  the  pulling  surf  boats,  in  order  that  the  crew 
shall  always  be  proficient  with  the  oars.  When  the  motor  surf- 
boat  is  used  the  crew  shall  be  exercised,  in  pulling  with  the 
oars.  Drill  with  the  pulling  boat  shall  be  held,  when  possible, 
in  the  surfboat  which  would  be  used  for  dangerous  work. 

Whenever  practicable,  exercise  shall  be  had  in  the  use  of  the 
drogue. 

Drills  with  boats  convenient  to  the  beach  or  elsewhere,  to 
avoid  hauling  the  service  boat  from  the  boat  room,  will  be  per- 


40  INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

mltted  only  as  may  be  authorized  by  Headquarters,  and  then 
only  when  the  drill  boat  conforms  in  the  arrangement  of  oars, 
height  of  seats  above  platform',  etc.,  to  the  pulling  surfboat. 

212.  No  boat  drill  which  is  not  in  accordance  with  these  in- 
structions, and  which  does  not  include  all  the  crew  present  for 
duty  at  the  time,  shall  be  recorded  as  a  boat  drill. 

213.  At  boat  drills,  after  the  officer  in  charge  has  exercised 
the  crew  sufficiently,  he  shall  surrender  the  steering  oar  on  al- 
ternate boat-drill  days  to  No.  1  and  to  No.  2,  respectively,  who 
shall,  under  his  instruction,  exercise  the  crew  in  the  drill,  includ- 
ing launching  and  landing  through  surf.     At  such  times  the 
officer  in  charge  shall,  when  practicable,  take  the  oar  of  No.  1  or 
No.  2,  as  the  case  may  be. 

214.  The  crew  of  each  station  supplied  with  a  self-bailing 
surfboat  shall  be  exercised  once  each  month,  when  the  water 
is  not  too  cold  or  the  surf  too  high,  in  capsizing  and  righting  the 
boat,  leaving  all  movable  equipment  on  shore. 

215.  During  the  months  of  December,  January,  February,  and 
March  one  boat  drill  in  each  week  may  be  omitted  at  stations 
on  the  Atlantic  coast  north  of  Cape  Henlopen  and  at  stations 
on  the  Great  Lakes,  but  the  time  assigned  to  them  shall  be 
employed  in  other  drills.     (See  art.  191-1.) 

DRILL  WITH  SELF-BAILING  SURFBOAT  ON  BOAT  WAGON. 
INSTRUCTIONS. 

218.  Before  unloading  the  boat  from  the  wagon  the  officer  in 
charge  shall  see  that  the  valve  to  the  water-ballast  tank,  the 
ventilators  to  the  side  air  cases,  and  the  hatches  are  securely 
closed. 

219.  Water  ballast,  if  needed,  should  not  be  let  into  the  tank 
of  a  self-bailing  boat  until  the  boat  is  afloat  and  under  control. 
When  the  tank  is  full  the  valve  shall  be  closed.    The  tank  may 
be  emptied  of  water  with  the  pump  or  by  opening  the  valve:- 
after  the  boat  is  landed. 

220.  Unloading  the  boat  from  the  wagon  shall  be  practiced, 
so  that  it  can  be  done  quickly  and  easily,  and  the  crew  shall  be 
timed  in  this  evolution  from  the  command  Unload!    until  the 
oars  are  crossed  and  the  boat  is  ready  to  be  taken  down  to  the 
surf.     One-half  minute  is  ample  time  in  which  to  unload  when 
the  crew  is  properly  drilled.     The  crew  will  .not  be  drilled  in 
loading  the  boat  on  the  wagon  quickly. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  41 

221.  When  conditions  are  not  suitable  for  launching,  the 
crew  should  be  exercised  in  unloading,  but  this  must  be  in  addi- 
tion to  the  regular  boat  drill. 


DRILL. 

(Crew  of  officer  and  8  men.) 
222.   (1)   Leaving  the  station  for  drill  or  service. 

Commands: 

1.  Man  the  surf  boat. 

2.  Forward. 

3.  Halt — unload. 

4.  Take  life  preservers. 

5.  Take  oars. 

6.  Go. 

7.  In  bows. 

8.  Way  enough. 


COMMANDS. 
Ian  the  surf  boat-. 


DUTIES. 

_.Nos.  5  and  0  open  and  secure  the  boat- 
room  doors.  If  the  wagon  pole  be 
detached,  Nos.  1  and  2  adjust  it,  No. 
1  holding  it  in  position  while  No.  2 
inserts  the  bolt;  the  men  fall  into 
place  with  the  drag  ropes  over  their 
shoulders,  as  shown  in  the  following 
diagram : 


NOTE.— If  a  horse  is  used,  the  man  who  has  the  care  of  it  shall 
at  once  proceed  to  harness  and  lead  it  to  where  the  boat  is. 


42  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

Forward The  wagon  is  run  out  of  the  house  to 

the  most  desirable  place  for  launch- 
ing, as  near  the  water  as  possible, 
the  boat's  bow  toward  the  surf.  (If 
a  horse  is  to  be  used,  the  snrfman 
who  has  the  care  of  the  horse,  as- 
sisted by  one  man  on  each  side, 
hitches  *the  horse  to  the  boat 
wagon. ) 

Unit — unload The  drag  ropes  are  dropped  (or  the 

horse  unhitched,  as  the  case  may  be, 
and  secured  at  a  safe  place)  ;  Nos. 
3  and  4  cast  off  the  side  lashings; 
Nos.  1,  3,  5,  and  7  on  the  starboard 
side  and  Nos.  2,  4,  6,  and  8  on  the 
port  side  run  the  boat  back  over  the 
rear  axle  as  far  as  the  wheels  will 
allow ;  No.  7  takes  a  turn  with  the 
check  rope  around  the  bilge  keel  or 
grip  streak,  and  tends  it ;  No.  1 
swings  out  starboard  lifting  bar ;  No. 
2  follows  with  the  port  lifting  bar, 
which  he  hooks;  Nos.  1,  3,  and  5  on 
the  starboard  side  and  Nos.  2,  4,  6, 
and  8  on  the  port  side  man  the 
bars ;  the  officer  removes  the  king 
bolt,  the  reach  is  lifted,  the  officer 
removes  the  forward  wheels,  and  the 
reach  is  then  carefully  lowered  to 
the  ground ;  No.  7  slacks  the  check 
rope  and  the  boat  is  slid  down  and 
off  the  reach ;  Nos.  3,  4,  and  5  then 
run  the  forward  wheels  and  Nos.  6, 
7,  and  8  the  rear  wheels  up  the 
beach  out  of  the  reach  of  the  tide. 
Bach  man  then  takes  his  place  on 
his  proper  side  of  the  boat  and 
abreast  his  thwart. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  43 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

Take  life  preservers __At  the  command  Take,  each  man  lays 

hold  of  his  own  life  preserver.  At 
the  command  LIFE  PRESERVERS, 
which  is  given  shortly  after  the 
command  Take,  the  life  preservers 
are  taken  simultaneously,  the  men 
put  them  on  and  proceed  to  adjust 
them. 

Take  oars At  the  command  Take  each  man  lays 

hold  of  his  oar.  At  the  word  OARS, 
which  is  given  after  a  short  interval, 
the  oars  are  raised  simultaneously 
on  end,  blade  up,  and  the  men,  gov- 
erned by  No.  1,  drop  them  together 
into  the  rowlocks  on  their  respective 
sides,  the  handles  resting  against  the 
opposite  air  case.  The  oars  will  be 
kept  on  end  long  enough  to  insure 
uniform  action,  and  will  be  dropped 
without  orders.  The  officer  at  the 
same  time  secures  the  steering  oar 
in  its  rowlock  or  becket,  its  handle 
resting  under  the  after  thwart. 
The  boat  is  launched  into  the  water; 
the  two  bowmen  jump  into  the  boat 
when  it  is  water  borne,  take  their 
oars  and  assist  to  keep  the  boat  head 
to  the  sea ;  No.  1  at  the  stern  assists 
the  officer. 

Go ,At    this    command,    which   the    officer 

gives  at  his  discretion,  the  men  give 
the  boat  all  the  headway  possible, 
then,  as  it  becomes  water  borne,  the 
bow  oarsmen,  the  men  amidships, 
and  the  stroke  oarsmen,  in  the  order 
named,  jump  in,  take  their  oars,  and 
give  way  briskly  together,  the  bow 
oarsrnen  steadying  the  boat  as  long 
as  the  depth  of  the  water  or  surf 
will  permit,  and  the  officer  jumping 
in  when  he  deems  it  best  to  do  so. 


44  INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

In  bows Given    when    the    boat    has    sufficient 

way  and  while  the  blades  are  in  the 
water.  Bowmen  complete  the  stroke, 
toss  oars  simultaneously  to  an  angle 
of  45°,  boat  them  together,  and 
stand  erect  in  the  bow  facing  for- 
ward. If  a  landing  is  to  be  made, 
the  bowman  next  to  the  .landing 
shall  use  his  boat  hook  as  needed, 
or  stand  by  painter  or  heaving  stick 
and  line,  or  stand  ready  to  catch  a 
line  as  directed  by  the  officer. 

Way  enough Given    when    the    boat    has    sufficient 

headway  and  while  the  blades  are 
in  the  water  at  the  beginning  of  the 
stroke.  The  men  finish  the  stroke 
and,  as  the  oars  leave  the  water, 
toss  them  simultaneously  to  an  angle 
of  45°  and  boat  them  quickly  and 
quietly,  placing  the  blades  entirely 
inside  the  gunwale.  The  stroke 
oarsman  next  to  the  landing  place, 
if  one,  takes  up  his  boat  hook ;  each 
man  unships  his  rowlock ;  bowman 
and  stroke  oarsman  on  side  next  the 
landing  place  check  headway,  keep 
boat  clear,  etc.,  as  necessary. 
NOTE. — When  there  are  six  or  seven  men  in  the  crew,  the  drill 

prescribed  for  8  men  will  be  followed  as  far  as  practicable.     In 

actual  service,  as  at  wrecks  or  in  rough  waters,  the  officer  shall 

use  his  discretion  about  unshipping  rowlocks. 

(2)  Leaving  a  vessel  for  the  beach. 
Commands : 

1.  Stand  by  the  oars. 

2.  Shove  off. 

3.  Out  oars. 

4.  Give  way  together. 

5.  Way  enough  (or  "In  oars"). 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  45 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

Stand  by  the  oars Every  man,  except  the  inboard  bow- 
man, ships  his  rowlock,  seizes  his 
oar  by  its  handle,  and  sees  the  blade 
clear  of  the  other  oars.  The  oars 
should  be  shoved  forward  over  the 
gunwale  far  enough  to  bring  the 
handle  in  the  proper  position,  and 
should  be  kept  fore  and  aft. 

Shove  off Inboard  bowman  shoves  the  bow 

smoothly  off  from  the  ship's  side 
with  boat  hook,  at  the  same  time 
shoving  her  a  little  ahead  if  pos- 
sible; the  officer  sheers  off  with  rud- 
der or  steering  oar,  assisted  if  nec- 
essary by  the  inboard  stroke  oar, 
who  hauls  ahead  by  any  available 
means.  Bowman  places  boat  hook 
fore  and  aft  amidships,  seats  him- 
self, ships  his  rowlock,  and  gets  his 
oar  ready. 

Out  oars ^Given  when  the  boat  is  clear  of  the 

ship's  side.  The  crew  throw  the 
blades  of  the  oars  horizontally  out- 
ward, allowing  the  leathers  to  fall 
into  the  rowlocks,  place  both  hands 
on  handle,  and  quickly  trim  blades 
flat  and  directly  abeam.  This  is  the 
position  of  Oars.  Bowmen  throw 
their  oars  out  at  the  same  time  as 
the  rest  of  the  crew,  if  they  are 
ready ;  otherwise  they  swing  their 
oars  out  together,  touching  their 
blades  forward  to  insure  making  the 
movement  in  unison,  and  bring  them 
to  the  position  of  Oars  or  take  up 
the  stroke  with  the  remainder  of  the 
crew,  as  the  case  may  be. 


46  INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

Give  way  together All  the  oarsmen  take  the  full  stroke. 

keeping  accurate  stroke  with  the 
starboard  stroke  oar  and  feathering 
the  blades.  The  crew  will  pull  a 
strong,  steady  stroke,  always  using 
their  backs,  and  maintain  silence. 

Way   enough     ( or    "  In 

oars") When   landing  in   smooth   water   and 

sufficiently  near  the  beach,  the  com- 
mand, Way  enough  may  be  given,  in 
which  case  the  oars  are  tossed  to- 
gether to  an  angle  of  45°  and  laid 
entirely  within  the  boat,  blades  for- 
ward, between  the  men  and  the  rail, 
with  as  little  noise  as  possible.  At 
the  command  In  oars,  the  oars  are 
hauled  inboard,  their  looms  resting 
on  the  opposite  rail,  the  men  jump 
overboard  on  their  respective  sides 
and  run  the  boat  up  on  the  beach. 
The  life  preservers  are  removed,  the 
oars  are  laid  in,  blades  forward,  and 
the  boat  is  loaded  on  the  wagon  in 
the  reverse  order  of  unloading. 

(3)   Going  alongside  a  vessel,  official  occasion. 
Stand  by  to  toss.     (Given 

instead    of    command 

"Way  enough") Stand  by  to  toss,  the  preparatory  com- 
mand, is  given  as  a  warning  to  the 
crew.  The  command  Toss  is  given 
as  the  blades  enter  the  water,  and 
when  the  boat  has  sufficient  head- 
way to  reach  the  gangway.  The 
oarsmen  complete  the  stroke  and 
then  toss  the  oars  to  a  vertical  posi- 
tion by  pressing  smartly  on  the 
handle  with  the  inboard  hand,  rais- 
ing the  oar  with  the  outboard  hand 
under  the  loom.  Lower  handle  of 
oar  to  bottom  boards  and  hold  the 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  47 

DUTIES. 

oars  in  a  vertical  position  with  the 
blades  fore  and  aft.  The  inboard 
stroke  and  the  inboard  bow  oarsmen 
lay  their  oars  in  the  boat  quickly, 
after  assuming  the  vertical  position, 
seize  their  boat  hooks,  assist  to 
check  headway  and  fend  off  and 
haul  the  boat  alongside  the  gang- 
way. The  crew  will  remain  at  a 
toss  until  officers  leave  the  boat;  if 
it  is  then  desirable  to  lay  the  oars 
in  the  boat  it  will  be  done  by  the 
command  Boat  the  oars,  at  which 
each  man  lays  his  oar  quickly  and 
quietly  in  the  boat,  blades  forward. 
(This  command  should  not  be  given 
when  there  are  overhanging  obstruc- 
tions from  the  ship  which  would  be 
likely  to  foul  the  oars  when  they  are 
in  a  vertical  position.) 

(4)   Leaving  a  vessel  after  official  visit,  oars  boated. 
Commands: 

1.  Stand  by  the  oars. 

2.  Up  oars. 

3.  Shove  off. 

4.  Let  fall. 

5.  Give  way  together. 

6.  Way  enough  (or  "In  oars"). 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

Stand  by  the  oars Same  as  explained  in  paragraph  2  of 

this  article. 

Up  oars The  oars,  except  the  two  bow  and  the 

inboard  stroke  oars,  are  tossed 
quickly  to  a  vertical  position,  blades 
fore  arid  aft  and  in  line  with  that 
of  the  stroke  oar,  handles  of  oars 
on  bottom  boards,  outboard  hand 
grasping  loom  of  oar  at  height  of 
chin,  wrist  of  inboard  arm  resting 
on  inboard  thigh,  and  steadying  oar. 


48  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

Shove  off This  command  is  executed  as  described 

in  paragraph  2  of  this  article.  As 
soon  as  possible  the  inboard  stroke 
oar  lays  aside  his  boat  hook  and 
gets  up  his  oar  without  further 
command.  If  time  permits,  the  bow- 
men get  up  their  oars  and  await  the 
command  Let  fall.  If  the  command 
Let  fall  is  given  before  their  oars 
are  up,  they  point  their  oars  for- 
ward over  the  gunwale,  lightly 
touch  the  blades,  swing  them  out, 
and  take  up  the  stroke. 

Let  fall Given  when  the  boat  is  clear  of  the 

ship's  side.  At  the  command  Let 
fall  all  the  oarsmen  raise  their  oars 
vertically,  and  drop  the  blades  out- 
board into  the  rowlocks  smartly  and 
together,  slipping  the  inboard  hand 
to  the  handle  of  the  oar,  and  come 
to  the  position  Oars  with  both  hands 
on  the  handle.  Under  no  circum- 
stances should  the  blades  be  allowed 
to  touch  the  water  in  letting  fall. 

Give  way  together Same  as  described  in  paragraph  2  of 

this  article. 

Way   enough    (or   "In 

oars") Same  as  described  in  paragraph  2  of 

this  article. 

224.  Self-bailing  snrfboat  on  boat  carriage  at  station  provided 
with  inclined  launching  ways. 

Commands : 

1.  Man  the  surfboat. 

2.  Take  life  preservers. 

3.  Let  go. 

4.  Up  oars. 

5.  Let  fall. 

6.  Give  way. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  49 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

an  the  surfboat The   crew  climb   into   the  boat;   each 

man  standing  by  his  thwart. 

Take  life  preservers Each  man  quickly  and  quietly  puts  on 

and  adjusts  his  life  preserver,  and 
-  then  takes  his  seat  in  the  boat.     The 
officer  grasps  the  steering  oar. 

I  Let  go The  starboard  bowman  lets  go  the  se- 
curing line  and  takes  his  seat  on 
his  thwart.  At  stations  where  the 
boat  is  kept  on  the  carriage  bow 
out,  the  officer  will  let.  go  the  secur- 
ing line. 

Up  oars : Given   as   soon   as   the  boat   is   clear 

of  the  boatroom  doors.  Each  man 
grasps  his  oar  and  raises  it  to  the 
position  of  toss,  and  the  officer  rigs 
out  steering  oar  and  bears  down  on 
its  handle. 

Let  fall Given   as   soon   as   the  boat   is   clear 

of  the  boat  carriage.  Each  man 
drops  his  oar  smartly  into  the  row- 
lock without  noise,  and  takes  the 
position  of  Oars. 

Give  way The   crew  give   way   as   directed,   the 

officer  sheering  the  boat  as  he  de- 
sires with  the  steering  oar. 

225.  Explanations  and  purposes  of  special  commands. 

COMMANDS.  EXPLANATIONS  AND  PURPOSES. 

Oars__  Explanation. — Given  when  the  blades 

are  in  the  water.  Finish  that  stroke 
and  assume  the  position  Oars,  as  de- 
scribed under  Out  oars,  in  paragraph 
2,  article  222. 

Purpose.— (I)    To  stop  pulling,   keep- 
ing the  oars  out.     (2)  To  salute, 
34079—21 4 


50  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

COMMANDS.  EXPLANATIONS    AND    PURPOSES. 

Trail Explanation. — Given   when  blades  are 

in  the  water.  Finish  the  stroke,  re- 
lease the  handle  of  the  oar.  allow- 
ing it  to  draw  fore  ai.J  aft  and  trail 
alongside.  If  no  trailing  lines  are 
fitted,  retain  the  handle  of  the  oar 
in  the  hand. 

Purpose. —  (1)  To  salute.  (2)  To  pass 
obstructions.  For  the  latter,  the 
oars  of  either  side  naay  be  trailed 
independently. 

Face  about — hold Explanation. — The    men    face    about, 

passing  around  the  end  of  their  oars, 
and  take  seats  on  the  next  thwart 
aft,  drop  the  blades  of  their  oars 
into  the  water,  and  hold  hard.  The 
men  on  the  after  thwart  kneel  and 
hold  hard.  To  get  headway  in  the 
opposite  direction,  give  the  order 
Give  way. 

Purpose. —  (1)  To  exert  full  power  in 
checking  headway  and  stopping 
boat.  (2)  To  exert  full  power  in 
drawing  away  from  an  object.  (3) 
To  avoid  a  dangerous  breaker  when 
it  is  impossible  or  inadvisable  to 
turn  the  boat. 

Hold  water Explanation. — Given  when  blades  are 

in  the  water.  Cease  pulling,  drop 
the  oars  in  the  water,  and  hold  the 
blades  perpendicular  to  the  keel  line. 
With  considerable  way  on,  espe- 
cially in  a 'loaded  boat,  care  in  hold- 
ing water  is  required  to  prevent 
carrying  away  the  rowlock  or  the 
oar.  Under  these  conditions  drop 
the  oars  in  the  water  with  the  upper 
edges  of  the  blades  inclined  forward 
and  gradually  bring  the  blades  ver- 
tical as  way  is  lost.  The  oars  on 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST   GUARD  STATIONS.  51 

COMMANDS.  EXPLANATIONS    AND    PURPOSES. 

either  side  may  hold  water  inde- 
pendently. 

Purpose. — To  check  or  -stop  headway 
or  sternboard. 

Stern  all Explanation. — Given  from  position  of 

Oars  or  Hold  water.  The  oars  are 
backed,  keeping  stroke  and  feather- 
ing as  when  pulling  ahead.  Should 
not  be  given  when  the  boat  has  much 
headway.  When  the  boat  has  head- 
way the  con i  maud  Stern  all  should 
be  preceded  by  Oars  or  Hold  water. 

Purpose. — To  acquire  sternboard. 

Back  starboard  ( or  port )  _  Explanation. — Designated      oars      are 

backed  as  at  Stern  all.  Should  Hold 
water  before  backing  if  boat  has 
much  headway.  If  quicker  action  in 
turning  is  desired,  the  command 
Face  about  port  (or  starboard),  Give 
way  together  should  be  given. 

Purpose. — To  turn. 
Back       starboard,     give 
way     port      (or     vice 

versa) .Explanation. — Given  from  the  position 

of  Oars  or  Hold  water. 

Purpose. — To  turn  quickly  when  boat 
has  little  or  no  headway. 

Stand  by  to  toss.     Toss Explanation. — Same   as   in   paragraph 

3  of  article  222. 

Purpose. —  (1)  To  salute.  (2)  In  go- 
ing alongside  upon  official  visits  to 
vessels. 

Boat  the  oars Explanation. — Given  from  the  position 

of  Toss,  OARS,  or  Trail.  Place  the 
oars  quietly  and, quickly  fore  and 
aft  in  the  boat.  This  command  may 
be  given  from  any  position. 

Purpose. — To  get  the  oars  into  the 
boat. 


52  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

COMMANDS.  EXPLANATIONS    AND    PURPOSES. 

Point  the  oars Explanation. — Stand  facing  aft,  point 

the  blades  of  the  oars  forward  and 
downward  to  the  beach  at  an  angle 
of  30°,  ready  to  shvjve  off  at  the 
command.  If  the  waves  lift  the 
stern  of  the  boat,  the  united  effort 
to  shove  off  should  be  made  just  as 
her  stern  lifts. 

Purpose. — To  shove  off  a  grounded  or 
beached  boat. 

Stand  by  to Purpose. — When  for  any  reason  it  may 

be  desirable,  the  preparatory  com- 
mand Stand  by  to may  pre- 
cede any  command  of  execution 
given  in  a  boat.  The  preparatory 
for  Oars  is  Stand  by  to  lay  on  the 
oars. 

CAPSIZING  AND  RIGHTING  DRILL. 

Being  under  oars,  the  officer  in  charge  commands : 

Capsize  drill .__  Given  as  a  warning. 

In  oars The  oars  are  boated  and  placed  amid; 

ships,  blades  forward. 

Lash  oars All    pulling    oars    are    lashed    to    the 

thwarts  amidships,  and  the  handle 
of  the  steering  oar  under  the  after 
thwart. 

Man  starboard  (or  port) 

righting  lines The  righting  lines  are  led  across  the 

boat  to  the  opposite  side,  the  men  on 
each  thwart  manning  the  line  be- 
longing to  their  respective  thwarts. 

Capsize The  men  stand  erect  on  the  rail,  haul 

back  on  the  righting  lines,  and  cap- 
size the  boat.  After  the  boat  is 
capsized  the  men  Immediately  climb 
_up^  on  the  bottom,  carrying  the 
righting  lines  with  thorn,  stand 
erect,  and  brace  their  feet  against 
the  keel. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  53 

COMMANDS.  EXPLANATIONS    AND   PURPOSES. 

Right  boat The   men   haul   on   the   righting  lines 

and  right  the  boat,  all  climbing  in 
as  soon  as  possible,  and  taking  their 
places  on  their  proper  thwarts. 

Unhisli    ours The  oars  are  unlashed  and  placed  on 

the  outward  sides  of  thwarts.  The 
officer  shoves  steering  oar  into 
place. 

Out  oars Executed  as  prescribed  in  article  222, 

paragraph  2. 
NOTE. — At  each  capsizing  and  righting  drill  the  boat  shall  be 

capsized  and  righted  several  times. 

DRILL  FOB  BOATS  UNDER  SAIL. 

226.  The  principles  of  boat  sailing  are  the  same  for  all  rigs. 
The  use  of  the  lee  oars  is  dangerous  when  under  sail ;  a  slight 
gust  of  wind  lowers  the  gunwale  so  as  to  prevent  the  oars  being 
lifted  from  the  water,  thus  "  catching  a  crab,"  and  the  headway 
of  the  boat  will  cause  the  oars  to  fly  violently  fore  and  aft. 

227.  The  officer  in  charge  shall  never  permit  anyone  to  climb 
the  masts  of  a  boat.,    If  halyards,  etc.,  are  unrove  unstep  the 
mast.     No  person  shall  be  permitted  to  stand  in  a  boat  under 
sail ;  this  does  not  apply  to  the  helmsman  of  a  motor  lifeboat 
under  sail. 

228.  Going  alongside  under  sail  requires  care,  judgment,  and 
experience.     In  the  first  place  it  should  not  be  attempted  if  a 
boat,  or  other  obstruction  which  the  masts  could  touch,  over- 
hangs the  gangway,  nor  in  rough  weather  when  the  rolling  mo- 
tion of  the  boat  would  cause  the  masts  to  strike  the  ship.     In 
such  cases  the  masts  should  be  unstepped  and  the  boat  brought 
alongside  under  oars. 

229.  If  the  ship  is  riding  to  a  windward  tide,  approach  the 
gangway  from  abaft  the  beam,  tend  all  gear  and  shorten  sail 
when  the  boat  has  sufficient  way  to  reach  the  gangway.     The 
bow  and  stroke  oarsmen  tend  boat  hooks,  and  the  other  men 
perform  their  duties  in  shortening  sail. 

230.  If  the  ship  is  riding  to  the  wind,  approach  the  gangway 
from  about  abeam,  tend  all  gear,  bow  and  stroke  oarsmen  stand 
by  the  boat  hooks ;  when  there  is  sufficient  way  to  make  the 

'  gangway,  command:  Stand  by  to  shorten  sail,  Shorten  sail  (if 
but  one  mast).  If  two  masts,  command:  In  jib  and  foresail. 
The  jib  tack  and  sheet  are  let  go,  the  jib  is  smothered  into  the 


54  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

foremast ;  lower  the  foresail,  at  the  same  time  putting  the 
tiller  hard  down,  haul  main  sheet  amidships  .or  a  little  on  the 
weather  quarter.  This  throws  the  boat's  head  into  the  wind, 
and  hauling  the  main  sheet  to  windward  deadens  her  headway 
when  desirable.  When  alongside,  command :  In  mainsail.  Stow 
sails  and  unstop  if"  desirable.  The  above  is  the  surest  and  safest 
method,  but  with  skillful  handling  all  sails  may  be  taken  in 
together,  the  tiller  put  hard  down,  and  the  boat  rounded  up  to 
the  gangway.  This  requires  more  skill  and  judgment  and 
should  not  ordinarily  be  attempted. 

231.  If  there  is  any  current,  make  allowance  for  it  by  head- 
ing for  a  point  farther  forward  or  aft,  as  the  case  may  be. 

MOTOR  LIFEBOAT  UNDER  SAIL. 
235.  The  boat  being  under  oars  or  power,  to  make  sail : 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

Way  enough Oars  are  boated  or  engine  stopped. 

Stand  by  to  step ^he  starboard  oarsmen  launch  the 

main  mast  forward  until  heel  of 
mast  is  even  with  step ;  raise  mast 
head.  Similarly  port  oarsmen 
launch  foremast  to  position  and 
raise  rnast  head.  All  crew  remain 
seated  whenever  their  duties  will 
permit. 

Step  the  masts Stroke  oars  guide  heel  of  main  mast 

into  step.  Bow  oars  guide  heel  of 
foremast  into  step.  Starboard  oars- 
men stand  on  deck  and  raise  main 
mast.  Port  oarsmen  stand  on  deck 
and  raise  foremast.  Bow  and  stroke 
oarsmen  secure  mast  clamps  and 
cast  off  shrouds  and  set  them  up. 

Loose  sail No.  1  stroke  oarsman  casts  oil"  sheet 

from  mainsail  and  takes  place  in 
stern  sheets  with  main  sheet  in 
hand.  No.  2  stroke  oarsman  mans 
the  mainsail  halyards.  No.  1  re- 
ports when  all  is  ready  aft.  No.  7 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  55 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

casts  adrift  fore  sheet  and  passes 
it  aft  to  No.  3.  No.  5  mans  the  fore- 
sail halyards.  No.  8  casts  adrift 
jib  halyards,  hauls  head  of  jib  down 
to  deck,  hooks  and  mans  jib  hal- 
yards. No.  7  sets  np  jib  tack  and 
passes  sheets  aft  on  each  side  to 
No.  4.  No.  7  reports  when  all  is 
ready  forward. 
With  starboard  (or  port) 

sheet.     Make  sail Jib,  foresail,  and  mainsail  are  hoisted 

chock  up.  The  men  convenient  to  the 
sheets  haul  them  aft  on  designated 
side  and  tend  them.  Bowmen  keep 
bright  lookout  ahead,  fully  inform- 
ing the  officer  of  the  proximity  of 
obstructions  or  approaching  vessels. 
23G.  To  Tack. 

Ready  about Given  as  a  warning  for  the  crew  to  pre- 
pare for  the  evolution.  The  officer 
gives  the  boat  a  good  full,  waits 
for  a  smooth  time,  then  eases  down 
the  tiller.  At  the  same  time  the 
man  tending  the  main  sheet  hauls 
it  amidships  slowly.  (Do  not  haul 
it  across  the  amidship  line,  for  it 
then  acts  as  a  back  sail.) 

Ease  off  the  jib  sheet Given  when  jib  begins  to  shiver. 

Let  go  fore  sheet Given  when  foresail  ceases  to  draw. 

If  boat  seems  inclined  to  stop  head 
to  wind,  haul  jib  sheet  to  windward; 
the  jib  will  be  taken  aback  and  pay 
her  head  around.  If  the  boat  gath- 
ers sternboard,  shift  the  tiller. 

Shift  over  main  sheet When  wind  is  ahead,  shift  over  the 

main  sheet  and  stand  by  to  haul  it 
aft  when  well  around  on  the  new 
tack. 

. 


56  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

Haul  aft  fore  and   jib 

sheets As  soon  as  the  bow  of  the  boat  has 

passed  the  wind,  haul  aft  fore  and 
jib  sheets,  leaving  the  main  sheet 
slack  until  boat  is  well  around, 
then  trim  by  the  wind.  If  the  boat 
falls  off  too  far  from  the  wind,  haul 
aft  main  sheet  and  keep  jib  sheet 
flying  until  she  is  brought  up  by  the 
foresail  and  the  mainsail  and  the 
tiller.  When  nearly  high  enough, 
haul  aft  the  jib  sheet  and  trim  her 
by  the  wind. 

237.  To  Wear.  v 

Stand  by  to  wear Given  as  a  warning  for  the  crew  to 

prepare  for  the  evolution.  Officer 
puts  the  tiller  up  when  ready. 

Ease  off  main  sheet Given  as  the  boat's  head  pays  off,  in 

order  to  get  the  maximum  effect  of 
the  mainsail  in  increasing  her  head- 
way. Keep  fast  the  fore  and  jib 
sheets  until  wind  is  abeam,  as  they 
help  pay  her  head  off. 

Ease    off    fore    and    jib 

sheets Given  when  wind  is  a  little  abaft  the 

beam.  Slack  the  sheets  off  grad- 
ually. 

In  mainsail Given   when   wind   comes   nearly   aft. 

Haul  down  the  mainsail. 

Shift  over  sheets Given  when  wind  is  aft.     Stand  by  to 

haul  all  sheets  aft  on  the  other  side. 

Set  mainsail Given  when  wind  is  slightly  on  new 

weather  quarter.  Set  mainsail  and 
haul  it  flat  aft.  Leave  other  sheets 
flying,  or  smothered  in  to  mast,  so 
she  will  come  up  rapidly. 

Haul    aft    fore    and    jib 

sheets .Given  as  the  boat  comes  by  the  wind 

on  new  tack.  Haul  both  sheets  flat 
aft. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  57 

NOTE. — If  wearing  in  a  light  to  gentle  breeze,  it  is  unnecessary 
to  take  in  the  mainsail,  but  in  a  moderate  breeze,  or  anything 
stronger,  it  should  always  be  done  on  account  of  danger  from 
gybing. 

With  a  sprit  rig,  put  tiller  up  and  ease  off  sheets.  When  the 
wind  is  nearly  aft,  trim  in  main  sheet  to  avoid  danger  from 
gybing  violently.  In  anything  stronger  than  a  gentle  breeze, 
sprit-rigged  boats  should  always  be  tacked  to  avoid  this  danger. 
If  absolutely  necessary  to  gybe  a  sprit-rigged  boat  in  a  fresh 
breeze,  the  peak  should  be  dropped  in  addition  to  hauling  in  the 
main  sheet. 

238.  To  Heave  to. 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

Stnnd  by  to  heave  to Given  as  a  warning  for  the  crew  to 

prepare  for  the  evolution.  Officer 
brings  boat  by  the  wind  and  keeps 
tiller  a-lee. 

Haul  main  sheet  flat  aft.  i 
HauT  aft  weather  jib 

sheet.  In  foresail These  commands  are  given  simultane- 
ously, and  are  obeyed  by  the  men 
at  their  various  stations.  In  heavy 
weather  the  foresail  shall  be  .taken 
in  ;  in  light .  breezes  the  fore  sheet 
may  be  simply  slacked  off.  If  the 
bow  falls  off,  slack  away  jib  sheet. 
The  boat  in  this  condition  should 
lie  dead  in  the  water,  wind  about 
abeam. 

239.  To  Get  Under  Way  from  Heave  to. 

Make  sail Haul  aft  fore  and  jib  sheets  and  set 

foresail,  ease  the  tiller,  and  case  off 
the  main  sheet. 


58  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

240.  To  Reef  Sail. 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

Stand  by  to  reef Given   as  a  warning  for  the  crew  to 

prepare  for  the  evolution.  Tend  fore 
and  main  halyards.  Officer  brings 
boat  by  the  wind. 

Slack    down    fore    and 

main  halyards Officer  luffs  slightly,   but   not  enough 

to  cause  boat  to  lose  headway.  Pore 
and  main  halyards  are  slacked  down 
about  18  inches. 

Reef  sail .Pass   the   reef  earings  from  the  reef 

cringles  to  the  tack  bands.  The 
earings  in  the  leeches  should  be 
tightly  bound  around  the  foot  of  the 
sails.  Pass  reef  points  around  foot 
of  sail.  No.  7  reports  "All  ready  for- 
ward." 

Hoist  away Given  when  sails  are  reefed  and  all  is 

ready.  Men  at  halyards  hoist  sails 
and  officer  lays  boat  on  desired 
course.  Always  keep  boat  under 
control,  if  possible,  while  reefing. 
Reef  whenever  boat  begins  to  take 
in  water  over  lee  rail.  Never  be 
afraid  of  reefing  too  soon. 
241.  To  Douse  Sail. 

Stand  by  to  shorten  sail-Given  as  a  warning  for  the  crew  to 
stand  by  their  stations.  Tend  all 
halyards. 

Shorten  sail Slack  away  all  halyards  until  sails 

are  lowered  into  boat.  Men  sit  on 
thwarts  awaiting  next  command. 

Furl  sails Bowmen  and  stroke  oarsmen,  assisted 

by  Nos.  5  and  6,  and  3  mid  4,  re- 
spectively, unhook  yard  from  trav- 
eler and  tack  from  tack  band,  and 
then  furl  sails  on  foot,  making 
smooth  skin  and  rolling  sails  up  to 
yards,  which  should  be  left  out  and 
clear.  Use  sheets  for  furling  lines. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR,  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  59 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

The  jib  should  be  rolled  up  with  the 
foresail,  having  unhooked  halyards 
and  tack.  Secure  traveler  bands  to 
tack  bands,  and  lower  jib  halyard 
block  to  tack  band  on  foremast. 

Prepare  to  unstep .Come  up  shroud  tackles,  and  secure 

shrouds  and  tackles  around  masts. 
Nos.  1  and  7  report  when  all  is  ready 
for  unstepping. 

Stand  by ;  unstep .Make  a  slight  pause  between  these 

commands.  The  starboard  oarsmen 
seize  the  mainmast,  and  the  port 
oarsmen  the  foremast.  The  stroke 
and  bow  oarsmen  unclamp  the  main- 
mast and  the  foremast,  respectively. 
The  masts  are  lifted  vertically  (in- 
clining each  in  the  direction  it  is  to 
be  lowered)  until  heels  are  clear  of 
the  tenons  and  then  lowered  into 
boat,  the  foremast  on  port  side,  and 
mainmast  on  starboard  side.  Men 
quickly  take  seats  on  thwarts. 

242.  General  Rules  for  Boats  Under  Sail: 

1.  Never  be  afraid  to  reef  in  good  time. 

2.  Always  see  sails  well  set,  and  trimmed  according  to 

the  direction  of  the  wind. 

3.  See  that  sheets  are  never  belayed. 

4.  See  that  crew  is  properly  stationed  for  making  and 

shortening  sail,  reefing,  and  tacking. 

5.  Trim  boat  by  shifting  crew  or  ballast  as  required. 

6. .Make  the  crew  sit  on  the  thwarts.  In  stepping  and 
unstepping  masts  and  making  sail,  no  one  will  stand 
up,  except  when  absolutely  necessary,  and  even 
then  only  on  bottom  boards  or  deck  of  the  boat. 

7.  Remember  that  a  loaded  boat  carries  more  way  than 

an  empty  one. 

8.  In  going  alongside,  allow  plenty  of  room  for  rounding 

to.  Unstep  the  masts  as  soon  as  sail  is  lowered. 
If  you  are  not  likely  to  go  alongside  in  a  seaman- 
like  fashion,  tack  or  wear  and  try  again. 


60  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

MANAGEMENT  OF  BOATS  IN  A  SURF,  BEACHING  THEM,  ETC. 

243.  The  following  rules  are  published  by  the  Royal  National 
Lifeboat  Institution  of  Great  Britain  : 

I.  Rowing  to  seaward. —  (1)  As  a  general  rule,  speed  must  be 
given  to  a  boat  rowing  against  a  heavy  surf.  Indeed,  under 
some  circumstances,  her  safety  will  depend  upon  the  utmost 
possible  speed  being  attained  on  meeting  a.  sea.  For  if  the  sea 
be  really  heavy  and  the  wind  blowing  a  hard,  onshore  gale,  an 
approaching  heavy  sea  may  carry  the  boat  away  on  its  front 
and  turn  it  broadside  on  or  upend  it.  A  boat's  only  chance  in 
such  a  case  is  to  obtain  such  a  way  as  shall  enable  her  to  pass 
end  on  through  the  crest  of  a  sea  and  leave  it  as  soon  as  possible 
behind  her.  If  there  be  a  rather  heavy  surf,  but  no  wind,  or  if 
the  wind  is  offshore  and  opposed  to  the  surf,  as  is  often  the 
case,  a  boat  may  be  propelled  so  rapidly  through  it  that  her 
bow  would  fall  more  suddenly  and  heavily  after  topping  the 
sea  than  if  her  way  had  been  checked;  it  may,  therefore,  be 
only  when  the  sea  is  of  such  magnitude  and  the  boat  of  such 
character  that  there  may  be  chance  of  the  former  carrying  her 
back  before  it  that  full  speed  should  be  given  to  her. 

(2)  It  may  also  happen  that  by  careful  management  a  boat 
may  be  made  to  avoid  the  sea,  so  that  each  wave  may  break 
ahead  of  her,  which  may  be  the  only  chance  of  safety  in  a  small 
boat,  but  if  the  shore  be  flat  and  the  broken  water  extend  to  a 
great  distance  from  it  this  will  often  be  impossible. 

The  following  general  rules  for  rowing  to  seaward  may  be 
relied  upon : 

(a)  If  sufficient  command  can  be  kept  over  a  boat  by  the 
skill  of  those  on  board  her,  avoid  the  sea  if  possible,  so  as  not 
to  meet  it  at  the  moment  of  its  breaking  or  curling  over. 

(I))  Against  a  head  gale  and  a  heavy  surf,  get  all  possible 
speed  on  a  boat  on  the  approach  of  every  sea  which  can  not 
be  avoided. 

(c)  If  more  speed  can  be  given  to  a  boat  than  is  sufficient 
to  prevent  her  from  being  carried  back  by  a  surf,  her  way  may 
be  checked  on  its  approach,  which  will  give  her  an  easier  pas- 
sage over  it. 

II.  Running  before  a  broken  sea,  or  surf,  to  the  shore  (flat 
beach). —  (1)  The  one  great  danger  when  running  before  a 
broken  sea  is  that  of  "  broaching  to."  To  that  peculiar  effect 
of  the  sea,  so  frequently  destructive  of  human  life,  the  utmost 
attention  must  be  directed.  The  cause  of  a  boat's  broaching  to 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  61 

when  running  before  a  broken  sea  or  surf  is  that  her  own  motion 
being  in  the  same  direction  as  that  of  the  sea  she  opposes  no 
resistance  to  it,  but  is  carried  before  it.  (Thus,  if  a  boat 
be  running  bow  on  to  the  shore  and  her  stern  to  the  sea,  the 
first  effect  of  the  surf  or  roller  on  its  overtaking  her  is  to  throw 
up  her  stern,  and,  as  a  consequence,  to  depress  the  bow;  if  she 
then  have  sufficient  inertia  (which  will  be  proportional  to 
weight)  to  allow  the  sea  to  pass  her,  she  will  in  succession  pass 
Through  the  descending,  the  horizontal,  and  the  ascending  posi- 
tions as  the  crest  of  the  wave  passes  successively  her  stern, 
her  midships,  and  her  bow,  in  the  reverse  order  in  which  the 
same  positions  occur  in  a  boat  propelled  to  seaward  against 
the  surf.  This  may  be  defined  as  the  safe  mode  of  running 
before  a  broken  sea. 

(2)  But  if  a  boat,  on  being  overtaken  by  a  heavy  surf,  has 
not  suflicient  inertia  to  allow  it  to  pass  her  the  first  of  the 
three  positions  alone  occurs — her  stern  is  raised  high  in  the  air 
and  the  wave  carries  the  boat  before  it,  on  its  front  or  unsafe 
side,  the  bow  deeply  immersed  in  the  hollow  of  the  sea,  where 
the    water,    being    stationary,    or    comparatively    so,    offers    a 
resistance;  while  the  crest  of  the  sea,  having  the  actual  motion 
which  causes  it  to  break  forces  onward  the  rear  end  of  the 
boat.    A  boat  in  this  position  will  sometimes,  aided  by  careful 
oar  steerage,  run  a  considerable  distance  until  the  wave  has 
broken  and  expended  itself.       But  it  will  often  happen  that, 
if  the  bow  be  low,  it  will  be  driven  under  water,  when  the 
buoyancy   being  lost  forward,   while  the  sea   presses   on   the 
stern,  the  boat  will  be  thrown  end  over  end;  or,  if  the  bow  be 
high  or  protected  by  a  bow  air  chamber,  so  that  it  does  not 
become  submerged  the  resistance  forward  acting  on  one  bow 
will  slightly  turn  the  boat's  head,  and  the  force  of  the  surf 
being  transferred  to  the  opposite  quarter  she  will  in  a  moment 
be  turned  broadside  to  the  sea  and  be  thrown  by  it  on  her  beam 
ends,  or  altogether  capsized.     It  is  in  this  manner  that  mosc 
boats  are  upset  in  a  surf,  especially  on  fiat  coasts. 

(3)  Hence  it  follows  that  the  management  of  a  boat,  when 
landing  through  a   heavy   surf,   must,   as   far   as  possible,   be 
assimilated  to  that  when  proceeding  to  seaward  against  one, 
at  least  so  far  as  to  stop  her  progress  shoreward  at  a  moment 
of  being  overtaken  by  a  heavy  sea  and  thus  enabling  it  to  pass 
her.     There  are  different  ways  of  effecting  this  object : 

a.  By  turning  a  boat's  head  to  the  sea  before  entering  the 
broken  water  and  then  backing  in,  stern  foremost,  pulling  a 


62  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

few  strokes  ahead  to  meet  each  heavy  sea,  and  then  again 
backing  astern.  If  a  sea  be  really  heavy  and  a  boat  small  this 
plan  will  be  generally  safest,  as  a  boat  can  be  kept  more  under 
command  when  the  full  force  of  the  oars  is  used  against  a 
heavy  surf  than  by  backing  them  only. 

/>.  If  rowing  to  shore  with  the  stern  to  seaward  by  back- 
ing all  the  oars  on  the  approach  of  a  heavy  sea  and  rowing 
ahead  again  as  soon  as  it  has  passed  to  the  bow  of  the  boat, 
thus  rowing  in  on  the  back  of  the  wave ;  or,  as  is  practiced 
in  some  lifeboats,  placing  the  after  oarsmen  with  their  faces 
forward  and  making  them  row  back  at  each  sea  on  its  approach. 

c.  If  rowed  in  bow  foremost  by  towing  astern  a  pig  of  ballast 
or  a  large  stone,  or  a  large  basket,  or  a  canvas  bag  termed 
a  "  drogue,"  or  drag,  made  for  the  purpose,  the  object  of  each 
being  to  hold  the  boat's  stern  back  and  prevent  her  being  turned 
broadside  to  the  sea  or  broaching  to. 

d.  Heavy  weights  should  be  kept  out  of  the  extreme  ends  of 
the  boat,  but  when  rowing  before  a  heavy  sea  the  best  trim 
is  deepest  by  the  stern,  which  prevents  the  stern  being  readily 
driven  off  by  the  sea. 

e.  When  running  before  a  sea,  a  boat  should  be  steered  by 
an  oar  over  the  stern  or  on  one  quarter. 

(4)  General  rules  for  running  before,  or  attempting  to  land 
through,  a  heavy  surf  or  broken  water: 

a.  As   far  as  possible  avoid  each  sea  by  placing  the   boat 
where  the  sea  will  break  ahead  of  her. 

b.  If  the  sea  be  very  heavy,  or  if  the  boat  be  small,   and 
especially  if  she  has  a  square  stern,  bring  her  bow  round  to 
seaward   and  back  her  in,   rowing  ahead  against  each  heavy 
surf  sufficiently  to  allow  it  to  pass  the  boat. 

c.  If  it  be  considered  safe  to  proceed  to  the  shore  bow  fore- 
most, back  the  oars  against  each  sea  on  its  approach,  so  as  to 
stop  the  boat's  way  through  the  water  as  far  as  possible,  and 
if  there  is  a  drag,  or  any  other  appliance  in  the  boat  which  may 
be  used  as  one,  tow  it  astern  to  aid  in.  keeping  the  boat  stern-on 
to  the  sea,  which  is  the  chief  object  in  view. 

d.  Bring  the  principal  weight  in  the  boat  toward  the  end  that 
is  to  seaward,  but  not  to  the  extreme  end. 

e.  If  a  boat  worked  by  both  sails  and  oars  be  running  under 
sail  for  the  land  through  a  heavy  sea,  her  crew  should,  unless 
the  beach  be  quite  steep,  take  down  her  sails  and  masts  before 
entering  the  broken  water,   and  take  her  to  land  under  oars 
alone,  as  above  described.     If  she  have  sails  only,  her  sails 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  63 

should  be  much  reduced,  a  half-lowered  foresail  or  other  small 
head sa  i  1  bei 1 1 g  sufiicien  I . 

III.  Rc-'icliiny  or  landuifi  thro-mjli  a  surf. —  (1)  The  running 
bo [ore  a  sari:  or  broken  sea,  and  the  beaching  or  landing  of  a 
boat,  are  two  distinct  operations;  the  management  of  boats,  as 
;ih-.\o  recommended,  lias  exclusive  reference  to  running  before 
a  surf  where  the  shore  is  so  flat  that  the  broken  water  extends 
to  some  distance  from  the  beach.  On  a  very  steep  beach  the 
first  heavy  fall  of  broken  water  will  be  on  the  beach  itself, 
while  on  some  very  Hat  shores  there  will  be  broken  water  ex- 
tending 4  or  5  miles  from  the  land.  The  outermost  line  of 
broken  water,  on  a  flat  shore,  where  the  waves  break  in  3  or 
4  fathoms  of  water,  is  the.  heaviest,  arid  therefore  the  most 
dangerous;  and  when  it  has  been  passed  through  in  safety  the 
danger  lessens  as  the  water  shoals,  until  on  nearing  the  land  its 
force  is  spent  and  its  power  is  harmless.  As  the  character  of 
the  sea  is  quite  different  on  steep  and  flat  shores,  so  is  the 
customary  management  of  boats  on  landing  different  in  the  two 
situations. 

(2)  On  the  flat  shore,  whether  a  boat  be  run  or  backed  in,  she 
is  kept  straight  before  or  end-on  to  the  sea  until  she  is  fairly 
aground,  when  each  surf  takes  her  farther  in  as  it  overtakes 
her,  aided  by  the  crew,  who  will  then  generally  jump  out  to 
lighten  her  arid  drag  her  in  by  her  sides.     As  above  stated, 
sail  will,  in  this  case,  have  been  previously  taken  in,  if  set,  and 
the  boat  will  have  been  rowed  or  backed  in  by  the  oars  alone. 

(3)  On  a  steep  beach,  it  is  the  general  practice,  in  a  boat 
of  any  size,  to  sail  right  onto  the  beach,   and  in  the  act  of 
landing,   whether  under  oars  or  sail,   to  turn  the  boat's  bow 
half  around  toward  the  direction  in  which  the  surf  is  running, 
so  that  she  may  be  thrown  on  her  broadside  up  $he  beach, 
where  help  is  usually  at  hand  to  haul  her  as  quickly  as  possible 
out  of  the  reach  of  the  sea.     In  such  situations,  we  believe  it 
is  nowhere  the  practice  to  back  a  boat  in  stern  foremost  under 
oars,  but  to  row  in  under  full  speed,  as  above  described. 

LANDING   IN    A    HEAVY    SURF   IN    A    MOTOR    SURFBOAT. 

244.  The  following  general  rules  may  be  relied  on : 
(a)   That  a  motor  surfboat  should  enter  the  surf  at  a  mod- 
orate  speed  with  the  rudder  unshipped,  steering  oar  in  place, 
and  an  oar  out  on  each  quarter  to  assist  in  steering.     It  is 
safest  to  stop  the  engine  and  land  under  oars,  particularly  if 


64  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

the  surf  is  dangerous  and  is  breaking  close  to  the  beach.  Care 
should  be  taken  to  keep  the  boat's  stern  to  the  sea.  If  the  sea 
gets  on  the  quarter,  there  will  be  a  tendency  to  broach  to. 

(b)  That  the  drogue  should  be  used  in  landing  in  a  heavy 
surf,  and  that  a  long  drogue  rope  is  preferable  fo  a  short  one, 
except   when   working   through  broken   water,   as   when  on   a 
shoal.     The   drogue   should  be   tended   by   a   surlinan   with   a 
hatchet,  ready  to  cut  the  tripping  line,  and  the  drogue  rope 
also,  if  circumstances  warrant  and  the  drogue  rope  is  not  long 
enough,  if  slacked  off,  to  permit  the  boat  to  reach  the  beach. 
It  sometimes  happens,  when  a  boat  is  running  true,  that  the 
drogue,  even  when  tripped,  will  hold  the  boat  back  at  a  time 
when  she  should  go  as  fast  as  possible  on  the  sea  selected  for 
landing.     A  strain  should  be  kept  on  the  drogue  rope,  as  a 
slack  rope  is  likely  to  foul  the  propeller. 

(c)  Backing  the  engine  in  a  surf  is  dangerous,  as  it  will 
cause  the  stern  to  deviate  from  a  right  angle  to  the  surf. 

(d)  Weights  should  be  so  distributed  as  to  trim  the  boat  by 
the  stern,  so  that  it  will  drag. 

(c)  Oil  will  be  found  to  be  of  great  assistance  in  landing- 
through  a  heavy  surf.  Fish  oil  is  best  for  this  purpose.  Oakurn 
or  cotton  waste  saturated  with  it  may  be  carried  in  the  conical 
end  of  the  drogue,  or  in  an  oil  bag  made  fast  near  the  drogue. 
The  container  should  be  pricked  with  a  roping  needle  to  permit 
the  oil  to  escape. 

THE  DROGUE,   OB  DEAG. 

245.  (1)  Purpose  of. — The  drogue,  or  drag,  is  used  to  check 
a  boat's  way  and  keep  her  end-on  to  the  sea.  When  running 
before  a  heavy  sea  or  landing  through  a  dangerous  surf  it  will 
prove  of  the  greatest  assistance.  If  caught  in  a  gale  in  an 
open  boat  the  drogue  may  be  used  as  a  sea  anchor  to  keep  the 
boat  head-on  to  the  sea.  In  such  cases,  if  there  is  oil  in  the 
boat,  secure  a  bag  of  it  to  the  drogue. 

(2)  Description. — Drogues  furnished  Coast  Guard  stations 
shall  be  of  two  sizes ;  the  larger  for  use  in  power  lifeboats  and 
the  smaller  for  use  in  surfboats,  as  follows  : 

a.  Large-sized  drogue. — To  be  of  No.  5  cotton  canvas,  cone 
shaped,  24  inches  in  diameter  at  the  mouth,  4£  feet  long,  evenly 
tapered  to  a  point,  the  cone  to  be  in  four  equal  sections  joined 
by  round  seams,  the  sewing  to  be  on  the  inside.  Around  the 
inside  of  the  mouth  shall  be  a  1-inch  tabling,  hand  sewed,  and 
roped  with  1^-inch  manila.  Two  bails  of  1-inch  inanila  rope 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  65 

shall  be  roped  on  to  the  four  seams  of  the  drogue,  passing  the 
whole  length  of  the  drogue  and  crossing  each  other  2  feet  be- 
yond the  mouth,  where  they  will  be  seized  into  a  galvanized 
thimble  with  a  f-inch  opening.  Both  bails  shall  pass  continu- 
ously around  the  drogue,  and  into  the  bight  of  the  outer  bail 
there  shall  be  seized  close  to  the  apex  a  galvanized-iron  thimble 
with  i-inch  opening.  The  ends  of  the  lines  forming  the  bails 
shall  be  spliced  with  a  long  splice.  A  holding  line  of  1^-inch 
manila,  10  fathoms  long,  shall  be  spliced  into  the  bail  thimble 
at  the  mouth,  and  a  tripping  line  of  12-thread  manila,  15 
fathoms  long,  shall  be  spliced  into  the  bottom  thimble,  the  ends 
of  the  lines  securely  whipped. 

b.  Small-sized  drogue. — To  be  of  No.  6  cotton  canvas,  cone 
shaped,  15  inches  in  diameter  at  the  mouth,  30  inches  long,  and 
fitted  in  all  respects  as  prescribed  for  the  large-sized  drogue. 

c.  The   drogue-holding   rope   should   be   marked   with   a   red 
rag  tucked  through  the  lay  at  the  point  where  it  is  belayed. 

246.  Use  of  the  drogue. —  (1)  When  the  drogue  is  used  over 
the  stern,  No.  1  tends  the  drogue  lines.  Care  shall  be  taken 
that  the  holding  and  the  tripping  lines  do  not  foul  each,  other. 

(2)  To  check  the  headway  of  the  boat,  No.  1  sees  the  lines 
clear  and  throws  the  drogue  over  when  directed  by  the  officer 
(being  careful  that  the  lines  do  not  foul  the  propeller  when 
used  in  a  motor  boat).     Slack  out  the  holding  line  to  the  de- 
sired length  and  take  a  turn  with  it  to  a  cleat  on  the  star- 
board   side   as   near    the    sternpost    as   possible    (in    lifeboats 
make  the  line  fast  to  the  starboard  bollard  just  forward  of  the 
after  end  box).     Slack  out  the  tripping  line  at  the  same  time 
as  the  holding  line,  keeping  it  free  from  strain,  and  make  fast 
the  tripping  line  forward   of   the  holding  line.     The  ends  of 
both  the  holding  and  the  tripping  lines  must  be  secured  to  the 
boat  to  prevent  the  outer  end  from  being  run  out. 

(3)  If  headway  is  desired,  slack  out  on  the  holding  line  until 
the.  tripping  line,  which  is  secured  forward  of  the  holding  line, 
capsizes    and    empties    the    drogue,    towing   it    apex    forward. 
Conversely,   when   it   is   desired   to   check  headway   when   the 
drogue  is  being  towed  by  the  tripping  line,  slack  out  on  trip- 
ping line  until  the  drogue  is  capsized  and  towed  mouth  forward 
by  the  holding  line. 

(4)  Before  entering  a  dangerous  surf  the  drogue  should  be 
dropped    overboard   and    towed    with   the    apex   forward,    the 

34079 — 21 -5 


66  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

tripping  line  being  belayed  on  its  bight.  Should  it  become  nec- 
essary to  check  the  headway,  throw  off  the  bight  of  the  trip- 
ping line. 

(5)  If  the  drogue  is  used  over  the  bo-w,  it  shall  be  handled  in 
a  similar  manner,  No.  7  putting  the  drogue  over  and  tending 
the  lines. 

247.  Boat  sail  bent  to  a  yard  used  as  a  drogue. — A  boat  sail 
bent  to  a  yard,  loosed  and  towed  astern,  the  yard  being  at- 
tached to  a  line  capable  of  being  veered,  hauled,  or  let  go,  will 
net  in  some  measure  as  a  drogue,  and  will  tend  much  to  break 
the  force  of  the  sea  immediately  astern  of  the  boat. 

BOARDING  A  VESSEL  STRANDED  OR  AFLOAT  IN  A  HEAVY  SEA. 

251.  (1)  Whenever  practicable,  a  vessel,  whether  stranded  or 
afloat,  should  be  boarded  from  to  leeward,  as  the  principal 
danger  is  that  the  boat  may  collide  against  the  vessel  or  be 
swamped  or  upset  by  the  rebound  of  the  sea,  and  the  greater 
violence  of  the  sea  on  the  weather  side  of  the  vessel  renders 
such  accidents  more  liable  to  occur  on  that  side.  The  danger 
will  be  still  further  increased  when  the  vessel  is  aground  and 
the  sea  breaking  over  her. 

(2)  If  a  stranded  vessel  is  broadside  to  the  s^a,  the  chief 
danger  in  boarding  to  leeward  is  the  possible  falling  of  the 
masts,  or  that  the  boat  may  be  stove  by  the  wreckage  along- 
side.   Under  such  circumstances  it  may  be  necessary  to  take  a 
wrecked  crew  into   a  lifeboat  from  the  bow  or   stern  of  the 
wreck.     In  boarding  a  wreck  that  is  stranded  on  a  flat  shore, 
lifeboats  usually  anchor  to  windward  with  a  long  scope  of  cable, 
so  that  the  boat  will  drift  either  under  the  bow  or  stern,  whioh- 
<-\er  point  is  advisable,  taking  care  that  the  boat  does  not  come 
abreast  of  the  hull  by  using  all  the  oars  except  the  two  after 
ones,  whose  men  will  send  a  good  line  on  board  the  wreck  with 
a  heaving  stick  for  use  of  the  wrecked  people  as  a  traveler,  or 
to  be  tied  around  their  bodies  before  jumping  overboard.    The 
greatest   care,   under   these   circumstances,   must   be   taken   to 
prevent  actual  contact  between  the  boat  and  the  ship,  and  the 
crew  of  the  latter  sometimes  have  to  jump  overboard  and  to  be 
hauled  to  the  boat  by  ropes.     The  greatest  danger  is  in  the 
anchor  dragging  or  the  cable  breaking ;  to  avoid  this  the  strain 
must  be  relieved  as  much  as  possible  by  use  of  the  oars. 

(3)  In  every  case  of  boarding  a  wreck  or  a  vessel  at  sea  it  is 
important  that  the  lines  by  which  the  boat  is  made  fast  to  the 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  67 

vessel  should  be  of  sufficient  length  to  allow  of  her  rising  and 
falling  freely  with  the  sea,  and  every  rope  should  be  kept  in 
hand  ready  to  cut  or  slip  in  a  moment  if  necessary.  On 
wrecked  persons  or  other  passengers  being  taken  into  a  boat  in 
a  seaway  they  should  be  placed  on  the  thwarts  in  equal  num- 
bers on  either  side  and  be  made  to  sit  down.  All  crowding  or 
rushing  headlong  into  the  boat  should  be  prevented,  as  far  as 
possible,  and  the  captain  of  a  ship,  if  a  wreck,  should  be  called 
on  to  remain  on  board  to  preserve  order  until  every  other  person 
has  left  her. 

% 
RESCUING  PEOPLE  FROM  A  DKIFTJNG  WRECK  AT  SEA. 

254.  (1)  In  rescuing  people  from  a  drifting  wreck,  approach 
from  leeward,  taking  care  to  avoid  wreckage  floating  alongside. 

(2)  If  there  is  much  wind  and  the  sea  is  breaking  over  the 
wreck,  it  is  advisable  to  send  a  good  line  on  board,  using  the 
heaving  stick.     Have  the  people  secure  the  line  around  their 
bodies  and  jump  overboard,  one  at  a  time.    The  boat's  crew  will 
haul  them  into  the  boat  as  rapidly  as  possible. 

(3)  Should  it  become  necessary  to  go  alongside,  head  bow-on 
for  the  lee  side  of  the  wreck,  selecting  an  unobstructed  part. 
Boat  the  bow  oars  and  have  the  other  men  Face  about,  to  keep 
the  boat  from  touching  the  wreck.     One  bowman  will  use  his 
boat  hook  to  keep  the  boat  clear,  while  the  other  man  will 
assist  the  people  into  the  boat. 

(4)  An  exception  to  the  rule  of  boarding  a  vessel  to  leeward 
is  a  vessel  with  a  low  freeboard,  with  booms,  etc.,  over  the  side. 
Such  vessels  should  be  boarded  on  the  weather  quarter,   the 
boat's  crew  being  in  the  same  positions  as  prescribed  in  para- 
graph  3  of  this  article. 

SOUND  SIGNALS  FOK  A  FOG. 

261.  (1)  In  fog,  mist,  falling  snow,  or  heavy  rainstorms, 
whether  by  day  or  night,  a  power  boat  makes  the  following 
signals  at  intervals  of  not  more  than  one  minute : 

a.  If  underway  and  not  towing  or  being  towed,  a  prolonged 
blast  of  two  or  more  seconds  on  the  whistle  or  fog  horn. 

b.  If  underway  and  towing,  three  blasts  in  succession  on  the 
whistle  or  fog  horn,  namely,  one  prolonged  blast  followed  by 
two  short  blasts. 

c.  If  at  anchor,  ringing  of  the  bell  for  about  five  seconds. 


68  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

(2)  A  power  boat  is  underway  within  the  meaning  of  these 
rules  when  she  is  not  anchored  or  made  fast  to  the  shore  or  a 
ship,  or  aground. 

SPEED  IN  FOG. 

202.  Boats  shall,  in  a  fog,  mist,  falling  snow,  or  heavy  rain- 
storm, go  nt  moderate  speed. 

STEERING  AND  SAILING  HTJLES. 

263.  (1)  When  two  .boats  under  sail  are  approaching  one 
another  so  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision,  one  of  them  shall  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  the  other,  as  follows : 

a.  A  boat  which  is  running  free  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of 
a  boat  which  is?  close-hauled. 

b.  A  boat  which  is  close-hauled  on  the  port  tack  shall  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  a  boat  which  is  close-hauled  on  the  starboard 
tack. 

c.  When  both  are  running  free,  with  the  wind  on  different 
sides,  the  boat  which  has  the  wind  on  the  port  side  shall  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  the  other. 

d.  When  both  are  running  free,  with  the  wind  on  the  same 
side,  the  boat  which  is  to  windward  shall  keep  out  of  the  way 
of  the  boat  which  is  to  leeward. 

e.  A  boat  which  has  the  wind  aft  shall  keep  out  of  the  way 
of  other  boats. 

(2)  When  two  boats  under  power  or  oars  are  •  meeting  end- 
on,  or  nearly  end-on,  so  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision,  each  shall 
alter  her  course  to  starboard  so  that  each  may  pass  on  the  port 
side  of  the  other. 

(3)  When  two  boats  under  power  or  oars  are  crossing  so  as 
to  involve  risk  of  collision,  the  boat  which  has  the  other  on  her 
own  starboard  side  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  other. 

(4)  When   a  boat  under  power  or   oars   and  a  boat  under 
sail  are  proceeding   in  such   directions  as  to  involve  risk  of 
collision,  the  boat  under  power  or  oars  shall  keep  out  of  the 
way  of  the  boat  under  sail. 

(5)  Where  by  any  of  these  rules  one  of  the  two  boats  is  to 
keep   out  of   the   way,   the  other   shall   keep   her   course  and 
speed. 

(6)  Every  boat  which  is  directed  by  these  rules  to  keep  out 
of  the  way  of  another  boat  shall,  if  the  circumstances  of  the 
case  admit,  avoid  passing  ahead  of  the  other. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  69 

(7)  Every   boat   under   power   which    is   directed   by    these 
rules  to  keep  out  of  the  way  of  another  boat  shall,  on  approach- 
ing her,  if  necessary,  slacken  her  speed  or  stop  or  reverse. 

(8)  Every  boat,  whether  under  power,  oars,  or  sail,  when 
overtaking  any  other  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  over- 
taken boat. 

(9)  Any  boat  under  power  approaching  another  which  is  in 
sight  of  her  shall  indicate  what  course  she  intends  to  take 
by  the  following  signals  on  her  whistle : 

a.  One  short  blast  to  mean  "  I  am  directing  my  course  to 
starboard." 

&.  Two  short  blasts  to  mean  "  I  am  directing  my  course  to 
port" 

c.  Three  short  blasts  to  mean  "  My  engines  are  going  at  full 
speed  astern." 

d.  The  words  "short  blast"  to  mean  a  blast  of  about  one 
second's  duration, 

(10)  In  a  narrow  channel  every  boat  under  power  or  oars 
shall,   when  it  is  safe  and-  practicable,   keep   to   that  side  of 
the  fairway  or  mid-channel  which  lies  on  the  starboard  side 
of  such  boat. 

(11)  Whenever  a  boat  under  power  is  nearing  a  short  bend 
or  curve  in  a  river  or  harbor  she  should  give  a  long  blast  on 
the  steam  whistle. 

(12)  Due  regard  shall  be  had  to  all  dangers  of  navigation 
and   collision    and   to    any    special    circumstances    which    may 
render  a  departure  from   the  above  rules  necessary  in  order 
to  avoid  immediate  danger. 

SIGNALS. 
METHODS. 

271.  The   United    States   Coast    Guard    Signal    System    com- 
prises the  Semaphore  Code,  the  Dot  and  Dash  Code,  and  the 
International  Code. 

272.  In   communicating  between   units   of   the   Coast   Guard 
or  with  units  of  the  United  States  Navy  the  following  methods 
of  signaling  are  employed: 

Wigwag  (day  and  night  signals).— Dot  and  Dash  Code. 
Plashing  light  (night). — Dot  and  Dash  Code. 
Semaphore   (day). — Semaphore  Code. 
Flag  signals  (day). — International  Code. 


70  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

273.  In  communicating  between  units  of  the  Coast  Guard 
and  merchant  vessels  the  International  Code  and  such  other 
of  the  codes  named  in  the  preceding  article  as  meet  the  needs  of 
the  case  may  be  used.  Call  letters  shall  be  used  only  between 
units  of  the  Coast  Guard. 

INSTRUCTIONS. 

275.  The  International  Morse  Code  shall  be  used  in  communi- 
cating by  wigwag  and  flashing  light  methods. 

276.  A  signal  drill  shall  be  either  a  recitation  or  a  practice, 
or  both.    A  recitation  shall  embrace  the  questions  and  answers 
on  the  wigwag,  flashing  light,  and  semaphore  methods,  in  the 
appendix  of  this  pamphlet,  as  well  as  practice  with  wands  or 
small  flags  indoors. 

277.  Practice  drills  in  wigwag  and  in  semaphore  shall  be  held 
with  the  regulation  flags,  and  out  of  doors,  the  men  being  paired 
off  beyond  ordinary  hearing  distance  of  each  other.     Each  man 
shall  be  required  to  send  to  and  receive  from  the  other -a  col- 
lection of  words  containing  all  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  pre- 
pared by  the  officer  in  charge.     The  necessary  communications 
between  sender  and  receiver  will  be  carried  on  by  means  of 
procedure  signs,  and  no  conversation  will  be  permitted.     Each 
man  will  be  provided  with  a  pencil  and  paper  for  recording  the 
words  sent  to  him,  which  record  he  shall  hand  to  the  officer  at 
the  end  of  the  practice.     The  officer  shall  compare  each  record 
with  the  words  sent.     Practice  in  flashing  light  shall  be  held 
twice  each  week.     In  using  the  practice  set  care  shall  be  taken 
that  the  men  do  not  rely  on  the  ear  instead  of  the  eye  in  read- 
ing.    To  prevent  this  the  person  reading  should  be  out  of  hear- 
ing of  the  "  click  "  of  the  instrument.     Officers  interested  in  the 
proficiency  of  their  crews  will  find  means  of  accomplishing  this. 
When  practicing  with  the  large  flashing  light  set  at  short  dis- 
tances, the  insertion  of  a  dark  substance,  such  as  a  piece  of 
emery  paper,  between  the  bulb  and  the  reflector  has  been  found 
effective  in  overcoming  the  blinding  glare  of  the  reflector.    This 
substance  is  not  to  be  used  when  signaling  to  any  distance  and 
must  be  removed  from  the  box  immediately  the  practice  drill 
is  over. 

278.  The  crew  shall  become  proflcient  in  wigwag,  semaphore, 
and  flashing  light  signaling.     Members  of  the  crew  who  are  not 
proficient  in  these  different  methods  shall  be  required  to  prac- 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  71 

tice  each  day  except  Saturday  and  Sunday.     Those  who  do  not 
learn  after  a  reasonable  time  shall  be  reported  as  deficient. 

279.  The  tests  for  proficiency  and  expertness  in  the  wigwag, 
semaphore,  and  flashing-light  methods  shall  be  conducted  with 
three  men,  namely,  a  sender,  a  receiver,  and  a  recorder.     The 
receiver  shall  receive  and  call  out  the  meanings  of  the  signals 
sent  and  the  recorder  shall  record  them.     Test  messages  for 
determining  proficiency  and  expertness  in  these  methods  shall 
consist  of  not  less  than  17  words  averaging  5  letters  each  and  of 
3  numbers  averaging  5  figures  each,  except  in  the  semaphore  test, 
which  shall  consist  of  not  less  than  20  words  averaging  5  letters 
each.     Every  test  message  shall  contain  all  the  letters  of  the 
alphabet  and,  when  numbers  are  included,  all  the  figures  be- 
tween 0  and  9.     Each  figure  in  a  message  shall  be  counted  as 
a  letter.     No  person  shall  be  considered  as  proficient  or  expert 
in   these   methods   unless   he   can   also    send   correctly   at  the 
requisite  speed.     (See  arts.  297,  304,  and  314.) 

280.  No  drill,   except  a   drill  in  night  signals,   shall  be   re- 
garded as  practice,  or  recorded  in  the  log  as  such,  unless  it  be 
held  out  of  doors  with  regulation  flags.    All  other  exercises  in 
signals  shall  be  recorded  in  the  log  as  recitations. 

281.  All  messages,  except  in  regular  signal  drill,  should  be 
recorded  by  a  second  signalman,  or  other  person,  as  the  words 
or  characters  are  called  out  by  the  person  receiving  the  signal. 
This  rule  is  general. 

282.  A  message  in  which  a  few  words  have  been  lost  should 
never  be  guessed  at.    If  only  a  part  of  a  word  has  been  under- 
stood, the  proper  "  repeat "  sign  should  be  made  immediately. 
The  receiver  should  not  wait  until  the  message  is  complete  and 
then  depend  on  guessing  the  part  lost.     If  the  message  is  not 
perfectly  clear,  or  if  the  receiver  thinks  he  may  have"  made  a 
mistake,  he  should  make  the  proper  "  repeat "  sign  after  the 
last  word  he  is  sure  of.     It  will  seldom  be  necessary  to  repeat 
the  whole  message  if  this  rule  is  observed ;  but  if  the  receiver 
fails  to  "  break  "  the  sender  immediately  after  losing  a  part  of 
the  message  he  will  cause  the  sender  unnecessary  signaling. 

283.  In  all  signaling  skill  and  rapidity  must  always  be  re- 
garded as  secondary  to  accuracy,  though  after  accuracy  has 
been  attained  the  relative  skill  of  signalmen  is  shown  by  the 
rapidity  with  which  they  can  accurately  receive  messages. 


72  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

THE  DOT  AND  DASH  CODE. 

285.  The  Dot  and  Dash  Code  comprises  the  alphabet  and 
numerals  of  the  International  Morse  Code,  together  with  certain 
additional  procedure  signs,  as  follows: 

ALPHABET. 

' 


A  ._ 

J   

s  ... 

B  

K 

T  

C  _  

L  

U  

D  

M  

V  

E  . 

N  _. 

F  .  .        . 

O  

x  inn. 

G  

P  

y  .  

H  

Q  

Z  ___.  . 

R  .  . 

NUMERALS. 

1  .  

5  ..... 

g  

2  .  .  

6  

9  ,11. 

3  . 

7  ... 

0 

*  •  •  •  •  _ 

PROCEDURE     SIGNS. 


Full  stop  sign__ AAA  made  as  one  si 

Finale  sign AR  made  as  one  sign  (.-_._.)• 

Finish  sign ,VA  made  as  one  sign  (. . . . ). 

Erase  sign E    made    separately    about    10    times 

( )• 

Group  sign GR  made  separately  ( .     . .). 

Break  sign II  made  separately  (. .    . .}. 

Repeat  sign .JMI  made  as  one  sign  (. . .  .)• 

Repeat  all  before  (word 

or  group) IMI  AB  (word  or  group). 

Repeat  from    (word  or 

group)    to    (word   or 

group) (Word  or  group)  II  IMI  II   (word  or 

group). 
Repeat  all  after    (word 

or  group) IMI  AA  (word  or  group). 

Repeat  word  after JMI  WA   (word)    AR. 

Repeat  all  before  group 

No,  — ___JMI  AB   (No.)r 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  73 

Repeat  from  group  No. 

-  .to  group  No.  — (No.)  II  IMI  II  (No.). 

Repeat  all   after  group 

No.— IMI  A  A  (No.). 

Repeat  group  No.  — IMI  GR  (No.). 

Repeat    group    No.    — 

and  group  No.  — IMI  GR  (No.)  II  GR  (No.). 

Interrogatory  sign INT  made  as  one  sign  (. .  — .  — ). 

Preliminary     executive 

sign IX  made  as  one  sign  (. .  — . .  — ). 

Executive  sign .Flash  (10  sec.). 

Time  of  receipt  sign TOR    made    separately     ( — 

Unofficial  sign UN  made  separately  (. .  —    —  .)• 

Received  sign R  ( ), 

Word  after  sign WA  made  separately  ( ._). 

WIGWAG. 

291.  Wigwag    employs    the    International    Morse    Alphabet, 
numerals  and  special  Morse  signs.     A  motion  through  an  arc 
of  90°    to  the  sender's  right  represents  a  "  dot,"  and  a  similar 
motion  to  the  left  a  "  dash."     The 

only  signs  peculiar  to  wigwag  are:  ^----j- 

(a)  .The  "attention"  sign,  i.  e., 
the  flag  waved  back  and  forward 
overhead  and 

(b)  The   "break"    sign,   i.   e.,   a 
motion  to  the  front. 

292.  A  hand  flag,  a  hand  light,  or 
a    searchlight  beam   is  used.     The 
sender     should    face     the    receiver 
squarely.     The  motions  for  the  dot 
and  dash  should  be  made  at  right 
angles  to  the  line  of  transmission, 
and   for   the   "  brk "   from  the  ver- 
tical   position    through    an    arc    of 
135°  in  the  direction  of  the  line  of 
transmission.    In  order  to  keep  the 
Hag  fully  exposed  the  point  of  the 

staff  should  be  made   to   describe  an  elongated  figure  8.     In 
case  a  hand  light  is  used,  it  is  desirable  to  have  a  reference 


74  INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

light  at  the  sender's  feet.  An  oil  lantern  may  more  con- 
veniently be  swung  outward  and  upward.  It  is  important  to 
obtain  a  good  background  and  to  select  a  flag  the  colors  of 
which  present  the  most  marked  contrast  with  the  background. 

293.  The  prescribed  calls  may  be  supplemented  by  flag-hoist 
calls  as  in  semaphore.    The  procedure  prescribed  for  semaphore 
shall  be  followed. 

294.  While    slower    than    semaphore,    a    large   wigwag   flag 
against  a  good  background  may  be  read  at  a  greater  distance 
than  semaphore. 

295.  To  call  a  ship  or  station,  face  it  and  make  its  call,  either 
by  flag  hoist  and  "  attention " ;   by   "  attention "  alone,  or  by 
"  attention  "  followed  by  letter  or  letters  abbreviating  the  name 
of  the  unit  for  which  the  dispatch  is  intended.    The  receiving 
unit,  if  the  call  be  by  flag  hoist,  answers  the  call  by  hoisting 
the  answering  pennant  under  the  call  of  the  transmitting  unit, 
at  the  dip  as  soon  as  seen  and  two-blocked  when  ready  to  re- 
ceive and  record.    If  the  call  be  by  other  than  flag  hoist,  the  re- 
ceiving unit  makes  the  "  answering  "  sign,  followed  if  necessary 
by  three  or  four  letters  abbreviating  the  name  of  the  transmit- 
ting unit.     The  transmitting  unit  then  makes  the  break  sign, 
followed  by  GR  and  number  of  groups  or  words,  then  makes 
break  followed  by  BT  if  text  is  in  code,  and  proceeds  with  text 
of  dispatch.    The  receiving  unit  will,  when  the  call  and  answer 
is  by  flag  hoist,  immediately  dip  the  answering  pennant  if  a 
word  or  sign  is  missed.    If  the  call  be  other  than  by  flag  hoist, 
it  makes  "repeat"   (IMI).     The  transmitting  unit  at  the  con- 
clusion of  the  dispatch  makes  "  break,"  and  then  makes    AR 
and  hauls  down  the  flag  call  if  used.     The  receiving  unit  ac- 
knowledges the   receipt  of  the  dispatch    (a)    if  the   call   and 
answer  be  by  flag  hoist,  by  hauling  down  the  answering  pennant 
when  the  transmitting  unit  hauls  down  the  call ;  (Z>)  if  the  call 
and  answer  be  other  than  by  flag  hoist,  makes  "  R  break  VA." 

296.  If,  in  the  course  of  a  signal  the  sender  discovers  that  he 
has  made  an  error,  he  should  make  the  "  erase  "  sign,  then  make 
the  last  word  or  group  which  was  correctly  transmitted  and 
continue  with  the  signal  or  dispatch.     If,  in  the  course  of  a 
signal  addressed  to  a  unit,  the  receiver  does  not  understand  a 
word,  character,  or  display,  he  should  break  in  with  the  proper 
repeat  sign. 

297.  (1)  The  standard  of  proficiency  for  a  person  receiving 
wigwag  signals  in  a  test  for  proficiency  shall  be  18  letters  per 
minute,  85  per  cent  of  the  letters  being  correctly  received  and 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  75 

recorded.  The  standard  of  expertness  for  such  a  person  shall  be 
25  letters  per  minute,  all  the  letters  being  received  and  recorded 
without  error. 

(2)  The  standard  of  proficiency  for  a  person  sending  wigwag 
signals  with  hand  flags  shall  be  18  letters  per  minute  and  the 
standard  of  expertness  for  such  person  shall  be  25  letters  per 
minute,  all  letters  being  sent  correctly  in  either  case.     (See  art. 
279.) 

(3)  Should  the  tests  be  made  with  wands  or  small  flags  the 
standard  of  proficiency  for  a  person  sending  wigwag  signals 
shall  be  18  letters  per  minute  and  the  standard  of  expertness 
for  such  person  shall  be  24  letters  per  minute.     In  either  case, 
all  the  letters  composing  the  test  shall  be  sent  correctly. 

The  small  flags  referred  to  herein  are  flags  the  size  of  hand 
semaphore  flags. 

FLASHING  LIGHT. 

301.  The  Dot  and  Dash  Code  is  used  for  this  method,     A 
short  flash  is  used  for  a  "  dot "  and  a  long  flash  for  a  "  dash." 

302.  In  transmitting  dispatches  the  transmitting  unit  makes 
the  call  of  the  unit  for  which  the  dispatch  is  intended  several 
times  or  until  repeated.    The  receiving  unit  repeats  the  call  as 
made  by  the  transmitting  unit.     The  transmitting  unit  then 
makes  its  own  call  until  repeated  and  the  receiving  unit  repeats 
the  call  of  the  transmitting  unit.     The  transmitting  unit  then 
makes  break  (II),  the  receiving  unit  answers  with  a  flash;  the 
transmitting  unit  then  makes  "  GR  "  followed  by  the  number  of 
words  or  groups,  which  the  receiving  unit  answers  with  a  flash ; 
the  transmittingjunit  then  makes  "  break  "   (II)   if  text  is  in 
plain  language,  BT  if  text  is  in  code,  and  the  receiving  unit 
answers  with  a  flash ;  the  transmitting  unit  then  transmits  text 
of  the  dispatch  ( including  office  and  date  number  and  time  of 
origin  number),  and  the  receiving  unit  answers  each  word  or 
group  with  a  flash.    At  the  end  of  the  dispatch  the  transmitting 
unit  makes  "finale"  sign    (AR),  or  if  there  are  further  dis- 
patches to  transmit  to  the  same  receiving  unit,  the  transmitting 
unit  makes  AR  II  B;  the  receiving  unit,  if  dispatch  has  been 
received,  makes  "  R  II  VA."    If  the  transmitting  unit  indicates 
that  there  are  further  dispatches  for  the  same  receiving  unit, 
the   receiving  uoit   answers   such   signal   with   "  R   II   K "    or 
"  R  II  Q."  as  circumstances  demand. 

303.  Officers  in  charge  of  stations  with  a  standard  night  signal 
set  shall  require  the  station  lookouts  to  call  adjoining  stations 


76  INSTRUCTIONS  EOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

within  signal  distance  at  irregular  intervals  during  the  night, 
and  will  note  in  the  log  when  such  calls  are  not  promptly 
acknowledged.  They  will  encourage  men  not  on  lookout  duty 
to  practice  night  signaling  with  men  belonging  to  adjoining 
stations,  but  such  practice  must  not  interfere  wit!  the  duties 
of  the  lookout. 

304.  (1)  The  standard  of  proficiency  for  a  person  receiving 
flashing  light  signals  in  a  test  for  such  proficiency  shall  be  30 
letters  per  minute.    The  standard  of  expertness  for  such  person 
shall  be  60  letters  per  minute.    In  either  case,  at  least  85  per 
cent  of  the  letters  sent  shall  be  correctly  received  and  recorded. 

(2)  The  standard  of  proficiency  for  a  person  sending  flash- 
ing light  signals  shall  be  30  letters  per  minute  and  the  standard 
of  expertness  for  such  person  shall  be  60  letters  per  minute.  In 
either  case,  all  the  letters  composing  the  test  shall  be  sent 
correctly.  (See  art.  279.) 

SEMAPHOBE. 

305.  Semaphore  is  the  standard  system  of  transmitting  dis- 
patches during  daylight  for  short  and  medium  distances.    While 
under  ordinary  circumstances  it  would  not  be  used  for  the  trans- 
mission of  signals,  it  may  be  used  either  as  the  primary  method 
of  transmission  or  as  a  secondary  method  to  supplement  flag 
signals  then  displayed. 

306.  It  employs  two  hand  flags  from  15  to  18  inches  square, 
and  either  blue  and  white  similar  to  the  international  flag  "  P  " 
or  red  and  yellow  similar  to  the  international  flag  "  O,"  the 
color  to  be  used  which  affords  the  better  contrast  to  the  back- 
ground.    The  flags  should  be  .attached  to  a  light  staff  about  2 
feet  long. 

307.  The  sender  should  select  a  background  giving  the  greatest 
contrast.     Except  under  special  conditions  of  light  and  when 
the  sun  is  in  line  with  and  back  of  the  sender,  the  sky  affords 
the  best  background.     The  arms  must  be  placed  at  the  exact 
positions  indicating  the  letters,  a  distinct  pause  being  made  at 
each  position  and  the  arms  moved  from  position  to  position  by 
the  shortest  route. 

308.  The  semaphore  alphabet  is  printed  as  the  characters  ap- 
pear with  the  sender  facing  the  receiver.     Thus  the  character 
"  B  "  is  with  the  right  arm  extended  horizontally. 

309.  Numbers  shall  always  be  spelled  out. 

310.  The  "  break  "  and  "  answering  "  are  shown  in  the  plate. 


CHAR- 
ACTERS 


HAND 
FLAGS 


CHAR- 
ACTERS 


HAND 
FLAGS 


CHAR- 
AQERS 


HAND 
FLAGS 


CHAR- 
AQERS 


HAND 
FLAGS 


A 

B 
C 
D 

E. 
F 
G 
H 


K 

L 
M 
N 
O 
P 


Q 


S 
T 
U 
V 

w 

X 


Y 


MEN- 
TION 


ING 
SIGN 

BRMK 


78  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

311.  Procedure  signs  ordinarily  used  are: 

Error E  agitated. 

Interrogatory .INT. 

Code  follows _Br7 

Signals  follow TM! 

Number  of  words  or  groups GE,  (followed  by  number  spelled 

out. 

End  of  word Break. 

End  of  sentence  (full  stop) AAA( three  a's). 

End  of  dispatch AH. 

Repeat  all  before  word .IMI  break  AB  break  (word). 

Repeat  all  after  word .IMI  break  AA  break  (word). 

Repeat  word  after  word IMI  break  WA  break  (word). 

Received    (and    communication 

finished) R  bre;ik  VA  (used  only  when 

call  flags  are  not  used.    When 
call  flags  are  used  the  haul- 

ying  down  of  the  call  signifies 
HOIT  ';',.lkmtob  m-elveU").:' 

Move  to  your  right __MR.X 

Move  to  your  left ML.1 

Move  up __ .Mu.1 

Move  down__  _  JVtD.1 


\  312.  To  call  a  unit  hoist  the  call  of  the  unit  for  whom 
signal  or  dispatch  is  intended,  "  two-blocked "  (unless  it  is 
necessary  to  make  such  a  call  while  ilag  signals  are  displayed  at 
the  same  yardarm,  in  which  case  the  call 'may, be  hoisted  at  the 
dip).  The  receiving  unit  answers  the  call  by  hoisting  the  call 
of  the  transmitting  unit  over  the  answering  pennant  (l).'at  the 
"dip,"  as  soon  as  seen,  and  until  ready  to  receive;  (2)  two- 
blocked  when  ready  to  receive.  When  it  is.  not  practicable  to 
«all  by  flag  hoist,  and  the  "  attention  "  sign  is  not  sufficiently 
definite  to  attract  attention,  the  transmitting  unit  will  use 
three  or  four  letters  abbreviating  the  name  of  the  unit  called. 
The  receiving  unit  answers  with  the  "answering"  sign,  and  if 
that  be  not  sufficiently  definite  with  three  or  four  letters  abbre- 
viating the  name  of  the  unit  answered.  The  transmitting  unit 
will  then  make  "break"  (II)  and  then  GR,  followed  by  number 
,of  groups  or  words,  and  then  again  makes  break  sign  and  pro- 
ceeds with  text  of  the  dispatch,  all  numbers  being  spelled  out. 


1  May  be  used  in  wigwag  also. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  79 

When  the  call  and  answer  is  by  flag  hoist  the  receiving  unit  will 
dip  the  answering  pennant  immediately  when  a  sign  or  word  is 
missed.  If  the  call  be  other  than  by  flag  hoist,  the  receiving 
unit  will  in  such  cases  make  "repeat"  (IT).  At  the  conclu- 
sion of  the  dispatch  the  transmitting  unit  makes  the  break  sign 
and  then  makes  2H ,  and  hauls  down  the  flag  call  if  used.  The 
receiving  unit  acknowledges  the  receipt  of  the  dispatch  (a)  if 
the  call  and  the  answer  be  by  flag  hoist,  by  hauling  down  the 
answering  pennant  when  the  transmitting  unit  hauls  down  the 
call;  (&)  if  the  call  and  answer  be  other  than  by  flag  hoist,  by 
making  "  R  break  VA."  If  there  are  additional  dispatches  to 
transmit  to  the  same  receiving  unit  the  transmitting  unit  makes 
AR  II  B  at  the  end  of  the  dispatch,  instead  of  AR.  If  the  trans- 
mitting unit  indicates  that  there  are  further  dispatches  for  the 
same  receiving  unit,  the  receiving  unit  answers  such  signal  with 
"  R  II  K  "  or  "  R  II  Q,"  as  circumstances  demand,  instead  of 
"  R  II  ^A,"  which  last  signal  the  receiving  unit  makes  only 
when  all  dispatches  for  her  at  that  time  have  been  received. 

313.  If  during  the  sending  of  the  dispatch  the  receiving  unit 
fails  to  receive  any  part  of  it  for  any  reason,  such  as  the  sender 
becoming  obscured  by  smoke,  etc.,  the  receiving  unit  should  dip 
the  answering  pennant,  if  used.  The  transmitting  unit  should 
then  dip  the  call.  When  the  receiving  unit  is  again  ready  to 
receive,  it  should  two-block  the  answering  pennant  and  the 
transmitting  unit  shoiild  then  two-block  the  call  and  proceed 
with  the  dispatch,  starting  with  and  repeating  the  last  two  or 
three  words  transmitted  before  the  answering  pennant  was 
dipped.  If  the  receiving  unit  requires  more  than  the  last  word 
or  sign  to  be  repeated,  it  should  make  the  appropriate  procedure 
sign  for  repeating  the  required  portion. 

314.  (1)  The  standard  of  proficiency  for  a  person  receiving 
semaphore  signals  in  a  test  for  proficiency  shall  be  40  letters 
per  minute.    The  standard  of  expertness  for  such  person  shall 
be  90  letters  per  minute.    In  either  case,  at  least  85  per  cent  of 
the  letters  sent  shall  be  received  and  recorded  correctly. 

(2)  The  standard  of  proficiency  for  a  person  sending  sema- 
phore signals  shall  be  40  letters  per  minute  and  the  standard 
of  expertness  for  such  person  shall  be  90  letters  per  minute.  In 
either  case,  all  the  letters  composing  the  test  shall  be  sent  cor- 
rectly. (See  art.  279.) 

315.  The  letter  "G"  is  designated  for  use  in  opening  com- 
munication by  semaphore,  wigwag,  or  flashing  light  between 
Coast  Guard  stations  and  vessels  of  the  United  States  Navy. 


80  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

The  International  Code  pennant  "  G  "  will  be  used  for  the  pur- 
pose of  opening  communication  by  the  semaphore  and  wigwag 
between  Coast  Guard  stations  and  vessels  of  the  United  States 
Navy.  The  pennant  "  G  "  hoisted  at  the  yardarni  of  a  naval  vessel 
indicates  that  the  vessel  desires  to  communicate  with  the  Coast 
Guard  station  in  sight  by  semaphore  or  wigwag.  To  answer  the 
station  hoists  the  International  Code  answering  pennant  at  the 
"dip"  (about  two-thirds  of  the  way  up).  The  vessel  then  pro- 
ceeds with  the  message.  When  the  message  is  received  and 
understood  the  station  hoists  the  answering  pennant  to  the 
yardarm.  Both  then  haul  down.  If  riot  understood,  request  by 
semaphore  or  wigwag,  as  the  case  may  be,  that  the  message,  or 
such  part  as  may  be  necessary,  be  repeated.  Similarly  a  Coast 
Guard  station  desiring  to  communicate  with  a.  naval  vessel  will 
hoist  "  G  "  at  the  yardarm,  and  the  naval  vessel  will  answer  by 
hoisting  the  answering  pennant  at  the  "  dip."  The  message  will 
then  be  sent  and  acknowledged  as  prescribed.  To  open  com- 
munication at  night  by  flashing  light  the  letter  "  G  "  will  be 
used  as  a  call.  Stations  answer  by  making  "  G,"  and  the  mes- 
sage will  be  sent  as  prescribed  in  article  302,  "  Instructions  for 
Coast  Guard  Stations."  A  naval  vessel  may  arissver  by  making 
her  own  call  or  making  "  G."  It  is  the  practice  when  com- 
municating by  Hashing  light  for  the  receiving  station  to  make  a 
long  dash  after  each  word  made  by  the  sending  station,  which 
is  correctly  received.  If  the  dash  is  not  made,  the  sending  sta- 
tion repeats  the  word  until  the  receiving  station  indicates  by 
a  long  dash  that  the  word  is  understood.  When  several  naval 
vessels  are  present  the  senior  naval  vessel  will  acknowledge  the 
call  "  G  "  when  made  by  a  Coast  Guard  station.  The  station 
should  in  all  cases  determine  the  name  of  the  naval  vessel  with 
which  it  is  communicating. 

INTEENATIONAL  CODE. 

. 

321.  One  drill  with  the  International  Code  shall  be  held  each 
week,  recitation  and  practice  alternating.  The  recitation  shall 
consist  of  questions  by  the  officer  in  charge  to  each  member  of 
the  crew  upon  the  different  flags  of  the  code;  upon  one,  two, 
three,  and  four  flag  hoists,  and  the  distinguishing  flag  or  pen- 
nant of  each;  the  part  of  the  code  book  necessary  to  turn  to 
when  reading  or  in  making  a  signal ;  the  manner  of  opening  and 
conducting  communications  by  the  International  Code;  special 
distance  signals;  the  "List  of  Merchant  Vessels  of  the  United 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  81 

States " ;  and  in  actual  communication  by  means  of  the  minia- 
ture signal  flags  provided  each  station.  The  "bridge"  names 
for  the  flags  of  the  International  Code  as  shown  in  this  book 
shall  always  be  used. 

322.  Practice  with  the  International  Code  shall  be  held  out 
of  doors  with  the  regulation  flags.     The  crew  will  be  divided 
into  two  parts,  one  to  send  and  the  other  to  receive  messages 
prepared  by  the  officer  in  charge  with  the  view  of  testing  the 
knowledge  of  the  crew  in  the  various  tables  and  parts  of  the 
code,  and  in  reading  and  making  the  official  numbers  of  vessels. 
To  insure  accuracy,  a  message  shall  in  each  case  be  written 
out  before  being  given  to  the  sending  squad,  which  will  be  re- 
quired to  look  up  and  to  record  on  the  same  or  an  attached  sheet 
of  paper  the  corresponding  signals.     A  separate  line  shall  be 
used  for  each  hoist  and  its  meaning,  a  straight  line  drawn  down 
the  sheet  separating  the  two.    The  receiving  squad  shall   be 
required   to   make   a   similar   record   of   each   hoist,   carefully 
checking  the  same  while  the  hoist  is  still  up.    At  the  close  of  the 
exercise  the  officer  in  charge  will  compare  the  messages  received 
with  the  ones  sent  to  note  errors  or  discrepancies  and  will  in- 
struct the  crew  regarding  any  that  he  finds.     Each  member  of 
the  crew  should  be  given  an  opportunity  to  find  and  record, 
without  assistance,  one  or  more  hoists  and  their  meanings  at 
each  drill.    The  practice  should  include  making  up  the  flags  of 
a  hoist  as  soon  as  it  is  hauled  down. 

323.  When  two  stations  are  within  signal  distance  of  each 
other,  the  International  Code  drill  shall  be  held  between  them, 
the  day  to  be  agreed  upon  by  the  officers  in  charge.     If  atmos- 
pheric conditions,  force,  or  direction   of  the  wind,   assistance 
work,  etc.,  prevent  the  drill  being  held  on  the  appointed  day, 
the  respective  officers  shall  select  another  day  for  the  drill. 

324.  When  a  station  is  not  within  signal  distance  of  another, 
or  when  circumstances  prevent  a  drill  between  two  crews,  a 
temporary  pole  on  which  to  hoist  the  answering  pennant  (which 
nmy   be   an   improvised   one)    should  be   erected   well   beyond 
speaking  distance  of  the  flagpole  and  the  practice  conducted 
as  prescribed  in  the  preceding  article.     The  two  parts  of  the 
crew  shall  practice  at  both  sending  and  receiving  messages. 
In  the  absence  of  a  second  set  of  international  signal  flags  the 
receiving  party  shall  use  the  wigwag  for  acknowledging  hoists 
and  making  other  necessary  signals. 

34079—21 6 


82  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

325.  No  drill  with  the  International  Code  shall  be  regarded 
as  a  practice  and  recorded  in  the  log  as  such  unless  it  be  held 
out  of  doors  with  the  regulation  flags.  All  other  exercises 
\vith  this  code  shall  be  recorded  in  the  log  as  recitations. 

3-6.  The  standard  of  proficiency  in  Internal  ional  Code 
practice  shall  be  the  ability  to  read  any  signal  displayed  in  one 
hoist  and  give  its  meaning  correctly  in  one  minute,  and  to  con- 
vert any  given  message  into  its  proper  code  signals  at  an  average 
speed  of  two  minutes  for  each  hoist  in  the  message. 

327.  The  standard  of  expertness  in  International  Code 
practice  shall  be  the  ability  to  read  any  signal  displayed  in  one 
hoist  and  give  its  meaning  correctly  in  20  seconds,  and  to  con- 
vert any  given  message  into  its  proper  code  signals  at  an  aver- 
age speed  of  45  seconds  for  each  hoist  in  the  message. 

SIGNALS  FOE  USE  AT  WRECKS. 

331.  The  following  signals  shall  be  used  by  the  officers  and 
crews  at  Coast  Guard  stations  as  circumstances  may  require : 

(a)  Upon  the  discovery  of  a  wreck  by  night,  a  red  pyrotech- 
nic light  or  a  red  rocket  will  be  burned  to  signify.  "  You  are 
seen ;  assistance  will  be  given  as  soon  as  possible." 

(&)  A  red  flag  waved  on  shore  by  day,  or  a  red  light,  red 
rocket,  or  red  Roman  candle  displayed  by  night,  will  signify, 
"  Haul  away." 

(c)  A  white  flag  waved  on  shore  by  day,  or  a  white  light 
slowly  swung  back  and  forth,  or  a  white  rocket  or  a  white 
Roman  candle  fired  by  night,  will  signify,  "  Slack  away." 

(d)  Two  flags,  a  white  and  a  red,  waved  at  the  same  time  on 
shore  by  day,  or  two  lights,  a  white  and  a  red,  slowly  swung  at 
the  same  time,  or  a  blue  pyrotechnic  light  burned  by  night,  will 
signify,   "  Do  not  attempt  to  land  in  your  own  boats ;   it  is 
impossible." 

(e)  A  man  on  shore  beckoning  by  day,  or  two  torches  burning 
near  together  by  night,  will  signify,  "  This  is  the  best  place  to 
land." 

332.  Any  of  the  signals  specified  in  the  preceding  article  may 
be  answered  from  the  vessel  as  follows : 

In  the  daytime,  by  waving  a  flag,  a  handkerchief,  a  hat,  or 
even  the  hand ;  at  night,  by  firing  a  rocket,  a  blue  light,  or  a 
gun,  or  by  showing  a  light  over  the  ship's  rail  for  a  short  time 
and  then  concealing  it. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  83 

333.  The  officer  in  charge  of  every  station  shall  see  that  there 
is  a  staff  for  each  of  the  flags  carried  on  the  beach  cart  for  use 
at  wrecks.     Each  staff  shall  be  6  feet  long,  1  inch  in  diameter 
at  the  butt,  and  tapering  to  one-half  inch  at  the  top,  where  the 
flag  shall  ho  attached.    The  staffs  shall  be  made  of  some  tough 
wood ;  a  crooked  or  condemned  oar  may  be  used  for  this  pur- 
pose.    When  properly  fitted  they  shall  be  becketed  under  the 
beach  cart,  the  flags  being  under  the  body  of  the  cart  to  protect 
them  from  the  weather. 

334.  The  torches  shall  be  secured  to  the  headboard  of  the 
beach  cart  by  the  fixtures  supplied  with  them.     The  pots  shall 
be  kept  half  filled  with  mineral  oil  and  the  boxes  in  the  handles 
kept  filled  with  matches.    The  torch  staffs  shall  be  becketed  on 
the  side  of  the  cart.     To  extinguish  the  torch  return  it  to  the 
pot,  letting  the  cover  attached  to  the  torch  fall  into  its  place  on 
the  pot.     The  extra  cover,  connected  with  a  chain,  is  to  cover 
the  pot  while  the  torch  is  burning  during  rain  or  snow., 

335.  When  the  two  torches  are  used  together,  as  directed  in 
paragraph   (e)   of  article  331,  they  shall  be  attached  to  their 
staffs  and,  if  possible,  stuck  in  the  ground  about  10  feet  apart 
in  line  with  the  beach. 

336.  One  red  and  one  white  lantern  (unlighted  until  required 
for  signaling)  shall  be  carried  on  the  cart,  one  on  each  side,  at- 
tached to  the  uprights.     If  a  boat  is  to  be  used  arid  the  beach 
cart  is  not  used,  the  necessary  flags  and  lights  to  make  the 
signals  directed  in  paragraphs  (a)  and  (c)  of  article  331  shall 
be  transferred  from  the  cart  to  the  boat  and  taken  to  the  beach 
to  be  used,  if  necessary. 

UNITED  STATES  STOHM  SIGNALS. 

341.  Storm    warnings    are    displayed    by    the    I  lulled    Stales 
Wrathor  Bureau  as  follows: 


84  INSTRUCTIONS  FOU  COAST  GITAUD  STATIONS. 

EXPLANATION  OF  SMALL-CRAFT,  STORM,  AND  HURRICANE 
WARNINGS. 

(1)  The  small-craft  learning. — A  red  pennant  indicates  that 
moderately    strong*   winds    that   will    interfere   with   the   safe 
operation  of   small  craft   are  expected.     No  nigh*--  display   of 
small-craft  warnings  is  made. 

(2)  The  northeast  storm  learning. — A  red  pennant  above  a 
square  red  flag  with  black  center  displayed  by  day,  or  two  red 
lanterns,  one  above  the  other,  displayed  by  night,  indicates  the 
approach  of  a  storm  of  marked  violence,  with  winds  beginning 
from  the  northeast. 

(3)  The  southeast  storm  warning. — A  red  pennant  below  a 
square  red  flag  with  black  center  displayed  by  day,  or  one  red 
lantern  displayed  by  night,  indicates  the  approach  of  a  storm  of 
marked  violence,  with  winds  beginning  from  the  southeast. 

(4)  The  southwest  storm  'learning. — A  white  pennant  below 
a  square  red  flag  with  black  center  displayed  by  day,  or  a  white 
lantern  below  a  red  -lantern  displayed  by  night,  indicates  the 
approach  of  a  storm  of  marked  violence,  with  winds  beginning 
from  the  southwest. 

(5)  The  northwest  storm  warning. — A  white  pennant  above 
a  square  red  flag  with  black  center  displayed  by  day,  or  a  white 
lantern  above  a  red  lantern  displayed  by  night,  indicates  the 
approach  of  a  storm  of  marked  violence,  with  winds  beginning 
from  the  northwest. 

(6)  Hurricane  or  whole  gale  warning. — Two  square  flags,  red 
with  black  centers,  one  above  the  other,  displayed  by  day,  or 
two  red  lanterns,  with  a  white  lantern  between,  displayed  by 
night,  indicate  the  approach  of  a  tropical  hurricane  or  of  one  of 
the  extremely  severe  and  dangerous  storms  which  occasionally 
occur. 

348.  Flags  and  pennants  shown  in  Plates  I  and  II  are  not 
used  by  Coast  Guard  stations.  They  are  inserted  for  g'eneral 
information. 

RESUSCITATION  DRILL. 

351.  Resuscitation  drill  shall  be  held  once  each  week  and 
shall  be  had  with  the  whole  crew  when  it  consists  of  an  oflirer 
and  six  men  or  less.  The  officer  is  not  required  to  take  the 
part  of  the  patient.  With  more  than  six  surf  men  present  for 
the  drill,  the  officer  shall  direct  the  drill  without  taking  part  in 
it.  Each  member  of  the  crew  shall  participate  in  the  drill  and 
be  proficient  in  it. 


DAY    SIGNAL^   H 


SMALL  CRAFT  ^    >,,    > 

.  '>  ,"*  **"*  ^ 


HURRICANE, 
NE.  STORM  SE.  STORM          SW.  STORM  NW.  STORM    OR  WHOLE  GALE. 


NIGHT  SIGNALS 


HURRICANE. 
NE.  STORM  SE.  STORM          SW.  STORM         NW.  STORM    OR  WHOLE  GALE. 


Ill 


I 


I 


I       I 


FLAG,  DOT  AND  DASH,  PENNANT  NUMERALS 

_^________ 3 *        9 -'  •»         H    *     >      ,     •>   I 


1 


8 


SPECIAL  FLAGS,  PENNANtS  ANDSIpjMS 


COURSE 
iPENNANT 


ANSWERING 
PENNANT 


TURN 
PENNANT 


FIRST 
REPEATER 


DEPLOY 
PENNANT 


SECOND 
REPEATER 


FORMATION 
PENNANT 


THIRD 
REPEATER 


SPEED 
PENNANT 


DECIMAL  AND 
ONE  HALF  SIGN1 


POSITION 
PENNANT 


TACK  LINE 
SIGN 


EMERGENCY 
PENNANT 


SIGNALS 
SIGN 


EXECUTIVE 
SIGN 


DESIGNATING 
PENNANT 


FULL  STOP 
SIGN 


SQUADRON 
FLAG 


FINALE 
SIGN 


DIVISION 
FLAG 


FINISH 
SIGN 


INTERNATIONAL 

"CODE  FLAG"  AND 
"ANSWERING  PENNANT" 


PLATE  III 


QUARANTINE 

(INTERNATIONAL  Q) 


SUBMARINE 
WARNING 


RED  CROSS 


PLATE  ',1V 


ALPHABETICAL  CODE  FLA^S  'A^D -fEflNASlV^  : 

.,','»...••        '  •      •      ' 


AFFIRMATIVE 


INTERROGATORY 


BOY 


FOX 


JIG 


CAST 


GEORGE 


)l         KING 


DOG 


HAVE 


LOVE 


MIKE 


ROGER 


WATCH 


NEGATIVE 


SAIL 


X-RAY 


OPTIONAL 


TARE 


YOKE 


PREPARATORY 


UNIT 


ZED 


QUACK 


VICE 


NOTE.-The  dot  and 
dash  equivalent  of  the 
international  flag  "I" 
when  used  as  a  signal 
flag  meaning  "Inter- 
rogatory" must  not  be 
confused  with  the 
Morse  equivalent  of 
"I"  (. .)  when  used  as 
a  letter. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  85 

352.  One  of  the  crew  shall  take  the  part  of  the  patient  and 
the  others  shall  take  position  astride  the  patient's  hips,  at  the 
arms,  holding  the  tongue,  rubbing  the  limbs,  applying  hot-water 
bottles,  etc.,  and  the  position  of  "  idle  man."     The  position  of 
"  idle  man,"  on  the  patient's  right,  when  he  is  lying  on  his  back, 
is  designed  to  provide  a  breathing  spell  for  the  man  astride  the 
hips  before  he  works  with  the  arms,  as  these  two  positions  are 
the  most  tiring  in  the  drill. 

353.  At  the  beginning  of  the  drill  the  officer  shall  be  the  first 
man  at  the  chest  movement,  except  when  he  directs  the  drill,  as 
prescribed  in  article  351 ;  No.  1,  the  "  idle  man  " ;  No.  2,  at  the 
arms;  No.  3,  at  the  tongue;  No.  4,  rubbing  the  left  leg;  and 
No.  5,  rubbing  the  right  leg.     After  about  two  minutes'  prac- 
tice each  man   shall  move  one  place  to  the  left,   facing  the 
patient,  and  continue  the  drill ;  thus  the  officer  will  move  into 
the  position  of  "  idle  man  " ;  No.  1  will  go  to  the  arms ;  No.  2, 
to  the  tongue;  No.  3,  to  the  left  leg;  No.  4,  to  the  right  leg; 
No.  5  will   take  position   astride   the  body.     After  a   further 
practice  of  about  two  minutes  each  man  shall,  at  the  order 
"  Shift,"  move  one  place  to  the  left,  as  before,  the  crew  continu- 
ing to  rotate  until  each  man  has  been  drilled  two  minutes  in 
cjicii  of  the  several  positions.    A  new  patient  should  be  selected 
at  intervals  of  9  or  10  minutes.     Care  must  be  taken  in  rotating 
that  the  count  is  not  interrupted  or  its  cadence  changed.     After 
the  crew  as  a  whole  has  been  exercised,  each  man  shall  perform 
the  resuscitation  of  a  patient  without  assistance,  according  to 
the  modification  of  Rule  III,  repeating  all  the  rules  necessary 
and  indicating  by  motions  the  several  steps  as  he  proceeds. 

354.  The  recitation  in  resuscitation  shall  embrace  the  rules, 
including  the  "  modification  of  Rule  III,"  "  Treatment  of  frost- 
bites," and  "  Saving  persons  from  drowning  by  swimming  to 
their  relief." 

355.  At  the  close  of  resuscitation  drill  the  officer  shall  open 
the  medicine  chest  and  question  each  man  on  the  uses  of  the 
remedies  contained  therein. 

DIRECTIONS  FOR  RESTORING  THE  APPARENTLY  DROWNED. 

361.  NOTE. — These  directions  differ  from  those  originally  is- 
sued to  the  service,  by  the  addition  of  means  for  securing 
deeper  inspiration.  The  method  originally  published,  known  as 
the  Howard  or  direct  method,  has  been  productive  of  excellent 
results  in  the  practice  of  the  service,  and  is  retained  here.  It 
is,  however,  here  arranged  for  practice  in  combination  with  the 


86 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOB  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS, 


Sylvester  method,  the  latter  producing  deeper  inspiration  than 
any  other  known  method,  while  the  former  effects  the  most 
complete  expiration.  The  combination  therefore  tends  to  pro- 
duce the  most  rapid  oxygenation  of  the  blood — the  real  object 
to  be  gained.  The  combination  is  prepared  primarily  for  the 
use  of  Coast  Guard  crews  where  assistants  are  at  hand.  A 
modification  of  Rule  III,  however,  is  published  as  a  guide  in 
cnses  where  no  assistants  are  at  hand  and  one  person  is  com- 
pelled to  act  alone.  In  preparing  these  directions  the  able  and 


FIG.   1. — Expelling  water  from  body. 

exhaustive  report  of  a  committee  of  the  Humane  Society  of  Mas- 
sachusetts, embraced  in  the  annual  report  of  the  society  for 
"•-96,   has  been   availed   of,  placing  the  Department  under 
many  obligations  for  its  valuable  suggestions. 

RULE  I.  AROUSE  THE  PATIENT. — Do  not  move  the  patient  un- 
less in  danger  of  freezing;  instantly  expose  the  face  to  the  air, 
toward  the  wind  if  there  be  any ;  wipe  dry  the  mouth  and  nos- 
trils ;  rip  the  clothing  so  as  to  expose  the  chest  and  waist ;  give 
two  or  three  quick,  smarting  slaps  on  the  chest  with  the  open 
hand;. 

1C  the  patient  does  not  revive,  proceed  immediately  MS  follows: 

Run-;   IT.  To  ExrEL  WATER  FROM  THE  STOMACH   AND  CHEST 

(see  Fig.  1). -—Separate  the  jaws  and  Ueep  them  apart  by  plac- 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


87 


ing  between  the  teeth  a  cork  or  small  bit  of  wood ;  turn  the 
patient  on  his  face,  a  large  bundle  of  tightly  rolled  clothing  be- 
ing placed  beneath  the  stomach ;  press  heavily  on  the  back  over 
it  for  half  a  minute,  or  as  long  as  fluids  flow  freely  from  the 
mouth. 

RULE  III.  To  PRODUCE  BREATHING  (see  figs.  2  and  3). — Clear 
the  mouth  and  throat  of  mucus  by  introducing  into  the  throat 


FIG. 


Movements  to  produce  inspiration. 


the  corner  of  a  handkerchief  wrapped  closely  around  th( 
forefinger ;  turn  the  pat  lent  on  the  back,  the  roll  of  clothing 
being  so  placed  as  to  raise  the  pit  of  the  stomach  above  the  level 
of  the  rest  of  the  body.  Let  an  assistant  with  a  handker- 
chief or  piece  of  dry  cloth  draw  the  tip  of  the  tongue  out  oi 
one  corner  of  the  mouth  (which  prevents  the  tongue  fron 
falling  back  and  choking  the  entrance  to  the  windpipe),  and 
keep  it  projecting  a  little  beyond  the  lips.  Let  another  assistant 
grasp  the  arms  just  below  the  elbows  and  draw  them  steadily 
upward  by  the  sides  of  the  patient's  head  to  the  ground,  th< 
hands  nearly  meeting  (which  enlarges  the  capacity  of  the  chest 
and  induces  inspiration).  (Fig.  2.)  While  this  is  being  done  let 
a  third  assistant  take  position  astride  the  patient's  hips  with  hi-.' 


88 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


elbows  resting  upon  his  own  knees,  his  hands  extended  ready 
for  action.  Next,  let  the  assistant  standing  at  the  head  turn 
down  the  patient's  arms  to  the  sides  of  the  body,  the  assistant, 
holding  the  tongue  changing  hands  if  necessary 2  to  let  the  arms 
pass.  Just  before  the  patient's  hands  reach  the  ground,  ":he  man 
astride  the  body  will  grasp  the  body  with  his  hands,  the  balls 


FIG.   3. — Movements  to  produce  expiration. 


of  the  thumbs  resting  on  either  side  of  the  pit  of  the  stomach, 
the  fingers  falling  into  the  grooves  between  the  short  ribs.  Now, 
using  his  knees  as  a  pivot,  he  will  at  the  moment  the  patient's 
hands  touch  the  ground  throw  (not  too  suddenly)  all  his 
weight  forward  on  his  hands,  and  at  the  same  time  squeeze  the 
waist  between  them  as  if  he  wished  to  force  anything  in  the 
chest  upward-  out  of  the  mouth ;  he  will  deepen  the  pressure 
while  he  slowly  counts  1,  2,  3,  4  (a  period  of  2  to  2£  seconds), 
then  suddenly  let  go  with  a  final  push,  which  will  spring  him 
back  to  his  first  position.11  This  completes  expiration.  (Fig.  3.) 

2  Changing  bands  will  be  found  unnecessary  after  some  practice ;  tbe 
tongue,  however,  must  not  be  released. 

8  A  child  or  yery  fleUcate  patient  must,  of  course,  be  more,  gently 
handled, 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  89 

At  the  instant  of  his  letting  go,  the  man  at  the  patient's  head 
will  again  draw  the  arms  steadily  upward  to  the  sides  of  the 
patient's  head  as  before  (the  assistant  holding  the  tongue 
again  changing  hands  to  let  the  arms  pass  if  necessary),  hold- 
ing them  there  while  he  slowly  counts  1,  2,  3,  4  (a  period  of  2 
to  21  seconds).  This  completes  inspiration. 

Repeat  these  movements  deliberately  and  perseveringly 
twelve  to  fifteen  times  in  every  minute — thus  imitating  the 
natural  motions  of  breathing. 

If  natural  breathing  be  not  restored  after  a  trial  of  the  bel- 
lows movement  for  the  space  of  about  four  minutes,  then  turn 
the  patient  a  second  time  on  the  stomach,  as  directed  in  Rule  II, 
rolling  the  body  in  the  opposite  direction  from  that  in  which  it 
was  first  turned,  for  the  purpose  of  freeing  the  air  passage  from 
any  remaining  water.  Continue  the  artificial  respiration  from 
one  to  four  hours,  or  until  the  patient  breathes,  and  for  a  while 
after  the  appearance  of  returning  life,  carefully  aid  the  first 
short  gasps  until  deepened  into  full  breaths.4  Continue  the 
'drying  and  rubbing,  which  should  have  been  unceasingly  prac- 
ticed from  the  beginning  by  assistants,  taking  care  not  to  inter- 
fere with  the  means  employed  to  produce  breathing.  Thus  the 
limbs  of  the  patient  should  be  rubbed,  always  in  an  upward 
direction  toward  the  body,  with  firm-grasping  pressure  and 
energy,  using  the  bare  hands,  dry  flannels  or  handkerchiefs, 
and  continuing  the  friction  under  the  blankets  or  over  the  dry 
clothing.  The  warmth  of  the  body  can  also  be  promoted  by  the 
application  of  hot  flannels  to  the  stomach  and  armpits,  bottles 
or  bladders  of  hot  water,  heated  bricks,  etc.,  to  the  limbs  and 
soles  of  the  feet. 

RULE  IV.  AFTER  TREATMENT. — Externally:  As  soon  as  breath- 
ing is  established  let  the  patient  be  stripped  of  all  wet  clothing, 
wrapped  in  blankets  only,  put  to  bed  comfortably  warm,  but 
with  a  free  circulation  of  fresh  air,  and  left  to  perfect  rest. 
Internally:  Give  aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia  in  doses  of  a  tea- 
spoonful  to  a  tablespoonful,  according  to  the  weight  of  the 
patient,  or  hot  tea  or  coffee,  every  10  or  15  minutes  for  the 
first  hour,  and  as  often  thereafter  as  may  seem  expedient. 
Later  manifestations:  After  reaction  is  fully  established  there 
is  great  danger  of  congestion  of  the  lungs,  and  if  perfect  rest  is 

4  By  continuing  the  artificial  respiration,  carefully  timing  the  move- 
ments to  conform  with  the  patient's  labored  breathing. 


90 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


not  maintained  for  at  least  48  hours  it  sometimes  occurs  that 
the  patient  is  seized  witli  great  difficulty  of  breathing,  and  death 
is  liable  to  follow  unless  immediate  relief  is  afforded.  In  such 
cases  apply  a  large  mustard  plaster  over  the  breast.  If  the 
patient  gasps  for  breath  before  the  mustard  takes  effect,  assist 
the  breathing  by  carefully  repeating  the  artificial  respiration. 


FIG.  4. — Movements  by  one  person  to  produce  inspiration. 

MODIFICATION  or  RULE  III. 
I  To   be  used  after  Rules   1  and   II   in   ease  no  assistance  is  at  hand.] 

To  PRODUCE  RESPIRATION. — If  no  assistance  is  at  hand  and 
OHO  person  must  work  alone,  turn  the  patient  on  the  back,  the 
roll  of  clothing  being  so  placed  as  to  raise  the  pit  of  the  stomach 
above  the  level  of  the  rest  of  the  body ;  draw  forward  the 
tongue  and  keep  it  projecting  just  beyond  the  lips ;  if  the  lower 
jaw  be  lifted  the  teeth  may  be  made  to  hold  the  tongue  in 
place;  it  may  be  necessary  to  retain  the  tongue  by  passing  a 
handkerchief  under  the  chin  and  tying  it  over  the  head. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


91 


Take  position  astride  the  patient's  hips,  as  in  figure  5. 
Grasp  the  arms  just  below  the  elbows  and  raise  "them  steadily 
upward  by  the  sides  of  the  patient's  head  to  the  ground,  the 
hands  nearly  meeting,  holding  them  there  wh.ile  slowly  count- 
ing 1,  2,  3,  4  (a  period  of  2  to  2£  seconds).  This  enlarges  the 
capacity  of  the  chest  and  induces  inspiration.  (Fig.  4.) 


FIG.  5. — Movements  by  one  person  to  produce  expiration. 


Next;  lower  the  arms  to  the  sides  and  .lust  before  they  reach 
the  ground  drop  them  and  instantly  grasp  the  body  with  the 
hands,  the  halls  of  the  thumbs  resting  on  either  side  of  the  pit 
of  the  stomach,  the  lingers  falling  into  the  grooves  between  the 
short  ribs ;  now,  using  his  knees  as  a  pivot,  the  operator  will 
throw  (not  too  suddenly)  all  his  weight  forward  on  his  hands, 
and  at  the  same  time  squeeze  the  waist  betwreen  them  as  if  he 
wished  to  force  anything  in  the  chest  upward  out  of  the  mouth ; 
he  will  deepen  the  pressure  while  he  slowly  counts  1,  2,  3,  4 
(a  period  of  2  to  2£  seconds),  then  suddenly  let  go  with  a  final 
push,  which  will  spring  him  back  to  his  first  position  as  in 
Rule  III.  This  completes  expiration.  (Fig.  f>.) 

• 


92  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

At  the  instant  of  letting  go,  grasp  the  arms  just  below  the 
elbows  and  raise  them  steadily  upward  by  the  sides  of  the 
patient's  head  to  the  ground,  holding  them  there  while  slowly 
counting  1,  2,  3,  4  (a  period  of  2  to  2£  seconds).  This  completes 
inspiration.  (Pig.  4.) 

Repeat  these  movements  12  to  15  times  in  every  minute — thus 
imitating  the  natural  motions  of  breathing. 

INSTRUCTIONS   FOE   SAVING   DROWNING  PERSONS  BY   SWIMMING 
TO  THEIR  RELIEF. 

:  362.  (1)  Before  jumping  in  to  save  a  drowning  person,  divest 
yourself  as  far  and  as  quickly  as  possible  of  all  clothing,  tear- 
ing it  off  if  necessary.  If  there  is  not  time  to  remove  all  your 
clothing,  at  least  loosen  the  feet  of  your  drawers,  if  tied,  so  they 
will  not  fill  with  water  and  drag  you  down. 

(2)  On  approaching  a  drowning  person  assure  him  in  a  loud, 
firm  voice  that  he  is  safe.    Do  not  get  close  enough  for  him  to 
take  hold  of  you  if  he  is  struggling,  for  that  would  be  sheer 
madness  and  you  would  be  running  too  great  a  risk,  but  keep 
off  for  a  few  seconds  until  he  gets  quiet.    Then  take  fast  hold 
of  the  hair  of  his  head,  turn  him  as  quickly  as  possible  on  his 
back,  give  him  a  sudden  pull  which  will  cause  him  to  float, 
and  then  throw  yourself  on  your  back,  with  his  back  to  your 
stomach.    In  this  way  you  will  get  him  ashore  sooner  and  safer 
than  by  any  other  unaided  method.    It  is  of  primary  importance 
that  you  take  fast  hold  of  his  hair  and  that  you  throw  yourself 
and  him  on  your  backs.    The  great  advantage  of  this  method  is 
that  it  enables  you  to  keep  your  own  head  up  and  his  also,  and 
that  you  can  float  nearly  as  long  as  you  please,  or  until  a  boat 
or  other  help  reaches  you.    A  good  swimmer  can  easily  carry  in 
this  manner  two  or  three  persons.    As  an  experiment  four  per- 
sons have  been  carried  a  distance  of  40  or  50  yards  at  sea. 

(3)  It  is  believed  that  there  is  no  such  thing  as  a  death 
grasp.    As  soon  as  a  drowning  person  begins  to  get  feeble  and 
to  lose  consciousness  he  gradually  slackens  his  hold  until  he 
lets  go  altogether.     No   apprehension  need,   therefore,  be  felt 
on  that  account  in   attempting  to  rescue  a   drowning  person. 
There  is,  however,  great  danger  in  permitting  a  drowning  per- 
son to  seize  hold  of  you,  and  unless  his  grasp  can  be  broken 
both  his  life  and  yours  are  endangered.    To  break  his  grasp  it 
may  be  necessary  to  stop  his  breathing  by  putting  his  head 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  93 

under  water,  by  pinching  his  nose  and  closing  his  mouth  with 
your  hand,  or  by  striking  him  with  your  knee  in  the  pit  of  the 
stomach.  Some  of  these  means  seem  brutal,  and  they  are  justi- 
fied only  when  necessary  to  save  life/ 

(4)  If  in  the  sea,  it  is  sometimes  a  great  mistake  to  try  to 
swim  ashore.    If  there  is  a  strong  outgoing  tide  and  you  are  by 
yourself  or  have  hold  of  a  person  who  can  not  swim,  get  on  your 
back  and  float  until  help  comes.    Many  a  person  exhausts  him- 
self and  sinks  in  the  effort  to  reach  the  shore  against  an  out- 
going tide,  when  if  he  had  floated  a  boat  or  other  aid  might 
have  come  to  his  assistance. 

(5)  After  a  person  has  sunk  to.  the  bottom  the  position  of 
the  body  may  be  disclosed,  if  the  water  be  smooth,  by  the  air 
bubbles  which  rise  occasionally  to  the  surface.    If  in  a  tideway 
or  stream,  allowance  should  be  made  for  the  action  of  the  cur- 
rent in  carrying  the  bubbles   out   of  the  perpendicular  while 
rising  to  the  surface.    Oftentimes  a  body  may  be  recovered  from 
the  bottom  before  it  is  too  late  for  resuscitation  by  diving  for 
it  in  the  direction  indicated  by  the  bubbles. 

(6)  On  rescuing  a  person  by  diving  to  the  bottom  the  hair  of 
the  head  should  be  seized  by  one  hand  only  and  the  other  hand 
used  in  conjunction  with  the  feet  in  raising  yourself  and  the 
drowning  person  to  the  surface. 

(7)  These  instructions  apply  alike  to  all  circumstances  as 
regards  rough  sea  or  smooth  Water. 

EFFECTS  OF  COLD — FEOSTBITE. 

365.  (1)  Symptoms. — The  local  effects  of  cold,  according  to 
their  severity,  usually  are  divided  into  three  degrees. 

a.  In  the  FIRST  DECEEE  the  part  is  painful  and  the  skin  is 
of  a  dark-red  hue.     This  condition  is  known  as  chilblain  and 
occurs  chiefly  when  children  or  poorly  nourished  persons  are  ex- 
posed to  cold. 

b.  In  the  SPJCOND  DEGREE  the  skin  is  of  a  bright  red  or  livid 
hue,  and  blisters  form  on  its  surface. 

c.  In  the  THIRD  DEGREE  the  part  is  pale,   stiff,   and  brittle. 
Severe  cold  causes  constriction  of  the  blood  vessels,  and  if  the 
blood  is  completely  cut  off  for  a  considerable  time  death  of  the 
tissue  results. 

(2)  a.  If  heat  is  applied,  to  a  part  that  has  been  slightly 
frostbitten  (FIRST  DEGREE),  a  sensation  of  itching  and  tingling 
is  experienced. 


94  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

b.  In  frostbites  of  the  SECOND  DEGREE  heat  causes  pain  and 
swelling;  the  skin  may  peel  off  and  leave  a  raw  surface. 

c.  In  the  THIRD  DECREE,  if  the  part  is  dead,  no  reaction  takes 
place  upon  the  application  of  heat ;  the  dead  portion  turns  black, 
and  a  line  of  demarcation  appears  between  it  and  th*  living 
tissue.     If  the  heat  is  applied  suddenly  to  a  badly  frozen  part 
of  the  body,  the  liability  to  gangrene  (death  of  the  tissue)  is 
increased  on  account  of  the  intense  reaction  that  takes  place 
in  the  tissue  that  is  still  living. 

(3)  When  the  whole  body  is  exposed  to  severe  cold,  the  indi- 
vidual becomes  benumbed,  exertion  is  difficult,  and  drowsiness 
which  can  not  he  resisted  overtakes  him ;  the  eyesight  fails,  he 
totters  as  he  walks,  and  then  falls  and  becomes  unconscious. 

(4)  Prevention. — All  parts  of  the  body  should  be  kept  as  dry 
as  possible,  as  dampness  increases  the  tendency  to  frostbite.    The 
shoes  should  be  large.     In  extreme  weather,  in  case  of  exposure, 
it  is  well  to  wear  two  pairs  of  stockings,  a  woolen  pair  over  a 
cotton  pair.     The  ears  and  the  face,  except  the  eyes,  nose,  and 
mouth,  should  be  well  covered,  especially  if  snow  is  falling  or  a 
brisk  wind  is  blowing.     Fur-lined  gloves  are  warmer  than  woolen 
ones.     Special  care  should  be  taken  of  the  feet;  they  should  be 
washed  each  day,  and  a  small  quantity  of  oil  should  be  rubbed 
into  them.     A  large  quantity  of  oil  is  harmful,  and  only  such 
quantity  should  be  used  as  can  be  well  rubbed  in,  leaving  a  dry 
surface  when  the  rubbing  is  completed.     Clean  stockings  should 
be  put  on  each  day.     Wet  stockings  should  be  changed  for  dry 
ones  whenever  practicable.     The  feet  are  less  likely  to  become 
frostbitten  if  a  person  keeps  moving.     If  he  has  to  stand  in 
one  place,  shoe  strings  should  be  loosened. 

(5)  Treatment. — If  a  physician  is  present,  his  instructions 
should  be  followed.     If  no  physician  is  present,  proceed  as  fol- 
lows: 

a.  If  the  frostbite  is  of  the  FIRST  DEGREE — that  is,  if  the  tissue 
is  only  slightly  frostbitten — the  part  should  be  rubbed  gently 
arid  cloths  wrung  out  of  cold  water  applied.     Snow  may  be 
rubbed  on  the  affected  part,  but  it  is  not  as  efficient  as  cold 
cloths.     The  rubbing  and  the  applications  should  alternate,  rub- 
bing a  few  minutes  and  then  applying  cloths  for  a  few  minutes. 
The  temperature  of  the  water  in  which  the  cloths  are  soaked 
should  be  raised  gradually  until  it  is  lukewarm. 

b.  In  frostbites  of  the  SECOND  DEGREE — that  is,  where  the  skin 
is  of  a  livid  hue  and  blisters  have  formed — rubbing  should  not 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  95 

be  resorted  to,  as  there  is  danger  of  increasing  the  ill  effects. 
Cold  cloths  should  be  applied,  but  the  cold  treatment  must  not 
be  kept  up  too  long,  as  cold  prolongs  the  cause  of  the  injury. 
The  temperature  of  the  water  should  be  raised  gradually  a  de- 
gree or  two  every  few  minutes,  using  fresh  cloths  each  time 
the  temperature  of  the  water  is  changed.  It  should  be  remem- 
bered that  reaction  takes  place  naturally  as  soon  as  the  person 
is  taken  indoors  out  of  the  cold,  even  if  he  be  treated  in  a  cold 
room,  and  the  object  of  treatment  is  to  prevent  this  reaction 
from  taking  place  too  rapidly  and  at  the  same  time  not  to  retard 
unduly  the  restoration  of  vitality. 

c.  In  frostbites  of  the  THIRD  DEGREE,  the  same  method  should 
be  followed  in  order  to  bring  about  a  reaction  as  in  those  of  the 
SECOND  DEGREE  ;  reaction,  however,  will  not  happen  in  a  part  that 
is  dead,  but  the  adjacent  living  tissue  will  react,   and  a  red 
line  will  form  between  it  and  the  dead  portion. 

d.  In  some  cases  reaction  has  already  taken  place  when  the 
person  is  first  seen.     In  these  cases  the  above-described  treat- 
ment is  unnecessary.     After  reaction  has  occurred  the  patient 
should  be  nioved  into  a  warm  room  and  an  ointment  composed 
of  vaseline  1  ounce,  camphor  6  grains,  should  be  applied.     The 
part    should    then    be    surrounded    with    absorbent    cotton,    or 
wrapped  in  flannel  cloths.     Boracic  acid  ointment  may  be  used 
instead  of  the  vaseline  and  camphor.     Blisters  that  form  should 
be  pricked  with  a  needle  and  the  water  allowed  to  flow  out,  but 
the  covering  of  the  blisters  should  not  be  removed. 

e.  If  gangrene  occurs,  cloths  wet  with  alcohol  placed  ovei 
the  part  will  prevent  infection  and  hasten  the  separation  of  the 
dead  part  from  the  living  tissue. 

f.  A  person  suffering  from  exposure  to  a  low  temperature, 
or  from  submersion  in  cold  water,  should  be  placed  in  a  cold 
room  and  artificial  respiration,  as  practiced  by  the  Coast  Guard 
in  the  case  of  apparently  drowned  persons,  should  be  performed. 
The  extremities  should  be  rubbed  with  a  solution  composed  of 
equal  parts  of  alcohol  and  water. 

g.  When  the  patient  begins  to  react,  the  temperature  of  the 
room  should  be  raised  slowly  and  the  patient  given  hot  drinks, 
such  as  coffee,  tea,  or  chocolate.     If  the  patient  is  unable  to 
swallow,  a  pint  of  hot  coffee  or  tea  should  be  injected  into  the 
rectum.     Efforts  to  restore  animation  should  be  continued  for 
an  hour  or  two. 


96  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

BEACH-APPARATUS  DRILL. 

371.  Beach-apparatus  drill  shall  be  so  far  as  practicable  pre- 
cisely the  same  as  at  a  wreck,  using  the  apparatus  on  the  beach 
cart.     The  drill  shall  consist  in  the  mustering  of  the  c:ew,  the 
recital  by  each  member  of  his  particular  duties,  the  rigging  of 
the  gear  over  a  distance  of  approximately  75  yards  from  the 
sand  anchor  to  the  wreck  pole,  and  the  carrying  out  of  the  drill 
as  prescribed.     If  practicable,  the  range  from  the  gun  to  the 
wreck  pole  should  be  across  water.     Powder  must  be  used  in 
every  case  unless  the  supply  on  hand  is  reduced  to  3  pounds, 
in  which  case  the  district  superintendent  shall  be  notified.    The 
use  of  small  practice  gear  is  forbidden.     A  short  whip  and  haw- 
ser of  regulation  size  will  be  allowed,  but  in  every  other  respect 
the  gear  shall  be  of  service  size  and  kind.     When  a  practice  shot 
line  is  used,  it  shall  be  removed  from  the  pins  and  fired  from 
the  box  precisely  as  in  actual  service.     Once  each  quarter  the 
regulation  gear  on  the  service  beach  cart  shall  be  used.     The 
sand  anchor  shall  be  securely  buried  at  every  drill  and  a  man 
landed  in  the  buoy.     A  post  or  ready-buried  anchor  shall  not  be 
used  except  where  absolutely  unavoidable. 

372.  Beach-apparatus  drill  shall  be  held  twice  each  week  dur- 
ing the  first  month  after  a  station  is  placed  in  commission,  and 
once  each  week  thereafter. 

373.  Practice  with  the  life  car  shall  be  substituted  for  that 
with  the  breeches  buoy  at  least  twice  each  year.     The  car  must 
be  examined  for  leaks  after  each  practice. 

374.  The  hawser  cutter  shall  be  bent  on  ready  for  hauling  off 
once  each  month,  but  the  hawser  shall  not  be  cut.     The  officer 
in  charge  shall,  when  advisable,   demonstrate   the  use  of  the 
hawser  cutter  by  bending  it  on  to  a  condemned  line  or  hawser 
and  cutting  it. 

375.  The  No.  1  and  No.  2  surf  men  shall  on  alternate  months 
conduct  the  drill  once,  taking  the  place  of  the  officer  in  charge, 
the  officer  in   charge  falling  out.     When   No.   1   conducts  the 
drill,  he  performs  his  own  duties  and  those  of  the  officer  in 
charge,  assisted  by  No.  2;  No.  2  performs  his  regular  duties  and 
assists  No.  1.     When  No.  2  conducts  the  drill,  he  performs  the 
duties  of  the  officer  in  charge  and  of  No.  1,  assisted  by  No.  1  ; 
No.  1  performs  the  regular  duties  of  No.  2  and  assists  No.  2. 
At  such  drills  each  of  the  other  men  will  perform  his  regular 
duties. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  97 

376.  At  each  drill  the  person  in  charge  shall  note  the  time 
elapsing  from  the  moment  the  command  Action  is  given  until 
the  man  is  landed  at  the  crotch.    This  time,  and  the  distance 
of  the  sand  anchor  from  the  pole,  shall  be  noted  in  the  log. 

Words  of  command : 

Open  boat-room  doors — Man  the  beach  cart. 

Forward. 

Halt. 

Action. 

Man  lee  whip,  haul  off. 

Man  weather  whip,  haul  ashore. 

377.  (1)   Open  boat-room  doors — Man  the  beach  cart. — Nos. 
5  and  6  open  and  secure  the  boat-room  doors.     If  necessary  to 
run  the  boat  out,  Nos.  1  and  2  ship  the  pole  or  shafts  of  the 
boat  wagon;  No.  1  holding  the  pole,  No.  2  inserting  the  bolt. 
The  crew  run  out  the  boat,  No,  1  and  No.  2  guiding  the  pole. 
The  men  then  take  their  stations  at  the  beach  cart,  face  to  the 
front  with  the  drag  ropes  over  their  shoulders,  as  shown  in 
fig.  1. 

(2)  The  officer  in  charge  before  giving  the  command,  For- 
ward I  will  muster  the  crew,  and  each  man  upon  his  number  be- 
ing called  will  make  the  hand  salute  and  recite  his  duties  as 
given  below. 

Officer  in  charge. — Has  general  supervision;  selects  place  to 
bury  sand  anchor  and  position  for  gun;  places  firing  plank,  if 
one  is  used ; 6  places  gun  in  position ;  provides  cartridge,  primer, 
and  lanyard;  loads  and  sights  gun  and  determines  elevation 
with  the  level ;  pricks  cartridge,  primes,  and  fires  gun ;  signals 
the  wreck  to  haul  off  whip ;  lights  hawser  to  the  surf ;  hitches 
whip  around  neck  of  buoy  block  and  bends  buoy  bridle  to  whip ; 
raises  center  of  crotch. 

(3)  No.  1. — Assist  officer  in  charge  to  place  gun  in  position; 
provide  shot  and  hold  for  No.  2  to  bend  shot  line  to,  then  insert 
shot  in  bore;  train  gun ; 5  bend  shot  line  around  whip ;  attend 
left  part  of  whip ;  if  on  lee  side,  bend  whip  to  hawser ;  hold 
breeches  buoy  block  while  officer  in  charge  bends  on  whip,  and 
then  snap  block  on  hawser ;  man  fall  and  left  leg  of  crotch. 

(4)  A7o.  2. — Place  shot-line  box  in  position;  bend  shot  line 
into  shot;  train  gun ; 5  take  a  half -hitch  with  shot  line  over  tail 

5  If  firing  plank  is  used,  the  officer  in  charge  will  train  gun. 
34079 — 21 7 


98  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

of  whip  block;  attend  right  part  of  whip;  if  on  lee  side,  bend 
whip  to  hawser,  hold  breeches-buoy  block  while  the  officer  in 
charge  bends  on  whip,  then  snap  block  on  hawser ;  man  fall 
and  right  leg  of  crotch. 

(5)  No.  3. — Place  shot-line  box  in  position;  stretch  tackle 
(outer  block)  ;  haul  whip  from-  reel  while  it  is  being  hauled  off 
to  the  wreck ;  and  if  on  lee  side  do  the  same  while  hawser  is 


FIG.  1. — Man  the  beach  cart. 

being  hauled  off ;  haul  in  slack  of  hawser ;  bend  strap  or  chain 
tail  for  outer  block  of  tackle ;  man  fall  and  left  leg  of  crotch ; 
am  shifting  man  on  whip. 

(6)  .No.  4. — Unload  buoy  from  cart;  place  crotch,  hawser,  and 
buoy  in  position ;  stretch  tackle  and  hook  inner  block  into  sand- 
anchor  pennant;  haul  whip  from  reel  while  it  is  being  hauled 
off  to  the  wreck,  and  if  on  lee  side  do  the  same  while  hawser  is 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


99 


being  hauled  off;  haul  in  slack  of  hawser;  hook  outer  block  of 
tackle ;  man  fall  and  right  leg  of  crotch ;  am  shifting  man  on 
whip. 

(7)  No.  5. — Open  and  secure  boat-room  doors;  unload  sand 
anchor,  shovels,  and  pick,  and  bury  sand  anchor;  man  weather 
part  of  whip  when  hauling  off  hawser ;  haul  in  slack  of  hawser, 


FIG.  2. — Holding  back. 

hook  inner  block  if  pennant  block  is  used;   man  and  belay 
fall ;  am  shifting  man  on  whip. 

(8)  No.  6. — Open  and  secure  boat-room  doors;  unload  sand 
anchor,  shovels,  and  pick,  and  bury  sand  anchor;  man  weather 
part  of  whip  when  hauling  off  hawser ;  haul  in  slack  of  hawser ; 
snatch  hawser,  and  make  cat's-paw  if  pennant  block  is  used; 
man  fall  and  center  of  crotch ;  am  shifting  man  on  whip. 


100          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

(D)  No.  7. — In  drill  go  to  wreck  pole;  in  service  unload 
shovels  and  pick,  and  assist  to  bury  sand  anchor ;  man  weather 
part  of  whip  when  hauling  off  hawser ;  haul  in  slack  of  hawser ; 
man  fall  and  center  of  crotch ;  am  shifting  man  on  whip. 

(10)  If  the  crew  consists  of  an  officer  and  eight  men,  No.  8, 
at  drill,  will  go  to  the  wreck  pole  instead  of  No.  7 ;  in  service 
his  duties  will  be  the  same  as  those  of  No.  7. 

378.  Forward. — The  beach  cart  will  be  hauled  from  the  sta- 
tion to  the  wreck.    When  going  down  the  skids  or  any  steep 
declivity  Nos.  1  and  2  will  guide  the  cart,  while  Nos.  3,  4,  5,  and 
6  hold  back  on  the  drag  ropes.     (See  fig.  2.) 

379.  Halt.— The  officer  in  charge  will  direct  the  cart  to  be 
placed  between  the  surf  and  the  spot  he  selects  for  the  sand 
anchor  and  a  few  yards  to  windward  (current),  the  cart  facing 
the  surf.     (See  fig.  3.) 

380.  (1)  Action. — The  relative  positions  assumed  by  the  men 
for  the  purpose  of  placing  the  apparatus  are  shown  by  fig.  4. 
The  current  is  supposed  to  be  running  from  the  right,  as  shown 
by  the  arrow. 

(2)  Officer  in  charge  puts  on  his  haversack;  No.  4  throws 
buoy  off  che  cart ;  Nos.  5,  6,  and  7  unload  the  shovels,  pick,  and 
sand  anchor,   and  proceed   at  once  to  bury  the   sand  anchor 
where  directed  by  the  officer  in  charge.    The  sand  anchor  must 
be  opened,  its  sides  at  right  angles  to  each  other,  and  buried 
upon  its  flat  in  a  narrow  trench  of  sufficient  depth,  say  2  feet, 
and  the  trench  then  filled  in  solidly  about  it.     Nos.  2  and  3 
remove   the  shot-line  box.     The  Officer   in   charge   and  No.   1 
remove  the  gun,  and  place  it  in  position  four  or  five  paces  to 
windward  of  the  cart;  Nos.  2  and  3  place  the  shot-line  box, 
inverted,  on  a  line  with  the  muzzle  of  the  gun,  and  3  feet  to 
windward  (wind),  unless  the  wind  is  directly  on  shore,  when 
they  will  place  it  to  the  right,  and,  after  lifting  the  pins  clear 
of  the  line,  will  cant  the  box  in  the  direction  of  the  wreck. 

(3)  If  through  carelessness  the  shot  line  has  been  faked  too 
tightly  upon  the  pins,  it  should  not  be  forced  off  the  pins  by 
the  bottom  board,  which  is  liable  to  split,  but  the  frame  should 
be  raised  and  a  few  of  the  bottom  fakes  removed  with  the  hand 
when  the  remainder  will  fall  off  into  its  place  in  the  box. 

(4)  Officer  in  charge  loads  with  cartridges,  No.  1  provides  the 
shot,  wipes  and  holds  it  while  No.  2  wets  a  fathom  of  the  shot 
line  and  bends  it  into  the  shank  with  three  half  hitches.     No.  1 
then  inserts  the  shot  into  the  bore  from  side  of  gun,  forcing  it 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


101 


gently  but  firmly  down  upon  the  C'hJii^e  jy^bout  disturbing  the 
fakes  and  without  any  slack  line  ociuc<.n  flic  (tun  and'the  shot- 
line  box.  >  %  '  •'  Y 


>        ~^L- — -     ~^'-    "^      "      ~~— >        "      *'•>>. 


t}  for  Sand  Anchor. 


FIG.  3. — Halt. 


(5)  Nos.  1  and  2  take  position  on  their  knees  on  the  left  and 
right  side  of  the  gun,  respectively,  and  train  the  muzzle  to  the 
right  or  left  by  the  rear  handles,  as  directed  by  the  officer  in 
charge,  who  pricks  the  cartridge,  leaving  the  priming  wire  in 
the  vent,  steps  2  or  3  yards  to  the  rear,  sights  over  the  gun,  and 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.         103 

commands  "  Right,"  "  Left,"  or  "  Well,"  as  required,  giving  his 
orders  in  a  sharp,  distinct  tone. 

(6)  The  lateral  training  obtained,  due  allowance  being  made 
for  the  wind,  the  officer  in  charge  gives  the  gun  the  necessary 
elevation  with  the  combination  level,  withdraws  the  priming 
wire,  inserts  the  primer,  bending  the  loop  at  a  right  angle  to  the 
tube,  hooks  the  lanyard  into  the  loop,  stands  off  on  the  weather 
side,  gives  the  cautionary  word  "  Ready,"  and  fires. 

(7)  When  firing  the  gun,  the  officer  in  charge  reeves  the  lan- 
yard through  the  rear  handle  of  the  carriage  and  gives  a  sharp, 


FIG.  5. — Manner  in  which  shot  line  is  bent  to  whip  and  tail. 

strong  pull  in  a  direction  below  the  level  of  the  vent,  to  avoid 
disturbing  the  elevation. 

(8)  In  the  meanwhile  No.  4  unloads  and  carries  the  crotch 
to  a  point  on  a  line  between  the  sand  anchor  and  wreck,  at  a 
suitable  distance  from  the  water,  on  the  bluff  of  the  bank,  if 
possible,  and  opens  it  wide,  span  on  the  left,  the  legs  forming 
a  straight  line  parallel  with  the  beach,  and  then  carries  the 
breeches  buoy  and  end  of  hawser  to  a  point  in  front  of  the 
crotch,  and  as  near  the  water  as  possible.  If  the  wooden  buoy 
block  is  used,  he  reeves  the  end  of  the  hawser  through  it  and 
attaches  the  tally  board. 


104         INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

(9)  Nos.  3  and  4  stretch  the  tackle  from  the  sand  anchor 
toward  the  crotch  (3  at  outer  block,  4  at  inner  or  white  block), 
remove  the  straps,  leaving  it  clear  and  ready  to  be  placed  upon 
the  hawser. 

(10)  If  a  threefold  tackle  is  used,  No.   4  hooks   the  inner 
(white)  block  into  the  sand-anchor  pennant. 

(11)  Communication    being   made    with    the    wreck,    No.    1 
takes  a  round  turn  and  two  half  hitches  with  the  shot  line 
around  both  parts  of  the  whip  immediately  behind  the  block, 
while  2  makes  a  half  hitch  over  the  end  of  the  tail  of  whip 
block  with  the  bight  of  the  shot  line.    ( See  fig.  5. ) 

Fig.  6  shows  the  position  of  the  men  and  apparatus  at  this 
.stage. 

(12)  The  officer  in  charge  makes  a  signal  to  the  wreck  to  haul 
on  board ;  No.  1  tends  to  the  left  and  No.  2  the  right  part  of  the 
whip,  separating  them  a  distance  of  50  or  more  yards;  Nos.  3 
and  4  haul  the  whip  from  the  reel  as  fast  as  it  is  needed,  No.  3 
standing  on  the  left,  No.  4  on  the  right.     (See  fig.  7.) 

(13)  When  the  tail  block  has  been  made  fast  on  board  the 
wreck,  the  lee  man  (No.  1  or  No.  2)  bends  the  bight  of  the  lee 
part  of  the  whip  to  the  hawser  just  inside  the  tally  board,  with 
a  round  turn  around  the  hawser  and  a  half  hitch  around  the 
standing  part  of  the  whip,  the   end  of  the  hawser  hanging 
loose.    Fig.  8  shows  the  method  of  bending  the  lee  part  of  the 
whip  to  the  hawser. 

(14)  The  men  man  the  weather  part  of  the  whip,  excepting 
the  lee  man   (No.  1  or  No.  2),  who  tends  the  lee  part  of  the 
whip,  keeping  it  clear  of  the  hawser,  which  will  drift  to  lee- 
ward of  it,  and  the  lee  man   (No.  3  or  No.  4),  who  hauls  the 
whip  from  the  reel.     The  officer  in  charge  hauls  the  hawser 
from  the  cart  and  lights  it  to  the  surf.     ( See  fig.  9. ) 

(15)  The  hawser  having  reached  the  wreck,   the  lee  man 
(No.  1  or  No.  2)  holds  the  breeches-buoy  block  while  the  officer 
in  charge  throws  over  it  a  clove  hitch  with  the  bight  of  the 
weather  part  of  the  whip,  and  hauls  it  snug  around  the  neck. 
The  block  is  then  snapped  on  the  hawser  by  the  holder,  and 
the  officer  in  charge  bends  the  buoy  bridle  into  the  whip,  inshore 
of  the  buoy,  with  a  bowline  knot. 

(16)  If  the  wooden  buoy  block  is  used,  the  buoy  is  passed 
down  through  the  loops  of  the  clove  hitch  and  the  hitch  hauled 
very  snug  around  the  neck  of  the  block.     ( See  fig.  10. ) 

(17)  When  a  threefold  purchase  is  used  the  pennant  block  is 
dispensed  with,  and  as  soon  as  the  hawser  is  made  fast  to 


p 

<3 

B 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


107 


the  wreck  the  men  who  have  been  manning  the  weather  part 
of  the  whip  haul  in  the  slack  of  the  hawser.  No.  5  holding  the 
turn  around  the  sand-anchor  pennant  or  pennant  cleat,  No,  3 
adjusting  the  strap  or  chain  tail  around  the  hawser,  and  No.  4 
hooking  the  outer  block  of  the  tackle  into  the  strap.  The  proper 
manner  of  adjusting  the  strap  is  shown  in  figure  11. 

(18)  The  hawser  is  then  hauled  moderately  taut  by  the  officer 
in  charge  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  and  7.     No.  5  takes  a  turn 


..-«w^&.--x.  u 

/;;,•  '  '  "  V-  »    "V 


FIG.  8. — Manner  in  which  bight  of  whip  is  bent  to  hawser. 

with  the  fall,  while  Nos.  3  arid  1  at  the  heel  of  the  left  leg  of 
the  crotch  and  Nos.  2  and  4  at  the  heel  of  the  right  leg,  with 
the  officer  in  charge  and  Nos.  6  and  7  in  the  center,  raise  the 
crotch  by  raising  the  center,  bringing  the  heels  as  near  together 
as  necessary,  No.  3  passing  and  securing  the  span.  ( See  fig.  12. ) 
(19)  The  crotch  is  inclined  outward  sufficiently  to  allow  the 
hawser  to  be  hauled  well  taut  upon  its  gaining  a  perpendicular 
position. 


108 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


109 


(20)  The  tackle  is  again  manned  and  the  hawser  hauled  taut 
when  the  fall  is  belayed  by  No.  5  around  the  neck  of  the  inner 
block  or  pennant  cleat  (being  careful  not  to  choke  the  luff) 
and  the  whip  is  manned*  If  it  becomes  necessary  to  fleet  the 
threefold  tackle  when  the  pennant  block  is  not  used,  No.  5 
takes  a  turn  with  the  hawser  around  the  sand-anchor  pennant 


FIG.  10. — Manner  in  which  whip  is  attached  to  breeches  buoy. 

or  pennant  cleat,  No.  3  fleets  the  strap,  and  No.  4,  with  the 
necessary  assistance,  overhauls  and  hooks  the  outer  block  of 
the  tackle. 

(21)  To  fleet  tackle  when  pennant  block  is  used,  the  officer  in 
charge  with  a  strap  and  heaver,  racks  both  parts  of  hawser 
together  near  pennant  block,  and  the  tackle  is  then  overhauled 
and  hooked  by  the  men  assigned  to  those  duties. 


110 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


(22)  When  a  twofold  purchase  and  a  pennant  block  are  used, 
No.  6,  as  soon  as  the  hawser  is  attached  to  the  wreck  snatches 
the  bight  into  the  pennant  block  and  locks  it,  and  the  men 
on  the  weather  part  of  the  whip  haul  in  the  slack  of  the  hawser, 
when  Nos.  3,  4,  5,  and  6  put  the  tackle  on  Nos.  3  and  4  at  the 
outer  block,  No.  3  with  the  strap,  Nos.  5  and  6  at  thj  inner 
block,  No.  6  making  a  cat's-paw  in  the  hauling  part  of  the 
»  hawser,  into  which  Nos.  5  and  6  hook  the  inner  block. 


FIG.  11. — Manner  of  adjusting  strap  to  hawser. 

381.  Man  lee  whip — Haul  off. — Nos.  1  and  2  have  charge  of 
the  left   and   the   right  side   of  the   whip,   respectively.    Nos. 
3,  4,  5.  6,  and  7  are  shifting  men,  man  the  lee  part,  and  haul 
the  buoy  off  to  the  wreck.     (See  fig.  13.) 

382.  (1)  Man  weather  whip — Haul  ashore. — Nos.  3,  4,   5,  6, 
and  7  shift  to  the  weather  part  of  the  whip  and  haul  ashore, 
the  officer  in  charge  superintending  and  assisting  when  neces- 
sary.    (See  fig.  14.) 

(2)  The  officer  in  charge  and  No.  7  assist  the  rescued  persons 
out  of  the  buoy  when  they  reach  the  shore. 


34079—21 8 


X13 


114          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

383.  Odd  numbers  are  on  the  left,  even  numbers  are  on  the 
right  when  stationed  at  the  beach  cart;  and  throughout  the 
exercise,  when  two  numbers  work  in  company,  as  in  training 
the  gun,   tending  the  whip,  hauling  the  whip  from  the  reel, 
etc.,  the  odd  number  is  on  the  left,  the  even  number  on  the  right. 

384.  The  exercise  must  be  considered  as  a  whole,  and  when  a 
man  has  performed  one  duty  he  will  proceed  to  execute  the 
next  assigned  him.     All  must  work  together.     While  the  officer 
in  charge  and  Nos.  1  and  2  are  opening  communication  with  the 
gun  and  shot  line,  Nos.  3,  4,  5,  and  6  will  have  the  hawser  and 
its  connections  ready  for  sending  off  and  hauling  taut. 

385.  When  practicing,  No.  6  or  No.  7  will  go  to  the  wreck 
pole  as  soon  as  the  gun  is  discharged,  and  haul  off  and  make 
fast  the  whip  and  hawser. 

386.  When  the  individuals  of  the  crew  have  become  expert  in 
the  performance  of  their  several  special  duties,  they  are,  in 
drill,  to  be  successively  transferred,  temporarily,  to  the  per- 
formance of  the  duties  of  each  of  the  other  members,  until 
every  man  becomes  proficient  in  the  particular  duties  of  every 
position.    This  change  is  effected  by  making  each  man,  except 
the  officer  in  charge,  shift  his  station  at  the  beach  cart  one 
place,  proceeding  in  the  same  direction  as  the  hands  of  a  watch 
move.     Thus,  in  the  first  change,  No.  7  acts  as  No.  1,  No.  1  as 
No.  3,  No.  3  as  No.  5,  No.  5  as  No.  6,  No.  6  as  No.  4,  No.  4  as 
No.  2,  and  No.  2  as  No.  7.     (See  Fig.  1.) 

387.  In  many  instances,  after  communication  is  made  with  a 
wreck,  as  many  as  two  or  three  hundred  yards  of  shot  line 
will  be  left  in  the  box.    The  officer  in  charge  must  be  governed 
by  circumstances  as  to  the  best  method  of  handling  the  surplus 
line.     If  there  is  no  danger  of  the  wreck  going  to  pieces,  the 
spare  line  may  be  hauled  on  board  the  wreck,  the  shore  end 
being  bent  around  the  whip ;  but  where  great  haste  is  necessary 
it  must  be  cut. 

388.  In  service  at  a  wreck  the  bight  of  the  shot  line  should 
not  be  bent  around  the  whip,  as  the  portion  inshore  is  liable  to 
foul  the  whip. 

389.  Instances    may   occur   when    a    wreck    is   breaking  up 
rapidly,  and  there  is  not  sufficient  time  to  send  off  the  whip 
and  hawser,  or  the  crew  are  too  much  exhausted  to  haul  the 
gear  off.     In  such  cases,  after  communication  is  made  by  means 
of  the  shot  line,  that  line  should  be  cut,  and  the  shore  end  bent 
to  a  single  part  of  the  whip;  when  the  end  of  the  whip  has 
reached  the  wreck,  the  bight  of  the  whip  should  be  bent  into  the 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          115 

slings  of  the  buoy  (block  removed)  so  that  the  buoy  may  be 
pulled  off  through  the  surf  by  the  people  on  the  wreck. 

390.  Work  can  be  facilitated  if,  after  the  gear  is  set  up  and 
in  working  order,  a  good  man  from  one  of  the  adjacent  crews 
be  sent  off  to  the  wreck  in  the  breeches  buoy  to  superintend  the 
work  at  that  end,  assist  the  people  into  the  buoy,  etc. 

391.  When  more  crews  than   one  are  present  the  adjacent 
crews  will  assist  in  hauling  off  and  setting  up  the  hawser, 
hauling  the  buoy  off  and  on,  and  assisting  the  people  from  it. 

392.  Officers  in  charge  are  particularly  directed  to  allow  no 
interference  in  the  management  of  the  apparatus  from  outside 
parties,  but  may  accept  their  assistance  in  hauling  on  ropes,  etc. 

393.  (1)   When  the  life  car  is  to  be  used  in  drill,  where  the 
drill  ground  is  over  water,  it   should  be  substituted  for  the 
breeches  buoy,  and  be  hauled  to  and  from  the  wreck  pole  upon 
the  hawser  in  the  same  manner  as  the  buoy,  the  hawser  being 
rove  through  the  eye  of  each  bail  and  the  whip  line  made  fast  to 
the  bails  as  follows:  Take  two  half  hitches  with  a  bight  of 
the  whip  around  the  outer  bail  under  the  eye,  carry  the  whip 
to  the  inner  bail  and  make  it  fast  with  a  bight  as  before,  hav- 
ing the  bail  upright,  and  the  whip  between  them  taut,  for  a 
span. 

(2)  In  addition  to  the  above,  the  practice  at  a  drill  should 
include  the  hauling  of  the  car  back  and  forth  through  the 
water  as  follows :  The  shot  line  having  fallen  over  the  wreck 
pole,  bend  the  whip  line  into  the  rings  at  the  ends  of  the  life 
car  in  the  same  manner  as  described  above,  except  that  the  line 
between  the  rings  should  be  left  sufficiently  slack  not  to  ob- 
struct the  hatch  of  the  car.  The  car  should  then  be  hauled 
back  and  forth  over  the  water.  This  maneuver  should  be 
repeated  two  or  three  times.  Where  this  can  not  be  done  on 
account  of  the  absence  of  water  at  the  drill  ground,  two  men 
will  go  out  in  the  surfboat  and  anchor  it  at  the  usual  prac- 
tice distance  from  the  shore.  The  line  will  then  be  fired  across 
the  boat,  and  the  drill  will  be  carried  out  as  last  above  directetl. 

To  LOAD  THE  BEACH  CAET. 

401.  The  crews  are  not  to  be  exercised  in  loading  the  carts 
expeditiously,  but  rather  in  compactly  stowing  the  apparatus, 
following  the  instructions  herein  contained. 


116          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

402.  The  apparatus  must  be  placed  upon  the  cart  in  the  fol- 
lowing order: 

(a)  The  reel  is  to  be  unshipped.  One  man  lights  along  the 
hawser  while  four  men,  one  at  each  corner  of  the  cart,  proceed 
to  coil  it  down,  right-handed  and  from  the  outside  toward  the 
center,  in  a  Flemish  coil.  Having  completed  the  first  layer, 
carry  the  bight  to  the  outside  of  the  coil  and  coil  toward  the 
center  again.  This  is  done  in  order  that  the  hawser,  when  in 
use,  may  run  from  the  center  of  the  coil. 

(&)  Tally  board  No.  2  is  to  be  spliced  or  bent  on  the  top  end 
of  the  hawser  and  stowed  away  in  the  center  of  the  coil. 

(c)  Ship  the  reel.     Reeve  the  whip  through  the  tail  block, 
make  each  end  of  the  whip  fast  with  a  slight  stop  at  each  side 
of  the  reel,  and  reel  up,  working  toward  the  middle  of  the 
spindle;  when  both  parts  meet,  work  back  to  the  end,  and  so  on 
until  the  whip  is  on  the  reel,  when  the  tail  block  will  hang  in 
the  middle  of  the  whip  over  the  front  of  the  reel. 

(d)  Tally  board  No.  1  is  to  be  spliced  permanently  into  Ihe 
tail  of  the  whip  block  just  above  the  splice. 

(e)  The  inner  block,  or  that  next  the  sand  anchor,  should  be 
painted  white,  the  outer  one  left  bright.     The  tackle  is  to  be 
overhauled  its  full  length,  and  a  strap  placed  around  all  parts 
of  the  fall,  under  each  block.     The  outer  block  is  to  be  placed 
under  the  reel,  on  the  left  side,  and  all  parts  of  the  fall,  coiled 
right-handed  around  upon  the  hawser,  laying  them  down  flat, 
finishing  with  the  inner  block  under  the  reel,  opposite  the  outer 
block. 

(/)  The  gun  is  to  be  placed  athwart  the  hawser,  immediately 
over  the  axle,  muzzle  to  the  right.  Stops,  3  feet  long,  are 
spliced  into  the  top  of  the  sides  of  the  cart  body,  and  are  made 
fast  through  the  front  and  rear  handles  of  the  right  side  of  the 
gun  carriage. 

(g)  Shot-line  box  A,  containing  No.  9  line,  is  to  be  placed 
across  the  cart  in  the  rear  of  the  gun,  rilling  the  space  between 
the  gun  and  the  tailboard.  Stops,  3  feet  in  length,  are  spliced 
into  the  top  of  the  sides  of  the  cart  body  and  are  made  fast 
into  the  handles  of  the  shot-line  box,  and  No.  7  and  No.  4  lines 
in  their  respective  boxes  are  secured  on  top  of  all. 

(h)  The  shot  lines  must  be  faked  as  shown  in  the  diagram 
(fig.  15),  and  hauled  as  closely  around  the  pins  as  can  be  done 
without  springing  them. 

(i)  The  rammer  is  to  be  placed  between  the  gun  and  the  shot- 
line  box. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


117 


(j)  The  tailboard  is  cut  away  sufficiently  on  the  top  under 
the  rails  to  admit  of  its  being  raised  to  drive  under  the  tail- 
board and  hawser  two  pieces  of  wood,  one-half  inch  thick,  2 
inches  wide,  and  3  feet  long,  one  on  each  side,  leaving  4  inches 
projecting.  The  sand  anchor  is  to  be  placed  across  the  rear  end 
of  the  cart,  upon  its  edge,  resting  upon  these  projecting  pieces, 
the  pennant  hooked  into  it  and  moused. 

(k)  The  stops  spliced  into  the  eyes  of  the  tailboard  rods  are 
to  be  passed  down  outside  of  the  anchor,  around  the  horns  of 
the  cross  frame  of  the  cart  body,  back,  up  outside  the  anchor, 
and  made  fast  in  the  eye  again. 

(I)  The  pennant  is  to  be  kept  up  in  place  by  the  same  stops. 
The  sharp  point  of  the  pickax  is  to  be  stuck  between  the  sand 


FIG.  15. — Method  of  faking  the  shot  line. 

anchor  and  the  tailboard,  on  the  left  side,  the  handle  to  the 
right,  the  point  of  the  pick  resting  upon  the  sand-anchor  sup- 
port. 

(m)  The  loops  of  the  shovel  handles  are  to  be  placed  over  the 
upper  horn  of  the  pick,  blades  of  the  shovels  to  the  right,  and 
kept  in  place  by  a  stop  spliced  around  the  right  rear  brace  of 
the  cart  body  and  brought  up  over  and  around  the  shovel  han- 
dles. 

(n)  A  f-inch  hole  is  bored  through  both  legs  of  the  crotch,  at 
a  distance  from  the  bolt  equal  to  the  extreme  length  of  the  cart. 
A  span  of  1^-inch  rope,  3  fathoms  long,  is  spliced  into  one  of 
these  holes.  The  crotch  is  to  be  secured  under  the  cart  on  the 
left  side  by  taking  a  half  hitch  around  both  legs  with  this  span, 
making  the  span  fast  around  the  horn  of  the  after  crosspiece 


118          INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

of  the  cart  body,  the  liead  of  the  crotch  being  made  fast  at  the 
breast  piece  with  a  two-legged  stop  spliced  there  for  that  pur- 
pose. 

(o)  Three  shots  and  a  heaving  stick  and  line  are  to  be  placed 
upon  the  hawser  in  front  of  the  gun,  a  piece  of  bagging  being 
put  under  them. 

(p)  Upon  the  gun  there  is  to  be  placed  a  haversack  contain- 
ing the  lanyard,  priming  wires,  combination  level,  red  flannel, 
three  6-ounce,  three  5-ounce,  and  three  4-ounce  cartridges,  filled 
and  marked,  and  24  primers. 

(q)  The  breeches  buoy  is  to  be  laid  flat,  resting  upon  the 
reel  and  gun.  The  hawser  cutter  will  be  placed  under  the 
afterpart  of  the  reel.  The  speaking  trumpet  is  to  be  hung 
over  the  left  headboard  rod. 

(r)  The  gun  worm  and  ax  are  to  be  hung  in  leather  beckets 
on  the  left  and  right  sides  of  the  cart  body,  respectively. 

(s)  The  tarpaulin,  stopped  at  the  corners  and  sides3  is  to  be 
spread  over  all. 

(t)  A  water  light  shall  always  be  carried,  suspended  from 
the  underside  of  the  cart.  A  life  preserver  also  shall  be  car- 
ried on  the  cart  for  use  in  case  a  man  must  be  sent  into  the 
surf  with  the  lines.  Signal  flag's  shall  be  becketed  underneath 
the  cart. 

(u)  Two  torches  shall  be  secured  to  the  headboard  by  the 
fixtures  supplied  with  them. 

(v)  Two  lanterns  (unlighted  till  required  for  signaling)  shall 
be  carried,  one  on  each  side,  attached  to  the  uprights. 

403.  Loaded  .as  above,   the  reel  stanchions  placed  6  inches 
from    the    headboard,    the   cart    should    exactly    balance.      If, 
through  difference  in  size  and  weight  of  crotch  and  sand  anchor 
the  cart  does  not  balance,  it  can  be  adjusted  by  moving  the  gun 
a  few  inches  forward  or  aft. 

404.  While  standing  in  the  house  the  cart  should  have  a  sup- 
port under  the  center  of  the  axle. 

HAWSER  CUTTER. 

411.  (1)  After  the  crew  is  landed  from  a  stranded  vessel,  it 
may  be  necessary  to  detach  the  hawser  from  the  wreck,  either 
for  the  purpose  of  using  it  elsewhere  or  because  the  wreck  is 
rapidly  breaking  up.  In  either  case  the  hawser  cutter  should  be 
used.  To  do  this,  the  breeches  buoy  is  first  removed,  and  then, 
facing  the  wreck  and  standing  on  the  left  of  the  hawser,  the 
cutter  is  placed  upon  it  by  grasping  it,  as  shown  in  figure  16, 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          119 


FIG.  16. — Applying  hawser  cutter. 


120 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


the  white  end  of  the  cutter  being  inshore,  the  eyes  of  the  knives 
inclined  toward  the  wreck.  The  cutter  is  then  closed  and  the 
clasp  secured,  head  of  pin  to  seaward. 


I 


FIG.  17. — Hawser  c alter  arranged  for  hauling  off. 


(2)  The  becket  in  the  outer  end  of  the  cutter  should  have  two 
eyes  formed  in  the  bight  by  passing  a  seizing  around  both  parts 
2  inches  from  the  bight,  and  a  second  seizing  2  inches  from  the 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          121 

first.    The  method  of  bending  the  whip  to  the  hawser  cutter  is 
as  follows  (see  fig.  17)  : 

(3)  Bond  a  bight  of  the  weather  part  of  the  whip  into  the 
outer  eye  of  the  becket,  leading  from  the  outer  end  of  the  cut- 
ter, with  a  sheet  bend,  as  at  A,  and  the  tail  of  the  knife  lan- 
yards into  another  bight  of  the  same  part  of  the  whip  with  a 
bowline    knot,    B,    allowing'    sufficient    slack    line,    G    (say,    2 
fathoms),  to  permit  the  knives  to  work. 

(4)  About  2  feet  inshore  of  the  last  knot,  take  up  another 
bight,  D,  of  the  whip,  and  pass  it  up  through  the  second  eye  in 
the  outer  becket,  toggling  it  with  another  bight,  E.    This  trans- 
fers the  weight  of  the  whip  from  the  knives  to  the  becket,  thus 
relieving  the  hawser  from  their  pressure  while  the  cutter  is 
being  hauled  off  to  the  wreck. 

(5)  Haul  the  cutter  out  as  close  as  possible  to  the  spar  to 
which  the  hawser  is  secured,  letting  the  part  of  the  whip,  F, 
fast  to  the  knives,  hang  as  loosely  as  possible. 

(6)  When  the  cutter  reaches  the  spar  hold  fast  to  the  haul- 
ing-out  part,  haul  on  the  hauling-in  part,  F,  attached  to  the 
knives,  which  will  remove  the  toggle  bight  E,  freeing  bight  D 
from  the  eye,  allowing  the  strain  to  come  on  the  knives,  which 
will  cut  the  hawser. 

(7)  Haul  the  hawser  in  as  quickly  as  possible,  to  prevent  its 
unlaying.     Haul  back,  and  unbend  the  whip  'from  the  cutter. 
Unreeve  the  whip.    Keep  the  knives  sharp,  and  all  ironwork  of 
the  cutter  oiled. 

MUSTER  AT  A  STATION  BY  AN  INSPECTING 
OFFICER. 

421.  (1)  The  muster  shall  be  held  in  the  most  suitable  place 
at  the  station,  as  directed  by  the  inspecting  officer.  The  uni- 
form shall  be  clean  blue. 

(2)  The  officer  in  charge  shall  form  the  line,  giving  the  com- 
mands, Pall  in,  Right  dress,  and  Front,  and  when  the  line  is 
dressed,  he  shall  take  position  as  near  as  possible  in  front  of  the 
center  of  it  and  shall  command,  Hand,  SALUTE.  The  officer  in 
charge  then  faces  about,  salutes,  and  reports  to  the  inspecting 
officer,  "  Sir,  the  crew  is  mustered."  The  inspecting  officer  re- 
turns the  salute  and  commands,  *'  Call  the  roll,  sir."  The  officer 
in  charge  faces  about  and  commands,  Two,  at  which  the  men 


122          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

drop  their  hands.  He  then  calls  the  roll.  Each  man  as  his  name 
is  called  answers  with  his  watch  number,  the  senior  answering 
for  each  absentee  by  stating  that  he  is  "  On  lookout,"  "  In  hos- 
pital," "Absent  without  leave,"  etc.,  as  the  case  may  be.  After 
the  roll  is  called  the  officer  in  charge  takes  position  to  the  right 
of  the  line. 

(3)  The  inspecting  officer  inspects  the  uniforms,  obtains  re- 
quired data,  and  asks  the  usual  questions  as  to  complaints,  and 
when  lie  finishes  commands  Dismiss. 

(4)  The  officer  in  charge  salutes,  steps  2  paces  to  the  front, 
faces  left,  inarches  to  the  center  of  the  line,  faces  left  again, 
and  commands  DISMISSED. 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  RECRUIT. 

422.  For  preliminary  instruction  a  number  of  recruits,  usually 
not  exceeding  three  or  four,  are  formed  as  a  squad  in  single 
rank. 

POSITION  OF  ATTENTION. 

423.  Heels  on  the  same  line  and  as  near  each  other  as  the 
conformation  of  the  man  permits. 

Feet  turned  out  equally  and  forming  an  angle  of  about  45°. 

Knees  straight  without  stiffness. 

Hips  level  and  drawn  back  slightly ;  body  erect  and  resting 
equally  on  hips;  chest  lifted  and  arched;  shoulders  square  and 
falling  equally. 

Arms  and  hands  hanging  naturally,  thumb  along  the  seam  of 
the  trousers. 

Head  erect  and  squarely  to  the  front,  chin  drawn  in  so  that 
the  axis  of  the  head  and  neck  is  vertical;  eyes  straight  to  the 
front. 

Weight  of  the  body  resting  equally  upon  the  heels  and  balls 
of  the  feet. 

THE  RESTS. 

424.  Being  at  halt,  the  commands  are:  FALL  OUT;  REST;  AT 
EASE;  and  (1)  Parade,   (2)  REST. 

At  the  command  fall  out,  the  men  may  leave  the  ranks,  but 
are  required  to  remain  in  the  immediate  vicinity.  They  resume 
their  former  places,  at  attention,  at  the  command  Fall  in. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          123 

At  the  command  rest  each  man  keeps  one  foot  in  place,  but 
is  not  required  to  preserve  silence  or  immobility. 

At  the  command  at  ease  each  man  keeps  one  foot  in  place  and 
is  required  to  preserve  silence  but  not  immobility. 

425.  (1)   Parade,    (2)    REST.— Carry  the  right  foot  6  inches 
straight  to  the  rear,  left  knee  slightly  bent ;  clasp  the  hands, 
without  constraint,  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  body,  fingers 
joined,  left  hand  uppermost,  left  thumb  clasped  by  the  thumb 
and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand;  preserve  silence  and  steadi- 
ness of  position. 

426.  To  resume  the  attention:   (1)   Squad,   (2)   ATTENTION. 
The  men  take  the  position  of  attention. 

EYES  BIGHT  OR  LEFT. 

427.  (1)   Eyes,  (2)  RIGHT  (LEPT),  (3)  FRONT.    At  the  com- 
mand right,  turn  the  head  to  the  right  oblique,  eyes  fixed  on 
the  line  of  eyes  of  the  men  in,  or  supposed  to  be  in,  the  same 
rank.     At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the 
front. 

FACINGS. 

428.  To  the  flank:  (1)  Right  (left),  (2)  FACE. 

Raise  slightly  the  left  heel  and  right  toe;  face  to  the  right, 
turning  on  the  right  heel,  assisted  by  a  slight  pressure  on  the 
ball  of  the  left  foot ;  place  the  left  foot  by  the  side  of  the  right. 
Left  face  is  executed  on  the  left  heel  in  the  corresponding 
manner. 

Right  (left)  half  face  is  executed  similarly,  facing  45°. 

"  To  face  in  marching "  and  advance,  turn  on  the  ball  of 
either  foot  and  step  off  with  the  other  foot  in  the  new  line  of 
direction ;  to  face  in  marching  without  gaining  ground  in  the 
new  direction,  turn  on  the  ball  of  either  foot  and  mark  time. 

429.  To  the  rear:   (1)  About,  (2)  FACE. 

Carry  the  toe  of  the  right  foot  about  a  half  foot-length  to  the 
rear  and  slightly  to  the  left  of  the  left  heel  without  changing 
the  position  of  the  left  foot;  face  to  the  rear,  turning  to  the 
right  on  the  left  heel  and  right  toe ;  place  the  right  heel  by  the 
side  of  the  left. 

SALUTES. 

430.  (1)  Nothing  gives  a  better  indication  of  the  state  of  dis- 
cipline than  the  observance  of  the  forms  of  military  courtesy. 

(2)  From  time  immemorial  the  salute  has  been  a  form  of 
military  courtesy  that  has  been  strictly  and  conscientiously 


124          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

observed  by  men  of  every  nationality  who  followed  the  profes- 
sion of  arms. 

(3)  In  regard  to  personal  salutes,  a  junior  always  salutes  a 
senior.    An  enlisted  man  salutes  an  officer,  and  the  very  officer 
saluted  is  called  to  account  if  he  fails  to  salute  another  officer, 
his  senior. 

(4)  If  uncertainty  exists  in  regard  to  the  necessity  for  salut- 
ing, the  only  rule  to  follow  is  to  render  the  salute.     It  is  far 
better  to  salute,  even  if  in  doubt  as  to  the  necessity  for  so  doing, 
than  to  expose  yourself  to  the  cnance  of  censure  and  repri- 
mand, and  to  be  thought  ignorant  of  the  rules  of  one  of  the  most 
essential  and  elementary  requirements  of  a  military  service. 

431.  (1)   Hand,   (2)   SALUTE.     Raise  the  right  hand  smartly 
till  the  tip  of  the  forefinger  touches  the  lowrer  part  of  the  head- 
dress above  the  right  eye,  thumb  and  fingers  extended  and  joined, 
palm  to  the  left,  forearm  inclined  at  about  45°,  hand  and  wrist 
straight ;   at  the  same  time  look  toward   the  person  saluted. 
(2)   Drop  the  arm  smartly  by  the  side. 

STEPS    AND    MARCHINGS. 

432.  All  steps  and  marchings,  executed  from  a  halt,  except 
right  step,  begin  with  the  left  foot. 

433.  The  length  of  the  full  step  in  quick  time  is  30  inches, 
measured  from  heel  to  heel,  and  the  cadence  is  at  the  rate  of 
120  steps  per  minute. 

The  length  of  the  full  step  in  double  time  is  36  inches;  the 
cadence  is  at  the  rate  of  180  steps  per  minute. 

The  instructor,  when  necessary,  indicates  the  cadence  of  the 
step  by  calling  one,  two,  three,  four,  or  left,  right,  the  instant 
the  left  and  right  foot,  respectively,  should  be  planted. 

434.  All  steps  and  marchings  and  movements  involving  march 
are  executed  in  quick  time  unless  the  squad  be  marching  in 
double  time,  or  double  time  be  added  to  the  command;  in  the 
latter  case  double  time  is  added  to  the  preparatory  command. 
Example:  (1)  Squad  right,  double  time,  (2)  MARCH  (school  of 
the  squad). 

QUICK  TIME. 

435.  Being  at  a  halt,  to  march  forward  in  quick  time:   (1) 
Forward,   (2)  MARCH. 

At  the  command  Forward,  shift  the  weight  of  the  body  to  the 
right  leg,  left  knee  straight. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          125 

At  the  command  inarch,  move  the  left  foot  smartly  straight 
forward  30  inches  from  the  right,  sole  near  the  ground,  and 
plant  it  without  shock ;  next,  in  like  manner,  advance  the  right 
foot  and  plant  it  as  above ;  continue  the  march.  The  arms  swing 
naturally. 

436.  Being  at  a  halt,  or  in  march  in  quick  time,  to  march  in 
double  time:  (1)  Double  time,  (2)  MARCH. 

If  at.  a  halt,  at  the  first  command  shift  the  weight  of  the  body 
to  the  right  leg.  At  the  command  inarch,  raise  the  forearms, 
fingers  closed,  to  a  horizontal  position  along  the  waist  line; 
take  up  an  easy  run  with  the  step  and  cadence  of  double  time, 
allowing  a  natural  swinging  motion  to  the  arms. 

If  marching  in  quick  time,  at  the  command  march,  given  as 
either  foot  strikes  the  ground,  take  one  step  in  quick  time,  and 
then  step  off  in  double  time. 

437.  To  resume  the  quick  time:  (1)  Cluick  time,  (2)  MARCH. 
At   the   command   march,    given   as   either   foot   strikes    the 

ground,  advance  and  plant  the  other  foot  in  double  time;  re- 
sume the  quick  time,  dropping  the  hands  by  the  sides. 

TO   MAKK  TIME. 

438.  Being  in  march:  (1).  Mark  time,  (2)  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  -foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  other  foot ;  bring  up  the  foot  in 
roar  and  continue  the  cadence  by  alternately  raising  each  foot 
about  2  inches  and  planting  it  on  line  with  the  other. 

Being  at  a  halt,  at  the  command  march,  raise  and  plant  the 
feet  as  described  above. 

THE  HALF  STEP. 

439.  (1)   Half  step,  (2)  MARCH. 

Take  steps  of  15  inches  in  quick  time,  18  inches  in  double 
time. 

440.  Forward,  half  step,  halt,   and   mark  time   may  be   exe- 
cuted one  from  the  other  in  quick  or  double  time. 

To  resume  the  full  step  from  half  step  or  mark  time:  (1)  For- 
ward, (2)  MARCH. 

SIDE    STEP. 

441.  Being  at  a  halt  or  mark  time:  (1)  Right  (left)  step,  (2) 
MARCH. 

Carry  and  plant  the  right  foot  15  inches  to  the  right;  bring 
the  left  foot  beside  it  and  continue  the  movement  in  the  cadence 
of  quick  time. 


126          INSTRUCTIONS  FOB,  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

The  side  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only  and  is  not 
executed  in  double  time. 

If  at  order  arms,  the  side  step  is  executed  at  trail  without 
command. 

BACK  STEP. 

442.  Being   at    a   halt   or   mark    time:    (1)    Backward,    (2) 
MARCH. 

Take  steps  of  15  inches  straight-  to  the  rear. 

The  hack  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only  and  is  not 
executed  in  double  time. 

If  at  order  arms,  the  back  step  is  executed  at  trail  without 
command. 

TO   HALT. 

443.  To  arrest  the  march  in  quick  or  double  time:  (1)  Squad, 
(2)  HALT. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground, 
plant  the  other  foot  as  in  marching;  raise  and  place  the  first 
foot  by  the  side  of  the  other.  If  in  double  time,  drop  the  hands 
by  the  sides. 

TO    MARCH    BY   THE   FLANK. 

444.  Being   in    march:    (1)    By   the   right    (left)    flank,    (2) 
MARCH. 

At  the  command  inarch,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot,  then  face  to  the  right 
in  marching  and  step  off  in  the  new  direction  with  the  right 
foot. 

TO    MARCH   TO   THE   REAR. 

445.  Being  in  march:  (1)  To  the  rear,  (2)  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  tli^ 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot ;  turn  to  the  right  about 
on  the  balls  of  both  feet  and  immediately  step  oif  with  the  left 
foot. 

If  inarching  in  double  time,  turn  to  the  right  about,  taking 
four  steps  in  place,  keeping  the  cadence,  and  then  step  off  with 
the  left  foot. 

CHANGE  STEP. 

446.  Being  in  march:  (1)  Change  step,  (2)  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  thi> 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot;  plant  the  toe  of  the 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          127 

right  foot  near  the  heel  of  the  left  and  step  off  with  the  left 
foot. 

The  change  on  the  right  foot  is  similarly  executed,  the  com- 
mand inarch  being  given  as  the  left  foot  strikes  the  ground. 

MANUAL  OF  AKMS. 

447.  As  soon  as  practicable  the  recruit  is  taught  the  use, 
nomenclature,  and  care  of  his  rifle  (see  art.  507  et  seq.)  ;  when 
fair  progress  has  been  made  in  the  instruction  without  arms, 
he  is  taught  the  manual  of  arms ;  instruction  without  arms 
and  that  with  arms  alternate. 

448.  The  following  rules  govern  the  carrying  of  the  piece: 
First.  The  piece  is  not  carried  with  cartridges  in  either  the 

chamber  or  the  magazine  except  when  specifically  ordered. 
When  so  loaded,  or  supposed  to  be  loaded,  it  is  habitually  car- 
ried locked;  that  is,  with  the  safety  lock  turned  to  the  "safe." 
&t  all  other  times  it  is  carried  unlocked,  with  the  trigger  pulled. 

Second.  Whenever  troops  are  formed  under  arms,  pieces  are 
immediately  inspected  at  the  commands:  (1)  Inspection,  (2) 
ARMS;  (3)  Order  (right  shoulder,  port),  (4)  ARMS. 

A  similar  inspection  is  made  immediately  before  dismissal. 

If  cartridges  are  found  in  the  chamber  or  magazine,  they  are 
removed  and  placed  in  the  belt. 

Third.  The  cut-off  is  kept  turned  "  off,"  except  when  cartridges 
are  actually  used. 

Fourth.  The  bayonet  is  not  fixed  except  for  bayonet  training, 
on  guard,  or  for  combat. 

Fifth.  Fall  in  is  executed  with  the  piece  at  the  order  arms. 
Fall  out,  rest,  and  at  ease  are  executed  as  without  arms.  On 
resuming  attention  the  position  of  order  arms  is  taken. 

Sixth.  If  at  the  order,  unless  otherwise  prescribed,  the  piece 
is  brought  to  the  right  shoulder  at  the  command  march,  the 
three  motions  corresponding  with  the  first  three  steps.  Move- 
ments may  be  executed  at  the  trail  by  prefacing  the  preparatory 
command  with  the  words  at  trail;  as  (1)  At  trail,  forward, 
(2)  MARCH;  the  trail  is  taken  at  the  command  march. 

When  the  facings,  alignments,  open  and  close  ranks,  taking 
interval  or  distance,  and  assemblings  are  executed  from  the 
order,  raise  the  piece  to  the  trail  while  in  motion  and  resume 
the  order  on  halting. 

Seventh.  The  piece  is  brought  to  the  order  on  halting.  The 
execution  of  the  order  begins  when  the  halt  is  completed. 


128          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Eighth.  A  disengaged  hand  in  double  time  is  held  as  when 
without  arms. 

449.  The  following  rules  govern  the  execution  of  the  manual 
of  arms  : 

First.  In  all  positions  of  the  left  hand  at  the  balance  (center 
of  gravity,  bayonet  unfixed)  the  thumb  clasps  the  piece;  the 
sling  is  included  in  the  grasp  of  the  hand. 

Second.  In  all  positions  of  the  piece  "  diagonally  across  the 
body  "  the  position  of  the  piece,  left  arm,  and  hand  are  the  same 
as  in  port  arms. 

Third.  In  resuming  the  order  from  any  position  in  the  manual, 
the  motion  next  to  the  last  concludes  with  the  butt  of  the  pi  ceo 
about  3  inches  from  the  ground,  barrel  to  the  rear,  the  left 
hand  above  and  near  the  right,  steadying  the  piece,  fingers  ox- 
tended  and  joined,  forearm  and  wrist  straight  and  inclining 
downward,  all  fingers  of  the  right  hand  grasping  the  piece.  To 
complete  the  order,  lower  the  piece  gently  to  the  ground  with  the 
right  hand,  drop  the  left  quickly  by  the  side,  and  take  the  posi- 
tion of  order  arms. 

Allowing  the  piece  to  drop  through  the  right  hand  to  the 
ground,  or  other  similar  abuse  of  the  rifle  to  produce  effect  in 
executing  the  manual,  is  prohibited. 

Fourth.  The  cadence  of  the  motions  is  that  of  quick  time ; 
the  recruits  are  first  required  to  give  their  whole  attention  to 
the  details  of  the  motions,  the  cadence  being  gradually  acquired 
as  they  become  accustomed  to  handling  their  pieces.  The  in- 
structor may  require  them  to  count  aloud  in  cadence  with  the 
motions. 

Fifth,  The  manual  ^is  taught  at  a  halt,  and  the  movements 
are,  for  the  purpose  of  instruction,  divided  into  motions  and 
executed  in  detail ;  in  this  case  the  command  of  execution  de- 
termines the  prompt  execution  of  the  first  motion,  and  the  com- 
mands, two,  three,  four,  that  of  the  other  motions. 

To  execute  the  movements  in  detail,  the  instructor  first  cau- 
tions By  the  numbers;  all  movements  divided  into  motions  are 
then  executed  as  above  explained  until  he  cautions,  Without  the 
numbers;  or  commands  movements  other  than  those  in  the 
manual  of  arms. 

Sixth.  Whenever  circumstances  require,  the  regular  positions 
of  the  manual  of  arms  and  the  firings  may  be  ordered  without 
xegard  to  the  previous  position  of  the  piece. 

Under  exceptional  conditions  of  weathor  or  fatigue,  the  rifle 
may  be  carried  in  any  manner  directed. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          129 

450.  Position  of  order  arms  standing:  The  butt  rests  evenly 
on  the  ground,  barrel  to  the  rear,  toe  of  the  butt  on  a  line  with 
toe  of  and  touching  the  right  shoe,  arms  and  hands  hanging 
naturally,  right  hand  holding  the  piece  between  the  thumb  and 
fingers. 

451.  Being  at  order  arms:   (1)  Present,  (2)  ARMS. 

With  the  right  hand  carry  the  piece  in  front  of  the  center 
of  the  body,  barrel  to  the  rear  and  vertical,  grasp  it  with  the  left 
hand  at  the  balance,  forearm  horizontal  and  resting  against  the 
body.  (2)  Grasp  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand. 

452.  Being  at  order  arms:  (1)  Port,  (2)  ARMS. 

With  the  right  hand  raise  and  throw  the  piece  diagonally 
across  the  body,  grasp  it  smartly  with  both  hands;  the  right 
palm  down,  at  the  small  of  the  stock ;  the  left  palm  up,  at  the 
balance ;  barrel  up,  sloping  to  the  left  and  crossing  opposite  the 
junction  of  the  neck  with  the  left  shoulder;  right  forearm 
horizontal ;  left  forearm  resting  against  the  body ;  the  piece  in 
a  vertical  plane  parallel  to  the  front. 

453.  Being  at  present  arms:   (1)  Port,  (2)  ARMS. 

Carry  the  piece  diagonally  across  the  body  and  take  the  posi- 
tion of  port  arms. 

454.  Being  at  port  arms:   (1)  Present,  (2)  ARMS. 

Carry  the  piece  to  a  vertical  position  in  front  of  the  center  of 
the  body  and  take  the  position  of  present  arms. 

455.  Being  at  present  or  port  arms :  (1)  Order,  (2)  ARMS. 
Let  go  with  the  right  hand ;  lower  and  carry  the  piece  to  the 

right  with  the  left  hand ;  regrasp  it  with  the  right  hand  just 
above  the  lower  band ;  let  go  with  the  left  hand,  and  take  the 
next  to  the  last  position  in  coming  to  the  order.  (2)  Complete 
the  order. 

456.  Being  at  order  arms:  (1)  Right  shoulder,  (2)  ARMS. 
With  the  right  hand  raise  and  throw  the  piece  diagonally 

across  the  body;  carry  the  right  hand  quickly  to  the  butt,  em- 
bracing it,  the  heel  between  the  first  two  fingers.  (2)  With- 
out changing  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,  place  the  piece  on 
the  right  shoulder,  barrel  up  and  inclined  at  an  angle  of  about 
45°  from  the  horizontal,  trigger  guard  in  the  hollow  of  the 
shoulder,  right  elbow  near  the  side,  the  piece  in  a  vertical  plane 
perpendicular  to  the  front;  carry  the  left  hand,  thumb  and 
fingers  extended  and  joined,  to  the  small  of  the  stock,  tip  of 
34079—21 9 


130          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

the  forefinger  touching  the  cocking  piece,  wrist  straight  and 
elbow  down.  (3)  Drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

457.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  (1)  Order,  (2)  ARMS. 
Press  the  butt  down  quickly  and  throw  the  piece  diagonally 

across  the  body,  the  right  hand  retaining  the  grasp  of  the  butt. 
(2),  (3)  Execute  order  arms  as  described  from  port  arms. 

458.  Being  at  port  arms:  (1)  Right  shoulder,  (2)  ARMS. 
Change  the  right  hand  to  the  butt.     (2),    (3)    As  in  right 

shoulder  arms  from  order  arms. 

459.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms :  (1)  Port,  (2)  ARMS. 
Press  the  butt  down  quickly  and  throw  the  piece  diagonally 

across  the  body,  the  right  hand  retaining  its  grasp  of  the 
butt.  (2)  Change  the  right  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock. 

460.  .Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  (1)  Present,  (2)  ARMS. 
Execute  port  arms.     (3)   Execute  present  arms. 

461.  Being  at  present  arms :  (1)  Right  shoulder,  (2)  ARMS. 
Execute  port  arms.     (2),    (3),    (4)  Execute  right  shoulder 

arms  as  from  port  arms. 

462.  Being  at  port  arms :  (1)  Left  shoulder,  (2)  ARMS. 
Carry  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  place  it  on  the  left 

shoulder,  barrel  up,  trigger  guard  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder ; 
at  the  same  time  grasp  the  butt  with  the  left  hand,  heel  between 
first  and  second  fingers,  thumb  and  fingers  closed  on  the  stock. 
(2)  Drop  the  right  hand  by  the  side. 

Being  at  left  shoulder  arms:  (1)  Port,  (2)  ARMS. 

Grasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 
(2)  Carry  the  piece,  to  the  right  with  the  right  hand,  regrasp 
it  with  the  left,  and  take  the  position  of  port  arms. 

Left  shoulder  arms  may  be  ordered  directly  from  the  order, 
right  shoulder  or  present,  or  the  reverse.  At  the  command 
arms  execute  port  arms  and  continue  in  cadence  to  the  position 
ordered. 

463.  Being  at  order  arms:   (1)  Parade,  (2)  REST. 

Carry  the  right  foot  6  inches  straight  to  the  rear,  left  knee 
slightly  bent ;  carry  the  muzzle  in  front  of  the  center  of  the 
body,  barrel  to  the  left;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand 
just  below  the  stacking  swivel,  and  with  the  right  hand  below 
and  against  the  left. 

Being  at  parade  rest:  (1)  Squad,  (2)  ATTENTION. 

Resume  the  order,  the  left  hand  quitting  the  piece  opposite 
the  right  hip. 

464.  Being  at  order  arms:  (1)  Trail,  (2)  ARMS. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          131 

Raise  the  piece,  right  arm  slightly  bent,  and  incline  the 
muzzle  forward  so  that  the  barrel  makes  an  angle  of  about 
30°  with  the  vertical. 

When  it  can  be  done  without  danger  or  inconvenience  to 
others,  the  piece  may  be  grasped  at  the  balance  and  the  muzzle 
lowered  until  the  piece  is  horizontal ;  a  similar  position  in  the 
left  hand  may  be  used. 

465.  Being  at  trail  arms:   (1)  Order,  (2)  ARMS. 

Lower  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  resume  the  order. 

BIFLE  SALUTE. 

446.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  (1)  Rifle,  (2)  SALUTE. 

Carry  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  small  of  the  stock,  fore- 
arm horizontal,  palm  of  hand  down,  thumb  and  fingers  extended 
and  joined,  forefinger  touching  end  of  cocking  piece;  look 
toward  the  person  saluted.  (2)  Drop  left  hand  by  the  side; 
turn  head  and  eyes  to  the  front. 

467.  Being  at  order  or  trail  arms:   (1)  Rifle,  (2)  SALUTE. 
Garry  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  right  side,  palm  of  the 

hand  down,  thumb  and  fingers  extended  and  joined,  forefinger 
against  piece  near  the  muzzle;  look  toward  the  person  saluted. 
(2)  Drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side;  turn  the  head  and  eyes 
to  the  front. 

THE  INSPECTION. 

468.  Being  at  order  arms :  (1)  Inspection,  (2)  ARMS. 

At  the  second  command  take  the  position  of  port  arms.  (2) 
Seize  the  bolt  handle  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right 
hand,  turn  the  handle  up,  draw  the  bolt  back,  and  glance  at 
the  chamber.  Having  found  the  chamber  empty,  or  having 
emptied  it,  raise  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  front. 

469.  Being  at  inspection  arms:    (1)    Order   (right   shoulder, 
port),  (2)  ARMS, 

At  the  preparatory  command  push  the  bolt  forward,  turn  the 
handle  down,  pull  the  trigger,  and  resume  port  arms.  At  the 
command  arms,  complete  the  movement  ordered. 

TO    DISMISS    THE    SQUAD. 

470.  Being  at  halt:   (1)  Inspection,  (2)  ARMS;  (3)  Port,  (4) 
ARMS;    (5)  DISMISSED. 


132          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 
SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD. 

471.  Men  are  grouped  into  squads  for  purposes  of  instruction, 
discipline,  control,  and  order. 

472.  The  squad  proper  consists  of  a  2  p.  o.  and  seven  men. 
The  movements  in  the  School  of  the  Squad  are  designed  to 

make  the  squad  a  fixed  unit  and  to  facilitate  the  control  and 
movement  of  the  company.  If  the  number  of  men  grouped  is 
more  than  3  and  less  than  12,  the:  are  formed  as  a  squad  of 
4  files,  the  excess  above  8  being  posted  as  file  closers.  If  the 
number  grouped  is  greater  than  11,  2  or  more  squads  are  formed 
and  the  group  is  termed  a  platoon. 

For  the  instruction  of  recruits,  these  rules  may  be  modified. 

473.  A  2  p.  o.  is  the  squad  leader,  and  when  absent  is  replaced 
by  a   designated   man.     If   none   is   designated,   the   senior  in 
length  of  service  acts  as  leader. 

The  2  p.  o.,  when  in  ranks,  is  posted  as  the  left  man,  in  the 
front  rank  of  the  squad. 

When  he  leaves  the  ranks  to  lead  his  squad,  his  rear-rank  man 
steps  into  the  front  rank,  and  the  file  remains  blank  until  the 
squad  leader  returns  to  his  place  in  ranks,  when  his  rear-rank 
man  steps  back  into  the  rear  rank. 

474.  In  battle  officers  and  1  p.  os.  endeavor  to  preserve  the 
integrity  of  squads ;  they  designate  new  leaders  to  replace  those 
disabled,  organize  new  squads  when  necessary,  and  see  that 
every  man  is  placed  in  a  squad. 

Men  are  taught  the  necessity  of  remaining  with  the  squad  to 
which  they  belong  and,  in  case  it  be  broken  up  or  they  become 
separated  -therefrom,  to  attach  themselves  to  the  nearest  squad 
and  platoon  leaders,  whether  these  be  of  their  own  or  of  another 
organization. 

475.  The  squad  executes  the  halt,  rests,  facings,   steps,  and 
marchings  and  the  manual  of  arms  as  explained  in  the  School 
of  the  Recruit. 

TO    FORM    THE    SQUAD, 

476.  To  form  the  squad  the  instructor  places  himself  3  paces 
in  front  of  where  the  center  is  to  be  and  commands :  FALL  IN. 

The  men  assemble  at  attention,  pieces  at  the  order,  and  are 
arranged  by  the  2  p.  o.  in  double  rank,  as  nearly  as  practicable 
in  order  of  height  from  right  to  left,  each  man  dropping  his  left 
hand  as  soon  as  the  man  on  his  left  has  his  interval.  The  rear 
rank  forms  with  the  distance  of  40  inches. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.         133 

The  instructor  then  commands:  COUNT  OFF. 

At  this  command  all  except  the  right  file  execute  eyes  right, 
and,  beginning  on  the  right,  the  men  in  each  rank  count  one, 
two,  three,  four;  each  man  turns  his  head  and  eyes  to  the  front 
as  he  counts. 

Pieces  are  then  inspected. 

ALIGNMENTS. 

• 

477.  To  align  the  squad,  the  base  file  or  files  having  been 
established:  (1)  Right  (left),  (2)  DRESS,  (3)  FRONT. 

At  the  command  dress  all  men  place  the  left  hand  upon  the 
hip  (whether  dressing  to  the  right  or  left)  ;  each  man,  except 
the  base  file,  when  on  or  near  the  new  line  executes  eyes  right, 
and,  taking  steps  of  2  or  3  inches,  places  himself  so  that  his 
right  arm  rests  lightly  against  the  arm  of  the  man  on  his  right, 
and  so  that  his  eyes  and  shoulders  are  in  line  with  those  of  the 
men  on  his  right;  the  rear-rank  men  cover  in  file. 

The  instructor  verifies  the  alignment  of  both  ranks  from  the 
right  flank  and  orders  up  or  back  such  men  as  may  be  in  rear 
or  in  advance  of  the  line ;  only  the  men  designated  move. 

At  the  command  front,  given  when  the  ranks  are  aligned, 
each  man  turns  his  head  and  eyes  to  the  front  and  drops  his 
left  hand  by  his  side. 

478.  To  preserve  the  alignment  when  marching :  GUIDE  RIGHT 
(LEFT). 

The  men  preserve  i;heir  intervals  from  the  side  of  the  guide, 
yielding  to  pressure  from  that  side  and  resisting  pressure  from 
the  opposite  direction ;  they  recover  intervals,  if  lost,  by  gradu- 
ally opening  out  or  closing  in ;  they  recover  alignment  by 
slightly  lengthening  or  shortening  the  step;  the  rear-rank  men 
cover  their  file  leaders  at  40  inches. 

In  double  rank,  the  front-rank  man  on  the  right,  or  designated 
Hank,  conducts  the  march;  when  marching  faced  to  the  flank, 
the  leading  man  of  the  front  rank  is  the  guide. 

TO   STACK   AND   TAKE  AEMS. 

470.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt :  STACK  ARMS. 

Each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  grasps  his  piece  with  the 
left  hand  at  the  upper  band  and  rests  the  butt  between  his  feet, 
barrel  to  the  front,  muzzle  inclined  slightly  to  the  front  and 
opposite  the  center  of  the  interval  on  his  right/  the  thumb  and 


134          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

forefinger  raising  the  slacking  swivel;  each  even  number  of  the 
rear  rank  then  passes  his  piece,  barrel  to  the  rear,  to  his  file 
leader,  who  grasps  it  between  the  bands  with  his  right  hand  and 
throws  the  butt  about  2  feet  in  advance  of  that  of  his  own  piece 
and  opposite  the  right  of  the  interval,  the  right  hand  slipping 
to  the  upper  band,  the  thumb  and  forefinger  raising  the  stacking 
swivel,  which  he  engages  with  that  of  his  own  piece ;  each  odd 
number  of  the  front  rank  raises  his  piece  with  the  right  hand, 
carries  it  well  forward,  barrel  to  the  front;  the  left  hand, 
guiding  the  stacking  swivel,  engages  the  lower  hook  of  the 
swivel  of  his  own  piece  with  the  free  hook  of  that  of  the  even 
number  of  the  rear  rank ;  he  then  turns  the  barrel  outward  into 
the  angle  formed  by  the  other  two  pieces  and  lowers  the  butt  to 
the  ground,  to  the  right  of  and  against  the  toe  of  his  right  shoe. 

The  stacks  made,  the  loose  pieces  are  laid  on  them  by  the 
even  numbers  of  the  front  rank. 

When  each  man  has  finished  handling  pieces,  he  takes  the 
position  of  attention. 

480.  Being  in  line  behind  the  stacks :  TAKE  ARMS. 

The  loose  pieces  are  returned  by  the  even  numbers  of  the 
front  rank ;  each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  grasps  his  own 
piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  piece  of  his  rear-rank  man  with 
his  right  hand,  grasping  both  between  the  bands;  each  odd 
number  of  the  front  rank  grasps  his  piece  in  the  same  way  with 
the  right  hand,  disengages  it  by  raising  the  butt  from  the 
ground  and  then,  turning  the  piece  to  the  right,  detaches  it  from 
the  stack ;  each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  disengages  and 
detaches  his  piece  by  turning  it  to  the  left,  and  then  passes  the 
piece  of  his  rear-rank  man  to  him,  and  all  resume  the  order. 

481.  Should  any  squad  have  Nos.  2  and  3  blank  files,  No.  1 
rear  rank  takes  the  place  of  No.  2  rear  rank  in  making  and 
breaking  the  stack ;  the  stacks  made  or  broken,  he  resumes  his 
post. 

Pieces  not  used  in  making  the  stack  are  termed  loose  pieces. 
Pieces  are  never  stacked  with  the  bayonet  fixed. 

THE  OBLIQUE  MAECH. 

482.  For    the    instruction    of   recruits,    the    squad    being   in 
column  or  correctly  aligned,  the  instructor  causes  the  squad 
to  face  half  right  or  half  left,  points  out  to  the  men  their  rela- 
tive positions,  and  explains  that  these  are  to  be  maintained  in 
the  oblique  inarch. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          135 

483.  (1)  Right  (left)  oblique,  (2)  MARCH. 

Each  man  steps  off  in  a  direction  45°  to  the  right  of  his 
original  front.  He  preserves  his  relative  position,  keeping  his 
shoulders  parallel  to  those  of  the  guide  (the  man  on  the  right 
front  of  the  line  or  column ) ,  and  so  regulates  his  steps  that  the 
ranks  remain  parallel  to  their  original  front. 

At  the  command  halt  the  men  halt  and  face  to  the  front. 

To  resume  the  original  direction:  (1)  Forv/ard,  (2)  MARCH. 

The  men  half  face  to  the  left  in  marching  and  then  move 
straight  to  the  front. 

If  at  half  step  or  mark  time  while  obliquing,  the  oblique 
march  is  resumed  by  the  commands:  (1)  Oblique,  (2)  MARCH. 

TO    TURN   ON   A    MOVING   PIVOT. 

484.  Being  in  line:  (1)  Right  (left)  turn,  (2)  MARCH. 

The  movement  is  executed  by  each  rank  successively  and 
on  the  same  ground.  At  the  second  command,  the  pivot  man 
of  the  front  rank  faces  to  the  right  in  marching  and  takes  the 
half  step ;  the  other  men  of  the  rank  oblique  to  the  right  until 
opposite  their  places  in  line,  then  execute  a  second  right  oblique 
and  take  the  half  step  on  arriving  abreast  of  the  pivot  man. 
All  glance  toward  the  marching  flank  while  at  half  step  and 
take  the  full  step  without  command  as  the  last  man  arrives 
on  the  line.  * 

Right  (left)  half  turn  is  executed  in  a  similar  manner.  The 
pivot  man  makes  a  half  change  of  direction  to  the  right  and 
the  other  men  make  quarter  changes  in  obliquing. 

TO  TUBN  ON  A  FIXED  PIVOT. 

485.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  and  march:  (1)  Squad  right  (left), 
<2)  MARCH. 

At  the  second  command,  the  right-flank  man  in  the  front  rank 
faces  to  the  right  in  marching  and  marks  time ;  the  other  front- 
rank  men  oblique  to  the  right,  place  themselves  abreast  of  the 
pivot,  and  mark  time.  In  the  rear  rank  the  third  man  from 
the  right,  followed  in  column  by  the  second  and  first,  moves 
straight  to  the  front  until  in  rear  of  his  front-rank  man,  when 
all  face  to  the  right  in  marching  and  mark  time;  the  other 
number  of  the  rear  rank  moves  straight  to  the  front  four  paces 
and  places  himself  abreast  of  the  man  on  his  right.  Men  on 
the  new  line  glance  toward  the  marching  flank  while  marking 


136         INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

time  and,  as  the  last  man  arrives  on  the  line,  both  ranks  exe- 
cute forward,  inarch,  without  command. 

486.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  and  halt:   (1)  Squad  right  (left), 
(2)  MARCH;    (3)  Squad,  (4)  HALT. 

The  third  command  is  given  immediately  after  the  second. 
The  turn  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  preceding  article, 
except  that  all  men,  on  arriving  on  the  new  line,  mark  time 
until  the  fourth  command  is  given,  when  all  halt.  The  fourth 
command  should  be  given  as  the  last  man  arrives  on  the  line. 

487.  Being  in  line  to  turn  about  and  march:   (1)  Squad  right 
(left)  about,  (2)  MARCH. 

At  the  second  command,  the  front  rank  twice  executes  squad 
right,  initiating  the  second  squad  right  when  the  man  on  the 
marching  flank  has  arrived  abreast  of  the  rank.  In  the  rear 
rank  me  third  man  from  the  right,  followed  by  the  second  and 
first  in  column,  moves  straight  to  the  front  until  on  the  pro- 
longation of  the  line  to  be  occupied  by  the  rear  rank;  changes 
direction  to  the  right ;  moves  in  the  new  direction  until  in  rear 
of  his  front-rank  man,  when  all  face  to  the  right  in  inarching, 
mark  time,  and  glance  toward  the  marching  flank.  The  fourth 
man  marches  on  the  left  of  the  third  to  his  new  position ;  as  he 
arrives  on  the  line,  both  ranks  execute  forward,  march,  with- 
out command. 

488.  Being  in  line  to  turn  about  and  halt:   (1)    Squad  right 
(left)  about,  (2)  MARCH:    (3)  Squad,  (4)  HALT. 

The  third  command  is  given  immediately  after  the  second. 
The  turn  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  preceding  article,  ex- 
cept that  all  men,  on  arriving  on  the  new  line,  mark  time  until 
the  fourth  command  is  given,  when  all  halt.  The  fourth  com- 
mand should  be  given  as  the  last  man  arrives  on  the  line. 

LOADINGS    AND    FIRINGS. 

489.  The   commands   for   loading   and   firing   are    the   same 
whether   standing,   kneeling,   or   lying  down.     The   firings   are 
always  executed  at  a  halt. 

When  kneeling  or  lying  down  in  double  rank,  the  rear  rank 
does  not  load,  aim,  or  fire. 

The  instructions  in  firing  will  be  preceded  by  a  command  for 
loading. 

Loadings  are  executed  in  line  and  skirmish  line  only. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS.         137 

490.  Pieces  having  been  ordered  loaded  are  kept  loaded  with- 
out command  until  the  command  unload,  or  inspection  arms, 
fresh  clips  being  inserted  when  the  magazine  is  exhausted. 

491.  The  aiming  point  or  target   is   carefully  pointed   out* 
This  may  be  done  before  or  after  announcing  the  sight  setting. 
Both  are  indicated  before  giving  the  command  for  firing,  but 
may  be  omitted  when  the  target  appears  suddenly  and  is  un- 
mistakable ;  in  such  case  battle  sight  is  used  if  no  sight  setting 
is  announced. 

492.  The  target  or  aiming  point  having  been  designated  and 
the  sight  setting  announced,  such  designation  or  announcement 
need  not  be  repeated  until  a  change  of  either  or  both  is  neces- 
sary. 

Troops  are  trained  to  continue  their  fire  upon  the  aiming 
point  or  target  designated,  and  at  the  sight  setting  announced, 
until  a  change  is  ordered. 

493.  If  the  men  are  not  already  in  the  position  of  load,  that 
position  is  taken  at  the  announcement  of  the  sight  setting;  if 
the  announcement  is1  omitted,  the  position  is  taken  at  the  first 
command  for  firing. 

494.  When  deployed,  the  use  of  the  sling  as  an  aid  to  accurate 
firing  is  discretionary  with  each  man. 

TO   LOAD. 

495.  Being  in  line  or  skirmish  line  at  halt:  (1)  With  dummy 
(blank  or  ball)  cartridges,  (2)  LOAD. 

At  the  command  load  each  front-rank  man  or  skirmisher 
faces  half  right  and  carries  the  right  foot  to  the  right,  about 
1  foot,  to  such  position  as  will  insure  the  greatest  firmness  and 
steadiness  of  the  body;  raises,  or  lowers,  the  piece  and  drops 
it  into  the  left  hand  at  the  balance,  left  thumb  extended  along 
the  stock,  muzzle  at  the  height  of  the  breast,  and  turns  the 
cut-off  up.  With  the  right  hand  he  turns  and  draws  the  bolt 
back,  takes  a  loaded  clip  and  inserts  the  end  in  the  clip  slots, 
places  the  thumb  on  the  powder  space  of  the  top  cartridge,  the 
fingers  extending  around  the  piece  and  tips  resting  on  the  maga- 
zine floor  plate;  forces  the  cartridges  into  the  magazine  by 
pressing  down  with  the  thumb;  without  removing  the  clip, 
thrusts  the  bolt  home,  turning  down  the  handle;  turns  the 
safety  lock  to  the  "safe"  and  carries  the  hand  to  the  small  of 
the  stock.  Each  rear-rank  man  moves  to  the  right  front,  takes 
a  similar  position  opposite  the  interval  to  the  right  of  his  front- 


138         INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

rank  man,  muzzle  of  the  piece  extending  beyond  the  front  rank, 
arid  loads. 

A  skirmish  line  may  load  while  moving,  the  pieces  being  held 
as  nearly  as  practicable  in  the  position  of  load. 

If  kneeling  or  sitting,  the  position  of  the  piece  is  similar ;  if 
kneeling,  the  left  forearm  rests  on  the  left  thigh;  if  sitting, 
the  elbows  are  supported  by  the  knees.  If  lying  down,  the  left 
hand  vSteadies  and  supports  the  piece  at  the  balance,  the  toe  of 
the  butt  resting  on  the  ground,  the  muzzle  off  the  ground. 

For  reference,  these  positions  (standing,  kneeling,  and  lying 
down)  are  designated  as  that  of  load. 

496.  For  instruction  in  loading:  (1)  Simulate,  (2)  LOAD. 
Executed  as  above  described  except  that  the  cut-off  remains 

"  off  "  and  the  handling  of  cartridges  is  simulated. 

The  recruits  are  first  taught  to  simulate  loading  and  firing; 
after  a  few  lessons  dummy  cartridges  may  be  used.  Later, 
blank  cartridges  may  be  used. 

497.  The  rifle  may  be  used  as  a  single  loader  by  turning  the 
magazine  "  off."     The  magazine  may  be  filled  in  whole  or  in 
part  while  "off"  or  "on"  by  pressing  cartridges  singly  down 
and  back  until  they  are  in  the  proper  place.     The  use  of  the 
rifle  as  a  single  loader  is,  however,  to  be  regarded  as  excep- 
tional. 

TO  UNLOAD. 

498.  UNLOAD. 

Take  the  position  of  load,  turn  the  safety  lock  up  and  move 
bolt  alternately  back  and  forward  until  all  the  cartridges  are 
ejected.  After  the  last  cartridge  is  ejected  the  chamber  is 
closed  by  first  thrusting  the  .bolt  slightly  forward  to  free  it 
from  the  stud  holding  it  in  place  when  the  chamber  is  open, 
pressing  the  follower  down  and  back  to  engage  it  under  the  bolt 
and  then  thrusting  the  bolt  home;  the  trigger  is  pulled.  The 
cartridges  are  then  picked  up,  cleaned,  and  returned  to  the  belt 
and  the  piece  is  brought  to  the  order. 

TO    FI$E    BY    VOLLEY. 

- 

499.  (1)    READY,   (2)   AIM,   (3)   Squad,    (4)   FIRE. 

At  the  command  ready  turn  the  safety  lock  to  the  "  ready  " ; 
at  the  command  aim  raise  the  piece  with  both  hands  and  sup- 
port the  butt  firmly  against  the  hollow  of  the  right  shoulder, 
right  thumb  along  the  stock,  barrel  horizontal,  left  elbow  well 
under  the  piece,  right  elbow  as  high  as  the  shoulder;  incline 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS.          139 

the  head  slightly  forward  and  a  little  to  the  right,  cheek  against 
.  the  stock,  left  eye  closed,  right  eye  looking  through  the  notch 
of  the  rear  sight  so  as  to  perceive  the  object  aimed  at,  second 
joint  of  forefinger  resting  lightly  against  the  front  of  the  trigger 
and  taking  up  the  slack;  top  of  front  sight  is  carefully  raised 
into,  and  held  in,  the  line  of  sight. 

Each  rear-rank  man  aims  through  the  interval  to  the  right  of 
his  file  leader  and  leans  slightly  forward  to  advance  the  muzzle 
of  his  piece  beyond  the  front  rank. 

In  aiming  kneeling,  the  left  elbow  rests  on  the  left  knee, 
point  of  elbow  in  front  of  kneecap.  In  aiming  sitting,  the  el- 
bows are  supported  by  the  knees. 

In  aiming  lying  down,  raise  the  piece  with  both  hands;  rest 
on  both  elbows  and  press  the  butt  firmly  against  the  right 
shoulder. 

At  the  command  fire  press  the  finger  against  the  trigger ;  fire 
without  deranging  the  aim  and  without  lowering  or  turning  the 
piece ;  lower  the  piece  to  the  position  of  load  and  load. 

500.  To  continue  the  firing:   (1)   AIM,   (2)  Squad,   (3)  "EIRE. 
Each  command   is  executed   as   previously   explained.     Load 

(from  magazine)  is  executed  by  drawing  back  and  thrusting 
home  the  bolt  with  the  right  hand,  leaving  the  safety  lock  at 
the  "  ready." 

TO   FIEE   AT   WILL. 

501.  FIRE  AT  WILL. 

Each  man,  independently  of  the  others,  comes  to  the  ready, 
aims  carefully  and  deliberately  at  the  aiming  point  or  target, 
fires,  loads,  and  continues  the  firing  until  ordered  to  suspend 
or  cease  firing. 

502.  To  increase  (decrease)   the  rate  of  fire  in  progress  the 
instructor  shouts:  FASTER   (SLOWER). 

Men  are  trained  to  fire  at  the  rate  of  about  three  shots  per 
minute  at  effective  ranges  and  five  or  six  at  close  ranges,  de- 
voting the  minimum  of  time  to  loading  and  the  maximum  to 
deliberate  aiming.  To  illustrate  the  necessity  for  deliberation, 
and  to  habituate  men  to  combat  conditions,  small  and  compara- 
tively indistinct  targets  are  designated. 

TO  FIKE  BY   CLIP. 

503.  CLIP  FIRE. 

Executed  in  the  same  manner  as  fire  at  will,  except  that  each 
man,  after  having  exhausted  the  cartridges  then  in  the  piece, 
suspends  firing. 


140         INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

TO   SUSPEND  FIRING. 

504.  The  instructor  blows  a  long  blast  of  the  whistle  and  re- 
peats same,  it'  necessary,  or  commands :  SUSPEND  FIRING. 

Firing  stops ;  pieces  are  held,  loaded  and  locked,  in  a  position 
of  readiness  for  instant  resumption  of  tiring,  rear  sights  un- 
changed. The  men  continue  to  observe  the  target  or  aiming 
point,  or  the  place  at  which  the  target  disappeared,  or  at  which 
it  is  expected  to  reappear. 

This  whistle  signal  may  be  used  as  a  preliminary  to  cease 
firing. 

TO  CEASE  FIRING. 

505.  CEASE  FIRING. 

Firing  stops ;  pieces  not  already  there  are  brought  to  the  posi- 
tion of  load ;  those  not  loaded  are  loaded ;  sights  are  laid,  pieces 
are  locked  and  brought  to  the  order. 

Cease  firing  is  used  for  long  pauses,  to  prepare  for  changes  of 
position,  or  to  steady  the  men. 

506.  Commands  for  suspending  or  ceasing  fire  may  be  given 
at  any  time  after  the  preparatory  command  for  firing,  whether 
the  firing  has  actually  commenced  or  not. 

THE  RIFLE. 

507.  Most  of  the  operating  parts  of  the  rifle  may  be  included 
under  the  bolt  mechanism  and  magazine  mechanism. 

(1)  The  bolt  mechanism  consists  of  the  bolt,  sleeve,  sleeve 
lock,  extractor,  extractor  collar,  cocking  piece,  safety  lock,  firing 
pin,  firing-pin  sleeve,  striker,  and  mainspring. 

(2)  The  bolt  moves  backward  and  forward  and  rotates  in  the 
well  of  the  receiver ;  it  carries  a  cartridge,  either  from  the  maga- 
zine or  one  placed  by  hand  in  front  of  it,  into  the  chamber  and 
supports  its  head  when  fired.  , 

(3)  The  sleeve  unites  the  parts  of  the  bolt  mechanism  and  its 
rotation  with  the  bolt  is  prevented  by  the  lugs  on  its  sides  coming 
in  contact  with  the  receiver. 

(4)  The  hook  of  the  extractor  engages  in.  the  groove  of  the 
cartridge  case  and  retains  the  head  of  the  latter  in  the  counter- 
sink of  the  bolt  until  the  case  is  ejected. 

(5)  The  safety  lock  when  turned  to  the  left  is  inoperative; 
when  turned  to  the  right — which  can  only  be  done  when  the 
piece  is  cocked — the  point  of  the  spindle  enters  its  notch  in 
the  bolt  and  locks  the  bolt ;  at  the  same  time  its  cam  forces  the 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.         141 

cocking  piece  slightly  to  the  rear,  out  of  contact  with  the  sear, 
and  locks  the  firing  pin. 

508.  The  magazine  mechanism  includes  the  floor  plate,  fol- 
lower, magazine  spring,  and  cut-off. 

509.  (1)  To    charge    the   magazine,    see   that   the  cut-off  is 
turned  up  showing  "  on,"  draw  the  bolt  fully  to  the  rear,  insert 
the  cartridges  from  a  clip  or  from  the  hand,  and  close  the  bolt. 
To  charge  the  magazine  from  a  clip  place  either  end  of  a  loaded 
clip  in  its  seat  in  the  receiver  and,  with  the  thumb  of  the  right 
hand  press  the  cartridges  down  into  the  magazine  until  the  top 
cartridge  is  caught  by  the  right  edge  of  the  receiver.     The 
cartridge  ramp  guides  the  bullet  and  cartridge  case  into  the 
chamber.    The  magazine  can  be  filled,  if  partly  filled,  by  insert- 
ing cartridges  one  by  one. 

(2)  Pushing  the  bolt  forward,  after  charging  the  magazine, 
ejects  the  clip. 

510.  (1)  When  the  cut-off  is  turned  down  the  magazine  is 
"  off."    The  bolt  can  not  be  drawn  fully  back,  and  its  front  end 
projecting  over  the  rear  end  of  the  upper  cartridge  holds  it 
down  in  the  magazine  below  the  action  of  the  bolt.    The  maga- 
zine mechanism  then  remains  inoperative,  and  the  arm  can  be 
used  as  a  single  loader,  the  cartridges  in  the  magazine  being 
held  in  reserve.    The  arm  can  readily  be  used  as  a  single  loader 
with  the  magazine  empty. 

(2)  When  the  cut-off  is  turned  up,  the  magazine  is  "on"; 
the  bolt  can  be  drawn  fully  to  the  rear,  permitting  the  top  car- 
tridge to  rise  high  enough  to  be  caught  by  the  bolt  in  its  forward 
movement.  As  the  bolt  is  closed,  this  cartridge  is  pushed  for- 
ward into  the  chamber,  being  held  up  during  its  passage  by  the 
pressure  of  those  below.  The  last  one  in  the  magazine  is  held  up 
by  the  follower,  the  rib  on  which  directs  it  into  the  chamber. 

511.  In  magazine  fire,  after  the  last  cartridge  has  been  fired 
Miid  the  bolt  drawn  fully  to  the  rear,  the  follower  rises  and 
holds  the  bolt  open  to  show  that  the  magazine  is  empty. 

PRECAUTIONS. 

512.  (1)   If  it  is  desired  to  carry  the  piece  cocked,  with  a 
cartridge  in  the  chamber,  the  bolt  mechanism  should  be  secured 
by   turning   the   safety   lock   to  the   right.     Under   no   circum- 
stances should  the  firing  pin  be  let  down  by  hand  on  a  cartridge 
in  the  chamber. 


142          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

(2)  To  obtain  positive  ejection,  and  to  insure  the  bolt  catch- 
ing  the  top  cartridge  in  magazine,  when  loading  from  the  maga- 
zine, the  bolt  must  be  drawn  fully  to  the  rear  in  opening  it. 

(3)  When  the  bolt  is  closed,  or  slightly  forward,  the  cut-oil' 
may  be  turned  up  or  down  as  desired.     When  the  bolt  is  in  its 
rearmost  position,  to  pass  from  loading  from  the  magazine  to 
single  loading,   it   is  necessary  to  force   the  top  cartridge  or 
follower  below  the  reach  of  the  bolt,  to  push  the  bolt  slightly 
forward,  and  to  turn  the  cut-off  down,  showing  "  off." 

(4)  In  case  of  a  misfire  it  is  unsafe  to  draw  back  the  bolt 
immediately,  as  it  may  be  a  case  of  hangfire.     In  such  cases 
the  piece  should  be  cocked  by  drawing  back  the  cocking  piece. 

(5)  It  is  essential  for  the  proper  working  and  preservation 
of  all  cams  that  they  be  kept  lubricated. 

DISMOUNTING  AND  ASSEMBLING. 

513.  The  bolt  and  magazine  mechanism  can  be  dismounted 
without  removing  the  stock.     The  latter  should  never  be  done 
except  for  making  repairs,  and  then  only  by  some  selected  and 
instructed  man. 

TO    DISMOUNT    BOLT    MECHANISM. 

514.  (1)  Place  the  cut-off  at  the  center  notch ;  cock  the  arm 
and  turn  the  safety  lock  to  a  vertical  position,  raise  the  bolt 
handle  and  draw  out  the  bolt. 

(2)  Hold  bolt  in  left  hand,  press  sleeve  lock  in  with  thumb 
of  right  hand  to  unlock  sleeve  from  bolt  and  unscrew  sleeve 
by  turning  to  the  left. 

(3)  Hold   sleeve  between  forefinger   and  thumb   of  the  left 
hand,  draw  cocking  piece  back  with  middle  finger  and  thumb 
of  right  hand,  turn  safety  lock  down  to  the  left  with  the  fore- 
finger of  the  right  hand  in  order  to  allow  the  cocking  piece  to 
move  forward  in  sleeve,  thus  partially  relieving  the  tension  of 
mainspring;  with  the  cocking  piece  against  the  breast,  draw 
back  the   firing-pin   sleeve  with   the  forefinger   and  thumb   of 
right  hand   and  hold  it  in  this  position  while  removing  the 
striker  with  the  left  hand ;  remove  firing-pin  sleeve  and  main- 
spring ;  pull  firing  pin  out  of  sleeve ;   turn  safety-lock  thumb 
piece  to  the  right  on  sleeve  and  draw  it  to  the  rear  through  the 
groove  made  in  sleeve  for  this  purpose;  turn  the  extractor  to 
the  right,  forcing  its  tongue  out  of  its  groove  in  the  front  of 
the  bolt,  and  force  the  extractor  forward  and  off  the  bolt. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          143 

TO    ASSEMBLE    BOLT    MECHANISM. 

515.  (1)   Grasp  with  the  left  hand  the  rear  of  the  bolt,  handle 
up,   and  turn  the  extractor  collar  with  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger of  the  right  hand  until  its  lug  is  on  a  line  with  the  safety 
lug  on  the  bolt ;  take  the  extractor  in  the  right  hand  and  insert 
the  lug  on  the  collar  in  the  undercuts  in  the  extractor  by  push- 
ing the  extractor  to  the  rear  until  its  tongue  comes  in  contact 
with  the  rim  on  the  face  of  the  bolt  (a  slight  pressure  with  the 
left  thumb  on  the  top  of  the  rear  part  of  the  extractor  assists 
in  this  operation)  ;  turn  the  extractor  to  the  right  until  it  is 
over  the  right  lug;  take  the  bolt  in  the  right  hand  and  press 
the  hook  of  the  extractor  against  the  butt  plate  or  some  rigid 
object  until  the  tongue  on  the  extractor  enters  its  groove  in 
the  bolt. 

(2)  Place  the  safety  lock,  through  the  dismounting  groove, 
into  position  on  the  sleeve  and  turn  it  down  to  the  left  so  as 
to  permit  the  firing  pin  to  enter  the  sleeve  as  far  as  possible ; 
place  the  cocking  piece  against  the  breast  and  put  on  main- 
spring, firing-pin  sleeve,  and  striker.     Holding  the  cocking  piece 
between  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  left  hand,  draw  the 
cocking  piece  back  with  thumb  and  middle  finger  of  the  right 
hand  and  turn  the  safety  lock  to  a  vertical  position  with  the 
forefinger  of  the  right  hand ;  insert  the  firing  pin  in  the  bolt 
and  screw  up  the  sleeve  (by  turning  it  to  the  right)  until  the 
sleeve  lock  enters  its  notch  on  the  bolt. 

(3)  See  that  the  cut-oft'  is  at  the  center  notch;  hold  the  piece 
under  floor  plate  in  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand,  the  thumb 
extending  over  the  left  side  of  the  receiver;  take  bolt  in  right 
hand  with  safety  lock  in  a  vertical  position  and  safety  lug  up ; 
press  rear  end  of  follower  down  with  left  thumb  arid  push  bolt 
into  the  receiver;  lower  bolt  handle;  turn  safety  lock  and  cut- 
off down  to  the  left  with  right  hand. 

TO  DISMOUNT  THE   MAGAZINE   MECHANISM. 

516.  (1)  With  the  bullet  end  of  a  cartridge  press  on  the  floor 
plate  catch  (through  the  hole  in  the  floor  plate),  at  the  same 
time  drawing  the  bullet  to  the  rear;   this  releases  the  floor 
plate. 

(2)  Raise  the  rear  end  of  the  first  limb  of  the  magazine 
spring  high  enough  to  clear  the  lug  on  the  floor  plate  and  draw 
it  out  of  its  mortise ;  proceed  in  the  same  manner  to  remove  the 
follower. 


144          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

(3)  To  assemble  magazine  spring  and  follower  to  floor  plate, 
reverse  operation  of  dismounting. 

(4)  Insert  the  follower  and  magazine  spring  in  the  magazine, 
place  the  tenon  on  the  front  end  of  the  floor  plate  in  its  recess 
in  the  magazine,  then  place  the  lug  on  the  rear  end  of  the  floor 
plate  in  its  slot  in  the  guard,  and  press  the  rear  end  of  the  floor 
plate  forward  and  inward  at  the  same  time,  forcing  the  floor 
plate  into  its  seat  in  the  guard. 

PKECAUTIONS. 

517.  Unless  the  bolt  is  drawn  fully  back  the  ejector  will  fail 
to  work,  and  in  magazine  fire  it  will  cause  a  jam. 

When  a  misfire  occurs,  press  the  bolt  handle  well  down,  pull 
the  cocking  piece  to  the  rear,  and  try  again.  Unless  the  bolt 
handle  is  fully  down  the  firing  pin  does  not  strike  with  full 
force.  Almost  all  misfires  are  due  to  this  fault. 

See  that  the  guard  screws  are  kept  tight.  Loose  guard  screws 
not  only  prevent  good  shooting  but  also  interfere  with  the 
proper  feeding  of  cartridges  from  the  magazine,  often  resulting 
in  a  jam. 

For  practicing  the  motions  of  rapid  fire  with  the  rifle  un- 
loaded, turn  the  cut-off  down  or  "  off,"  otherwise  the  bolt  can 
not  be  worked  back  and  forth. 

518.  The  rifle  is  a  weapon  of  precision,  and  demands  proper 
care  and  cleaning.    A  lack  of  care  soon  ruins  its  accuracy. 

After  a  day's  shooting  the  bore  demands  special  attention,  as 
the  residuum  from  smokeless  powder  soon  corrodes  it,  and 
should  be  removed  as  soon  as  practicable. 

There  are  three  kinds  of  fouling : 

(1)  A  black  deposit,  easily  removed  by  oily  rags. 

(2)  An  acid  deposit  or  gas,  forced  into  the  texture  of  the 
steel,  which  gradually  comes  out,  and,  unless  removed,  causes 
rust.    Cleaning  must  be  repeated  daily  for  several  days. 

(3)  Metal   fouling,   caused  by  particles  of  the  cupro-nickel 
jacket  of  the  bullet  adhering  to  the  bore.,    This  rarely  happens 
with  the  present  ammunition,  and  its  removal  is  usually  not 
only  impracticable  in  the  field  but  unless  done  by  an  experi- 
enced man  may  cause  serious  damage  to  the  bore. 

519.  To  clean  the  rifle. —  (1)  Remove  the  bolt  and  clean  from 
the  breech  end.    Never  clean  from  the  muzzle. 

(2)  Use  a  cleaning  rod  and  small  piece  of  cloth  about  1* 
inches  square,  then  lightly  oil  the  bore  by  using  an  oiled  rag. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          145 

The  metal  and  working  parts  are  also  cleaned  by  using  dry 
rags,  and  then  oiling  with  a  slightly  oiled  rag  to  prevent  rust- 
ing and  to  lubricate  working  parts. 

(3)  No  more  oil  than  this  light  oiling  should  be  used,  be- 
cause any  surplus  oil  makes  the  rifle  disagreeable  to  handle, 
collects  dirt  and  grit,  finds  its  way  into  and  around  the  bolt 
mechanism,  and  often  flies  back  into  the  firer's  face  and  eyes 
when  he  fires.    The  bolt  handle  should  be  dry  and  entirely  free 
from  oil,  otherwise  in  operating  the  bolt  it  is  difficult  to  grasp 
firmly. 

(4)  If  available,  a  saturated  solution  of  soda  and  water  may 
be  used  to  clean  the  bore,  thoroughly  drying  the  bore  with  dry 
patches  before  oiling.     Or  the  following  mixture  may  be  used: 
Amyl  acetate,  2  parts ;  acetone,  2  parts ;  gas  engine  oil,  1  part. 
Dissolve  the  oil  in  the  acetate  and  add  the  acetone. 

(5)  Whatever  the  method  of  cleaning,  the  bore  should  be 
cleaned  daily  for  several  days. 

(6)  Cosmoline,  machine  oil,  or  any  other  oil  which  will  not 
rust  the  metal  is  suitable  for  oiling  rifles.     Sperm  oil  is  the 
best  for  lubricating  metallic  bearing  and  contact  surfaces,  a 
somewhat  heavier  oil  for  the  bore.    Never  use  emery  or  any 
other  material  which  will  scratch  the  metal. 

(7)  The  stock  and  hand  guard  may  be  coated  with  raw  lin- 
seed oil  and  polished  by  rubbing  with  the  hand. 

SIGHT   SETTING. 

520.  The  marks  opposite  the  peep  indicate  where  the  sight  is 
to  be  set.    The  numbers  on  the  sight  leaf  refer  to  the  marks 
below  the  numbers ;  for  example,  the  figure  6  is  above  the  600- 
yard  mark.     Changes  in  elevation  of  25,  50,  and  75  yards  have 
to  be  made,  and  when  there  are  no  marks  for  these  settings 
they  have  to  be  estimated,  and  with  great  care,  for  a  slight  in- 
accuracy makes  a  big  difference  in  the  point  of  hit. 

521.  The  marks  on   the  wind  gauge  are  called  points,  and 
changes  in  windage  of  quarter  points  may  have  to  be  made. 

The  bullet  is  carried  in  the  same  direction  that  the  sights  are 
moved ;  for  example,  if  shots  strike  above  and  to  the  right  of 
the  bull's-eye,  the  elevation  should  be  lowered  and  the  windage 
set  to  the  left.  Winds  carry  the  bullet  to  the  right  or  left  with 
the  wind ;  therefore  the  windage  is  set  to  windward. 
34079—21 10 


146          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

522.  The  elevation  is  not  always  set  at  exactly  the  actual 
range  at  which  the  firing  takes  place.     With  some  rifles  the 
elevation  is  set  above  the  range  and  with  others  below  it,  and 
all  rifles  are  not  exactly  true  for  windage. 

To  teach  sight  setting  it  is  not  sufficient  to  explain  it  to  the 
men.    They  must  be  practiced  in  it. 

NOTES  ON  PISTOL  SHOOTING. 

523.  When  a  pistol  is  first  taken  in  hand  it  should  be  exam- 
ined to  make  sure  that  it  is  not  loaded. 

524.  Both  the  front  sight  and  the  rear  sighting  groove  should 
be  blackened.     When  the  pistol  is  aimed  the  front  sight  should 
be  seen  through  the  middle  of  the  rear  sighting  groove  and  the 
top   of  the  front  sight  should  be  flush  with   the  top  of  the 
groove.     The  part  of  the  target  to  be  aimed  at  must  be  deter- 
mined by  practice.     With  most  pistols,  at  25  yards  the  aim  is 
usually  taken  at  the  bottom  edge  or  in  the  bottom  part  of  the 
bull's-eye,  and  at  50  yards  in  the  center  or  in  the  upper  part 
of  the  bull's-eye. 

525.  Grasp  the  stock  of  the  pistol  as  high  up  as  you  can,  so 
that  the  barrel,  hand,  and  arm  are  as  nearly  as  possible  in  one 
straight  line.     The  thumb  should  be  extended  along  the  upper 
pavt  of  the  frame.     The  second  joint  of  the  forefinger  should  be 
on  the  trigger. 

526.  Start  with  a  light  grip  and  gradually  squeeze  with  the 
whoje  hand,  the  trigger  finger  squeezing  gradually  back  as  the 
grip  is  tightened,  and  continue  squeezing  without  a  jerk  until 
the  pistol  fires.     Decide  to  call  the  hold  and  to  keep  the  right 
eye  open. 

527.  If  the  hits  are  bunched  to  one  side,  they  can  be  moved  to 
the  right  by  increasing  the  pressure  of  the  thumb  against  the 
left  side  of  the  pistol  or  to  the  left  by  decreasing  the  pressure. 

528.  Snapping — that  is,  aiming  and  squeezing  the  trigger  with 
the  pistol  not  loaded — is  most  valuable  practice.     No  man  should 
load  and  fire  until  he  has  snapped  several  times  to  get  ac- 
quainted  with   the   trigger   pull   of   the   pistol.     Expert  pistol 
shots  do  a  great  deal  of  snapping  instead  of  a  great  deal  of 
firing.     Steady  holding  can  be  acquired  only  by  much  snapping 
practice. 

529.  Positions. — In  the  prone  position  the  right  elbow  has  ex- 
cellent support  on  the  ground.     In  the  kneeling  position  the 
firer  may  kneel  on   either  knee.    Kneeling  on  the  left  knee 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          147 

affords  an  excellent  rest  on  the  right  knee  for  the  elbow.  In 
the  squatting  position  both  elbows  rest  on  the  knees.  In  the 
standing  position  face  the  target  squarely  or  nearly  so.  Stand 
upright,  not  craning  the  head  forward,  and  extend  the  arm  to 
its  full  stretch. 

NOTES  ON  THE  CLEANING  AND   CARE  OF  RIFLES. 

530.  The  following  is  quoted  from  Ordnance  Department, 
United  States  Army,  pamphlet  No.  1917,  Description  and  Rules 
for  the  Management  of  the  United  States  Rifle,  caliber  .30, 
model  of  1917 : 

"  CLEANING  TIJE  RIFLE. 

"  The  proper  care  of  the  bore  requires  conscientious,  careful 
work,  but  it  pays  well  in  reduced  labor  of  cleaning  and  in  pro- 
longed accuracy  life  of  the  barrel,  and  better  results  in  target 
practice.  Briefly  stated,  the  care  of  the  bore  consists  in  re- 
moving the  fouling  resulting  from  firing,  to  obtain  a  chemically 
clean  surface,  and  coating  this  surface  with  a  film  of  oil  to 
prevent  rusting.  The  fouling  which  results  from  firing  is  of 
two  kinds — one,  the  products  of  combustion  of  the  powder ;  the 
other,  cupro-nickel  scraped  off  (under  the  abrading  action  of 
irregularities  or  grit  in  the  bore).  Powder  fouling,  because  of 
its  acid  reaction,  is  highly  corrosive ;  that  is,  it  will  induce  rust 
and  must  be  removed.  Metal  fouling  of  itself  is  inactive,  but 
may  cover  powder  fouling  and  prevent  the  action  of  cleaning 
agents  until  removed,  and  when  accumulated  in  noticeable 
quantities  it  reduces  the  accuracy  of  the  rifle. 

"  Powder  fouling  may  be  readily  removed  by  scrubbing  with 
hot  soda  solution,  but  this  solution  has  no  effect  on  the  metal 
fouling  of  cupro-nickel.  It  is  therefore  necessary  to  remove 
all  metal  fouling  before  assurance  can  be  had  that  all  powder 
fouling  has  been  removed  and  that  the  bore  may  be  safely 
oiled.  Normally,  after  firing  a  barrel  in  good  condition,  the 
metal  fouling  is  so  slight  as  to  be  hardly  perceptible.  It  is 
merely  a  smear  of  infinitesimal  thickness,  easily  removed  by 
solvents  of  cupro-nickel.  However,  due  to  pitting,  the  presence 
of  dust,  other  abrasives,  or  to  accumulation,  metal  fouling 
may  occur  in  clearly  visible  flakes  or  patches  of  much  greater 
thickness,  much  more  difficult  to  remove. 

"  In  cleaning  the  bore  after  firing,  it  is  well  to  proceed  as 
follows:  Swab  out  the  bore  with  soda  solution  (see  below)  to 


148          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

remove  powder  fouling.  A  convenient  method  is  to  insert  the 
muzzle  of  the  rifle  into  the  can  containing  the  soda  solution 
and,  with  the  cleaning  rod  inserted  from  the  breech,  pump  the 
barrel  full  a  few  times.  Remove  and  dry  with  a  couple  of 
patches.  Examine  the  bore  to  see  that  there  are  in  evidence 
no  patches  of  metal  fouling  which,  if  present,  can  be  readily  de- 
tected by  the  naked  eye,  then  swab  out  with  the  swabbing 
solution — a  dilute  metal-fouling  solution.  (See  below.)  The 
amount  of  swabbing  required  witL  the  swabbing  solution  can 
be  determined  only  by  experience  and  by  observation  of  the 
color  of  the  patches.  Swabbing  should  be  continued  as  long 
as  the  wiping  patch  is  discolored  by  a  bluish-green  stain. 
Normally  a  couple  of  minutes'  work  is  sufficient.  Dry  thor- 
oughly and  oil. 

"  The  proper  method  of  oiling  a  barrel  is  as  follows  :  Wipe  the 
cleaning  rod  dry;  select  a  clean  patch  and  thoroughly  saturate 
it  with  sperm  oil  or  warmed  cosmic,  being  sure  that  the  cosmic 
has  penetrated  the  patch;  scrub  the  bore  with  the  patch,  finally 
drawing  the  patch  smoothly  from  the  muzzle  to  the  breech, 
allowing  the  cleaning  rod  to  turn  with  the  rifling.  The  bore 
will  be  found  now  to  be  smooth  and  bright,  so  that  any  subse- 
quent rust  and  sweating  can  be  easily  detected  by  inspection. 

"  If  patches  of  metal  fouling  are  seen  upon  visual  inspection 
of  the  bore,  the  standard  metal-fouling  solution  prepared  as 
hereinafter  prescribed  must  be  used.  After  scrubbing  out  with 
the  soda  solution  plug  the  bore  at  the  breech  with  a  cork  at  the 
front  end  of  the  chamber,  or  where  the  rifling  begins.  Slip  a 
2-inch  section  of  rubber  hose  over  the  muzzle  down  to  the  sight 
and  fill  with  the  standard  solution  to  at  least  one-half  inch 
above  the  muzzle  of  the  barrel.  Let  it  stand  for  30  minutes, 
pour  out  the  standard  solution,  remove  hose  and  breech  plug, 
and  swab  out  thoroughly  with  soda  solution  to  neutralize  and 
remove  all  trace  of  ammonia  and  powder  fouling.  Wipe  the 
barrel  clean,  dry  and  oil.  With  few  exceptions,  one  application 
is  sufficient,  but  if  all  fouling  is  not  removed,  as  determined  by 
careful  visual  inspection  of  the  bore  and  of  the  wiping  patches, 
repeat  as  described  above. 

"After  properly  cleaning  with  either  the  swabbing  solution 
or  the  standard  solution,  as  has  just  been  described,  the  bore 
should  be  clean  and  safe  to  oil  and  put  away,  but  as  a  measure 
of  safety  a  patch  should  always  be  run  through  the  bore  on  the 
next  day  and  the  bore  and  wiping  patch  examined,  to  insure 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          149 

that  cleaning  has  been  properly  accomplished.    The  bore  should 
then  be  oiled,  as  described  above. 

"  If  the  swabbing  solution  or  the  standard  metal-fouling  solu- 
tion is  not  available,  the  barrel  should  be  scrubbed,  as  already 
described,  with  the  soda  solution,  dried  and  oiled  with  a  light 
oil.  At  the  end  of  24  hours  it  should  again  be  cleaned,  when  it 
will  usually  be  found  to  have  '  sweated ' ;  that  is,  rust  having 
formed  under  the  smear  of  metal  fouling  where  powder  fouling 
was  present,  the  surface  is  puffed  up.  Usually  a  second  clean- 
ing is  sufficient,  but  to  insure  safety  it  should  be  again  exam- 
ined at  the  end  of  a  few  days  before  final  oiling.  The  swabbing 
solution  should  always  be  used,  if  available,  for  it  must  be 
remembered  that  each  puff  when  the  bore  *  sweats '  is  an  incipi- 
ent rust  pit. 

"A  clean,  dry  surface  having  been  obtained,  to  prevent  rust 
it  is  necessary  to  coat  every  portion  of  this  surface  with  a  film 
of  neutral  oil.  If  the  protection  required  is  but  temporary  and 
the  arm  is  to  be  cleaned  or  fired  in  a  few  days,  a  sperm  oil  may 
be  used.  This  is  easily  applied  and  easily  removed,  but  has  not 
sufficient  body  to  hold  its  surface  for  more  than  a  few  days. 
If  rifles  are  to  be  prepared  for  storage  or  shipment,  a  heavier 
oil,  such  as  cosmic,  must  be  used. 

"  In  preparing  arms  for  storage  or  shipment  they  should  be 
cleaned  with  particular  care,  using  the  metal-fouling  solution  as 
described  above.  Care  should  be  taken,  insured  by  careful  in- 
spection on  succeeding  day  or  days,  that  the  cleaning  is  properly 
done  and  all  traces  of  ammonia  solution  removed.  The  bore  is 
then  ready  to  be  coated  with  cosmic.  At  ordinary  temperatures 
cosmic  is  not  fluid.  In  order,  therefore,  to  insure  that  every 
part  of  the  surface  is  coated  with  a  film  of  oil,  the  cosmic  should 
be  warmed.  Apply  the  cosmic  first  with  a  brush ;  then,  with  the 
breech  plugged,  fill  the  barrel  to  the  muzzle,  pour  out  the  sur- 
plus, remove  the  ping,  and  allow  to  drain.  It  is  believed  that 
more  rifles  are  ruined  by  improper  preparation  for  storage  than 
from  any  other  cause.  If  the  bore  is  not  clean  when  oiled — 
that  is,  if  powder  fouling  is  present  or  rust  has  started — a  half 
inch  of  cosmic  on  the  outside  will  not  stop  its  action  and  the 
barrel  will  be  ruined.  Remember  that  the  surface  must  be  per- 
fectly cleaned  before  the  heavy  oil  is  applied.  If  the  instruc- 
tions as  given  above  are  carefully  followed  arms  may  be  stored 
for  years  without  harm. 


150          INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GITAKD  STATIONS. 

PREPARATION  OF  SOLUTIONS. 

"  Soda  solution. — This  should  be  a  saturated  solution  of  sal 
soda  (carhonate  of  soda).  A  strength  of  at  least  20  per  cent  is 
necessary.  The  spoon  referred  to  in  the  following  directions  is 
the  model  of  1910  spoon  issued  in  the  mess  outfit. 

"  Sal  soda,  one-fourth  pound,  or  4  heaping  spoonfuls ;  water, 
1  pint  or  cup,  model  of  1910,  to  upper  rivets.  The  sal  soda  will 
dissolve  more  readily  in  hot  water. 

"  Swabbing  solution. — Ammonium  persulphate,  60  grains,  one- 
half  spoonful  smoothed  off ;  ammonia,  28  per  cent,  6  ounces,  or 
three-eighths  of  a  pint,  or  12  spoonfuls ;  water,  4  ounces,  or  one- 
fourth  pint,  or  8  spoonfuls.  Dissolve  the  ammonium  persul- 
phate in  the  water  and  add  the  ammonia.  Keep  in.  tightly 
corked  bottle ;  pour  out  only  what  is  necessary  at  the  time,  and 
keep  the  bottle  corked. 

•'  Standard  metal-fouling  solution. — Ammonium  persulphate, 
1  ounce,  or  2  medium  heaping  spoonfuls ;  ammonium  carbonate, 
200  grains;  ammonia,  28  per  cent,  6  ounces,  or  three-eighths 
pint,  or  12  spoonfuls ;  water,  4  ounces,  or  one-fourth  pint,  or  8 
spoonfuls.  Powder  the  persulphate  and  carbonate  together,  dis- 
solve in  the  water,  and  add  the  ammonia ;  mix  thoroughly  and 
allow  to  stand  for  one  hour  before  using.  It  should  be  kept  in 
a  strong  bottle,  tightly  corked.  The  solution  should  not  be  used 
more  than  twice,  and  used  solution  should  not  be  mixed  with 
unused  solution,  but  should  be  bottled  separately.  The  solution, 
when  mixed,  should  be  used  within  30  days.  Care  should  be 
used  in  mixing  and  using  this  solution  to  prevent  injury  to  the 
rifle.  The  ammonia  solution  should  not  be  used  in  a  warm 
barrel.  An  experienced  noncommissioned  officer  should  mix  the 
solution  and  superintend  its  use. 

"  Neither  of  these  ammonia  solutions  has  any  appreciable 
action  on  steel  when  not  exposed  to  the  air,  but  if  allowed  to 
evaporate  on  steel  they  attack  it  rapidly.  Care  should,  there- 
fore, be  taken  that  none  spills  on  the  mechanism  and  that  the 
barrel  is  washed  out  promptly  with  soda  solution.  The  first 
application  of  soda  solution  removes  the  greater  portion  of  the 
powder  fouling  arid  permits  a  more  effective  and  economical 
use  of  the  ammonia  solution.  These  ammonia  solutions  are 
expensive  and  should  be  used  economically. 

"  It  is  a  fact  recognized  by  all  that  a  highly  polished  steel 
surface  rusts  much  less  easily  than  one  which  is  roughened; 
also,  that  a  barrel  which  is  pitted  fouls  much  more  rapidly 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          151 

than  one  which  is  smooth.  Every  effort,  therefore,  should  be 
made  to  prevent  the  formation  of  pits,  which  are  merely  en- 
larged rust  spots,  and  which  not  only  affect  the  accuracy  of 
the  arm  but  increase  the  labor  of  cleaning. 

•'The  chambers  of  rifles  are  frequently  neglected  because 
they  are  not  readily  inspected.  Care  should  be  taken  to  see 
that  they  are  cleaned  as  thoroughly  as  the  bore.  A  roughened 
chamber  delays  greatly  the  rapidity  of  fire  and  not  infrequently 
causes  shells  to  stick. 

"A  cleaning  rack  should  be  provided  for  every  barracks. 
Rifles  should  always  be  cleaned  from  the  breech,  thus  avoiding 
possible  injury  to  the  rifling  at  the  muzzle  which  would  affect 
the  shooting  adversely.  If  the  bore  for  a  length  of  6  inches 
at  the  muzzle  is  perfect,  a  minor  injury  near  the  chamber  will 
have  little  effect  on  the  accuracy  of  the  rifle.  The  rifle  should 
be  cleaned  as  soon  as  the  firing  for  the  day  is  completed.  The 
fouling  is  easier  to  remove  then,  and  if  left  longer  it  will  cor- 
rode the  barrel. 

"  If  gas  escapes  at  the  base  of  the  cartridge,  it  will  probably 
enter  the  well  of  the  bolt  through  the  striker  hole.  In  this 
case  the  bolt  mechanism  must  be  dismounted  and  the  parts  and 
well  of  the  bolt  thoroughly  cleaned. 

"  Before  assembling  the  bolt  mechanism  the  firing  pin,  the 
barrel  of  the  sleeve,  the  body  of  striker,  the  well  of  bolt,  and 
all  cams  should  be  lightly  oiled. 

"  Many  of  the  parts  can  generally  be  cleaned  with  dry  rags. 
All  parts  after  cleaning  should  be  wiped  with  an  oiled  rag. 

"  The  best  method  of  applying  oil  is  to  rub  with  a  piece  of 
cotton  cloth  upon  which  a  few  drops  of  oil  have  been  placed, 
thereby  avoiding  the  use  of  an  unnecessary  amount  of  oil ;  this 
method  will,  even  in  the  absence  of  the  oiler,  serve  for  the  cams 
and  bearings,  which  should  be  kept  continually  oiled. 

"Any  part  that  may  appear  to  move  hard  can  generally  be 
freed  by  the  use  of  a  little  oil. 

"  The  stock  and  hand  guard  may  be  coated  with  raw  linseed 
oil  and  polished  by  rubbing  with  the  hand. 

"  Sperm  oil  should  be  used  only  for  lubricating  metallic  bear- 
ing and  contact  surfaces. 

"  For  the  chamber  and  bore  only  cosmoline  or  cosmic  should  be 
used.  This  should  be  applied  also  to  all  metallic  surfaces,  to 
prevent  rusting  when  arms  are  stored  or  when  not  used  for  an 
appreciable  length  of  time." 


152          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

The  solutions  for  cleaning  and  removing  metal  fouling  and 
for  oiling  barrels  of  rifles  mentioned  above  are  made  in  quanti- 
ties for  cleaning  a  large  number  of  rifles.  The  soda  solution 
can  be  prepared  at  Coast  Guard  stations,  as  sal  soda  is  readily 
obtained  in  suitable  quantities.  In  lieu  of  the  "  swabbing  solu- 
tion "  and  "standard  metal  fouling  solution"  the  Coast  Guard 
has  found  that  "  3-in-l "  oil  serves  the  purpose  of  these  two 
solutions  and  is  more  economical  for  cleaning  a  small  number  of 
rifles,  such  as  is  found  at  Coast  Guarl  stations. 

NOTES  ON  INFANTRY  DRILL. 

531.  In  the  Landing-Force  Manual,  United  States  Navy,  1918, 
infantry  drill  and  tactics  have  been  brought  into  accord  with 
the  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  United  States  Army;  and  the 
infantry  organization  has  been  changed  to  correspond  with  that 
of  the  Army. 

532.  The  following  abbreviations   are  used  for   officers  and 
petty,  officers.     The  corresponding  officer  or   noncommissioned 
officer  in  the  Army  organization  is  also  given  : 

C.  C Company  commander. 

pt.  c Platoon    commander    (officer   or    warrant 

officer), 
pt.  1 Platoon  leader  (petty  or  noncommissioned 

officer  in  charge  of  a  platoon), 
c.  p.  o Chief  petty  officer  (first  sergeant). 

1  p.  o— .First  petty  officer  (sergeant). 

2  p.  o__- Second  petty  officer  (corporal). 

p.  o Petty  officer  (noncommissioned  officer). 

1  p.  os Act  as  guides. 

2  p.  os Act  as  squad  leaders,  or  as  guides  in  ab- 

sence of  1  p.  os. 

533.  The  terras  chief  petty  officer,  first  petty  officer,  and  sec- 
ond petty  officer  as  used  in  the  infantry  organization  should 
not  be  confused  with  those  designations  as  used  in  the  Coast 
Guard  Regulations.     In  the  infantry  formations  the  terms  mean 
as-  follows : 

Chief  petty  officer:  A  petty  officer  (normally  a  chief  petty 

officer  or  a  petty  officer,  first  class)  who  performs  the 

duties  of  a  first  sergeant  of  a  company. 
First   petty   officer:  A   petty   officer    (normally   a   petty 

officer,  first  or  second  class)  who  performs  the  duties 

of  a  sergeant. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  QTTARD  STATIONS.          153 

Second  petty  officer:  A  petty  officer  (normally  a  petty 
officer,  second  or  third  class)  who  performs  the  duties 
of  a  corporal. 

In  the  absence  of  petty  officers,  nonrated  men  may  act  as  first 

petty  officer  or  second  petty  officer  in  the  infantry  organization. 

534.   (1)  The  distance  between   ranks  is  40  inches   in  both 

line  and  column.     Distance  is  measured  from  the  back  of  the 

man  in  front  to  the  breast  of  the  man  in  rear. 

(2)  The  interval  between  men  in  ranks  is  4  inches  and  is 
measured  from  elbow  to  elbow. 

(3)  Pace:  Thirty  inches;  the  length  of  the  full  step  in  quick 
time. 

Question.  Of  what  does  a  squad  consist? 

Answer.  A  2  p.  o.  and  7  men.  When  the  squad  is  in  ranks 
the  2  p.  o.  is  posted  as  the  left  man  in  the  front  rank  of  the 
squad. 

Question.  How  many  squads  in  a  platoon? 

Answer.  Not  less  than  2  nor  more  than  4  squads. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  the  expression  "a  platoon  in 
line  "? 

Answer.  A  platoon  formed  in  two  ranks. 

Question.  What  are  the  positions  of  the  platoon  commander 
and  the  petty  officers,  platoon  in  line? 

Answer. 

pt.  c. 
(3  paces) 
- 
Ipo   ox x  —  x o  Ipo 

(2  paces) 
m          m= File  closers 

FIG.  1.— Platoon  in  line. 
(The  above  platoon  consists  of  three  squads.) 

(1)  Platoon  commander  three  paces  in  front  of  the  center 
of  the  platoon. 

(2)  A  first  petty  officer  is  in  the  front  rank  on  the  right  of 
the  platoon.     He  is  the  right  guide  of  the  platoon. 

(3)  A  first  petty  officer  is  in  the  front  rank  on  the  left  of 
the  platoon.     He  is  the  left  guide  of  the  platoon  (this  1  p.  o. 
is  dispensed  with  when  the  platoon  is  acting  as  a  part  of  a 
company). 

(4)  Men  in  the  position  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  platoon  are 
known  as  file  closers.    Musicians,  signalmen,  and  odd  men  are 
placed  with  the  file  closers. 


154         INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

In  the  above  case  the  platoon  is  considered  as  a  unit  acting 
singly,  in  which  case  it  has  two  1  p.  os.,  one  to  act  as  right  guide 
and  one  to  act  as  left  guide.  When  platoons  are  acting  together 
as  a  part  of  a  company  only  one  1  p.  o.  normally  is  assigned  to 
a  platoon. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  the  expression  "a  platoon  in 
column  of  squads  "  ? 

Answer.  A  platoon  with  the  squads  placed  one  behind  the 
other. 

Question.  What  are  the  stations  of  the  platoon  commander 
and  the  petty  officers  in  platoon  in  column  of  squads? 

Answer. 


pt.  c.  l  p  o  o 
x  -  • 


m  File  closers. 


*:: 

1    p  o    o 

FIG.  2.— Platoon  in  column  of  squads. 
(The  above  platoon  consists  of  three  squads.) 

(1)  Platoon  commander  alongside  and  outside  the  first  petty 
officer. 

(2)  A  1.  p.  o.  normally  40  inches  ahead  of  the  left  man  of  the 
first  squad. 

(3)  A  1.  p.  o.  normally  40  inches  behind  the  left  man  of  the 
third  squad  (this  1.  p.  o.  is  dispensed  with  when  the  platoon  is 
acting  as  a  part  of  a  company). 

(4)  Men  in  position  to  the  right  of  the  platoon  are  known  as 
file  closers.    Musicians,  signalmen,  and  odd  men  are  placed  in 
the  file  closers. 

NOTE. — In  this  formation  the  first  petty  officer  is  known  as 
the  guide.  In  the  normal  formation,  the  guide  is  left.  The 
men  in  the  left  file  are  responsible  for  the  proper  distance  from 
the  men  ahead  of  them  and  all  other  men  keep  their  positions 
with  reference  to  men  on  their  left.  The  guide  may  be  right, 
in  which  case  the  platoon  commander,  the  guides,  and  the  file 
closers  cross  over  to  the  opposite  side  to  those  shown  in  the 
diagram.  (In  column  of  squads  each  rank  preserves  the  align- 
ment toward  the  side  of  the  guide.) 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  a  company  in  line? 

Answer.  A  company  formed  in  two  ranks. 

Question.  What  are  the  positions  of  the  company  commander, 
platoon  commanders,  and  petty  officers  in  a  company  in  line? 


o 

© 

H 


Answer.  .9 


ON 


...trooi 


O 
O 
H 


•3 


•  •  z 

o 


-<Ji 

w 

Pi 


*: 


o 

P« 


355 


156 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


(1)  The  post  of  the  company  commander  is  three  paces  in 
front  of  the  center  of  the  company. 

(2)  The  posts  of  the  platoon  commanders  of  the  right  and  the 
left  platoons  are  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  company,  one  on  each 
flank.    The  posts  of  the  leaders  of  the  center  platoons  are  two 
paces  in  rear  of  their  platoons. 

(3)  The  first  petty  officer  of  the  first  platoon  is  the  right 
guide  of  the  company. 

The  first  petty  officer  of  the  left  platoon  is  the  left  guide  of 
the  company. 

The  first  petty  officers  of  the  center  platoons  are  two  paces  in 
rear  of  their  platoons  to  the  left  of  the  platoon  leaders. 

Question.  What  are  the  positions  of  the  company  commander, 
platoon  commanders,  and  petty  officers  in  company  in  column  of 
squads? 


Answer. 


1st  platoon — 


2<l  platoon 


3d  platoon 


4th  platoon. 


FIG.  4.— Company  in  column  of  squads. 
(The  above  company  consists  of  four  platoons  of  four  squads  each.) 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          157 

Question.  What  is  the  Infantry  organization? 
Answer.  (1)  A  squad  consists  of  seven  men  and  a  second 
petty  officer. 

(2)  A  platoon  consists  of  two,  three,  or  four  squads. 

(3)  A  company  consists  of  two,  three,  or  four  platoons. 

(4)  A  battalion  consists  of  two  or  more,  not  exceeding  six, 
companies. 

(5)  A  regiment  consists  of  two,  three,  or  four  battalions. 

(6)  A  brigade  consists  of  two  or  more  regiments. 


.T8SH 


APPENDIX. 


TREASURY  DEPARTMENT, 

Washington,  February  15,  1921. 

The  questions  and  answers  contained  in  the  appendix  are 
for  the  purpose  of  assisting  the  district  superintendents  and 
officers  in  charge  in  the  instruction  of  the  crews  of  Coast  Guard 
stations. 

J.    H.    MOYLE, 

Assistant  Secretary. 

QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS. 

BOATS  UNDER  OARS. 

Question.  What  general  rules  govern  a  good  oarsman? 

Answer.  A  good  oarsman  in  a  well-drilled  crew  sits  erect  on 
his  thwart,  feet  together  on  his  stretcher,  hands  together  on 
handle,  with  backs  up,  oar  level  with  rail,  blade  trimmed  with 
blade  of  stroke  oar. 

At  "  Give  way  together  "  the  first  motion  is  to  lean  well  for- 
ward, keep  back  straight,  shove  both  arms  out  perfectly  straight 
in  front,  point  blade  forward  and  down,  and  turn  it  so  that  as 
it  is  about  to  enter  the  water  the  flat  part  of  the  blade  is  per- 
pendicular. The  second  motion:  With  feet  on  stretcher,  eyes 
looking  straight  aft  (not  watching  blade),  keep  arms  perfectly 
rigid,  and  lean  back  beyond  the  vertical.  Always  lay  back  on 
your  oar  and  pull  it  through  the  water.  Do  not  attempt  to  pull 
with  the  arms  alone,  but  always  bring  the  muscles  of  the  back 
into  play.  The  third  motion  is  known  as  the  "  recovery." 
When  leaning  back  beyond  the  vertical,  by  bending  the  arms 
quickly,  the  blade  is  pulled  through  the  water  and  a  sudden 
force  is  applied  to  the  oar ;  this  is  the  most  efficient  part  of  the 

158 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          159 

stroke.  The  oar  is  withdrawn  from  the  water,  and  the  wrists 
are  dropped  until  the  blade  is  parallel  to  the  water.  Take  the 
next  stroke  without  stopping. 

Question.  What  are  the  general  rules  for  boats'  crews? 

Answer.  (1)  When  the  boat  is  called  away  move  on  the  run, 
and  man  the  boat  as  soon  as  possible.  (2)  Always  pull  a  good 
strong  stroke  and  pay  strict  attention  to  orders.  Paddling  and 
siouchiness  in  a  station  boat  shall  not  be  permitted.  (3) 
Never  stand  up  in  a  boat  if  it  can  be  avoided.  (4)  The  crew  of 
a  boat  shall  always  be  in  uniform  and  clean.  (5)  Never  engage 
in  conversation  in  a  boat  during  drills  or  in  performance  of 
duty.  (6)  Always  get  into  a  boat  ahead  of  an  officer,  and  leave 
it  after  him  unless  he  gives  orders  to  the  contrary.  If  you  are 
a  passenger,  always  rise  and  salute  when  an  officer  enters  or 
leaves  a  boat  in  which  you  are  seated. 

Question.  What  precautions  should  be  taken  in  going  into  a 
crowded  landing? 

Answer.  The  boat  should  be  pulled  easily,  kept  under  control 
with  oars  as  long  as  possible,  laying  on  oars  if  necessary,  and 
boating  them  only  at  the  last  minute. 

Question.  What  precautions  are  necessary  in  going  through  a 
narrow  entrance? 

Answer.  Get  good  way  on  the  boat,  then  trail  or  toss  the  oars. 

Question.  What  precautions  are  necessary  in  pulling  across 
the  current? 

Answer.  Try  to  get  a  range  on  two  objects  in  line,  and  steer 
by  these  to  keep  from  being  set  down  by  the  current. 

Question.  Which  holds  her  way  longer,  a  loaded  or  a  light 
boat? 

Answer.  A  loaded  boat. 

Question.  What  is  the  best  thing  to  do  when  you  have  a  long 
pull  against  the  tide? 

Answer.  Run  inshore  where  the  tide  is  slacker  than  it  is  in 
midstream  and  where  there  is  sometimes  an  eddy. 

Question.  What  about  carrying  a  lantern? 

Answer.  Always  see  that  there  is  a  lantern,  filled  and 
trimmed,  in  the  boat.  If  the  lantern  is  not  provided  with  a 
shutter,  it  shall  be  fitted  with  a  canvas  screen.  When  lighted 
and  not  in  use  the  lantern  shall  be  kept  so  that  it  will  not  get 
adrift  or  capsize. 

Question.  What  precautions  must  be  taken  regarding  going 
alongside?  . 


160         INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  Never  go  alongside  a  vessel  that  has  sternboard,  or 
wlLch  is  backing  her  engines.  In  going  alongside  in  a  seaway 
or  when  a  strong  tide  is  running  warn  the  bowmen  to  look  out 
for  the  boat  line  which  should  be  hove  from  the  vessel. 

Question.  How  would  you  run  a  line  with  a  pulling  boat? 

Answer.  Coil  most  of  the  line  in  the  stern  sheets,  but  take 
end  enough  in  the  bow  to  make  fast  when  you  reach  the  re- 
quired place.  Pull  away  and  let  the  vessel  pay  out  more  line 
until  you  are  sure  of  having  enougli  in  the  boat  to  reach  the 
place,  then  pay  out  from  the  boat.  If  laying  out  with  the  tide, 
take  less  line  in  the  boat  than  otherwise.  If  against  the  tide, 
and  if  practicable,  take  all  the  line  in  the  boat,  pull  up  and  make 
fast,  then  bring  end  to  ship.  With  a  long  line  to  be  laid  out  in 
a  strong  current,  it  will  usually  be  necessary  to  have  several 
boats,  one  to  run  away  with  the  end,  the  others  to  underrun 
the  line  at  intervals,  iloating  it  and  pulling  against  the  current 
with  the  bight.  If  the  end  is  to  be  secured  to  a  bollard,  put  a 
bowline  in  the  end  before  starting  and  throw  this  over  the  bol- 
lard. Bend  on  a  heaving  line  and  let  one  of  the  bow  oarsmen 
throw  this,  if  hands  are  standing  by  to  receive  it,  or  jump  ashore 
with  it  himself  if  necessary. 

BOAT   SAILING. 

« 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  the  trim  of  a  boat? 

Answer.  The  way  she  sits  in  the  water.  She  is  said  to  trim 
by  the  head  or  by  the  stern,  according  as  to  whether  she  is 
deeper  in  the  water  forward  or  aft. 

Question.  What  effect  does  the  position  of  weights  have  in 
sailing  a  boat? 

Answer.  If  most  of  the  weight  is  forward,  she  will  trim  by 
the  head.  In  this  case  her  stern  is  light  and  not  deep  in  the 
water;  consequently,  the  stern  will  tend  to  go  off  to  leeward, 
throwing  her  head  up  into  the  wind.  She  will  need  weather 
tiller  to  keep  her  by  the  wind.  Similarly,  if  weights  are  well 
aft  her  stern  will  be  deep  in  the  water  and  her  bow  light.  The 
wind  will  blow  the  bow  off,  the  boat  will  tend  to  fall  off,  and  it 
will  require  more  lee  tiller  to  keep  her  by  the  wind. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by,  "  By  the  wind  "? 

Answer.  A  boat  is  on,  or  by,  the  wind  when  she  is  sailing  as 
close  to  the  wind  as  she  can  and  still  keep  good  headway. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  weather  tiller  and  by  lee  tiller? 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          161 

Answer.  Weather  tiller:  When  the  tiller,  looking  forward, 
points  to  the  weather  side.  Lee  tiller  is  just  the  opposite. 

Question.  What  do  you  mean  by  the  weather  side? 

Answer.  Side  toward  the  wind ;  that  on  which  the  wind  first 
strikes.  The  lee  side  is  the  side  away  from  the  wind. 

Question.  What  is  the  tiller? 

Answer.  The  bar  fitted  fore  and  aft  iii  the  rudder  head,  by 
means  of  which  the  rudder  is  moved. 

Question.  What  is  tacking? 

Answer.  When  a  boat  is  close-hauled  on  one  tack,  by  putting 
the  tiller  down  and  letting  go  the  head  sheets,  she  is  brought 
up  head  to  wind ;  then  by  properly  working  the  sails  she  is 
made  to  fall  off:  on  the  other  tack.  This  is  tacking.  The  head 
goes  through  the  wind. 

Question.  What  is  the  object  of  tacking? 

Answer.  To  work  a  boat  to  windward. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  putting  a  tiller  down? 

Answer.  Putting  the  tiller  over  to  the  lee  side. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  putting  the  tiller  up? 

Answer.  Putting  the  tiller  over  to  the  weather  side. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  wearing? 

Answer.  Getting  a  boat  on  the  opposite  tack  by  putting  the 
tiller  up,  running  off  from  the  wind  and  gradually  bringing  her 
to  the  wind  on  the  other  tack.  The  head  goes  away  from  the 
wind ;  the  stern  goes  through  the  wind. 

Question.  Which  is  the  better  method  of  working  to  wind- 
ward, tacking  or  wearing? 

Answer.  Tacking,  because  if  properly  performed  the  boat  will 
lose  nothing  to  leeward.  On  the  contrary,  she  will  head  reach 
and  gain.  That  is,  she  will  while  in  stays  (while  in  process  of 
tacking)  run  several  boats'  lengths  to  windward.  In  wearing, 
on  the  contrary,  as  a  boat  is  run  to  leeward  a  part  of  the  time, 
much  distance  is  lost.  The  only  advantage  of  wearing  lies  in 
the  fact  that  there  is  always  possibility  of  failure  in  tacking, 
arid  greater  certainty  about  wearing. 

Question.  What  is  "leeway"? 

Answer.  The  drift  a  boat  makes  away  from  the  wind  when 
close-hauled. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  "  heaving  to  "  ? 

Answer.  Bringing  a  boat's  head  to  the  wind,  and  so  adjusting 
her  sails  that  she  will  make  no  headway  through  the  water. 
34079—21 11 


162          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  What  is  "gybing"? 

Answer.  A  boat  gybes  when  the  wind  shifts  around  the  stern, 
causing  the  main  boom  to  fly  over  rapidly  from  one  side  to  the 
other. 

Question.  Is  it  ever  safe  to  gybe? 

Answer.  Only  in  moderate  breezes.  If  the  breeze  is  fresh, 
lower  the  mainsail  before  letting  the  wind  shift  from  one  quar- 
ter to  the  other. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  "Idffing"? 

Answer.  Putting  tiller  down,  throwing  boat  up  into  the  wind. 

Question.  When  is  it  time  to  reef? 

Answer.  When  a  boat  begins  to  take  in  water  over  the  lee 
rail.  Never  be  afraid  of  reefing  too  soon. 

Question..  What  is  meant  by  "  wing  and  wing  "  ? 

Answer.  When  a  beat,  sailing  before  the  wind,  rigs  foresail 
out  on  opposite  side  from  mainsail  she  is  sailing  wing  and  wing. 

Question.  Is  this  safe? 

Answer.  Yes,  in  moderate  weather. 

Question.  If  it  is  found  necessary  to  carry  ballast  in  a  sta- 
tion's boat,  what  should  it  be? 

Answer.  Always  water  in  breakers.  Never  carry  sinking 
ballast;  that  is,  ballast  heavier  than  water.  Boats  fitted  with 
water-ballast  tanks  peed  no  other  ballast  when  the  tanks  are 
filled.  Stow  weights  as  low  as  possible. 

Question.  What  are  the  general  instructions  regarding  trim? 

Answer.  To  do  her  best  under  sail  a  boat  must  be  trimmed 
according  to  her  build  and  rig.  If  she  carries  much  head  sail 
she  will  have  to  be  deeper  forward  than  would  otherwise  be 
desirable.  If  she  has  little  or  no  head  sail  she  would  trim  by 
the  stern.  Weights  should  be  kept  out  of  the  ends  of  the  boats. 
Too  much  weather  tiller  can  be  corrected  by  shifting  weights 
aft ;  too  much  lee  tiller  by  shifting  them  forward. 

Question.  What  precautions  should  be  observed  in  handling 
sheets  ? 

Answer.  Never  belay  a  sheet  in  any  weather.  In  a  moderate 
squall  the  boat  should  be  luffed  sufficiently  to  shake  without 
spilling  the  sails,  thus  keeping  headway  enough  to  retain  con- 
trol, but  with  the  sheets  in  hand  (as  always).  If  it  becomes 
stronger  luff  more  decidedly  and  slack  sheet.  The  sheet  may, 
of  course,  be  let  go,  and  in  a  sudden  emergency  this  must  be 
done  at  once,  in  addition  to  putting  the  tiller  down,  and,  if 
necessary,  reducing  sail.  But  the  longer  you  can  keep  the  boat 


ItfSTHUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTAUD  STATIONS.          163 

under  control  the  better,  and  to  let  go  the  sheet  is  to  give  up 
control.  The  above  instructions  are  for  use  when  on  the  iwnd. 
In  running  free  different  instructions  hold  good.  Here  the  sail 
can  not  be  spilled  by  a  touch  of  the  tiller ;  consequently,  slack 
the  sheet  while  luffing.  The  force  of  the  wind  would  be  re- 
duced by  running  off,  but  if  it  becomes  too  strong  you  can  do 
nothing  but  lower  the  sail,  and  the  chances  are  that  it  will  bind 
against  the  shrouds  and  refuse  to  conre  down.  There  is  also 
danger  that  the  wind  will  shift  in  a  squall,  causing  the  mainsail 
to  gybe  with  violence., 

HANDLING  MOTOR  BOATS. 

Question.  What  study  should  an  officer  in  charge  make  con- 
cerning the  handling  of  motor  boats  at  his  station? 

Answer.  He  should  make  a  special  study  of  his  boat  with  a 
view  of  getting  perfectly  familiar  with  her.  He  should  learn 
by  practice  the  turning  circle  arid  the  effect  of  the  screw  under 
different  conditions.  He  should  inform  himself  of  the  amount 
of  gasoline  required  to  run  a  given  distance  at  ordinary  speed 
under  usual  conditions. 

Question.  What  is  the  effect  of  the  screw  in  steering? 

Answer.  Generally  speaking,  a  right-handed  screw  when  go- 
ing ahead  tends  to  throw  the  stern  to  starboard ;  when  backing, 
to  port.  In  other  words,  the  stern  is  dragged  around  in  the 
direction  the  propeller  is  turning,  and  this  effect  is  noticed 
whether  the  boat  itself  has  begun  to  answer  the  motion  of 
the  propeller  or  not.  In  attempting  to  turn  a  power  boat  the 
rudder  should  be  shifted  when  the  propeller  is  shifted  instead 
of  waiting  for  the  boat  to  lose  its  headway,  for  the  rudder  has 
the  same  general  effect  on  the  steering  of  the  boat  when  the 
propeller  is  backing,  whether  the  boat  itself  is  moving  astern 
or  has  not  yet  lost  its  headway  and  is  still  forging  ahead.  This 
rule  is  not  strictly  applicable  to  all  boats,  but  it  is  a  good  gen- 
eral rule  for  boats  with  a  single,  right-handed  screw. 

Question.    How  would  you  make  a  landing  with  a  motor  boat? 

Answer.  Make  landings  Avith  slow  speed.  In  making  a  land- 
ing it  is  a  common  mistake  to  keep  too  much  headway  on  and  to 
rely  upon  backing  the  engine  full  speed  to  stop  the  boat.  This 
is  poor  seamanship,  as  the  engines  may  fail  to  back  promptly, 
causing  a  collision  or  smash  up,  and  if  they  do  back  hard  it 
throws  unnecessary  strain  on  them. 

Question.  How  would  you  make  a  landing  alongside  of  a 
ship  in  a  strong  current? 


164          INSTRUCTIONS  FOB,  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  Do  not  let  the  current  catch  the  boat  on  the  outward 
bow,  as  this  might  sweep  her  with  force  against  the  ship's  side 
or  gangway.  The  painter  or  a  line  from  the  ship  may  be  used, 
the  boat  being  kept  off  a  little  from  the  side  until  it  is  fast,  and 
then  sheered  in  by  the  rudder.  A  boat  may  lie  alongside  safely 
in  a  strong  current  with  a  line  from  the  inner  bow  and  the 
rudder  slightly  over  for  sheering  out. 

Question.  How  should  a  motor  boat  be  trimmed  for  towing? 

Answer.  In  towing  the  stern  oi  the  towing  boat  should  be 
kept  well  down  by  shifting  weights  aft  if  necessary.  This  keeps 
the  propeller  well  immersed  and  gives  it  a  good  hold  on  the 
water. 

Question.  What  precautions  should  be  taken  when  running 
in  a  seaway? 

Answer.  When  running  in  a  seaway  speed  should  be  reduced 
somewhat,  not  only  to  avoid  shipping  seas  but  to  reduce  the 
strain  on  the  machinery  due  to  the  racing  of  the  screw.  In 
running  into  a  sea  it  is  possible  by  careful  nursing  to  make  fair 
speed,  watching  the  seas  and  slowing  or  even  stopping  for  a 
moment  as  heavy  seas  are  seen  bearing  clown  on  the  boat.  If 
the  man  who  is  running  the  engine  has  sufficient  experience  to 
regulate  the  speed  in  this  manner  it  is  convenient  to  leave  this 
to  him  if  he  can  see  ahead.  If  running  more  or  less  across  the 
sea  it  is  well  to  head  up  momentarily  for  a  heavy  wave. 

TOWING. 

Question.  Towing  an  unladen  boat  in  a  smooth  sea,  what  pre- 
cautions should  be  taken  by  the  towing  boat  and  tow? 

Answer.  Towing  boat  passes  clear  of  oars  of  the  tow,  places 
herself  in  line  ahead,  receives  painter  from  tow,  secures  it  to 
ringbolt  in  sternpost,  and  starts  slo\vly  ahead  as  soon  as  she  has 
hold  of  the  painter.  Bowman  in  the  tow  does  not  give  towing 
boat  his  painter  until  she  is  about  ahead.  He  then  takes  in 
slack  towline,  keeping  a  strain  on  it,  and  gradually  pays  it  out, 
thus  getting  way  on  the  tow  gradually  and  avoiding  too  sudden 
a  strain  on  the  towline  or  stem  of  the  boat. 

Question.  What  precautions  are  taken  in  case  the  tow  is 
heavily  laden  or  the  sea  rough? 

Answer.  Toggle  the  painter  to  a  stretcher  bet\veen  the  two 
after  thwarts  of  the  towing  boat  and  to  the  forward  thwart 
of  the  tow.  To.  steer,  bear  towline  over  on  the  quarter  toward 
which  you  want  to  turn,  for  the  rudder  will  be  of  little  use. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          165 

Question.  Give  precautions  when  carrying  stores. 

Answer.  Be  careful  of  the  oars,  as  they  may  easily  be  injured 
by  letting  stores  fall  on  them.  Keep  all  casks  hung  up  and 
have  tarpaulins  for  covering  articles  that  might  be  injured  by 
water.  While  loading  bear  in  mind  any  rough  water  that  you 
may  encounter.  Do  not  overload  a  boat ;  you  may  capsize  or  be 
responsible  for  loss  of  life.  When  carrying  treasure  always 
attach  a  buoy  with  a  drift  of  the  line  at  least  equal  to  the 
greatest  depth  of  water  on  the  way  back  to  the  station. 

Question.  How  would  you  tow  astern  of  a  large  vessel? 

Answer.  When  being  towed  astern  of  a  large  vessel,  use 
a  short  scope,  so  as  to  remain  close  under  the  counter,  with  the 
bow  partly  out  of  water.  In  casting  oft",  when  there  are  other 
boats  towing  astern,  be  careful  before  letting  go  either  to  drop 
clear  of  them  all  with  your  towline  or  be  handy  with  your  oars 
to  avoid  getting  athwart  the  hawse  of  any  of  them.  When  tow- 
ing astern  the  towline  should  never  be  made  fast,  but  should 
always  be  tended. 

Question.  How  would  you  tow  alongside  of  a  vessel? 

Answer.  If  towing  alongside,  have  the  towline  from  as  far 
forward  on  the  towing  vessel  as  possible;  either  toggle  it  to 
the  forward  thwart  (steadying  it  over  the  stem  with  a  bight 
of  the  painter),  or  pass  it  through  the  forward  rowlock  on  the 
side  nearest  the  towing  vessel.  Pay  particular  attention  to  the 
steering. 

Question.  What  precautions  must  be  taken  for  the  manage- 
ment of  a  boat  in  tow? 

Answer.  A  boat  should  never  be  towed  without  the  crew 
being  in  her,  or  at  least  a  sufficient  number  of  men  to  manage 
her  in  the  event  of  her  breaking  adrift  or  being  compelled  to 
cast  oft*  from  the  towing  vessel. 

Question.  When  would  you  use  a  drogue  in  being  towed? 

Answer.  A  drogue  is  found  of  great  advantage  when  being 
towed  before  a  heavy  sea,  as  it  prevents  the  boat  running  ahead 
in  front  of  a  sea  at  risk  of  damage  against  the  towing  vessel  and 
keeps  a  more  equable  strain  on  the  towline. 

MARINER'S  COMPASS. 

Question.  What  is  a  compass? 

Answer.  An  instrument  by  which  a  ship  or  boat  may  be 
steered  on  a  given  course  or  by  which  bearings  of  an  object 
may  be  taken. 


166         INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS, 

Question.  Describe  the  wet  or  liquid  compass. 

Answer.  Briefly,  it  is  a  magnetic  needle  or  several  parallel 
magnetic  needles  attached  to  a  compass  card,  so  fitted  as  to 
turn  easily  on  a  pivot  in  the  compass  bowl.  The  bowl  is  filled 
with  liquid  to  keep  the  card  from  wabbling  or  moving  too 
quickly.  The  liquid  contains  55  per  cent  distilled  water  and 
45  per  cent  denatured  alcohol  to  prevent  freezing.  The  whole 
is  held  in  a  composition  case  called  the  binnacle. 

Question.  How  is  the  compass  card  graduated? 

Answer.  In  points,  half  points,  quarter  points,  and  degrees. 

Question.  How  many  points  are  there  in  each  quadrant  or 
quarter  of  the  compass  card? 

Answer.  Eight. 

Question.  How  many  points  are  there  in  the  whole  compass 
card? 

Answer.  Thirty-two. 

Question.  Name  the  cardinal  points  of  the  compass. 

Answer.  North,  south,  east,  and  west. 

Question.  Name  the  semicardinal  points  of  the  compass. 

Answer.  Northeast,  southeast,  southwest,  and  northwest. 
These  are  halfway  between  the  cardinal  points. 

Question.  What  are  the  eight  principal  points  of  the  com- 
pass ? 

Answer.  The  four  cardinal  points  and  the  four  semicardinal 
points. 

Question.  How  are  the  points  halfway  between  the  cardinal 
and  semicardinal  points  named? 

Answer.  The  point  halfway  between  north  and  northeast  is 
named  north-northeast;  the  point  halfway  between  north  and 
northwest  is  named  north-northwest;  halfway  between  east 
and  northeast  is  named  east-northeast ;  halfway  between  east 
and  southeast  is  named  east-southeast,  and  so  on. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  "boxing  the  compass"? 

Answer.  By  calling  oft:  the  points  of  the  compass  in  order. 

Question.  Box  the  compass. 

Answer. — 


North. 

North  by  east. 

North-northeast. 

Northeast  by  north. 

Northeast. 

Northeast  by  east. 

East-northeast. 


East  by  north. 

East. 

East  by  south. 

East-southeast. 

Southeast  by  east. 

Southeast. 

Southeast  by  south. 


INSTRUCTIONS  EOR  COAST   GUARD  STATIONS.          167 


South-southeast 

South  by  east. 

South. 

South  by  west. 

South-southwest. 

Southwest  by  south. 

Southwest. 

Southwest  by  west. 

West-southwest. 


West  by  south. 

WTest. 

West  by  north. 

West-northwest. 

Northwest  by  west. 

Northwest. 

Northwest  by  north. 

North-northwest. 

North  by  west. 


Question.  Into  how  many  degrees  is  a  compass  card  divided? 

Answer.  Three  hundred  and  sixty. 

Question.  How  many  degrees  are  there  in  a  quadrant  or 
quarter  of  a  circle? 

Answer.  One-fourth  of  360,  or  90. 

Question.  How  many  points  are  there  in  90°  of  the  compass 
card? 

Answer.  Eight. 

Question.  How  many  degrees  are  there  in  one  point  of  the 
compass? 

Answer.  One-eighth  of  90°,  or  114. 

Question.  What  point  of  the  compass  corresponds  with  ISO0? 

Answer.  South. 

Question.  What  point  corresponds  with  45°? 

Answer.  Northeast. 

Question.  What  point  corresponds  with  135°? 

Answer.  Southeast. 

Question.  What  point  corresponds  with  225°? 

Answer.  Northwest. 

Question.  How  many  points  is  it  from  northeast  to  east  by 
north? 

Answer.  Three. 

Question.  How  many  points  is  it  from  northwest  by  west  to 
southwest  by  south? 

Answer.  Eight. 

Question.  What  point  of  the  compass  is  5  points  east  of  north? 

Answer.  Northeast  by  east. 

Question.  What  point  is  6  points  to  the  west  of  south? 

Answer.  West-southwest. 

Question.  What  is  the  opposite  bearing  to  east  by  north? 

Answer.  West  by  south. 

Question.  What  is  the  opposite  bearing  to  west-northwest? 

Answer.  East-southeast. 


168          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

(Questions  similar  to  the  above  should  be  continued  until 
perfect  familiarity  is  obtained;  there  is  no  better  way.) 

Question.  Does  the  north  point  of  the  compass  always  point 
to  the  true  north ;  and  if  not,  why  ? 

Answer.  It  does  not  always  point  to  the  true  north,  because 
the  compass  needle  is  deflected  by  forces  called  variation  and 
deviation. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  the  compass  bearing  of  an 
object? 

Answer.  Its  direction  by  compass  without  correction  for  varia- 
tion or  deviation. 

Question.  What  is  the  lubber's  point  of  a  compass? 

Answer.  The  vertical  line  on  the  inside  of  a  compass  bowl 
corresponding  with  the  fore-and-aft  line  of  the  ship  or  boat. 

Question.  For  what  is  it  used? 

Answer.  In  steering  this  line  is  made  to  coincide  as  nearly 
as  possible  with  the  given  course. 

Question.  Where  should  a  compass  be  placed  in  a  station 
boat  to  secure  the  best  results?  Why? 

Answer.  As  near  the  amidships  fore-and-aft  line  and  as  far 
u  way  from  movable  or  iixed  iron  or  steel  as  practicable.  The 
iron  or  steel  deflects  the  compass  needle  and  may  increase  its 
error,  so  that  it  would  be  unreliable. 

Question.  What  is  a  dumb  compass? 

Answer.*  A  circle  marked  with  the  graduations  of  the  com- 
pass card,  but  without  a  needle.  It  is  used  for  taking  bearings. 

Question.  How  should  it  be  fixed  in  a  station? 

Answer.  It  should  be  permanently  fixed  so  that  its  north  and 
south  points  coincide  with  the  north  and  south  points  of  the 
horizon. 

Question.  How  is  a  dumb  compass  fitted  for  taking  bearings? 

Answer.  It  is  fitted  with  a  movable  sighting  bar  pivoted  at 
the  center  of  the  compass  card. 

RULES  OF  THE  ROAD  FOR  BOATS. 

Question.  What  lights  are  required  to  be  carried  by  row- 
boats? 

Answer.  Rowboats,  whether  under  oars  or  sail,  shall  have 
ready  at  hand  a  lantern  showing  a  white  light,  which  shall 
be  temporarily  exhibited  in  time  to  prevent  collision. 

Question.  What  fog  signals  are  required  for  a  power  boat 
underway  on  the  inland  waters  of  the  Atlantic,  Pacific,  and  Gulf 
coasts  ? 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          169 

Answer.  If  under  way  and  not  towing  or  being  towed  it  shall 
sound,  at  intervals  of  not  more  than  one  minute,  on  the  whistle 
a  prolonged  blast.  When  towing  other  vessels  it  shall  sound 
at  intervals  of  not  more  than  one  minute  three  blasts  in  suc- 
cession, namely,  one  prolonged  blast  followed  by  two  short 
blasts.  A  boat  towed  may  give,  at  intervals  of  not  more  than 
one  minute,  on  the  fog  horn  a  signal  of  three  blasts  in  suc- 
cession, namely,  one  prolonged  blast  followed  by  two  short 
blasts,  and  she  shall  not  give  any  other.  A  boat  when  at 
anchor  shall,  at  intervals  of  not  more  than  one  minute,  -ring 
the  bell  rapidly  for  about  five  seconds. 

Question.  When  is  a  power  boat  under  way  within  the  mean- 
ing of  the  rules  of  the  road? 

Answer.  When  she  is  not  anchored  or  made  fast  to  the  shore 
or  to  a  ship  or  aground. 

Question.  Wliat  is  the  definition  of  a  steam  vessel  by  the 
rules  of  the  road? 

Answer.  The  words  "  steam  vessel "  shall  include  any  vessel 
propelled  by  machinery. 

Question.  At  what  speed  should  vessels  proceed  in  a  fog,  mist, 
falling  snow,  or  a  heavy  rain  squall? 

Answer.  They  shall  go  at  a  moderate  speed,  having  careful 
regard  to  the  existing  circumstances  and  conditions. 

Question.  What  are  the  sailing  rules  when  one  boat  is  running 
free  and  another  is  close-hauled? 

Answer.  A  boat  which  is  running  free  shall  keep  out  of  the 
way  of  a  boat  which  is  close-hauled. 

Question.  Two  boats  are  close-hauled  on  opposite  tacks. 
Which  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  other? 

Answer.  A  boat  which  is  close-hauled  on  the  port  tack  shall 
keep  out  of  the  way  of  a  boat  which  is  close-hauled  on  the 
starboard  tack.  - 

Question.  Two  boats  are  running  free  with  the  wind  on  oppo- 
sites  sides.  Which  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  other? 

Answer.  The  boat  which  has  the  wind  on  the  port  side  shall 
keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  other. 

Question.  Two  boats  are  running  free  with  the  wind  on  the 
same  side.  Which  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  other? 

Answer.  The  boat  which  is  to  windward  shall  keep  out  of  the 
way  of  the  boat  which  is  to  leeward. 

Question.  Which  has  the  right  of  way — a  boat  under  sail  with 
the  wind  aft,  or  any  other  boat? 


170          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  A  boat  under  sail  which  has  the  wind  aft  shall  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  any  other  boat  under  sail. 

Question.  What  is  the  rule  of  the  road  about  power  boats  or 
boats  under  oars  meeting  end-on  or  nearly  end-on  so  as  to  in- 
volve risk  of  collision? 

Answer.  Each  shall  alter  her  course  to  starboard  so  that 
each  may  pass  on  the  port  side  of  the  other. 

Question.  In  the  preceding  question,  suppose  the  course  of 
each  power  boat  is  so  far  to  starboard  of  the  other  that  they 
are  not  to  be  considered  as  meeting  end-on ;  what  shall  each  do? 

Answer.  Either  boat  should  immediately  give  two  short  blasts, 
which  the  other  boat  should  answer  promptly  by  two  similar 
blasts,  and  they  shall  pass  on  the  starboard  side  of  each  other. 

Question.  What  is  the  rule  for  power  boats  or  boats  under 
oars  crossing  so  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision? 

Answer.  The  boat  which  has  the  other  on  its  own  starboard 
side  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  other. 

Question.  What  is  the  rule  for  a  power  boat  or  a  boat  under 
oars  meeting  or  crossing  a  boat  under  sail? 

Answer.  The  boat  under  power  or  oars  shall  keep  out  of  the 
way  of  the  boat  under  sail. 

Question.  When,  under  the  rules,  one  boat  must  keep  out  of 
the  way,  what  shall  the  other  do? 

Answer.  The  other  shall  keep  her  course  and  speed. 

Question.  If  a  boat,  whether  under  oars,  sail,  or  power,  is 
overtaking  another  boat,  what  shall  the  overtaking  boat  do? 

Answer.  The  overtaking  boat  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of 
the  overtaken  boat. 

Question.  What  sound  signals  are  used  by  power  boats  on 
approaching  each  other? 

Answer.  Any  power  boat  approaching  another  shall  indicate 
what  course  she  intends  to  take  by  the  following  signals  on 
her  whistle: 

(a)  One  short  blast  to  mean,  "  I  am  directing  my  course  to 
starboard." 

( & )  Two  short  blasts  to  mean,  "  I  am  directing  my  course  to 
port." 

(c)  Three  short  blasts  to  mean,  "My  engines  are  going  full 
speed  astern." 

Question.  Do  the  signals  in  the  preceding  question  also  apply 
to  a  motor  boat  approaching  a  steam  vessel? 

Answer.  They  do. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          171 

Question.  To  which  side  of  a  fairway  must  a  boat  ordinarily 
be  kept? 

Answer.  In  a  narrow  channel  every  boat  under  power  or 
oars  shall,  when  it  is  safe  or  practicable,  keep  to  that  side  of 
the  fairway  or  mid-channel  which  lies  on  the  starboard  side  of 
such  boat. 

Question.  What  signal  is  given  on  nearing  a  short  turn  or 
bend? 

Answer.  A  long  blast  on  the  whistle. 

Question.  Suppose  a  long  blast  is  answered  by  a  similar  blast 
from  the  far  side  of  a  bend,  what  should  be  done? 

Answer.  The  usual  signals  for  meeting  and  passing  should 
then  be  given  by  both  boats. 

Question.  When  leaving  the  side  of  a  long  dock  or  proceed- 
ing out  of  a  slip,  what  signal  shall  a  power  boat  give? 

Answer.  It  shall  give  the  same  signal  as  in  the  case  of  ves- 
sels meeting  at  a  bend,  but  immediately  after  clearing  the  dock 
or  slip,  so  as  to  be  fully  in  sight,  it  shall  be  governed  by  the 
steering  and  sailing  rules. 

Question.  When  two  power  boats  are  meeting  end  on,  how 
does  each  steersman  alter  his  course? 

Answer.  Each  puts  his  helm  to  port  so  as  to  pass  on  the  port 
side  of  the  other. 

Question.  How  is  this  altering  of  the  course  indicated? 
Answer.  Each  steersman  blows  one  short  blast  on  the  whistle. 
Question.  If,  under  the  circumstances,  the  other  blows  one 
blast  before  you  do,  what  should  you  do? 

Answer.  I  would  answer  with  one  blast  and  put  my  helm  to 
port. 

Question.  If  you  find  it  is  not  possible  for  her  to  pass  on 
your  port  side,  what  should  you  do? 

Answer.  I  should  sound  several  short  and  rapid  blasts,  not 
less  than  four,  of  the  whistle,  and  if  the  boats  have  approached 
each  other  within  a  short  distance,  I  should  reduce  speed  to 
bare  steerageway,  or  if  necessary  stop  or  reverse. 

Question.  You  are  in  charge  of  a  power  boat  running  in  the 
same  direction  as  a  power  boat  ahead  and  wish  to  pass  on  her 
starboard  side,  what  should  you  do? 

Answer.  I  would  give  one  short  blast  of  the  whistle,  and,  if 
she  answered  with  one  short  blast,  I  would  port  the  helm  and 
pass  on  her  starboard  side. 

Question.  Suppose  you  wish  to  pass  on  her  port  side? 


172         INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  I  would  give  two  short  blasts,  and,  if  she  an- 
swered with  two  short  blasts,  I  would  starboard  the  helm  and 
pass  on  her  port  side. 

Question.  Suppose  in  either  case  she  gave  several  short 
blasts  in  answer,  not  less  than  four,  what  would  you  under- 
stand? 

Answer.  That  she  did  not  consider  it  safe  for  ine  to  pass 
at  that  point. 

Question.  How  long  can  she  keep  you  trailing  behind  her? 

Answer.  Only  so  long  as  there  is  danger  in  passing,  as  in  a 
narrow  or  obstructed  channel  or  fairway.     When  there  is  suffi- 
cient room  she  must  indicate  on  which  side  I  may  pass. 
,  Question.  What  are  cross  signals? 

Answer.  Answering  one  blast  with  two,  or  two  blasts  with 
one. 

Question.  Are  they  ever  permissible? 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  What  should  you  do  in  case  another  boat  gives  you 
a  cross  signal  on  meeting? 

Answer.  I  should  give  several  short  and  rapid  blasts,  not  less 
than  four,  and  if  necessary  stop  and  reverse. 

Question.  You  are  in  charge  of  a  power  boat,  a  steam  vessel 
is  approaching  on  your  port  bow  so  as  to  involve  risk  of  col- 
lision, which  boat  has  the  right  of  way  and  what  should  you  do? 

Answer.  My  boat  has  the  right  of  way,  and  I  would  hold  my 
course  and  speed. 

Question.  Suppose  the  other  boat  was  on  your  starboard  bow, 
what  would  you  do? 

Answer.  The  other  boat  would  have  the  right  of  way,  and  I 
would  reduce  speed  and  go  under  her  stern,  or  stop  or  reverse. 

Question.  Suppose  the  boat  is  overhauling  you  anywhere  from 
two  points  abaft  your  beam  to  astern  ? 

Answer.  I  would  have  the  right  of  way  and  would  hold  my 
course  and  speed. 

Question.  Suppose  it  is  a  sailing  vessel  on  your  port  bow, 
what  would  you  do? 

Answer.  She  would  have  the  right  of  way,  and  I  would  alter 
my  course  to  clear  her  or  stop  or  reverse. 

Question.  Suppose  a  sailing  vessel  was  coming  up  anywhere 
on  your  starboard  quarter,  close-hauled  and  on  the  starboard 
tack,  which  would  have  the  right  of  way? 

Answer.  I  would  have  the  right  of  way. 


INSTRUCTIONS   FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          173 

Question.  What  is  meant- by  close-hauled? 

Answer.  A  vessel  or  boat  is  close-hauled  when  she  is  sailing 
as  close  as  possible  to  the  wind. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  running  free? 

Answer.  A  boat  is  running  free  when  she  is  able  to  lay  her 
course  with  the  sheets  eased  off. 

Question.  When  are  you  justified  in  disregarding  the  rules  of 
the  road? 

Answer.  When  the  dangers  of  navigation,  and  collision,  or 
any  special  circumstances  may  render  a  departure  from  the 
rules  necessary  in  order  to  avoid  immediate  danger. 

Question.  What  light  would  you  use  as  an  anchor  light  for  a 
boat? 

Answer.  An  ordinary  hand  lantern  showing  a  white  light. 

MOTOR-BOAT  LAWS. 

Question.  Under  the  law,  what  do  the  words  "  motor  boat " 
mean? 

Answer.  They  mean  every  vessel  propelled  by  machinery  and 
not  more  than  65  feet  in  length,  except  tugboats  and  towboats 
propelled  by  steam. 

Question.  How  shall  the  length  of  a  motor  boat  be  determined? 

Answer.  By  measuring  from  end  to  end  over  the  deck,  exclud- 
ing sheer. 

Question.  Into  how  many  classes  are  motor  boats  divided? 

Answer.  Into  three  classes. 

Question.  What  motor  boats  are  included  in  class  1? 
.    Answer.  Those  less  than  26  feet  in  length. 

Question.  What  motor  boats  are  included  in  class  2? 

Answer.  Those  26  feet  or  over  and  less  than  40  feet  in  length? 

Question.  What  motor  boats  are  included  in  class  37 

Answer.  Those  of  40  feet  or  over  and  not  more  than  65  feet  in 
length. 

Question.  What  lights  shall  every  motor  boat  of  class  1  carry 
when  underway  from  sunset  to  sunrise? 

Answer.  (1)  A  white  light  aft  to  show  all  around  the  hori- 
zon. (2)  A  combined  lantern  in  the  fore  part  of  the  vessel,  and 
lower  than  the  white  light  aft,  showing  green  to  starboard  and 
red  to  port,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  from  right  ahead  to 
2  points  abaft  the  beam  on  their  respective  sides. 

Question.  What  lights  shall  motor  boats  of  classes  2  ftnd  3 
carry  when  under  way  from  sunset  to  sunrise?  .' 


174          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  (1)  A  bright  white  light,  in  the  fore  part  of  the  ves- 
sel as  near  the  stem  as  practicable,  so  constructed  as  to  show  an 
unbroken  light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  20  points  of  the 
compass,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  10  points  on  each  side  of 
the  boat,  namely,  from  right  ahead  to  2  points  abaft  the  beam 
on  either  side. 

(2)  A  white  light  aft  to  show  all  around  the  horizon. 

(3)  On  the  starboard  side  a  green  light  so  constructed  as  to 
show  an   unbroken   light   over   an   arc   of   the   horizon   of   10 
points  of  the  compass,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  from  right 
ahead  to  2  points  abaft  the  beam  on  the  starboard  side.    On 
the  port  side  a  red  light  so  constructed  as  to  show  an  unbroken 
light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  10  points  of  the  compass,  so 
fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  from  right  ahead  to  2  points  abaft 
the  beam  on  the  port  side. 

Question.  What  shall  be  the  dimension  of  the  glass  or  lens 
for  the  white  light  in  the  fore  part  of  a  motor  boat  of  class  2? 

Answer.  Not  less  than  19  square  inches. 

Question.  What  shall  be  the  dimension  of  the  glass  or  lens 
for  the  white  light  in  the  fore  part  of  a  motor  boat  of  class  3? 

Answer.  Not  less  than  31  square  inches. 

Question.  What  shall  be  the  dimension  of  the  glass  or  lens 
for  the  side  lights  of  a  motor  boat  of  class  2? 

Answer.  Not  less  than  16  square  inches. 

Question.  What  shall  be  the  dimension  of  the  glass  or  lens 
for  the  side  lights  of  a  motor  boat  of  class  3? 

Answer.  Not  less  than  25  square  inches. 

Question.  What  shall  be  the  character  of  the  glass  or  lens 
for  lights  on  motor  boats  of  classes  2  and  3  ? 

Answer.  They  shall  be  fresnel  or  fluted  glass. 

Question.  With  what  shall  the  side  lights  of  classes  2  and  3 
be  fitted? 

Answer.  They  shall  be  fitted  with  inboard  screens  of  suffi- 
cient height  and  so  set  as  to  prevent  these  lights  from  being 
seen  across  the  bow. 

Question.  What  is  the  length  of  the  side-light  screens  for 
boats  of  class  2? 

Answer.  Not  less  than  18  inches. 

Question.  What  is  the  length  of  the  side-light  screens  for 
boats  of  class  3? 

Answer.  Not  less  than  24  inches. 

Question.  What  lights  shall  motor  boats  carry  when  pro- 
pelled by  sail  and  machinery,  or  by  sail  alone? 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          175 

Answer.  They  shall  carry  the  colored  side  lights  suitably 
screened,  but  not  the  white  lights. 

Question.  With  what  sound-producing  appliance  shall  motor 
boats  be  provided? 

Answer.  With  a  whistle  or  other  sound-producing  mechanical 
appliance  capable  of  producing  a  blast  of  two  seconds  or  more 
in  duration. 

Question.  What  shall  be  deemed  to  be  a  prolonged  blast 
within  the  meaning  of  the  motor-boat  law? 

Answer.  A  blast  of  at  least  two  seconds. 

Question.  What  additional  sound-producing  appliances  shall 
every  motor  boat  of  class  2  or  3  carry  ? 

Answer.  An  efficient  foghorn  and  an  efficient  bell. 

Question.  What  shall  be  the  size  of  the  bell  on  class  3  motor 
boats? 

Answer.  It  shall  be  not  less  than  8  inches  across  the  mouth. 

Question.  What  life-saving  appliances  shall  every  motor  boat 
and  every  vessel  propelled  by  machinery  other  than  by  steam, 
more  than  65  feet  in  length,  carry? 

Answer.  Either  life  preservers,  or  life  belts,  or  buoyant  cush- 
ions, or  ring  buoys,  or  other  device  sufficient  to  sustain  afloat 
every  person  on  board  and  so  placed  as  to  be  readily  accessible. 

Question.  What  additional  life-saving  appliances  shall  be  pro- 
vided on  all  motor  boats  carrying  passengers  for  hire? 

Answer.  They  shall  carry  one  life  preserver  for  every  pas- 
senger carried. 

Question.  What  is  required  of  the  person  operating  a  motor 
boat  carrying  passengers  for  hire? 

Answer.  He  is  required  to  be  duly  licensed  for  such  service 
by  the  local  board  of  inspectors. 

Question.  What  are  the  requirements  of  law  regarding  fire- 
extinguishing  appliances  on  motor  boats? 

Answer.  Every  motor  boat,  and  also  every  vessel  propelled 
by  machinery  other  than  by  steam  more  than  65  feet  in  length, 
shall  carry  ready  for  immediate  use  the  means  of  promptly 
and  effectually  extinguishing  burning  gasoline. 

Question.  What  penalty  may  be  imposed  by  proper  authority 
for  violation  of  any  of  the  motor-boat  laws? 

Answer.  A  fine  not  exceeding  $100. 

Question.  What  light  shall  a  vessel  under  150  feet  in  length 
carry  when  at  anchor? 

Answer.  It  shall  carry  forward,  where  it  can  best  be  seen, 
but  at  a  height  not  exceeding  20  feet  above  the  hull,  a  white 


176          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

light  in  a  lantern  so  constructed  as  to  show  a  clear,  uniform, 
and  unbroken  light  visible  all  around  the  horizon  at  a  distance 
of  at  least  1  mile. 

Question.  Are  motor  boats  required  to  carry  lights  between 
the  hours  of  sunrise  and  sunset? 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  What  should  be  the  position  of  the  after  light  rela- 
tive to  the  forward  light  in  motor  boats? 

Answer.  The  after  light  should  be  higher  and  so  placed  as 
to  form  a  range  with  the  forward  light  arid  should  be  clear 
of  house  awnings  and  other  obstructions. 

Question.  Does  the  law  specify  the  size  of  the  white  light 
to  be  carried  on  motor  boats  of  class  1? 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  What  sound-producing  appliance  for  motor  boats 
has  been  held  to  be  in  compliance  with  the  law? 

Answer.  A  mouth  whistle  capable  of  producing  a  blast  of 
two  seconds  or  more  in  duration  which  can  be  heard  for  at 
least  one-half  a  mile. 

Question.  Can  foghorns  take  the  place  of  whistles  on  motor 
boats  of  classes  2  and  3? 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  With  what  life-saving  appliances  shall  every  motor 
boat  not  carrying  passengers  for  hire  be  provided? 

Answer.  With  life  preservers  or  life  belts  or  buoyant  cushions 
or  ring  buoys,  or  other  device,  sufficient  to  sustain  afloat  every 
person  on  board.  This  includes  members  of  the  crew,  children, 
and  babies. 

Question.  Whose  approval  shall  life-saving  appliances  have? 

Answer.  The  board  of  supervising  inspectors  of  the  Steam- 
boat-Inspection Service. 

Question.  What  qualities  shall  life  preservers  and  buoyant 
cushions  possess? 

Answer.  They  shall  be  capable  of  sustaining  afloat  for  a  con- 
tinuous period  of  24  hours  an  attached  weight  so  arranged  that 
whether  the  said  weight  be  submerged  or  not  there  shall  be'  a 
direct  downward  gravitation  pull  upon  such  life  preserver  or 
cushion  of  at  least  20  pounds.  If  a  buoyant  cushion  is  furnished 
for  more  than  one  person  its  capacity  must  be  proportionately 
greater. 

Question.  Is  a  life  preserver  or  buoyant  cushion  stuffed  or 
filled  with  granulated  cork  or  other  loose  granulated  material 
permitted? 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          177 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  Are  pneumatic  life  preservers  or  cushions  per- 
mitted? 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  What  substitutes  for  life  preservers,  life  belts,  etc., 
may  be  used? 

Answer.  Wooden  life  floats,  provided  their  dimensions  shall 
not  be  less  than  4  feet  in  length,  14  inches  in  breadth,  2  inches 
in  thickness,  and  of  well-seasoned  white  pine,  or  of  any  other 
wood  not  exceeding  white  pine  in  weight  per  cubic  foot. 

Question.  Would  a  motor  boat  hired  at  a  launch  livery  and 
carrying  a  person  in  addition,  to  the  person  operating  it  be  con- 
sidered as  carrying  passengers  for  hire? 

Answer.  Yes. 

Question.  Are  there  any  specific  means  prescribed  for 
promptly  extinguishing  burning  gasoline? 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  What  materials  will  serve  the  purpose  of  extin- 
guishing burning  gasoline? 

Answer.  Besides  the  usual  extinguishers  and  suitable  chemi- 
cals, salt  or  sand  in  sufficient  quantities  will  serve  the  purpose 
in  some  cases.  The  salt  or  sand  (preferably  the  two  mixed) 
should  be  kept  in  a  pail  or  receptacle. 

Question.  What  motor  boats  are  subject  to  inspection  by  the 
Steamboat-Inspection  Service? 

Answer.  Motor  boats  propelled  otherwise  than  by  steam  of  15 
gross  tons,  carrying  freight  or/  passengers  for  hire  but  not 
engaged  in  fishing  as  a  regular  business. 

Question.  What  motor  boats  must  be  documented? 

Answer.  All  motor  boats  of  over  5  net  tons  when  engaged  in 
trade  must  be  documented ;  that  is  to  say,  must  be  licensed  by 
collectors  of  customs. 

Question.  Are  vessels  under  5  net  tons  documented? 

Answer.  They  are  not  documented  in  any  case. 

Question.  What  distinction  is  there-  between  the  license  of 
a  vessel  and  the  license  of  a  motor-boat  operator? 

Answer.  The  license  of  a  vessel  obtained  from  a  collector  of 
customs  (designated  a  document)  is  additional  to  and  must  not 
be  confounded  with  the  license  required  for  the  operator  of  a 
motor  boat. 

Question.  How  must  a  documented  vessel  be  marked? 
34079—21 12 


178          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  She  must  have  the  name  and  home  port  on  the  stern 
and  the  name  on  each  bow.  The  tonnage  mark  and  official 
number  should  be  deeply  carved  or  otherwise  permanently 
marked  on  her  main  beam  or  other  approved  place. 

Question.  Does  the  law  require  that  the  name  of  an  undocu- 
mented motor  boat  be  displayed? 

Answer.  No;  but  the  Department  of  Commerce  recommends 
that  it  be. 

Question.  Are  motor  boats  required  to  have  copies  of  pilot 
rules  on  board? 

Answer.  Yes;  they  are  required  to  have  on  board  two  copies 
of  the  pilot  rules  to  be  observed  by  them. 

Question.  What  equipment  is  required  for  motor  boats  of 
class  1  not  carrying  passengers  for  hire? 

Answer.  Combination  light  forward,  white  light  aft,  whistle, 
life  preserver  or  life-saving  devices  for  each  person  on  board, 
means  for  extinguishing  burning  gasoline,  two  copies  of  pilot 
rules. 

Question.  What  equipment  is  required  for  motor  boats  of 
class  1  carrying  passengers  for  hire? 

Answer.  Combination  light  forward,  white  light  aft,  whistle, 
life  preserver  or  life-saving  device  for  each  person  on  board, 
licensed  operator,  means  for  extinguishing  burning  gasoline, 
two  copies  of  pilot  rules. 

Question.  What  equipment  is  required  for  motor  boats  of 
class  2  not  carrying  passengers  for  hire? 

Answer.  White  lights  forward  and  aft  and  colored  side 
lights,  whistle,  bell,  foghorn,  life  preserver  or  life-saving  de- 
vice for  each  person  on  board,  means  for  extinguishing  burning 
gasoline,  two  copies  of  pilot  rules. 

Question.  What  equipment  is  required  for  motor  boats  of 
class  2  carrying  passengers  for  hire? 

Answer.  The  same  equipment  as  when  not  carrying  passen- 
gers for  hire,  with  the  addition  of  a  licensed  operator. 

Question.  What  equipment  is  required  for  motor  boats  of 
class  3  not  carrying  passengers  for  hire? 

Answer.  The  same  as  required  for  class  2  when  not  carrying 
passengers  for  hire. 

Question.  What  equipment  is  required  for  motor  boats  of 
class  3  carrying  passengers  for  hire? 

Answer.  The  same  as  is  required  for  motor  boats  of  class  2 
carrying  passengers  for  hire. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          179 

Question.  What  is  the  duration  of  the  license  granted  the 
operator  of  a  motor  boat? 

Answer.  Five  years. 

Question.  What  equipment  is  required  for  a  motor  boat  after 
sunset  when  not  being  navigated? 

Answer.  No  equipment,  except  an  anchor  light. 

CUSTOMS  AND  NAVIGATION  LAWS. 

Question.  What  powers  have  officers  in  charge  of  Coast  Guard 
stations  and  houses  of  refuge  as  customs  officers? 

Answer.  They  have  the  powers  of  inspectors  of  customs. 

Question.  Briefly,  what  are  the  powers  of  inspectors  of  cus- 
toms? 

Answer,  (a)  To  go  on  board  of  vessels  in  any  port  of  the 
United  States  or  within  4  leagues  of  the  coast  thereof,  if  bound 
to  the  United  States ;  to  search  the  same  and  any  person,  trunk, 
or  envelope  on  board,  and  to  this  end  to  hail  or  stop  such  vessel 
and  use  all  necessary  force  to  compel  compliance. 

(&)  If  it  shall  appear  that  a  violation  of  law  is  committed 
whereby  the  vessel  or  the  merchandise  on  board  is  liable  to  for- 
feiture, to  seize  the  same.  They  may  also  arrest  any  person 
engaged  in  such  violation. 

Question.  When  are  officers  in  charge  of  stations  expected  to 
use  these  powers? 

Answer.  Whenever  the  occasion  demands.  They  are  not,  how- 
ever, expected  to  board  and  examine  vessels  unless  they  have 
reason  to  believe  such  vessels  are  engaged  in  a  violation  of  the 
customs  or  navigation  laws. 

Question.  Who  may  make  searches  and  seizures? 

Answer.  Officers  of  the  customs  or  of  the  Coast  Guard  cutters, 
or  authorized  agents  of  the  Treasury  Department,  or  other  per- 
sons specifically  appointed  for  the  purpose  in  writing  by  a  col- 
lector of  customs. 

Question.  What  flag  should  a  station  boat  on  boarding  duty 
carry? 

Answer.  A  station  boat  on  boarding  duty  in  the  enforcement 
of  the  customs  or  navigation  laws  shall  carry  the  Coast  Guard 
ensign  at  all  times  when  it  can  be  seen. 

Question.  What  is  the  duty  of  an  officer  in  charge  of  a  station 
in  regard  to  smuggling? 

Answer.  To  take  such  measures  as  may  be  within  his  power 
to  prevent  smuggling,  and  upon  detection  of  any  violation  of  the 


180          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

customs  revenue  laws  to  forthwith  report  the  same  to  the  col- 
lector of  the  district  and  to  seize  merchandise  in  the  act  of  being 
smuggled  or  which  has  been  smuggled. 

Question.  May  an  officer  in  charge  of  a  station  search  a 
vehicle  on  which  he  has  reason  to  believe  there  is  merchandise 
subject  to  duty  or  which  shall  have  been  introduced  into  the 
United  States  contrary  to  law? 

Answer.  Yes ;  he  may  stop,  search;  and  examine  the  same  and 
may  search  any  trunk  or  envelope  *n  which  he  has  reasonable 
cause  to  suspect  there  is  merchandise  which  was  imported  con- 
trary to  law,  and  such  merchandise  will  be  subject  to  seizure. 

Question.  What  constitutes  a  valid  seizure? 

Answer.  To  constitute  a  valid  seizure  there  must  be  open  vis- 
ible possession  claimed  and  authority  exercised  by  the  seizing 
officer.  The  parties  must  understand  that  they  are  dispossessed 
and  that  they  are  no  longer  at  liberty  to  exercise  any  control 
over  the  property. 

Question.  Is  it  necessary  that  a  superior  physical  force  be 
employed  ? 

Answer.  It  is  not  necessary  if  there  is  a  voluntary  acqui- 
escence in  the  seizure  and  dispossession. 

Question.  Suppose  there  is  voluntary  abandonment  of  the 
seizure  by  the  seizing  officer? 

Answer.  In  that  case  the  seizure  would  lose  its  validity. 

Question.  What  shall  be  done  with  seized  goods? 

Answer.  Merchandise  or  property  of  any  kind  seized  shall  be 
placed  and  remain  in  the  custody  of  the  collector  of  the  district 
in  which  the  seizure  is  made,  to  await  disposition  according  to 
law. 

Question.  Must  a  seizing  officer  make  known  his  character? 

Answer.  Every  officer  or  other  person  authorized  to  make 
searches  and  seizures  shall  make  known,  upon  being  questioned, 
his  character  as  an  officer  or  agent  of  the  customs  or  Govern- 
ment. 

Question.  Has  he  authority  to  require  other  persons  to  assist 
him? 

Answer.  Yes;  he  may  require  any  person  within'  the  distance 
of  3  miles  to  assist  him  in  making  any  arrest,  search,  or  seizure. 

Question.  Suppose  such  person  shall  without  reasonable  ex- 
cuse neglect  or  refuse  to  assist  the  officer  upon  proper  demand? 

Answer.  He  will  be  guilty  of  a  misdemeanor  and  be  subject 
to  a  fine  of  not  more  than  $200  nor  less  than  $5, 

j 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.         181 

Question.  What  is  the  penalty  for  resisting  a  revenue  officer 
in  the  discharge  of  his  duties  or  for  rescuing  or  destroying 
seized  property? 

Answer.  A  fine  of  not  more  than  $2,000  or  imprisonment  for 
not  more  than  one  year. 

Question.  May  an  officer  in  charge  of  a  station  enter  build- 
ings' to  make  search  or  seizure? 

:-•  Answer.  He,  and  the  persons  assisting  him,  may  if  deemed 
necessary  enter  into  or  upon  or  pass  over  the  lands,  inclosures, 
and  buildings,  other  than  the  dwelling  house,  of  any  person, 
but  he  should,  however,  when  practicable,  first  obtain  a  search 
warrant  for  the  purpose,  and  always  before  searching  a  dwell- 
ing house. 

Question.  What  is  necessary  before  seizure  is  made? 

Answer.  That  there  shall  be  reasonable  cause  for  it. 

Question.  How  shall  the  term  "  smuggling"  be  construed? 

Answer.  It  shall  be  construed  to  mean  the  act,  \vith  intent 
to  defraud,  of  bringing  into,  or  attempting  to  bring  into,  the 
United  States  dutiable  articles  without  passing  the  same  or  the 
package  containing  the  same  through  the  custom  house  or  sub- 
mitting them  to  the  officers  of  the  revenue  for  examination. 

Question.  Are  officers  of  the  customs  entitled  to  a  fee  as  in- 
former ? 

Answer.  No,  They  are  prohibited  from  either  directly  or  in- 
directly receiving,  accepting, .  or  contracting  for  any  portion  of 
such  fee, 

Question.  Under  what  penalty? 

Answer.  They  are  liable  to  a  fine  not  exceeding  $5,000  or  to 
imprisonment  for  not  more  than  one  year,  or  both,  and  will  be 
thereafter  ineligible  to  any  office  of  honor,  trust,  or  emolument 
under  the  Government. 

Question.  What  is  the  penalty  for  bribing  or  attempting  to 
bribe  a  revenue  officer  or  employee? 

Answer.  A  fine  not  exceeding  $2,000  or  imprisonment  at  hard 
labor  for  not  more  than  one  year,  or  both. 

Question.  What  is  the  penalty  for  assuming  to  be  a  revenue 
officer? 

Answer.  A  fine  of  not  more  than  $500  and  imprisonment  for 
not  more  than  two  years. 

Question.  What  is  the  duty  of  the  officer  in  charge  with  re- 
gard to  vessels  wrecked  on  the  coast  within  the  limits  of  his 
station? 

• 


182         INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  To  promptly  notify  the  nearest  collector  or  deputy 
collector  of  customs  of  the  shipwreck  or  of  any  merchandise 
presumably  of  foreign  origin  cast  ashore  from  the  wrecks  or 
forming  the  cargo  of  vessels  stranded  or  driven  ashore  by 
stress  of  wreather. 

Question.  What  else? 

Answer.  If  the  merchandise  is  presumably  of  foreign  origin, 
he  should  exercise  supervision  over  it  until  a  regular  customs 
officer  arrives  to  take  necessary  action  toward  forwarding  it  to 
its  destination  or  to  the  nearest  port  of  entry  that  may  be  de- 
termined upon  by  the  owner  or  underwriters. 

Question.  Suppose  the  merchandise  or  Cargo  is  not  of  foreign 
origin  ? 

Answer.  He  should  exercise  supervision  over  it  until  the 
owner  or  underwriters  have  been  consulted  as  to  its  disposition. 

Question.  What  is  the  ordinary  presumption  regarding  dere- 
lict or  wrecked  merchandise? 

Answer.  Merchandise  picked  up  at  sea  derelict  or  taken  from 
a  wreck  is  prima  facie  dutiable,  and  should  be  so  regarded  until 
the  matter  is  passed  upon  by  the  proper  customs  officers,  whether 
it  is  claimed  to  be  of  American  origin  or  not. 

Question.  What  rights  have  salvors  in  such  goods? 

Answer.  They  have  an  uncertain  interest  in  them  depending 
upon  the  decree  of  a  competent  tribunal.  They  have  also  a 
presumptive  right  to  possession  of  merchandise '  saved  by  them 
from  abandoned  wrecks,  but  their  possession  of  them  must  be 
reported  to  the  collector  of  customs. 

Question.  Is  it  lawful  for  a  vessel  to  transfer  its  cargo,  or 
any  part  thereof,  into  another  vessel  in  the  open  sea  within  4 
leagues  of  the  coast  of  the  United  States? 

Answer.  No.  It  is  unlawful,  except  in  case  of  accident,  neces- 
sity, or  distress,  which  must  be  proved  in  the  manner  prescribed 
by  law. 

Question.  What  action  should  you  take  in  any  such  case  com- 
ing under  your  observation? 

Answer.  I  should  at  once  investigate  the  matter  and  report 
all  the  facts,  together  with  the  names  of  the  vessels  involved, 
to  the  collector  of  customs  by  the  quickest  available  means. 

Question.  In  what  case  would  the  merchandise  so  transferred 
be  subject  to  forfeiture? 

Answer.  In  case  the  vessel  from  which  it  is  transferred  was 
bound  to  the  United  States  from  a  foreign  port.  The  vessel 
into  which  it  is  transferred  would  also  be  liable  to  forfeiture. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST   GUARD  STATIONS.          183 

Question.  Where  is  it  unlawful  for  a  vessel  to  unlade  its 
cargo  ? 

Answer.  It  is  unlawful  for  any  vessel -to  unlade  its  cargo,  or 
any  part  thereof,  elsewhere  than  at  a  port  of  entry  or  port  desig- 
nated as  a  customs  station  to  which  it  is  destined  without 
special  permission  from  the  collector  of  customs. 

Question.  Is  it  lawful  for  a  foreign  vessel  to  transport  mer- 
chandise or  passengers  from  port  to  port  in  the  United  States? 

Answer.  No ;  but  she  may  proceed  from  one  domestic  port  to 
another  for  the  purpose  of  unlading  her  foreign  cargo  or  to  take 
on  cargo  for  a  foreign  voyage. 

Question,  (a)  Under  what  conditions  are  the  equipment  and 
ship's  stores  of  a  wrecked  foreign  vessel  dutiable  when  brought 
into  the  United  States? 

( & )  When  are  they  free  of  duty  ? 

Answer,  (a)  The  equipment  and  ship's  stores  taken  from  a 
foreign  vessel  wrecked  outside  the  waters  of  the  United  States 
are  dutiable  when  brought  into  the  United  States. 

(&)  When  a  foreign  vessel  is  wrecked  in  the  waters  of  the 
United  States  the  equipment  and  sJiip's  stores  recovered  and 
brought  into  port  are  free  of  duty,  as  are  also  the  materials 
and  equipment  of  a  foreign  vessel  condemned  and  dismantled 
in  the  United  States. 

Question.  Is  the  importation  of  opium  unlawful? 

Answer.  The  importation  of  smoking  opium  or  opium  pre- 
pared for  smoking  is  prohibited.  The  importation  of  opium  in 
any  other  form  or  of  preparations  or  derivatives  thereof  is 
prohibited  except  for  medicinal  purposes. 

Question.  What  opium  should  be  seized  on  discovery? 

Answer.  All  smoking  opium  should  be  forthwith  seized  and 
also  all  other  forms  of  opium  not  shown  on  the  vessel's  mani- 
fest. 

Question.  Is  it  unlawful  to  import  intoxicating  liquors  into 
the  United  States? 

Answer.  Yes.  The  importation  into  or  exportation  from  the 
United  States  of  intoxicating  liquors  for  beverage  purposes  is 
absolutely  prohibited. 

Question.  Under  what  conditions  may  win^s  and  liquors  be 
imported  into  the  United  States? 

Answer.  Wines  and  liquors  may  be  imported  into  the  United 
States  for  nonbeverage  purposes,  if  a  permit  for  that  purpose 
is  obtained  from  the  prohibition  commissioner. 


184          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  May  intoxicating  liquors  for  beverage  purposes  be 
carried  on  board  merchant  vessels  of  the  United  States  as  sea 
stores;  and  if  so,  under  what  conditions? 

Answer.  Vessels  engaged  in  the  foreign  trade  rnay  not  carry 
intoxicating  liquors  for  beverage  purposes  as  sea  stores. 

Question.  Are  vessels  engaged  in  the  coasting  trade  permitted 
to  carry  intoxicating  beverages? 

Answer.  No ;  unless  they  have  a  license  for  the  purpose  from 
the  Prohibition  Commissioner. 

Question.  Define  the  following  terms  as  used  in  Customs 
Regulations  of  the  United  States:  (a-)  Vessel;  (&)  vessels  of 
the  United  States;  (c)  marine  document. 

Answer,  (a)  The  word  "vessel"  includes  every  description 
of  water  craft  or  other  artificial  contrivance  used  or  capable  of 
being  used  as  means  of  transportation  on  water. 

(&)  The  term  "vessels  of  the  United  States"  applies  to  such 
only  as  are  documented  either  by  license  or  by  enrollment  or  by 
certificate  of  registry. 

(c)  The  term  "  marine  document  "  relates  either  to  a  register, 
an  enrollment,  or  a  license. 

Question,  (a)  What  marine  document  may  be  issued  to  a 
vessel  of  20  net  tons  and  upward?  (b)  To 'a  vessel  of  5  net 
tons  and  less  than  20  net  tons? 

Answer,  (a)  Vessels  of  20  net  tons  and  upwards  may  be 
either  registered  or  enrolled  and  licensed. 

( & )  Vessels  of  5  net  tons  and  less  than  20  net  tons  can  be 
licensed  or  registered. 

Question.  What  marine  document  do  vessels  of  the  United 
States  navigating  the  waters  on  the  northern,  northeastern,  and 
north wesern  frontiers  otherwise  than  by  sea  require? 

Answer.  They  require  a  special  enrollment  and  license  which 
permits  them  to  be  employed  in  either  the  coasting  or  the.  for- 
eign trade  on  such  frontiers. 

Question.  What  vessels  do  not  require  to  be  documented? 

Answer.  Certain  classes  of  boats,  lighters,  and  barges. 

Question.  What  barges,  lighters,  and  other  boats  must  be 
documented? 

Answer.  Barges,  lighters,  and  other  boats  provided  with  sail 
or  internal  motive  power,  whether  such  power  is  generally  used 
or  not. 

Barges  and  boats  without  sail  or  internal  motive  power  of 
their  own  engaged  in  trade  with  Canada,  or  employed  upon  the 
marine  waters  of  the  United  States. 


INSTRUCTIONS  POR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          185 

Barges  and ''boats  without  sail  or  internal  motive  power  of 
their  own  carrying  passengers. 

Question.  What  vessels  may  engage  in  trade  between  port  and 
port  of  the  United  States?  ; 

Answer.  Vessels  of  the  United  States  and  certain  classes  of 
barges,  lighters,  and  other  boats  which  are  exempt  from  docu- 
mentation. 

Question,  (a)  Where  and  how  must  the  draft  be  marked  on 
every  registered  vessel  of  the  United  States?  (&)  What  indi- 
cates the  draft  to  any  line? 

Answer,  (a)  The  draft  of  every  registered  vessel  shall  be 
marked  upon  the  stem  and  sternpost  in  English  feet  or  decime- 
ters in  either  Arabic  or  Roman  numerals. 

(&)  The  bottom  of  each  numeral  shall  indicate  the  draft  to 
that  line. 

Question,  (a)  Of  what  two  descriptions  are  marine  docu- 
ments as  regards  place  of  issue?  (&)  How  are  they  distin- 
guished from  each  other? 

Answer,  (a)  Marine  documents  are  of  two-  descriptions: 
Permanent,  granted  to  vessels  belonging  to  ports  at  which  the 
document  issues,  and  temporary,  granted  to  vessels  not  be- 
longing to  ports  at  which  the  document  issues. 

(1))  The  two  classes  of  documents  are  distinguished  from 
each  other  by  plainly  writing  the  word  "  Permanent  "  or  "  Tem- 
porary "  in  the  margin  of  the  document  immediately  above  the 
number. 

Question.  For  what  length  of  time  are  marine  documents 
valid? 

Answer.  Registers  and  enrollments  are  valid  for  any  length 
of  time  until  a  contingency  shall  arise  requiring  their  surrender. 
Licenses  are  valid  for  one  year  only,  but  may  be  renewed  or 
changed  at  any  time  during  the  year  for  which  they  are  granted. 
No  enrollment  or  license  granted  to  any  vessel  shall  be  consid- 
ered in  force  longer  than  :such  vessel  is  Owned  and  is  of  the 
description  as  set  forth  in  the  document  and  is  engaged  in  the 
business  or  employment  for  which  the  document  was  granted. 

Question.  What  vessels  of  the  United  States  may  engage  in 
the  foreign  trade  by  sea? 

Answer.  Registered  vessels. 

Question.  May  registered  vessels  engage  in  the  domestic 
trade? 


186          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  Registered  vessels  may  engage  in  the  domestic  trade 
under  the  requirements  of  entering  at  the  custom  house  at  every 
port  of  arrival,  if  laden  with  excess  of  certain  commodities. 

Question.  What  vessels  may  engage  in  the  coasting  trade  or 
fisheries  ? 

Answer.  Vessels  of  20  net  tons  or  more  enrolled  and  having  a 
license  in  force,  and  vessels  of  5  net  tons  and  less  than  20  net 
tons  not  enrolled  but  having  a  license  in  force. 

Question.  By  whom  must  marine  documents  be  signed? 

Answer.  They  must  be  signed  and  sealed  by  the  collector  and 
countersigned  by  the  naval  officer  of  the  port  or  by  the  surveyor. 
Certificates  of  registry  must  also  bear  the  seal  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  Commerce  and  be  signed  by  the  Commissioner  of  Navi- 
gation. 

Question.  Must  a  vessel's  tonnnage  be  given  in  her  marine 
documents? 

Answer.  Yes.  Her  gross  and  net  or  registered  tonnage  must 
be  given. 

Question.  Where  and  how  must  a  vessel's  name  and  home 
port  be  marked  on  her? 

Answer.  The  name  of  every  documented  vessel,  "  yachts  ex- 
cepted,"  shall  be  marked  in  full  upon  each  bow  and  upon  the 
stern,  and  the  home  port  shall  also  be  marked  in  full  upon  the 
stern.  The  name  shall  be  painted  or  carved  or  gilded  in  Roman 
letters  in  a  light  color  on  a  dark  ground  or  in  a  dark  color  on 
a  light  ground.  The  letters  shall  not  be  less  than  4  inches  high. 

Question.  Where  else  than  on  the  bow  and  stern  must  the 
name  of  every  steam  vessel  be  marked? 

Answer.  Every  steam  vessel  must  also  have  her  name  con- 
spicuously placed  in  distinct  plain  letters  not  less  than  6  inches 
high  on  each  outer  side  of  the  pilot  house,  if  it  has  such,  and 
in  case  the  vessel  has  side-wheels,  also  on  the  outer  side  of 
each  wheelhouse. 

Question.  WThere  must  the  name  be  placed  on  vessels  called 
"  double  enders  "  ? 

Answer.  On  the  parts  corresponding  to  the  bow  and  stern. 

Question.  Where  must  the  name  and  home  port  be  placed  on 
documented  yachts? 

Answer.  On  some  conspicuous  part  of  their  hulls. 

Question.  What  is  a  vessel's  home  port? 

Answer.  A  vessel's  home  port  is  that  port  established  by  law 
at  or  nearest  to  which  the  owner,  or  if  there  be  more  than  one 


FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.       m 

owner,    at    which    the    husband    or    managing    owner   usually 
resides. 

Question.  Must    every    documented    vessel    have    an    official 
number,  and  of  what  does  it  consist? 

Answer.  Yes.     For  all  seagoing  vessels  of  100  tons  or  over 
it  consists  of  numerals  and  letters,  and  for  all  other  vessels,  of 
numerals  only,  but  signal  letters  may  also  be  assigned  to  vessels 
of  less  than  100  tons  when  special  application  is  made  therefor. 
Question.  When  a  vessel  shows  her  official  number,  does  she 
display  the  letters  or  the  numerals  assigned  to  her? 
Answer.  She  displays  her  signal  letters  only. 
Question.  How  many  letters  form  the  signal  letters  of  a  mer- 
chant vessel  of  the  United  States,  and  where  may  the  same  be 
found? 

Answer.  Four  letters.  They  may  be  found  in  the  List  of  Mer- 
chant Vessels  of  the  United  States. 

Question.  What  part  of  the  vessel's  official  number  is  marked 
on  the  main  beam? 

Answer.  The  numerals  assigned  her,  preceded  by  the  abbre- 
viation "  No." 

Question.  Upon  which  beam  must  it  be  marked? 
Answer.  Upon  the  face  of  the  beam  under  the  forward  side 
of  the  main  hatch  of  seagoing  and  lake  vessels  and  on  the  face 
of  the  beam  under  the  afterside  of  the  starboard  forward  hatch 
of  western  river  steamers.  On  river  steamers  of  the  coast  which 
carry  passengers  both  above  and  below  the  main  deck,  where 
there  is  no  hatch  to  the  main  deck,  the  markings  should  be 
painted  upon  one  of  the  deck  beams  in  a  conspicuous  place,  as 
near  as  possible  to  the  middle  of  the  vessel. 

Question.  WThat  else  must  be  carved  or  permanently  marked 
on  the  main  beam? 
Answer.  The  vessel's  net  tonnage. 

Question.  What  vessels  of  the  United  States  must  be  in- 
spected by  the  local  inspectors  of  steam  vessels? 

Answer,  (a)  Vessels  other  than  motor  boats  propelled  in 
whole  or  in  part  by  steam  and  vessels  of  above  15  gross  tons 
carrying  freight  or  passengers  for  hire  and  propelled  by  gas, 
fluid,  naphtha,  or  electric  motors. 

(&)  Sailing  vessels  of  over  700  gross  tons  carrying  passengers 
for  hire ;  seagoing  barges  of  over  100  gross  tons,  and  all  other 
vessels  of  over  100  tons  carrying  passengers  for  hire. 

Question.,  What  is  the  law  regarding  the  carrying  of  powder 
on  steam  vessels  carrying  passengers? 


188          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  No  steam  vessel  employed  in  the  carriage  of  passen- 
gers shall  carry  gunpowder  without  having  conspicuously  posted 
on  board  such  vessel  a  certificate  issued  by  the  local  inspectors 
authorizing  the  carriage  of  such  gunpowdeV. 

Question;  Must  the  master  of  every  vessel  of  the  United 
States  be  a  citizen  thereof  ? 

Answer.  Yes. 

Question.  Must  the  officers  of  every  vessel  of  the  United 
States  be  citizens  thereof? 

Answer.  In  general,  all  officers  who  shall  have  charge  of  a 
watch,  including  pilots,  shall  be  citizens  of  the  United  States. 

Question.  What  exceptions  are  there  to  the  general  law  re- 
quiring watch  officers  of  vessels  of  the  United  States  to  be  citi- 
zens thereof? 

Answer.  Where  on  a  foreign  voyage  or  on  a  voyage  from  an 
Atlantic  to  a  Pacific  port  of  the  United  States,  such  vessel,  is 
for  any  reason,  deprived  of  the  services  of  an  officer  below  the 
grade  of  master,  his  place  or  a  vacancy  caused  by  the  promo- 
tion of  another  officer  to  such  place  may  be  supplied  by  a  per- 
son not  a  citizen  of  the  United  States  until  the  first  return  of 
such  vessel  to  her  home  port. 

Question.  Whom,  in  addition  to  the  master,  mates,  and  pilots, 
does  the  word  "  officers  "  include  on  vessels  propelled  wholly 
or  in  part  by  steam? 

Answer.  The  chief  engineer  and  each  assistant  engineer  in 
charge  of  a  watch. 

Question.  What  officers  of  steam  vessels  of  the  United  States 
must  be  licensed? 

Answer.  All  masters,  chief  mates,  second  and  third  mates  if 
in  charge  of  a  watch,  engineers,  and  pilots. 

Question.  Of  other  vessels? 

Answer.  The  masters  of  sail  vessels  of  over  TOO  gross  tons 
and  of  all  other  vessels  or  barges  of  over  100  gross  tons  burden 
carrying  passengers  for  hire.  Chief  mates  of  these  vessels  may 
be  licensed  on  application,  provided  they  pass  the  required 
examination,  but  no  penalty  accrues  for  failure  of  such  vessel 
to  carry  a  licensed  mate. 

Question.  Must  a  licensed  officer  display  Ms  license  on  the 
vessel  upon  which  he  is  employed? 

Answer.  Yes.  Within  48  hours  after  going  on  board  for  duty, 
a  licensed  officer  must  display  his  certificate  of  license,  which 
shall  be  framed  under  glass,  in  some  conspicuous  place  on  such 
.  •  . 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          189 

vessel  where  it  can  be  seen  by  passengers  and  others  at  all 
times. 

Question.  How  can  you  tell  how  many  licensed  officers  any 
steam  merchant  vessel  or  ocean-going  vessel  of  the  United 
States  carrying  passengers  should  have? 

Answer.  The  number  of  licensed  officers  she  should  carry,  as 
well. as  the  number  of  men  in  her  crew,  is  given  on  the  vessel's 
certificate  of  inspection. 
.     Question.  What  is  a  certificate  of  inspection? 

Answer.  It  is  a  document  issued  a  vessel  certifying  that  the 
laws  relating  to  the  construction  and  equipment  of  such  vessel 
have  been  complied  with. 

Question.  Must  the  certificate  of  inspection  be  displayed  on 
board  inspected  vessels? 

Answer.  Yes ;  it  must  be  displayed  in  a  conspicuous  place  in 
the  vessel  where  it  is  most  likely  to  be  observed  by  passengers 
ancl  others  and  be  kept  there  at  all  times. 

Question.  What  is  the  difference  between  an  officer's  license 
and  the  license  issued  to  a  vessel? 

Answer.  An  officer's  license  is  a  document  issued  by  a  board 
of  local  inspectors  of  steam  vessels  authorizing  the  person  to 
whom  it  is  granted  to  perform  certain  duties  as  an  officer  on 
vessels  of  the  United  States ;  a  license  issued  to  a  vessel  is  a 
marine  document  .granted  by  a  collector  of  customs  authorizing 
the  employment  of  the  vessel  in  the  coasting  trade  or  fisheries. 
.  Question.  How  does  a  register  and  enrollment  identify  a 
vessel ? 

Answer.  By  her  name,  home  port,  build,  dimensions,  tonnage, 
and  rig,  and  by  her  master's  name  and  the  name  of  her  owner, 
and  if  more  than  one  owner,  by  the  names  of  all  and  the  portion 
owned  by  each,  and  especially  by  her  official  number. 

Question.  How  does  a  license  identify  ra  vessel? 

Answer.  By  her  official  number,  name,  rig,  and  tonnage,  and 
by  her  master's  name  and  the  name  of  her  husband,  or  manag- 
ing owner. 

Question.  Must  the  enrollment  and  license  of  a  vessel  of  20 
net  tons  and  over  be  separate  documents? 

Answer.  No  ;  they  may  be  consolidated  into  one  document. 

Question.  Can  a  vessel  enrolled  and  licensed  for  trade  on  the 
northern,    northeastern,    or   northwestern    frontiers   engage   in 
j  trade  elsewhere  than  on  those  frontier  waters? 

Answer.  No.  On  leaving  the  inland  waters  on  the  frontiers  to 
engage  in  trade  on  the  seaboard,  she  must  surrender  her  frontier 


190          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

papers  and  take  out  coasting  papers,  and  if  bound  on  a  foreign 
voyage  partly  by  sea  she  must  take  out  in  lieu  of  her  frontier 
papers  a  certificate  of  registry. 

Question.  Can  a  marine  document  be  used  for  any  other  vessel 
than  for  the  one  for  which  it  is  granted? 

Answer.  No.  It  can  be  used  solely  for  the  vessel  for  which 
it  is  granted  and  shall  not  be  sold,  lent,  or  otherwise  disposed  of 
to  any  person  whatever. 

Question.  When  must  permanert  marine  documents  be  sur- 
rendered? 

Answer.  Permanent  marine  documents  are  to  be  surrendered 
when  a  vessel  is  sold  in  whole  or  in  part ;  when  a  vessel  has  been 
lost  or  taken  by  an  enemy,  or  otherwise  prevented  from  return- 
ing to  the  port  to  which  she  belongs ;  when  a  vessel  is  burned 
or  broken  up ;  when  a  vessel  is  altered  in  form  or  burden  by 
being  lengthened,  shortened,  or  built  upon,  or  from  one  denomi- 
nation to  another  by  the  mode  or  method  of  rigging  or  fitting; 
on  a  change  from  one  employment  to  another;  on  the  death, 
removal,  or  resignation  of  one  of  the  chief  officers  of  an  incor- 
porated company  owning  any  vessel  and  whose  name  appeared 
on  the  documents  of  such  vessel ;  on  a  change  of  residence  of 
the  managing  owner  from  one  port  to  another  within  the  same 
customs  district  without  change  in  ownership ;  and  the  exemp- 
tion from  documentation  of  vessels  under  the  act  of  April  18, 
1874. 

Question.  When  must  temporary  marine  documents  be  sur- 
rendered? 

Answer.  Temporary  marine  documents  are  to  be  surrendered 
to  the  collector  at  the  port  where  the  vessel  belongs  within  10 
days  after  her  arrival,  and  in  all  cases  in  which  the  surrender 
of  the  permanent  documents  is  required. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  the  term  "  arrival "  at  the  port 
where  the  vessel  belongs? 

Answer.  By  the  term  "  arrival "  is  to  be  understood  the 
voluntary  arrival  of  the  vessel  at  her  home  port  to  which  she 
was  destined  in  the  regular  course  of  her  employment.  If,  for 
instance,  a  vessel  is  forced  by  stress  of  weather  into  her  home 
port  while  on  her  voyage  for  another  port  of  destination,  or 
stops  there  on  such  voyage  to  take  in  provisions  or  water  or 
take  on  passengers,  or  baggage,  such  not  being  her  usual  em- 
ployment, it  is  not  an  ''arrival"  within  the  meaning  of  the 
taw,  and  tjie  master  is  not  obliged  in  consequence  thereof  to 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          191 

surrender  her  temporary  document  and  take  out  a  permanent 
document. 

Question.  Can  the  name  of  a  documented  vessel  be  changed 
except  as  prescribed  by  law? 

Answer.  No ;  under  penalty  of  forfeiture. 

Question.  Is  it  lawful  for  an  officer  of  the  customs  to  inspect 
the  marine  documents  of  a  vessel? 

Answer.  It  is  lawful  at  all  times  for  any  officer  of  the  cus- 
toms to  inspect  the  marine  documents  of  any  vessel,  and  if  the 
master  on  board  of  any  vessel  shall  not  exhibit  the  same  when 
required  by  such  officer,  he  will  be  liable  to  a  fine  of  $100. 
The  papers  of  a  documented  vessel,  when  such  vessel  is  in 
commission,  should  be  on  board  and  accessible  to  the  person 
in  charge,  except  when  such  papers  are  in  the  custody  of  the 
collector. 

Question.  What  yachts  may  be  licensed,  arid  what  privileges 
do  licensed  yachts  have? 

Answer.  Yachts  measuring  16  gross  tons  or  over,  used  or  em- 
ployed exclusively  as  pleasure  vessels,  may  be  licensed  to  proceed 
from  port  to  port  within  the  United  States,  without  entering  or 
clearing,  and  to  foreign  ports  without  clearing  at  the  custom 
house. 

Question.  May  they  transport  merchandise  or  passengers  for 
hire?  <ci  no 

Answer.  No;  they  can  not  engage  in  any  trade,  nor  in  any 
way  violate  the  revenue  laws  of  the  United  States,  under  pen- 
alty of  seizure  and  forfeiture. 

Question.  Must  the  master  or  other  person  in  command  of  a 
yacht  exhibit  her  marine  documents  on  demand  of  any  officer 
of  the  customs? 

Answer.  Yes;  and  he  must  submit  to  such  examination  as 
the  officer  may  see  fit  to  make  for  the  due  protection  of  the 
public  revenues. 

Question.  Are  foreign  steam  tugs  permitted  to  tow  docu- 
mented vessels  of  the  United  States  from  one  port  or  place  in 
the  same  to  another? 

Answer.  No ;  unless  the  towing  is  in  whole  or  in  part  within 
or  upon  foreign  waters. 

BUOYS. 

Question.  In  coming  from  seaward,  what  color  buoys 
the  starboard  or  right-hand  side  of  the  channel? 
Answer.  Red. 


192          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  What  color  buoys  mark  the  port  or  left-hand  side? 

Answer.  Black. 

Question.  How  are  dangers  and  obstructions  marked? 

Answer.  By  buoys  with  black  and  red  horizontal  stripes. 

Question.  On  which  hand  should  these  buoys  be  left? 

Answer.  They  may  be  left  on  either  hand. 

Question.  How  are  buoys  that  indicate  the  fairway  marked? 

Answer.  With  black  and  white  vertical  stripes.  These  buoys 
should  be  passed  close-to. 

Question.  How  are  sunken  wrecks  marked? 

Answer.  By  red  and  black  buoys,  horizontal  stripes.  These 
buoys  are  the  same  as  obstruction  buoys. 

Question.  What  color  are  quarantine  buoys? 

Answer.  Yellow. 

Question.  What  are  white  buoys  used  for? 

Answer.  As  they  have  no  special  meaning,  they  are  often  used 
for  special  purposes  not  connected  with  navigation. 

Question.  .How  are  the  starboard  and  port  channel  buoys 
numbered? 

Answer.  The  numbers  begin  from  the  seaward  end  of  the 
channel.  Black  buoys  have  odd  numbers.  lied  buoys  have  even 
numbers. 

Question.  Why  are  perches  or  balls  or  cages  sometimes  placed 
on  buoys? 

Answer.  Such  buoys  are  at  turning  points.  The  color  and  the 
number  indicate  on  which  side  they  shall  be  passed. 

Question.  What  types  of  buoys  are  in  common  use? 

Answer.  Nun,  can,  and  spar. 

Question.  What  is  the  shape  of  a  nun  buoy? 

Answer.  Conical. 

Question.  Of  a  can  buoy? 

Answer.  Cylindrical. 

SIGNALS. 

MEANING  OF  FLAGS,  PENNANTS,  AND  SIGNS. 
Alphabet  flags. 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  A? 

Answer.  "Affirmative"  ( ),  written  "Affirm." 

Question.  Replying  to  a  signal,  what  does  it  indicate? 
Answer.  Assent,  consent,  permission  granted,  ov  "  Yes." 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          193 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  B? 

Answer.  "Boy"  ( ). 

Question.  How  is  it  used  as  explosive  flag? 

Answer.  It  is  hoisted  at  foretruck  when  handling  ammuni- 
tion, fuel  oil,  or  gasoline  in  large  quantities;  also  displayed  in 
the  bows  of  all  boats  and  lighters  transporting  same.  At  night 
a  red  light  shall  be  displayed  at  the  foretruck  when  handling 
ammunition,  fuel  oil,  or  gasoline  in  large  quantities. 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  pennant  C? 

Answer.  "  Cast  "   ( ) . 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  pennant  D? 

Answer.  "  Dog  "  ( •). 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  pennant  E? 

Answer.  "Easy"    (•)• 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  pennant  F? 

Answer.  "  Fox  "   ( • ) . 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  pennant  G? 

Answer.  "  George  "   ( ) . 

Question.  For  what  is  it  used  as  a  call? 

Answer.  For  Government  shore  signal  stations,  etc. 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  H? 

Answer.  "  Have  "  (••••)• 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  I? 

Answer.  "Interrogatory"  ( ),  written  "Int."  The 

dot  and  dash  equivalent  of  the  International  flag  "  I,"  when  used 
as  a  signal  flag  meaning  "  Interrogatory,"  must  not  be  confused 
with  the  Morse  equivalent  of  I  ( •  • )  when  used  as  a  letter. 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  J? 

Answer.  "  Jig  "   ( ) . 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  K? 

Answer.  "  King  "   ( ). 

34079—21 13 


194          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  L? 

Answer.  "  Love  "  ( • ) . 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  M? 

Answer.  "Mike"  ( ). 

Question.  What  does  it  mean  at  the  main  truck  of  ships  and 
in  the  bow  of  boats? 

Answer.  It  means  that  the  ship**  and  boats  so  flying  it  are 
carrying  mail. 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  arid  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  N? 

Answer.  "Negative"   ( — ),  written  "  Negat." 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  0? 

Answer.  "Optional"   ( ),  written  "Option." 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  P? 

Answer.  "  Preparatory  "  ( ) ,  written  "  Prep." 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  a? 

Answer.  "Quack"  ( ). 

Question.  For  what  is  it  used? 

Answer.  Quarantine  flag.  Hoisted  at  the  foremast,  or  other 
conspicuous  point  of  hoist,  by  all  ships  in  quarantine.  Hoisted 
by  incoming  ships  it  is  a  signal  to  the  health  officer  of  the  port 
that  pratique  is  desired. 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  R? 

Answer.  "  Roger  "  ( ) . 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  S? 

Answer.  "Sail"  (•••)• 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  T? 

Answer.  "Tare"  ( — ). 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  U? 

Answer.  "Unit"  ( ). 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  V? 

Answer.  "  Vice  "  ( ) . 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          195 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  mid  dash,  equivalent 
of  flag  W? 

Answer.  "Watch"   ( ). 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  X? 

Answer.  "  X-ray  "   ( — ) . 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  Y? 

Answer.  "Yoke"   ( ). 

Question.  What  is  the  name  and  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent 
of  flag  Z? 

Answer.  "Zed"   ( ). 

Question.  What  is  its  meaning  as  a  call? 

Answer.  General  call.  Hoisted  at  the  foretruck  it  calls  all 
absent  from  the  ship  to  return  immediately.  A  gun  may  be 
iired  to  call  attention  to  it. 

Question.  How  many  numeral  flags  are  there? 

Answer.  Ten. 

Question.  How  are  they  used? 

Answer.  They  are  used  in  their  numeral  sense,  in  signals, 
with  the  alphabet  flags  and  pennants  and  maneuvering  pennants 
on  ships  in  formation. 

Question.  What  does  the  5-flag  mean  when  broken  at  the  fore- 
truck  when  under  way? 

Answer.  "  Breakdown  "  or  "  Not  under  control."  The  equiva- 
lent night  signal  for  "  Breakdown  "  or  "  Not  under  control "  is 
two  red  lights  arranged  vertically. 

Question.  What  does  it  mean  when  broken  at  the  foretruck 
and  lowered  to  the  dip? 

Answer.  It  means  "  Man  overboard."  When  so  used  in  thick 
weather  a  gun  is  fired  at  the  same  time.  The  equivalent  night 
signal  for  "  Man  overboard  "  is  the  flashing  of  the  two  red  lights 
mentioned  above  and  the  firing  of  a  gun. 

Question.  What  does  the  6-flag  mean  when  hoisted  alone? 

Answer.  "  General  recall "  for  all  boats  away  from  the  ship. 
Its  night  equivalent  as  "  General  recall "  is  six  long  flashes. 

Question.  How  is  it  used  to  recall  particular  boats? 

Answer.  It  is  hoisted  over  the  numeral  pennants  of  the  boats 
it  is  desired  to  recall. 

Question.  What  does  it  mean  over  "  Negative  "  over  numeral 
pennants? 

Answer.  It  recalls  all  boats  except  that  indicated. 


196          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  What  does  it  mean  under  "  Negative "  and  over 
numeral  pennants? 

Answer.  It  directs  the  boat  indicated  not  to  return  until  re- 
called. 

Question.  When  are  numeral  pennants  used? 

Answer.  Only  in  calls.  Their  dot  and  dash  equivalents  are 
the  same  as  those  of  the  numeral  flags. 

SPECIAL    FLAGS,    PENNANTS,    AND    SIGNS. 

Question.  What  does  the  answering  pennant  mean  when 
hoisted  at  the  yardarm? 

Answer.  It  answers  a  flag-hoist  call  for  a  bridge  dispatch. 
While  hoisted,  it  indicates  that  the  message  is  being  read ;  when 
hauled  down,  that  it  is  received;  and  if  dipped  that  the  last 
word  was  not  received  and  should  be  repeated.  When  several 
ships  are  in  company,  and  particularly  on  flagships,  the  an- 
swering pennant  should  be  hoisted  under  the  call  of  the  ship 
answered,  in  order  to  avoid  confusion. 

Question.  What  is  the  dot  and  dash  equivalent  of  the  tack 
line? 

Answer. or  TL  made  as  one  character.  Written 

"  Tack." 

Question.  What  is  the  tack  line  and  for  what  is  it  used? 

Answer.  In  flag  hoists  it  is  a  piece  of  line  6  feet  long  fitted 
with  a  ring  and  snap,  like  a  flag,  and  used  to  separate  flags 
of  the  same  hoist,  which,  if  hoisted  at  the  ordinary  distance 
apart,  would  convey  a  different  meaning  from  that  intended. 

Question.  In  what  three  different  ways  may  it  be  used? 

Answer.  (1)  In  flag  hoists  it  .separates  a  single  alphabet  flag 
used  as  a  call  from  the  signal  proper. 

(2)  It  is  used  in  certain  direct-reading  signals  for  clearness. 

(3)  Where  no  confusion  will  result  it  may  be  used  to  sep- 
arate distinct  signals  made  at  the  same  point  of  hoist. 

Question.  What  is  the  "preliminary  executive"  sign? 

Answer. or  ix  made  as  one  character;  when  fol- 
lowed by  a  10-second  dash  (  1Q  sec-  ^  it  constitutes 
the  executive  sign.  The  termination  of  the  10-second  dash  is 
the  final  signal  of  execution  and  corresponds  to  the  "  haul 
down  "  of  a  flag-hoist  signal. 

Question.  What  is  the  dot-and-dash  "full-stop"  sign? 

Answer. — 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          197 

Question.  For  what  is  it  used? 

Answer.  It  is  used  to  separate  two  complete  signals  sent  at 
the  same  time  and  which  are  to  be  executed  simultaneously. 

Question.  What  is  the  "  finale  "  sign  ? 

Answer.  The  finale  sign  is • 

Question.  For  what  is  it  used? 

Answer.  To  indicate  the  end  of  a  signal  that  has  just  been 
sent. 

Question.  What  is  the  "finish"  sign? 

Answer.  •  • •  — 

Question.  For  what  is  it  used? 

Answer.  It  is  used  in  connection  with  nontactical  signals  to 
indicate  that  no  more  signals  are  to  be  sent  at  that  particular 
time. 

. 
VISUAL  CALL  SYSTEM  AND  TRANSMISSION  OF  SIGNALS  BY  FLAGS. 

VISUAL  CALL  SYSTEM. 

Question.  In  calling  or  exchanging  calls  with  naval  ships  or 
naval  shore  stations  by  flag  signal,  what  calls  are  to  be  used? 

Answer.  The  naval  calls. 

Question.  In  calling  or  exchanging  calls  with  merchantmen, 
or  when  it  is  desired  "to  inform  shore  stations  other  than  naval 
of  the  name  of  the  ship,  what  calls  are  to  be  used? 

Answer.  The  International  call  letters. 

Question.  How  is  any  Government  signal  station  other  than 
naval  to  be  called? 

Answer.  The  International  alphabet  pennant  G  (or  G  made 
by  other  means)  is  to  be  used  by  day,  and  at  night  G  is  to  be 
made  by  flashing  light.  Similarly,  G  is  used  by  a  Government 
signal  station  to  call  a  naval  vessel  (or  the  senior,  if  more  than 
one  is  present). 

Question.  What  is  the  dot-and-dash  equivalent  of  the  Inter- 
national answering  pennant? 

Answer.  It  is —  (MM  made  as  one  sign). 

Question.  In  addition  to  the  uses  prescribed  in  the  Interna- 
tional Code  of  Signals,  for  what  else  is  the  International  an- 
swering pennant  used? 

Answer.  International  answering  pennant  (or  its  dot-and- 
dash  equivalent)  is  used  to  answer  the  call  G  as  follows : 

(1)  By  flag,  by  hoisting  the  International  answering  pennant 
at  the  clip.  The  answering  pennant  is  kept  at  the  dip  while 


198          INSTRUCTIONS  FOE,  COAST  GTTAED  STATIONS. 

communication  is  being  exchanged,  and  is  two-blocked  and 
hauled  down  when  communication  has  been  understood  and  is 
completed. 

(2)  By  dot  and  dash,  by  making  the  dot-and-dash  equivalent 
( )  of  the  International  answering  pennant. 

Question.  Is  there  an  equivalent  for  the  call  pennants  in 
semaphore? 

Answer.  No.  When  it  is  not  practicable  to  call  by  hoist  and 
the  "  attention  sign  "  is  not  sufficiently  definite,  the  first  three 
or  four  letters  of  the  unit's  name  will  be  used  as  a  call. 

Question.  For  what  purposes  are  calls  used? 

Answer.  For  two  purposes : 

(1)  As  an  address  or  "call  up"  for  a  signal  or  dispatch. 

(2)  To  complete  the  meaning  of  a  signal  by   referring  to, 
indicating,  or  designating  a  unit,  ship,  or  class  of  ships.     When 
so  used  they  are  called  "  designating  signals." 

Question.  How  is  an  address  or  "  call  up  "  made  by  flag  hoist? 

Answer.  (1)  The  call  is  hoisted  above  the  signal,  or  as  a 
separate  hoist,  at  the  same  yardarm. 

(2)  As  a  "  call  up  "  for  a  bridge  dispatch,  the  call  is  hoisted 
at  the  yardarm  unless  it  is  necessary  to  make  such  a  call  while 
flag  signals  are  displayed  at  the  same  yardarm.  In  this  case 
the  call  for  a  bridge  dispatch  is  hoisted  at  the  dip.  In  either 
case  the  dipping  of  the  call  indicates  an  error,  and  hauling  it 
down  indicates  the  end  of  the  dispatch. 

Question.  How  is  the  tack  line  used  in  flag-hoist  calls? 

Answer.  (1)  To  separate  a  signal  from  the  last  flag  of  a  call, 
when  the  last  flag  of  the  call  is  an  alphabet  flag  or  the  squadron 
or  division  flag. 

(2)  To  separate  the  calls  of  classes  or  forces. 

(3)  To  separate  two  single  pennant  calls. 

Question.  How  is  an  address  or  "  call  up  "  made  by  dot  and 
dash? 

Answer.  (1)  The  call  precedes  the  signal  and  is  separated 
therefrom  in  all  signals  by  the  "  signal  "  sign  (• ). 

(2)  Letters  and  numbers  are  made  by  their  dot-and-dash 
equivalents. 

Question.  Is  the  tack-line  sign  used  in  calls  made  by  dot  and 
dash? 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  How  are  calls  by  dot  and  dash  made? 

Answer.  All  calls  by  dot  and  dash  are  made  complete  for  each 
class,  unit,  or  ship  addressed,  except  that  the  squadron  sign  for 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          199 

certain  squadrons  and  the  class  letter  may  be  omitted  at  discre- 
tion. 

Question.  What  flags  are  used  in  signals? 

Answer.  The  flags  used  are  those  of  the  international  alpha- 
bet, 10  numeral  flags,  10  numeral  pennants  (used  only  in  calls), 
and  14  special  flags  or  pennants.  (The  numeral  flags,  numeral 
pennants,  and  special  flags  are  not  furnished  Coast  Guard  sta- 
tions. ) 

Question.  How  would  you  prevent  confusion  or  mistakes  in 
sending  and  receiving  signals? 

Answer.  Due  to  the  similarity  in  the  sounds  of  the  different 
letters,  and  to  prevent  confusion  or  mistakes,  flags  are  to  be 
referred  to  by  the  names  assigned,  as  "  Cast,"  "  Roger,"  etc. ; 
not  C,  R,  etc. 

Question.  What  is  required  in  order  that  the  best  result  may 
be  obtained  in  signaling? 

Answer.  A  thorough  knowledge  of  the  meanings  of  all  flags 
and  pennants,  depending  upon  their  position  in  the  hoist,  and  a 
careful  study  not  only  of  the  system,  but  of  the  signals  them- 
selves. 

PROCEDURE   SIGNS. 

Question.  Why  are  procedure  signs  prescribed? 

Answer.  They  are  prescribed  for  use  with  any  system,  other 
than  flags,  to  facilitate  and  expedite  the  transmission  of  signals 
and  dispatches. 

Question.  Should  procedure  signs  be  memorized? 

Answer.  Yes ;  as  a  thorough  understanding  of  the  uses  of 
procedure  signs  is  essential  to  obtain  the  best  results  and  to 
prevent  confusion. 

Question.  When  a  procedure  sign  consisting  of  a  combination 
of  letters  appears  printed  in  small  capitals,  with  a  heavy  dash 
over  them,  how  should  it  be  sent? 

Answer.  The  Morse  equivalent  of  the  sign  so  printed  is  to 
be  transmitted  as  one  character.  Thus,  ixrf1  is  transmitted 

• ,  there  being  no  interval  between  letters  as  would  be  the 

case  if  the  letters  INT  were  transmitted  individually,  thus, 
. .  —  — ,  as  in  spelling  the  word  "  Intercept." 

Question.  What  is  the  "  full-stop  "  sign? 

Answer.  The  letters  333.  made  as  one  sign   ( ). 

Question.  For  what  is  it  used? 


200          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  In  dispatches  to  indicate  the  end  of  a  sentence,  and 
in  signals  to  separate  distinct  signals  which  are  to  be  executed 
by  the  same  signal  of  execution. 

Question. ^What  is  the  "finale"  sign? 

Answer.  AR  made  as  one  sign  ( ). 

Question.  For  what  is  it  used? 

Answer.  After  the  time  of  origin  (or  time  of  receipt,  if  used) 
of  every  dispatch.  It  is  also  used  at  the  end  of  every  other 
transmission  which  does  not  conclude  with  one  of  the  procedure 
signs  B,  K,  R,  Q,  or  "VA"  the  one  exception  to  this  being  in  the 
case  of  calling  up  and  answering  a  call,  in  which  case  the 
"  finale  "  sign  is  not  used. 

Question.  How  does  the  "  finale "  sign  differ  from  the  pro- 
cedure sign  VA? 

Answer.  It  differs  in  that  it  signifies  the  end  of  a  particular 
dispatch  and  further  signifies  "  I  have  stopped  to  receive  your 
R,"  whereas  VA  signifies  that  no  further  communication  is  to  be 
expected  at  that  particular  time,  i.  e.,  "  work  is  finished." 

Question.  How  would  a  receiver  acknowledge  the  receipt  of  a 
dispatch? 

Answer.  By  making  R  II  VA. 

Question.  If  at  the  end  of  a  dispatch  the  sender  has  another 
dispatch  to  follow,  how  does  he  indicate  that  fact? 

Answer.  By  sending  AR  II  B. 

Question.  How  would  the  receiver  indicate  to  the  sender 
that  he  understood  that  another  dispatch  was  to  follow? 

Answer.  Instead  of  indicating  "  receipt "  and  "  communica- 
tion finished,"  he  would  make  R  II  K,  thus  indicating  to  the 
sender  that  he  had  received  the  dispatch  and  that  the  sender 
was  to  "  go  ahead  "  with  the  next  dispatch. 

Question.  What  is  the  "  double  dash  "  sign?  • 

Answer.  The  "  double  dash "  sign  is  BT  made  as  one  sign 

( ).  It  is  used  to  separate  the  heading  from  the  text  in 

all  code  dispatches.  It  is  the  code  indicator. 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  its  use  in  sending  the  following 
dispatch:  B  34  sends  the  code  dispatch  "  TEQX-ABXY  "  to  B  25. 

Answer.  B  25  B  34  II  GR  4  BT  1021  II  TEQX  II  ABXY  II 
2015  II  !3?  II  GR  4  BT  1021  II  TEQX  II  ABXY  II  2015  AR. 

Question.  What  does  the  "  double  dash "  sign  indicate  in 
such  cases? 

Answer.  That  the  groups  of  the  text  are  from  a  code  book  and 
are  not  signals.  The  dispatch,  being  in  code,  is  to  be  repeated 
twice. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.         201 

Question.  What  is  the  "  erase  "  sign  and  for  what  is  it  used? 

Answer.  The  "  erase  "  sign  is  a  succession  of  E's,  made  sep- 
arately about  10  times  ( ) .  It  is  used  to  erase  a 

word  or  group  which  has  been  incorrectly  transmitted. 

Question.  If,  in  the  course  of  a  signal  or  a  dispatch,  a  word  or 
group  is  incorrectly  made,  what  should  be  done? 

Answer.  The  sender  must  immediately  make  the  "  erase " 
sign,  then  make  the  last  word  or  group  which  was  correctly 
transmitted  and  continue  the  signal  or  dispatch. 

Question.  B  34,  in  sending  to  B  25  the  dispatch  "  Prepare  to 
receive  stores,"  misspells  the  word  **  to."  What  should  he  do? 

Answer.  The  procedure  is  as  follows :  Prepare  ti  "  erase " 
sign,  prepare  to  receive  stores  2015  AK. 

Question.  What  is  the  "group"  sign? 

Answer.  The  "  group  "  sign  is  the  letters  GR  made  separately 

( )  and  followed  immediately,  without  the  "break" 

sign,  by  a  number  (Example,  GR  12). 

Question.  Where  is  it  used  and  what  does  it  signify? 

Answer.  It  is  used  at  the  end  of  the  prefix  to  signify :  "  The 
text,  office,  and  date  number,  and  time  reference  number,  to- 
gether contain  the  number  of  words  or  groups  indicated." 

Question.  What  is  the  position  of  GR  and  its  number  in  a  dis- 
patch? 

Answer.  The  position  of  GR  and  its  number  is  invariably  at 
the  end  of  the  prefix. 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  the  use  of  the  "  group  "  sign. 

Answer.  B  34    B  25  II  GR  5  II  prepare  to  receive  stores  2015  AR 

Question.  Is  the  use  of  GR  obligatory? 

Answer.  It  is  obligatory  in  all  code  dispatches,  in  all  official 
plain-language  dispatches,  and  in  all  signals  from  the  Signal 
Vocabulary  sent  in  dispatch  form. 

Question.  What  is  the  object  of  the  group  sign? 

Answer.  (1)  To  inform  the  receiving  unit  of  the  length  of  the 
dispatch  about  to  be  transmitted.  When  the  transmission  has 
been  completed  it  enables  the  receiving  unit  to  know  whether  it 
has  received  the  correct  number  of  words  or  groups. 

(2)  To  enable  the  receiving  unit  to  piece  together  parts  of  a 
dispatch  by  referring  to  the  groups  by  their  numerical  position 
in  the  dispatch,  or  to  request  repetitions  of  or  to  correct  certain 
words  or  goups. 

Question.  For  what  purpose  may  the  "  group  "  sign  be  used  in 
conjunction  with  the  "  interrogatory  "  sign  (  INT)  ? 


202          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  The  "  group  "  sign  may  be  used  in  conjunction  with 
the  "  interrogatory  "  sign  (!NT)  to  verify  the  number  of  groups 
in  a  dispatch  which  has  been  tansmitted. 

Question.  When  so  used,  what  does  this  combination  signify? 

Answer.  It  signifies  "  What  is  the  number  of  groups?  " 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  its  use  and  tell  what  it  signifies. 

Answer.  B  25  B  34  II  INT  GR  A"5.  This  signifies  "  What  is 
the  number  of  groups  in  your  last  dispatch?  " 

Question.  Give  another  example  cf  its  use  and  tell  what  it 
signifies  in  that  example. 

Answer.  B  25  B  34  II  INT  GR  II  1432  AH.  In  this  example  it 
signifies  "  What  is  the  number  of  groups  in  your  dispatch  timed 
1432?" 

Question.  How  do  you  count  groups  in  dispatches? 

Answer.  When  counting  groups  in  dispatches  each  word  or 
group  counts  as  one.  The  "  office  reference  number  and  date 
group  "  and  "  time  of  origin  "  each  count  as  one  group. 

Question.  In  counting  groups,  are  repeated  code  groups  and 
procedure  signs  counted? 

Answer.  They  are  not. 

Question.  How  are  groups  counted  in  plain-language  dis- 
patches? 

Answer.  Each  word  of  the  text,  including  the  time  of  origin, 
and  office  reference  number  and  date  group  (if  used),  is  counted. 

Question.  How  are  groups  counted  in  code  dispatches  (or  dis- 
patches made  up  of  code  and  plain  language)  ? 

Answer.  Each  group  of  the  text  and  each  plain-language  word 
(if  any),  and  also  the  time  of  origin,  and  office  reference  number 
and  date  group  (if  used),  is  counted. 

Question.  What  is  the  "break"  sign? 

Answer.  The  "  break  "  sign  is  the  letters  II  made  separately 
(••  ••)• 

Question.  When  is  the  "break"  sign  used? 

Answer.  (1)  In  any  dispatch  between  the  component  parts 
of  the  heading  and  between  the  time  of  origin  and  time  of 
receipt,  if  latter  is  used. 

(2)  In  code  dispatches  between  the  groups  of  the  text  and  be- 
tween the  text  and  time  of  origin. 

(3)  Between  procedure  signs  (except  that  it  is  not  used  be- 
fore the  "  erase  "  sign  nor  before  the  "  finale  "  sign  AR  )   and 
between  the  last  group  of  a  portion  of  a  dispatch  and  a  pro- 
cedure sign. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.         203 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  its  use  in  the  first  case. 

Answer.  B  25  B  34  II  Y  II  GR  9  II  proceed  on  service  as- 
signed at  time  previously  indicated  2210  SS. 

Question.  Give  another  example  of  its  use  in  the  first  case. 

Answer.  B  25  B  34  II  GR  35  II  the  following  dispatch  has 
been  received  from  Navy  Department  quote  1024  direct  com- 
manding officer  Pennsylvania  proceed  immediately  to  Washing- 
ton and  report  to  Chief  of  Naval  Operations  for  temporary 
duty  0830  signed  Secnav  unquote  comply  2045  II  TOR  II  2330 
£5. 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  its  use  in  the  third  case. 

Answer.  B  25     B  34  II  IMI  II  W  AR 

Question.  Give  another  example  of  its  use  in  the  third  case. 

Answer.  B  25    B  34  II  GR  105  II  first  portion  of  dispatch  II  B. 

Question.  What  care  should  be  taken  in  making  the  "  break  " 
sign? 

Answer.  The  spacing  on  each  side  of  a  "  break  "  sign  should 
be  lengthened  sufficiently  to  make  it  quite  distinctive;  the 
"  break  "  sign  itself  may  then  be  made  as  quickly  as  possible, 
care  being  taken  that  its  component  parts  are  not  run  into  one 
another  and  thus  confused  with  the  letter  H. 

Question.  What  is  the  "  repeat "  sign? 

Answer.  The  "  repeat "  sign  is  IMI  made  as  one  sign 
( ). 

Question.  What  does  the  "repeat"  sign  signify? 

Answer.  It  signifies  "  repeat." 

Question.  WThen  is  the  "repeat"  sign  used? 

Answer.  It  is  used  during,  or  immediately  following,  the 
transmission  of  a  signal  or  dispatch  to  request  a  repetition  of 
that  part  which  was  not  received ;  and  it  must  be  used  prior  to 
acknowledging  receipt  of  the  signal  or  dispatch. 

Question.  If  a  signal  or  dispatch  has  been  acknowledged  as 
having  been  received,  would  you  use  the  repeat  sign  to  request 
a  repetition? 

Answer.  No.  If  a  signal  or  dispatch  has  been  acknowledged 
as  having  been  received  by  sending  R,  the  repeat  sign  must  not 
be  used  to  request  a  repetition,  but  such  repetition  must  be 
obtained  by  use  of  the  procedure  sign  J. 

Question.  What  do  requests  for  repetitions  of  parts  of  a  dis- 
patch necessarily  entail? 

Answer.  (1)  Quoting  or  otherwise  indicating  those  parts  of 
the  dispatch  which  were  correctly  received  and  which  stand 
next  to  (before,  after,  or  on  either  side  of)  the  doubtful  part. 


204          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS 

(2)  Indicating  the  doubtful  part  itself. 

Question.  How  are  requests  for  repetitions  normally  made? 

Answer.  By  using  IMI  .  A  special  case,  used  in  plain-language 
dispatches,  is  dealt  with  by  using  IMI  in  conjunction  with  WA. 

Question.  What  signifies  "Repeat  all  before  (word  or 
group)" ? 

Answer.  IMI   AB  (word  or  group). 

Question.  What  signifies  "  Ilepeat  from  (word  or  group)  to 
(word  or  group)"  ? 

Answer.   (Word  or  group)  II  JMI  II  (word  or  group). 

Question.  What  signifies  "Repeat  all  after  (word  or 
group)"  ? 

Answer.   T3i  AA  (word  or  group). 

Question.  What  signifies  that  the  repetition  of  single  words  in 
plain-language  dispatches  is  required? 

Answer.  The  "word  after"  sign  (WA)  is  used  after  fSi 
and  followed  by  the  word  after  which  repetition  is  desired. 
Thus,  "IMI  WA  immediately  AR"  signifies  repeat  word  after 
"  immediately,"  while  "  iHT  WA  immediately  II  WA  of  A"R  " 
signifies  repeat  word  after  "  immediately  "  and  word  after  "  of." 

Question.  What  shall  be  done  in  case  the  word  preceding  the 
faulty  word  occurs  more  than  once  in  the  dispatch? 

Answer.  WA  should  be  followed  by  two  or  three  consecutive 
words  immediately  preceding  the  faulty  one. 

Question.  In  dispatches  composed  entirely  of  code  groups, 
how  is  a  request  for  repeat  made? 

Answer.  By  referring  to  the  groups  by  number. 

(1)  IMI  AB    (No.)    signifies   "Repeat   all   before  group   No. 

(2)  (No.)  II  55T    II  (No.)  signifies  "Repeat  from  group  No. 
to  group  No. ." 

(3)  IMI    AA    (No.)    signifies    "Repeat   all   after    group   No. 

»> 

(4)  IMI  GR  (No.)  signifies  "Repeat  group  No. ." 

(5)  IMI    GR  (No.)  II  GR  (No.)  signifies  "Repeat  group  No. 
and  group  No.  ." 

Question.  What  is  the  "time  of  receipt"  sign? 

Answer.  The  "  time  of  receipt "  sign  is  the  letters  TOR  made 
separately  ( — ). 

Question.  How  is  it  used  and  what  does  it  denote? 

Answer.  It  is  used  in  conjunction  with  a  four-figure  time 
group  (similar  in  composition  to  the  time  of  origin  number). 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          205 

It  denotes  the  time  at  which  the  receiving  unit  completes  the 
reception  of  the  dispatch.  Thus,  "  TOR  H  2330  "  at  the  end  of 
a  dispatch  would  indicate  that  the  dispatch  was  received  at 
11,30  p.  m.  (see  second  example  of  the  use  of  the  "break" 
sign ) . 

Question.  What  is  the  "unofficial"  sign  and  how  is  it  used? 

Answer.  The  "  unofficial "  sign  is  the  letters  UN  made  sepa- 
rately ( ) ,  and  is  used  in  the  prefix  to  indicate  the  un- 
official nature  of  a  dispatch. 

Question.  Where  does  the  "  unofficial "  sign  occur  in  a  dis- 
patch? 

Answer.  It  immediately  precedes  the  name  of  the  addressee 
nnd  the  name  of  the  person  signing  the  dispatch,  thus:  "  UN  to 
Lieut.  Smith  from  Brown." 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  the  use  of  the  "  unofficial " 
sign  in  a  dispatch. 

Answer.  B  25  B  34  II  UN  to  Lieut.  Smith  from  Brown  II  Will 
meet  you  at  time  indicated  AIL 

Question.  Is  the  number  of  groups  in  an  unofficial  dispatch 
indicated? 

Answer.  No ;  not  usually. 

Question.  What  is  the  "  finish  "  sign,  and  what  does  it  indi- 
cate? 

Answer.  The  "finish"  sign  is  VA,  made  as  one  sign  ( ), 

and  it  signifies  "  communication  is  finished." 

Question.  When  and  how  is  the  "  finish  "  sign  used? 

Answer.  It  is  used  only  when  neither  the  transmitter  nor  the 
receiver  has  any  further  communication.  It  is  always  preceded 
by  the  "  break  "  sign,  and  is  appended  to  whatever  has  to  be 
made  by  the  unit  which  transmits  last. 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  its  use  in  a  dispatch. 

Answer.  B  34  sends  to  B  25:  B  25  B  34  II  G-R  9  II  anchor 
will  be  clear  in  aboutjm  hour  1430  AR. 

B  25  makes :  R  II  VA 

Question.  What  is  the  "  word  after  "  sign,  and  how  is  it  used? 

Answer.  The  "  word  after  "  sign  is  the  letters  WA  made  sepa- 
rately ( — ).  It  is  used  in  conjunction  with  the  "repeat" 

sign  (  IMI  )  for  obtaining  repetitions  in  plain-language  dis- 
patches, to  signify  "Repeat  word  after ."  (Its  use  is 

explained  in  questions  relating  to  the  use  of  fEi). 

Question.  What  is  the  "  preliminary  executive  "  sign  for  the 
"  executive  to  follow  "  ? 


206          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  It  is  ix  made  as  one  sign  ( ). 

Question.  Where  and  how  is  it  used? 

Answer.  It  is  used  immediately  preceding  the  executive  sign 
(  spe- 1  °  )  as  a  preliminary  executive  and  signifies 

"  The  executive  sign  will  follow  immediately."  It  is  to  be  re- 
peated several  times,  or  until  the  transmitter  is  assured  the 
receiving  units  are  ready  and  prepared  for  the  executive  sign. 

Question.  What  is  the  "  executive "  sign,  how  is  it  written, 
and  what  does  it  mean? 

Answer.  The  "executive"  sign  is  a  10-secorid  flash  (or 
blast)  and  is  written  (10-secondi).  it  means  that  the  purport  of 
the  signal  is  to  be  carried  out  immediately  on  the  termination 
of  the  10-second  dash. 

Question.  When  making  the  "  executive  "  sign,  is  the  text  of 
the  signal  which  is  to  be  carried  out  ever  repeated  before  the 
"executive"  sign? 

Answer.  Yes.  The  text  of  the  signal  which  is  to  be  carried 
out  is  to  be  repeated  before  the  "  executive  "  sign  in  the  follow- 
ing cases: 

(1)  When  there  is  any  possibility  of  doubt  as  to  which  signal 
the  "  executive  "  sign  refers. 

(2)  When  a  second  further  signal  requiring  an  "execute"  is 
made  before  the  "  execute  "  sign  is  made  for  the  first  signal. 

(3)  When  a  considerable  time  has  elapsed  between  the  trans- 
mission of  a  signal  and  the  "  executive  "  sign  for  that  signal. 

Question.  Can  the  "executive"  sign  be  annulled? 

Answer.  The  "  executive  "  sign  can  not  be  annulled  after  it 
has  once  been  made. 

Question.  How  can  any  desired  degree  of  security  for  the 
reception  of  a  signal  before  giving  the  "  execute  "  be  insured? 

Answer.  By  adding  suitable  procedure  signs,  as  follows : 

(1)  By  using  the  procedure  sign  Y  all  units  will  answer  and 
acknowledge,  but  none  will  repeat  back. 

(2)  By  using  the  procedure  sign  G  all  units  will  repeat  back, 
but  none  will  acknowledge. 

(3)  By  using  the  procedure  signs  G  and  Y  all  units  will  re- 
peat back  and  acknowledge. 

SINGLE-LETTER  PROCEDURE   SIGNS. 

Question.  With  what  must  single-letter  procedure  signs  not 
be  confused,  and  how  is  confusion  avoided? 

Answer.  Single-letter  procedure  signs  are  not  to  be  confused 
with  single-letter  "  signals."  When  used  as  signals  the  letter 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          207 

will  follow  the  signal  sign.  When  used  as  procedure  signs  they 
precede  the  signal  sign. 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  B  signify  when  used  alone 
as  a  dispatch? 

Answer.  "  Has  dispatch  been  received?"  The  letter  B  is  not 
used  in  the  heading  as  a  procedure  sign. 

Question.  Is  it  ever  desirable  to  send  a  dispatch  in  portions? 

Answer.  It  is  when  making  a  long  dispatch.  In  order  to  in- 
sure that  each  portion  has  been  received  before  proceeding  with 
the  next,  the  letter  B  is  made  at  the  end  of  each  portion. 

Question.  How  does  the  receiving  unit  indicate  that  it  has 
received  each  portion  of  the  dispatch  correctly? 

Answer.  After  the  conclusion  of  each  portion,  if  the  receiving 
unit  has  received  the  portion  transmitted,  it  makes  K  (go  on) 
and  the  transmitting  unit  proceeds  with  the  dispatch. 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  the  use  of  B  and  K  in  a  plain- 
language  dispatch. 

Answer.  B  34  has  a  90-word  plain-language  dispatch  to  send 
to  B  25. 

B  34  sends  as  follows:  B  25  B  34  II  GR  90  II  first  thirty 
words  of  text  II  B.  •  .  £8  a 

B  25  answers:  K  (go  on),  or  rai,  etc.,  as  required. 

As  soon  as  B  25  lias  made  K,  indicating  that  the  first  portion 
has  been  received,  B  34  proceeds  with  the  subsequent  portions 
of  the  dispatch  in  a  similar  manner. 

Question.  How  is  the  last  portion  of  a  dispatch  transmitted? 

Answer.  In  the  usual  manner,  thus:  II  last  portion  of  the 
dispatch  1400  AR  . 

B  25  makes  :  R  II  vT  • 

Question.  When  the  transmitting  unit  has  more  than  one  dis- 
patch to  transmit  to  the  same  receiving  unit,  what  is  the  pro- 
cedure? 

Answer.  The  letter  B  (preceded  by  the  "break"  sign  II)  is 
used  after  the  completion  of  each  dispatch,  and  signifies  "  There 
is  more  to  follow."  The  letter  B  is  not  used  upon  the  comple- 
tion of  the  last  dispatch,  and  its  omission  signifies  to  the  receiv- 
ing unit  that  there  are  no  further  dispatches  to  follow  at  that 
particular  time. 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  the  use  of  the  letter  B  in  send- 
ing two  dispatches  to  the  same  unit 

Answer.  B  34  has  two  dispatches  for  B  25. 


208          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

B  34  makes  the  first  dispatch  as  follows :  B  25  B  34  II  GR  8 
II  make  preparations  for  sailing  at  daylight  to-morrow  1825 
AS  II  B. 

B  25  answers :  R  II  K. 

B  34  then  proceeds  with  the  second  dispatch  for  B  25  as  fol- 
lows: Un  to  Captain  Smith  from  Jones  II  best  wishes  for  a 
pleasant  voyage  AR. 

B  25  answers :  R  II  VA. 

Question.  How  would  you  ascertain  if  a  particular  dispatch 
has  been  received  by  the  unit  to  which  sent? 

Answer.  By  making  the  letter  B  followed  by  a  four-figure 
numeral  group  (time  of  origin)  or  by  two  four-figure  groups 
separated  by  "break  "  (office  reference  number  and  date  groups 
and  time  of  origin),  signifying  "Has  dispatch  reference  number 
been  received?  " 

Question.  Give  example  of  the  use  of  B  in  this  last  connec- 
tion. 

Answer.  B  34,  wishing  to  ascertain  whether  B  25  has  re- 
ceived dispatch  timed  1400,  makes :  B  25  B  34  II  B  1400  AR". 

If  B  25  is  not  able  to  give  the  required  information  at  once, 
B  25  answers:  R,  followed  later  by  R  1400  or  N  1400,  according 
as  she  has  or  has  not  received  the  dispatch  timed  1400  from 
B  34. 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  C  used  alone  as  a  dispatch 
signify? 

Answer.  "  You  are  correct." 

Question.  Give  an  example. 

Answer.  B  25  having  repeated  back  correctly  a  dispatch  from 
B  34  which  was  prefaced  "Repeat  back"  (G),  B  34  makes: 

C  II  VA. 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  C,  followed  by  a  dispatch  or 
by  groups  from  a  dispatch,  signify? 

Answer.  "  Following  is  correct  version  of  dispatch  timed 
."  It  may  be  used  in  this  connection  by  a  unit  which  dis- 
covers an  error  in  the  coding  or  transmission  of  an  outgoing 
dispatch  already  transmitted  (although  the  receiving  unit  has 
not  yet  requested  a  check). 

Question.  How  many  times  must  words  or  groups  in  dis- 
patches be  made  when  giving  the  correct  version  of  dispatches 
or  groups  in  dispatches? 

Answer.  In  giving  the  correct  version  of  dispatches  or  groups 
in  dispatches  they  are  to  be  made  once  only,  even  though  the 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          209 

original  dispatch  may  have  been  sent  twice,  as  in  code  dis- 
patches. 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  the  use  of  the  letter  C  followed 
by  a  dispatch  or  by  groups  from  a  dispatch. 

Answer.  B  34,  having  transmitted  a  dispatch  timed  1015  to 
B  25,  finds  that  the  twelfth  group  was  incorrectly  transmitted. 
B  34  corrects  the  dispatch  by  making  the  correct  group  as  fol- 
lows :  C  II  12  II  ABKQ  II  1015  £5. 

B  25  makes:  R  II  VA! 

Question.  Is  the  letter  C  used  in  reply  to  the  letter  J  (check 
the  coding  from  the  decode  and  repeat)  ? 

Answer.  The  letter  C  is  always  to  be  used  in  reply  to  the 
letter  J  (check  the  coding  from  the  decode  and  repeat),  whether 
or  not  the  dispatch  or  group  concerned  was,  in  the  first  instance, 
correctly  coded  or  transmitted,  thus  indicating  to  the  receiving 
unit  that  the  dispatch  has  been  checked. 

Question.  Is  the  letter  C  used. in  the  heading  as  a  procedure 
sign? 

Answer.  It  is  not. 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  G  used  alone  as  a  dispatch 
signify? 

Answer.  The  letter  G  used  alone  as  a  dispatch  or  in  the 
prefix  signifies  "  Repeat  back." 

Question.  When  is  a  dispatch  to  be  repeated  back  in  response 
to  G  used  alone? 

Answer.  The  complete  dispatch  is  to  be  transmitted  before 
the  receiving  unit  commences  to  repeat  back,  the  transmitting 
unit  signifying  the  end  of  the  dispatch  with  the  "  finale  "  sign 
AR.  When  repeating  back  or  correcting  repetitions  the  text  or 
groups  concerned  are  to  be  made  once  only,  even  though  the 
original  dispatch  may  have  been  made  twice,  as  in  code  dis- 
patches. 

Question.  B  34  has  a  dispatch,  KUBO  ABYZ  1040,  for  B  25 
and  wishes  it  repeated  back.  Give  the  procedure. 

Answer.  B  a4  makes :  B  25  B  34  II  G  II  GR  3  KUBO  II  ABYZ 
II  1040  AR! 

B  25  repeats  back  the  dispatch  as  follows:  GR  3  KUBO  II 
ABYZ  II  104053. 

B  34  makes:  C  II  VA. 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  G  signify  when  followed  by  a 
four-figure  numeral  group  (time  of  origin)  or  by  two  four-figure 
34079—21 14 


210          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

groups  separated  by  "break"  ("office  reference  number  tind 
date  group  "  and  "  time  of  origin  ")  ? 

Answer.  "  Repeat  back  dispatch  timed ." 

Question.  B  34  sends  to  B  25  a  dispatch  timed  1040  and  sub- 
sequently wishes  B  25  to  repeat  it  back.  What  does  he  do? 

Answer.  B  34  makes :  B  25  B  34 II  G  1040  AR.  To  which 
B  25  answers :  R,  if  not  in  a  position  to  immediately  repeat  back 
B  34's  1040;  B  25  subsequently  repeats  back  as  follows:  B  34 

B  25  II  B  25  V  B  34  II,  etc., —  1040  AR.  If,  however, 

B  25  is  able  to  repeat  it  back  immediately,  she  does  not  make  R 
but  repeats  back  the  dispatch. 

Question.  Should  part  of  a  dispatch  be  repeated  back  incor- 
rectly by  the  receiving  unit,  what  should  the  transmitting 
unit  do? 

Ans\ver.  The  transmitting  unit  should  repeat  that  part  of  the 
dispatch  again,  commencing  a  few  words  (or  groups)  before, 
and  ending  a  few  words  (or  groups)  after  the  incorrectly  re- 
peated portion. 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  J  signify  when  used  alone? 

Answer.  The  letter  J,  when  referring  to  code  dispatches,  sig- 
nifies :  "  Check  the  coding  from  the  decode  and  repeat."  When 
referring  to  plain-language  dispatches  it  signifies :  "  Check  con- 
tents of  your  dispatch  and  repeat."  The  letter  J  is  to  be  used 
for  requesting  a  **  check  and  repetition  "  in  the  same  manner 
that  the  "repeat"  sign  (ml)  is  used  in  requesting  a  repeti- 
tion. 

Question.  When  a  unit,  having  acknowledged  receipt  of  a  dis- 
patch, subsequently  doubts  the  correctness  of  the  dispatch  or 
any  groups  in  it,  what  must  it  do? 

Answer.  It  must  request  the  transmitting  unit  to  "  check  the 
coding  and  repeat "  the  doubtful  portions.  In  such  cases  the 
"  repeat "  sign  (IMI)  or  "  interrogatory  "  sign  (INT)  must  not 
be  used,  as  neither  of  them  necessitate  that  the  coding  be 
checked. 

Question.  Is  the  letter  J  used  in  the  heading  as  a  procedure 
sign? 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  How  would  you  refer  to  certain  words  or  code 
groups  of  a  dispatch? 

Answer.  The  words  or  groups  may  be  referred  to  by  their 
number;  thus,  J  2  II  4  II  2045,  referring  to  a  code  dispatch, 
signifies  "  Check  the  coding  and  repeat  groups  2  and  4  of  dis- 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          211 

patch  timed  2045,"  or,  if  referring  to  a  plain-language  dispatch, 
it  signifies  "  Check  words  2  and  4  and  repeat." 

Question.  Is  the  J  used  in  conjunction  with  the  "  word  after  " 
sign  (WA)  ;  and  if  so,  what  does  it  signify? 

Answer.  It  may  be  so  used  to  signify  "  Check  and  repeat  the 
word  *  after ' ." 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  its  use  in  this  connection  and 
tell  what  it  signifies. 

Answer.  "  J  II  WA  rendezvous  at  AR"  This  signifies  "  Check 
and  repeat  the  word  immediately  following  '  rendezvous  at.'  " 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  J  followed  by  a  four-figure 
numeral  group  (time  of  origin),  or  by  two  four-figure  groups 
separated  by  "break"  ("office  reference  number  and  date 
group"  and  "time  of  origin"),  signify? 

Answer.  "  Check  the  coding  and  repeat  dispatch  timed ." 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  the  use  of  J  asking  to  have  the 
coding  of  the  whole  dispatch  checked  and  the  dispatch  re- 
peated, B  34  having  sent  a  dispatch  timed  2045  to  B  25. 

Answer.  B  34  B  25  II J  2045  AR  .  B  34  answers :  R,  and  fol- 
lows the  procedure  for  transmitting  the  dispatch  or  groups  as 
explained  under  the  letter  C. 

Question.  In  the  preceding  question,  suppose  you  wished  to 
have  the  second  and  fourth  groups  repeated,  give  the  procedure. 

Answer.  B  34  B  25  II J  2 II 4 II 2045  2TK.  B  34  answers :  R, 
and  follows  the  procedure  for  transmitting  groups  as  shown 
under  the  letter  C. 

Question.  Wjtiat  does  the  letter  K  used  alone  as  a  dispatch 
signify? 

Answer.  "Go  on"  (Go  on  with  your  dispatch). 

Question.  Is  the  letter  K  used  in  the  heading  as  a  procedure 
sign? 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  K  signify  when  used  in  con- 
junction with  the  "  interrogatory  "  sign  (iNiF)  ? 

Answer.  "  May  I  go  on  ?  " 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  its  use. 

Answer.  B  34  having  directed  B  25  to  "wait"  (Q),  now 
wishes  B  25  to  go  on  with  his  dispatch.  B  34,  after  calling 
B  25,  if  necessary,  makes  X,  and  B  25  proceeds  with  his  dis- 
patch. 

Question.  Give  another  example  of  the  use  of  K  alone. 


212          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  B  25,  having  waited  for  some  time  for  permission  to 
proceed  with  his  dispatch,  may  make  to  B  34:  B  34  B  25  INT 
^,  thus  asking  for  permission  to  go  ahead.  B  34  may  make: 
K  or  Q,  according  to  circumstances. 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  M  used  in  the  preamble  sig- 
nify? 

Answer.  "  Relay  following  via." 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  N  signify  when  followed  by  a 
four-figure  numeral  group  (time  of  origin )  or  by  two  four-figure 
groups  separated  by  "break"  ("office  reference  number  and 
date  group"  and  "time  of  origin"),  or  by  a  dispatch  serial 
number,  such  as  Alnav  12,  Alatl  10,  etc.? 

Answer.  "  Dispatch has  not  been  received." 

Question.  Is  the  letter  N  used  in  the  heading  as  a  procedure 
sign? 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  Q,  used  as  a  dispatch  in  itself, 
signify? 

Answer.  "  Wait." 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  its  use. 

Answer.  B  25,  having  been  called  by  B  34,  but  being  unable 
to  take  a  dispatch  from  B  34  at  the  time,  answers  B  34  thus: 
Q.  When  ready  to  receive,  B  25,  after  calling  B  34,  makes :  K. 

Question.  If  a  unit  is  directed  by  another  unit  to  wait,  when 
should  it  recommence  transmission  with  that  unit? 

Answer.  Not  until  directed  to  do  so  by  the  procedure  sign  K 
(go  on). 

Question.  How  long  should  it  wait  for  the  "go  ahead"  sign 
(K)  to  be  made? 

Answer.  Should  it  appear,  after  a  reasonable  interval,  that 
the  "go  ahead"  sign  (K)  has  been  overlooked,  the  unit  which 
has  been  directed  to  wait  should  call  up  and  ask  permission  to 
communicate  by  making  INT  K. 

Question.  Is  the  letter  Q,  used  in  the  heading  as  a  procedure 
sign? 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  R,  used  as  a  dispatch  in  itself, 
signify? 

Answer.  "  Dispatch  received."  It  is  the  signalman's  acknowl- 
edgment to  the  transmitter  that  he  has  received  the  dispatch. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          213 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  the  use  of  R  when  B  84  has 
sent  a  plain-language  dispatch  to  B  25,  as  follows :  B  25  B  34 
II  text  of  P/L  dispatch  2030  AR. 

Answer.  B  25,  having  received  the  dispatch,  makes :  R  II    ^T. 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  signify  when  followed  by  a 
four-figure  numeral  group  (time  of  origin)  or  by  two  four-figure 
groups  separated  by  "break"  ("office  reference  number  and 
date  group"  and  "time  of  origin"),  or  by  a  dispatch  serial 
number,  such  as  Alatl  52? 

Answer.  "  Dispatch has  been  received." 

Question.  Give  an  example. 

Answer.  B  25,  wishing  to  inform  B  34  that  Alnav  60  has 
been  received,  makes :  B  34  B  25  II  R  60  Alnav !S!S. 

Question.  Is  the  letter  R  used  in  the  heading  as  a  procedure 
sign? 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  T,  used  in  the  preamble,  sig- 
nify? 

Answer."  Relay  following  to ." 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  V,  used  between  call  signs, 
signify? 

Answer.  "  From  ." 

Question.  When  is  the  letter  V  used  in  this  connection? 

Answer.  Only  in  the  case  of  dispatches  in  which  the  letters 
T  or  Z  are  used  in  the  preamble  to  show  the  addressee  from 
whom  the  dispatch  has  come,  and  in  the  case  of  dispatches  re- 
peated back  when  requested  by  a  unit  subsequent  to  the  time  at 
which  the  dispatch  was  originally  sent. 

Question.  WThat  does  the  letter  W,  used  by  itself,  signify? 

Answer.  "Am  unable  to  read  your  message." 

Question.  If  signaling  by  flashing  light,  what  does  W,  used  by 
itself  signify? 

Answer.  Light  not  properly  trained  or  light  burning  badly. 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  W,  used  by  itself,  signify 
when  signaling  by  semaphore  or  flag  waving? 

Answer.  Poor  background  or  interference,  such  as  smoke,  etc. 

Question.  When  is  this  signal  to  be  made? 

Answer.  By  any  receiving  unit  at  any  stage  of  the  transmit- 
ting, if  required.  . 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  its  use  when  B  34  is  sending  a 
dispatch  by  searchlight  by  day  to  B  25. 


214          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  If  due  to  bad  training  of  the  light  or  bad  focus  B  25 
finds  it  difficult  to  read  the  dispatch,  he  informs  B  34  of  this  by 
making  W,  repeating  it  as  necessary  until  B  34  corrects  the 
fault.  B  34  should  then  repeat  the  whole  dispatch,  unless  B  25 
has  received  part  of  the  dispatch  before  it  becomes  necessary  to 
make  W,  in  which  case  he  should  request  repetitioh  of  so  much 
of  it  as  may  be  necessary  by  the  procedure  sign  1ST  calling 
B  34  if  necessary. 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  Y,  used  as  a  dispatch  in  itself, 
signify? 

Answer.  "Acknowledge." 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  Y  in  the  prefix  signify? 

Answer.  It  directs  the  addressee  to  acknowledge  the  dispatch. 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  its  use. 

Answer.  B  34  has  the  dispatch  "  Pleasant  voyage — 1020  "  for 
B  25.  The  dispatch  is  to  be  acknowledged.  B  34  makes :  B  25 
B  34  II  Y  II  GR  3  pleasant  voyage  II  1020  JLR.  B  25  makes:  R. 

Question.  WThat  does  the  letter  Y  signify  when  followed  by  a 
four-figure  numeral  group  (time  of  origin)  or  by  two  four-figure 
groups  separated  by  "break"  ("office  reference  number  and 
date  group  "  and  "  time  of  origin  ")  ? 

Answer.  "  Dispatch  understood." 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  its  use,  B  25  having  received 
the  dispatch  just  given,  and  the  dispatch  having  been  under- 
stood, and  it  being  desired  to  report  this  fact  to  B  34. 

Answer.  B  25  makes  to  B  34:  B  34  B  25  II  Y  1020  AR.  B  34 
makes :  R  II  tt. 

Question.  What  is  required  before  a  dispatch  is  acknowl- 
edged? 

Answer.  It  must  be  distinctly  understood  that  a  dispatch  is 
not  to  be  acknowledged  until  it  is  understood  by  the  addressee, 
and  that  the  authority  of  the  commanding  officer,  or  other  com- 
petent authority,  is  required  before  the  acknowledgment  is 
made. 

Question.  What  does  the  "interrogatory"  sign  (INT),  used 
in  conjunction  with  the  letter  Y  and  a  time  of  origin  or  office 
reference  number  and  date  group,  signify? 

Answer.  "  Is  dispatch  referenced understood  ?  " 

Question.  For  wh$it  purpose  may  the  letter  Y  used  in  conjunc- 
tion with  the  "  interrogatory  "  sign  in  this  manner  be  used? 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          215 

Answer.  (1)  To  hasten  the  acknowledgment  of  a  prior  dis- 
patch which  is  prefixed  "Acknowledge." 

(2)  To  call  for  an  acknowledgment  of  a  prior  dispatch  which 
was  not  originally  prefixed  "  Acknowledge." 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  its  use  when  B  34  wishes  B  25 
to  acknowledge  B  34's  dispatch  timed  1020 : 

(1)  Dispatch  was  not  originally  prefixed  "Acknowledge." 

(2)  Dispatch  was  prefixed  "Acknowledge,"  but  B  25  has  not 
yet  acknowledged. 

Answer.  In  either  case,  B  34  makes  to  B  25:  B  25  B  34  II 
OT  Y  1020  AR. 

Question.  What  restriction  is  placed  upon  the  use  of  the 
"  interrogatory  "  sign  in  conjunction  with  the  letter  Y? 

Answer.  It  must  not  be  used  without  the  authority  of  a  re- 
sponsible officer. 

Question.  What  does  the  letter  Z  used  in  the  preamble  sig- 
nify? 

Answer.  "Addressed  to  ." 

Question.  When  is  the  letter  Z  so  used? 

Answer.  It  is  used  only  in  dispatches  that  have  been  trans- 
mitted from  the  originator  to  the  addressee  by  an  intermediate 
ship  or  unit,  and  then  only  by  the  relaying  ship  or  unit  to  the 
addressee,  to  show  the  latter  that  the  dispatch  is  a  relayed  one 
and  is  addressed  to  that  ship  or  unit. 

Question.  Give  an  example  of  the  use  of  the  letter  Z  in  the 
preamble,  when  B  34  has  a  dispatch  for  B  25  and  wishes  to 
send  it  to  B  36  for  retransmission  to  B  25. 

Answer.  B  34  makes :  B  36  B  34  II  T  II  B  25  V  B  34  II  GR 
10  II  report  probable  time  at  which  anchor  will  be  clear  0935 
S5.  B  36  then  transmits  the  dispatch  to  B  25  as  follows :  B  25 
B  36  II  Z  II  B  25  V  B  34  II  GR  10  II,  etc.  This  procedure  in- 
dicates to  B  25  that  the  dispatch  is  addressed  to  her  and  is 
from  B  34. 

Question.  What  is  to  be  noted  in  relaying  a  dispatch  such  as 
the  one  just  given? 

Answer.  It  is  to  be  noted  that  when  B  34  is  sending  to  B  36 
the  procedure  sign  T  is  used,  which  directs  B  36  to  relay  the 
dispatch  which  follows  to  B  25.  When  B  36  retransmits  to  B  25, 
the  T  changes  to  Z,  for  the  dispatch  is  addressed  to  B  25  and  is 
not  to  be  transmitted  further. 


216          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

TRANSMISSION    OF    SIGNALS    AND    DISPATCHES    BY    METHODS    OTHER 
THAN  BY  FLAGS. 

Definitions. 

Question.  Are  the  definitions  of  following  terms  used  through- 
out these  instructions? 

Answer.  Yes. 

Question.  What  is  the  definition  of  acknowledgment? 

Answer.  A  dispatch  (or  signal)  is  acknowledged  by  a  separate 
dispatch  from  the  addressee,  informing  the  originator  that  his 
dispatch  (or  signal)  has  been  received  and  is  understood.  This 
separate  dispatch  is  an  "  acknowledgment." 

Question.  What  is  the  definition  of  addressee*! 

Answer.  Addressee  is  the  authority  to  whom  signal  or  dis- 
patch is  addressed. 

Question.  What  is  the  definition  of  addressed  tot 

Answer.  This  term  denotes  that  the  authority  indicated  is  re- 
quired to  take  all  necessary  action,  to  carry  out  the  purport  of 
the  signal  or  dispatch. 

Question.  What  is  the  definition  of  dispatch! 

Answer.  A  dispatch  is  any  communication  other  than  a  signal 
or  letter,  regardless  of  the  method  of  transmission. 

Question.  What  is  the  definition  of  dipt 

Answer.  Signals  are  said  to  be  at  the  dip  when  the  top  of  the 
top  flag  of  the  signal  is  about  8  feet  from  being  two-blocked 
(i.  e.,  about  8  feet  from  the  yardarm). 

Question.  What  is  the  definition  of  originator! 

Answer.  Originator  is  the  authority  wrho  orders  a  signal  or 
dispatch  to  be  sent. 

Question.  What  is  the  definition  of  procedure! 

Answer.  This  term  denotes  the  rules  drawn  up  for  the  con- 
duct of  transmission  of  signals  and  dispatches. 

Question.  What  is  the  definition  of  procedure  sign! 

Answer.  Procedure  sign  is  a  sign  designed  for  facilitating  the 
conduct  of  transmission. 

Question.  What  is  the  definition  of  receiving  ship! 

Answer.  Receiving  ship  is  the  ship  by  which  a  signal  or  dis- 
patch is  actually  being  read. 

Question.  What  is  the  definition  of  reply  ? 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          217 

Answer.  Reply  is  a  signal  or  dispatch  originating  out  of,  re- 
ferring to,  or  replying  to  a  question  asked  in  a  prior  signal  or 
dispatch. 

Question.  What  is  the  definition  of  signal! 

Answer.  A  signal  is  an  arbitrary  combination  of  letters,  num- 
bers, and  special  signs,  the  meaning  of  which  is  to  be  found  in  a 
Signal  Book.  Signals  are  distinguished  by  that  term  from  com- 
munications spelled  out  in  plain  language  or  sent  in  code,  which 
are  classified  as  "  dispatches." 

Question.  What  is  the  definition  of  transmitting  ship  or  unit! 

Answer.  Transmitting  ship  or  unit  is  the  ship  or  unit  by 
which  a  dispatch  is  actually  being  made. 

PARTS  OF  A  SIGNAL  OR  DISPATCH. 

Question.  With  any  system  using  the  Morse  code,  is  a  full 
signification  of  the  communication  apparent? 

Answer.  It  is  not  apparent  until  the  communication  is  com- 
plete; that  is,  the  addressee,  on  seeing  or  hearing  his  call,  has 
no  knowledge  of  what  is  to  follow.  Not  only  must  the  signal  or 
dispatch  be  transmitted  and  received  part  by  part  according  to 
a  prescribed  order,  but  special  signs  are  necessary  for  clearness 
and  precision. 

Question.  In  general,  of  what  does  a  signal  or  a  dispatch  con- 
sist? 

Answer.   (1)  The  heading,  consisting  of — 

a.  The  call  (always  appears). 

b.  The  preamble,   j 

c.  The  address.       [(May  or  may  not  appear.) 

d.  The  prefix.         J 

(2)  The  office  reference  number  and  date  group  (may  or  may 
not  appear  in  dispatches,  never  appear  in  signals). 

(3)  The  text  (ahvays  appears). 

(4)  The  time  of  origin  number  (usually  appears  in  official  dis- 
patches, does  not  usually  appear  in  signals). 

Question.  Of  what  does  the  call  consist  and  how  is  it  used? 

Answer.  The  call  consists  of  the  call(s)  of  the  receiving 
unit(s)  and  the  call  of  the  transmitting  unit.  In  establishing 
communication  the  transmitting  unit  calls  the  receiving  unit  by 
making  the  call  of  that  unit.  The  latter  answers  by  repeating 
the  call  as  made  by  the  transmitting  unit.  The  transmitting 


218          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

unit  then  sends  its  own  call,  which  is  repeated  by  the  receiving 
unit(s).  , 

Question.  Of  what  does  the  preamble  consist? 

Answer.  Of  procedure  signs  and,  if  necessary,  the  calls  denot- 
ing the  route  of  the  signal  or  dispatch. 

Question.  Of  what  does  the  address  consist? 

Answer.  The  address  consists  of  the  call  of  the  addressee  and 
the  call  of  the  originator  separated  by  V  (from). 

Question.  Of  what  does  the  prefix  consist? 

Answer.  Of  procedure  signs  denoting  the  type  of  signal  or  dis- 
patch and  any  instructions  regarding  the  signal  or  dispatch  it- 
self. It  also  includes  the  number  of  groups  or  words  in  the 
text,  preceded  by  the  procedure  sign  GR.  The  position  of  the 
group  sign  (GR)  is  at  the  end  of  the  prefix. 

Question.  By  what  is  the  heading  separated  from  the  text  if 
the  text  is  in  plain  language? 

Answer.  By  II. 

Question.  By  what  is  it  separated  if  the  text  consists  of  code? 

Answer.  By  Sf . 

Question.  By  what  is  it  separated  if  the  text  consists  of  a 
signal  or  signals? 

Answer.  By  IM  (the  signals  sign). 

Question.  Of  what  does  the  office  reference  number  and  date 
group  consist? 

Answer.  Of  a  four  (or  five)  figure  group,  the  first  twro  (or 
three)  figures  of  which  designate  an  office  or  officer,  the  last  two 
the  day  of  the  month. 

Question.  What  is  the  first  group  of  the  text? 

Answer.  The  office  reference  number  and  date  group  is  the 
first  group  of  the  text  and,  when  used,  counts  as  one  group  in 
counting  the  total  number  of  groups  or  words. 

Question.  Is  the  office  reference  number  and  date  group  to  be 
coded? 

Answer.  They  are  not,  unless  they  appear  in  the  body  of  the 
text. 

Question.  What  does  the  text  comprise? 

Answer.  The  communication  itself,  whether  in  plain  language, 
code,  or  groups  from  a  signal  book. 

Question.  Of  what  does  the  time  of  origin  number  consist? 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          219 

Answer.  It  consists  of  a  four-figure  group,  the  first  two  repre- 
senting hours  from  midnight,  the  last  two  the  minutes  past  the 
hour. 

Question.  Is  the  time  of  origin  number  to  be  coded? 

Answer.  It  is  not,  unless  it  appears  in  the  body  of  the  text. 

Question.  Where  does  the  time  of  origin  number  appear  in  a 
message  and  how  is  it  counted? 

Answer.  It  is  the  last  group  of  the  text  and  is  counted  as  one 
group  in  counting  the  total  number  of  groups  or  words. 

Question.  What  is  the  time  of  receipt  number? 

Answer.  The  time  of  receipt  is  a  four-figure  group,  the  first 
two  figures  representing  the  hours  past  midnight,  the  last  two 
the  minutes  past  the  hour. 

Question.  What  does  the  time  of  receipt  indicate  and  of  what 
importance  is  it? 

Answer.  It  indicates  the  time  a  dispatch  was  received;  it  is 
of  importance  only  in  relayed  dispatches  and  in  locating  delays 
in  transmission. 

Question.  When  the  number  of  words  or  groups  is  stated  in 
the  prefix,  does  this  number  include  the  time  of  receipt  sign  or 
time  of  receipt  group? 

Answer.  It  does  not. 

Question.  How  is  the  end  of  tr admission  indicated? 

Answer.  By  the  "finale"  signAR,  or  the  "finish"  sign  VA. 

Question.  With  what  should  dispatches  ordinarily  terminate? 

Answer.  With  a  "  finale  "  sign  AR,  and  not  with  a  "  finish  " 
sign  VA. 

Question.  What  does  the  "  finish  "  sign  mean  and  when  is  it 
to  be  used? 

Answer.  It  means  "  communication  finished  "  and  should  be 
used  only  when  there  is  nothing  more  to  follow. 

Question.  Give  an  example  to  illustrate  the  various  parts  of  a 
dispatch  (flashing  light). 

Answer.  The  Wyoming  (B  32)  has  a  code  dispatch :  "  1721 
ABCD  EFGH  2013  "  received  from  the  Texas  (B  35)  to  transmit 
to  the  New  York  (B  34)  addressed  to  or  for  further  transmis- 
sion to  the  New  Mexico  (B  40). 

The  proper  position  of  the  various  procedure  signs  in  a  dis- 
patch, when  their  use  is  required,  is  indicated  in  the  right-hand 
column. 


220          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 
Example  of  a  dispatch. 


Parts  of  the  dispatch. 

The  dis- 
patch as 
transmitted. 

Signification. 

Position  of  prescribed 
procedure  signs  when 
their  use  is  required. 

Call               

B  34... 

New  York  receiving  . 

B  32 

Wyoming     transmit- 

II... 

ting. 
Break 

Preamble               .  ... 

T 

Pass  follo'ving  to 

Procedure     signs      T 

Address  

II  
B40  

V 

Break  
New  Mexico  
From 

Z,  and  L. 

Procedure  sign  V 

Prefix  
Oifice  reference  No  

Text                

B35  
II  
GR4  

BT  
1721  

II... 
ABCD  

Texas  
Break  

Number  of  groups,  4.  .  . 

Text  is  in  code  

Originated  by  Office 
assigned  number  17 
on  21st  day  of  cur- 
rent month. 
Break  
Code  group  . 

Procedure  signs  G,  Y, 
GR,  and  UN.      __ 
Procedure   signs    BT, 
II,  and  fST 

II  
EFGH  

Break  
Code  group  

II        

Break 

Time  of  origin  No  

2013  

II  

IMI 

Dispatch  written  8.13 
p.  m. 
Break  

Repeat 

II     

T 

II 

B  40 

V          

B  35 

II        

GR  4  ... 

T^'             4-                              4       1 

BTP 

(Being  in  code  ) 

1721  

II           .  . 

ABCD.... 
II    

EFGH.... 
II 

2013  

II  

TOR 

Break  

Time  of  receipt 

Time  of  receipt  

II  

2042 

Break  

Received  on  the  New 

End  of  dispatch  

SR     . 

York  at  8.42  p.  m. 

Procedure  signs  B,  Q, 

SE.TC. 

INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          221 

GENERAL  INSTRUCTIONS. 

Question.  What  system  is  to  be  used  in  answering  or  repeat- 
ing a  dispatch? 

Answer.  The  unit  replying  to  or  repeating  a  dispatch  shall 
use  the  same  system  in  which  it  is  sent,  unless  it  is  clearly  im-  ^ 
practicable  to  do  so. 

Question.  What  conditions  should  govern  the  selection  of  the 
system  in  sending  dispatches? 

Answer.  The  system  selected  will  depend  upon  the  importance 
of  the  signal  or  dispatch,  the  number  of  units  addressed,  the 
distance  the  signal  or  dispatch  must  be  transmitted,  and  condi- 
tions affecting  visibility.  The  system  selected  should  be  the  one 
which  would  interfere  least  with  other  signaling,  if  there  be 
any,  yet  sufficient  to  insure  attracting  attention  promptly. 

Question.  What  means  is  employed  to  attract  attention? 

Answer.  Any  means  of  attracting  attention  may  be  used 
which  does  not  interfere  with  the  purport  of  the  signal  or  dis- 
patch. 

Question.  Should  it  become  necessary  at  any  time  to  annul  a 
signal  during  its  transmission,  or  even  while  the  signal  "  execu- 
tion "  is  being  displayed,  what  is  to  be  done? 

Answer.  It  is  merely  necessary  to  send  N  (negative)  as  a 
general  signal,  using  a  different  system  of  transmission  (or  sec- 
ond blinker  tube),  following  the  prescribed  procedure. 

Question.  "In  calling  out  the  letters  and  signs  for  the  recorder, 
how  is  accuracy  obtained? 

Answer.  They  are  to  be  called  out  by  their  names,  as  "  Boy," 
not  "  B  "  ;  "  Roger,"  not  "  R  "  ;  "  Received  sign,"  not  "  R." 

Question.  From  whom  are  signals  considered  to  emanate  and 
to  whom  to  be  addressed  on  board  ship? 

Answer.  They  are  considered  to  emanate  from  the  senior 
officer  of  the  unit  of  origin  and  to  be  addressed  to  the  senior 
officer  of  the  unit  to  which  they  are  addressed. 

Question.  What  are  the  principal  methods  of  transmitting 
signals? 

Answer.  Flag  hoist,  flashing  light,  and  radio. 

Question.  What  secondary  methods  are  available? 

Answer.  Semaphore,  wigwag,  sound,  pyrotechnic,  etc. 

Question.  In  order  to  meet  the  requirements  of  each  of  the 
three  principal  methods  of  transmitting  signals,  what  equivalent 
has  each  letter,  numeral,  and  special  sign? 


222          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  Each  letter,  numeral,  and  special  sign  has  a  name,  a 
flag  or  pennant  equivalent,  and  a  dot  and  dash  equivalent. 

Question.  In  transmitting  signals  by  flashing;  light  (or  by  other 
means  employing  the  dot  and  dash  characters),  what  is  neces- 
sary in  order  that  the  receiving  unit  may  read  a  signal  cor- 
rectly? 

Answer.  A  decided  pause  should  be  made  between  repetitions 
of  signals  in  order  to  avoid  running  the  repetitions  together,  and 
thus  causing  the  receiving  unit  to  read  a  signal  other  than  the 
one  intended. 

.Question.  How  would  you  illustrate  this? 

Answer.  In  sending  the  signal  BCD,  it  should  be  sent  BCD 
(decided  pause),  BCD  (decided  pause),  BCD  (decided  pause), 
etc.,  and  not  BCDBCDBCD,  etc.,  for  in  the  latter  case  the  receiv- 
ing unit  might  possibly  read  the  signal  CDB  or  DBC  (particu- 
larly if  the  first  letter  or  first  two  letters  were  missed),  thus 
reading  a  signal  entirely  different  in  meaning  from  the  one 
being  sent. 

DISPATCHES. 

• 

Question.  What  is  the  character  of  all  dispatches  transmitted 
by  visual  methods  considered  to  be  and  from  whom  are  they 
considered  to  emanate  and  to  whom  to  be  addressed? 

Answer.  Unless  otherwise  indicated  they  are  considered  to  be 
official  and  to  emanate  from  the  senior  officer  on  board  the  ship 
of  origin  and  to  be  addressed  to  the  senior  officer  on  board  the 
receiving  unit. 

Question.  Is  each  dispatch  required  to  have  a  specific  address 
and  signature? 

Answer.  No ;  except  that  dispatches  intended  for  the  com- 
manding officer  of  a  ship,  which  is  a  flagship,  shall  be  prefaced 
"  To  shipsig,"  and  dispatches  from  the  commanding  officer  of  a 
ship  which  is  a  flagship  shall  be  prefaced  "  From  shipsig." 

Question.  How  are  unofficial  dispatches  prefaced? 

Answer.  By  the  letters  UN  followed  immediately  by  the  name 
of  the  addressee  and  the  name  of  the  originator ;  thus,  "  UN  for 
Captain  Smith  from  Captain  Jones."  No  unofficial  dispatch 
shall  be  sent  unless  signed  by  and  addressed  to  an  officer,  except 
by  special  permission  in  each  case. 

Question.  How  are  dispatches  identified? 

Answer.  By  their  "  office  reference  number  and  date  group  " 
and  the  "  time  of  origin  number." 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          223 

Question.  In  acknowledging  a  dispatch,  how  is  it  referred  to? 

Answer.  By  "office  reference  number  and  date  group"  (if 
used)  and  "time  of  origin  number,"  as  Y  0327  II  1751. 

Question.  What  is  necessary  in  dispatches  which  it  is  desired 
to  have  acknowledged? 

Answer.  They  should  contain  the  procedure  sign  Y  in  the' 
prefix. 

Question.  How  often  is  any  dispatch  in  code  to  be  transmit- 
ted? 

Answer.  It  is  to  be  sent  twice,  i.  e.,  immediately  upon  com- 
pletion of  the  first  transmission  the  repeat  sign,  IMI,  is  to  be 
made,  and  the  complete  dispatch  again  transmitted.  When  the 
letter  C  or  the  letter  G-  is  used  for  the  purpose  of  checking  or 
repeating  back  a  code  dispatch,  the  dispatch  is  to  be  transmitted 
only  once  in  such  cases. 

FLASHING-LIGHT   METHODS  OF  TRANSMISSION. 

Question.  In  systems  using  the  flashing-light  method  of  trans- 
mission, what  are  used? 

Answer.  The  International  Morse  alphabet  and  numerals  and 
special  Morse  signs  are  used. 

Question.  How  are  the  characters  made? 

Answer.  By  alternately  exposing  and  obscuring  the  light,  a 
short  flash  representing  the  "  dot "  and  a  long  flash  the  "  dash." 
The  characters  should  be  made  deliberately  and  distinctly. 

Question.  What  ratio  must  the  dots  and  dashes,  and  the 
spaces  between  them,  bear?  * 

Answer.  A  dot  is  taken  as  a  unit. 

A  dash  is  equivalent  to  three  units. 

An  acknowledging  flash  is  equivalent  to  six  units. 

A  space  between  two  elements  of  a  letter  or  sign  is  equal  to 

one  unit.  Thus,  the  letter  D  ( •)  has  three  units  for  the 

dash,  one  unit  space,  one  unit  "  dot,"  one  unit  space,  one  unit 
"  dot." 

A  space  between  two  complete  letters  or  signs  is  equal  to  a 
dash,  or  three  units. 

A  space  between  words,  or  groups,  is  equal  to  two  dashes,  or 
six  units. 

Question.  Should  this  ratio  be  carefully  adhered  to? 

Answer.  Yes ;  whatever  be  the  rate  of  transmission.  In  slow 
transmission,  with  heavy  searchlight  apparatus  or  with  sluggish 


224          INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

lights,  it  is  difficult  to  appreciate  the  relative  length  of  dots  and 
dashes,  and  experience  has  shown  it  best  to  accentuate  the  dots 
by  making  them  shorter  in  proportion  to  the  dashes. 

Question.  When  transmitting  at  night,  what  is  it  necessary 
to  do? 

Answer.  Care  must  be  taken  to  select  a  position  not  in  the 
immediate  vicinity  of  or  in  line  with  other  lights.  All  unneces- 
sary lights  in  the  vicinity  of  the  sending  station  should  be 
turned  out. 

Question.  When  are  signals  by  flashing  light  to  be  executed? 

Answer.  (1)  On  the  termination  of  the  10-second  flash  of  the 
"  execute." 

(2)  At  the  time  designated  in  the  signal. 

(3)  On  arrival  at  the  position  designated  in  the  signal. 

(4)  In   the  case  of  certain   signals,   as  soon  as   made  and 
received. 

Question.  What  means  may  be  employed  in  signaling  by 
flashing  light? 

Answer.   (1)   Searchlight. 

(2)  Yardarm  blinker. 

(3)  Blinker  tube. 

(4)  Any  other  effective  method  of  displaying  or  projecting 
light. 

Question.  How  should  the  searchlight  be  used? 

Answer.  At  night  the  beam  should  be  projected  where  it  will 
be  most  clearly  distinguished  by  the  receiving  unit(s),  but  not 
directly  on  the  receiver.  During  daylight  the  searchlight  must 
be  accurately  trained  on  the  receiving  unit. 

Question.  To  insure  this  being  accomplished;  what  should  be 
done? 

Answer.  Signal  searchlights  should  be  fitted  with  a  sighting 
device. 

Question.  What  is  the  most  efficient  method  of  transmitting 
visual  signals  long  distances? 

Answer.  The  searchlight. 

Question.  What  is  the  yardarm  blinker? 

Answer.  It  is  an  "  all-around  "  light  located  at  the  yardarms 
and  operated  by  a  key  on  the  signal  bridge. 

Question.  When  should  the  blinker  tube  be  used? 

Answer.  When  circumstances  render  it  advisable  that  a  signal 
light  shall  not  be  seen,  except  in  the  direction  of  the  receiver. 
The  tube  must  be  pointed  directly  at  the  receiver.  When  less 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


225 


brilliancy  is  required,  as  on  clear,  dark  nights,  the  light  may 
be  dimmed  by  veiling  it  with  one  or  more  thicknesses  of  bunt- 
ing; this  veil  should  be  inserted  well  down  the  tube,  in  order 
that  radiance  from  it  shall  not  be  visible  laterally. 

Question.  What  procedure  is  prescribed  for  dispatches  trans- 
mitted by  flashing  light  when  transmitting  to  one  unit? 

Answer. 


RECEIVING   UNIT. 

(1)  Repeats    call    as    made    by 
transmitting  unit. 

(2)  Repeats    call    as    made    by 
transmitting     unit     (transmitting 
unit's  can;. 

(3)  Answers  with  a  flash. 

(4)  Answers  with  a  flash. 


or 


(5)  Answers  with  a  flash. 

(6)  Answers      each      word 
group  with  a  flash. 


(7)  If    dispatch    has    been    re- 
ceived makes  R  II  VA. 

(8)  Receiving    unit    answers    B 
with  R  II  X  or  R  II  Q,  as  circum- 
stances demand. 


TRANSMITTING  UNIT. 

(1)  Makes  call  of  unit  for  whom 
dispatch-  is  intended  several  times 
or  until  repeated. 

(2)  Makes    own    call    until    re- 
peated. 

(3)  Makes  break  (II). 

(4)  Makes   G-R   followed  by  the 
number  of  words  or  groups. 

(5)  Makes  II  if  text  is  in  plain 
language  ;  BT  if  text  is  in  code. 

(6)  Transmits  text  of  dispatch 
(including  office  and  date  number 
and  time  of  origin  number). 

(7)  Makes  "finale"  sign 

or 

(8)  If    there    are    further    dis- 
patches  to   transmit   to   the   same 
receiving^  unit,    transmitting    unit 
makes  AR  II  B. 

Question.  Where  is  the  proper  location  of  prescribed  procedure 
signs  indicated  when  their  use  is  required? 

Answer.  In  the  example  illustrating  the  various  parts  of  a 
dispatch  (flashing  light  method,  p.  220). 

Question.  When  transmitting  to  one  unit  what  does  the  omis- 
sion of  the  answering  flash  indicate? 

Answer.  It  indicates  that  the  word  or  sign  just  made  was 
not  received  and  that  repetition  is  desired.  The  transmitting 
unit  should  repeat  the  last  word  or  sign  immediately. 

SEMAPHORE. 

Question.  W'hat  is  the  semaphore  system? 
Answer.  It  is  the  standard  system  of  transmitting  dispatches 
'uring  daylight  for  short  and  medium  distances. 
34079—21 15 


226          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  Under  ordinary  circumstances  would  it  be  used  for 
the  transmission  of  signals? 

Answer.  It  would  not;  but  it  may  be  used  either  as  the 
primary  method  of  transmission  or  as  a  secondary  method  to 
supplement  flag  signals  then  displayed. 

Question.  Describe  the  flags  used  in  transmitting  messages 
by  semaphore. 

Answer.  It  employs  two  hand  flags,  from  15  to  18  inches 
square,  and  either  blue  and  white  similar  to  the  International 
flag  P  or  red  and  yellow  similar  to  the  International  flag  O, 
the  color  to  be  used  which  affords  the  better  contrast  to  the 
background.  Each  flag  should  be  attached  to  a  light  staff  about 
2  feet  long. 

Question.  What  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  background 
when  using  semaphore  ? 

Answer.  The  sender  should  select  a  background  giving  the 
greatest  contrast.  Except  under  special  conditions  of  light  and 
when  the  sun  is  in  line  with  and  back  of  the  sender,  the  sky 
affords  the  best  background. 

Question.  What  care  must  be  exercised  in  sending  semaphore 
dispatches? 

Answer.  The  arms  must  be  placed  at  the  exact,  positions  indi- 
cating the  letters,  a  distinct  pause  being  made  at  each  position 
and  the  arms  moved  from  position  to  position  by  the  shortest 
route. 

Question.  How  is  the  semaphore  alphabet  printed? 
Answer.  As  the  characters  appear  with  the  sender  facing  the 
receiver.    Thus,  the  character  B  is  with  the  right  arm  extended 
horizontally. 

Question.  How  are  numbers  sent  by  semaphore? 
Answer.  Numbers  should  always  be  spelled  out. 
Question.  What  is  the  "break"  sign  in  semaphore? 
Answer.  The  flags  crossed  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  body, 
as  shown  in  the  plate. 

Question.  What  is  the  answering  sign  in  semaphore? 
Answer.  The  right-hand  flag  extended  vertically  upward  and 
the  left-hand  flag  extended  upward  at  an  angle  of  about  45° 
as  shown  in  the  plate. 

Question.  What  procedure  signs  ordinarily  are  used  in  sema 
phore? 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          227 

Answer. 

Error E  jgitated. 

Interrogatory . ?!£?• 

Code  follows BT. 

Signals  follow IM7 

Number  of  words  or  groups-  GR  (followed  by  number  spelled  out). 

End  of  word Break. 

End  of  sentence  (full  stop)__AAA"  (thrte  A's). 

End  of  dispatch .AR. 

Repeat  all  before  word -IMI  break  AB  break   (word). 

Repeat  all  after  word -IMI  break  AA  break    (word). 

Repeat  word  after  word IMI  break  WA  break   (word). 

Received  (and   communica-         R   break   VA   used   only   when    call   flags 

tion  finished).  are  not  used.     When  call  flags  are  used 

fj?  the   hauling   down    of   the    call    signifies 

"  dispatch  received  ") . 

Move  to  your  right MR.7 

Move  to  your  left ML,7 

Move  up MIT.7 

Move  down MD.7 

Question.  How  would  you  call  a  ship  or  unit  by  flag  hoist  for 
a  semaphore  signal  or  dispatch? 

Answer.  Hoist  the  call  of  the  ship  or  unit  for  whom  the 
signal  or  dispatch  is  intended,  "two-blocked"  (unless  it  is 
necessary  to  make  such  a  call  while  flag  signals  are  displayed 
at  the  same  yardarm,  in  which  case  the  call  may  be  hoisted  at 
the  dip). 

Question.  How  does  a  unit  so  addressed  answer? 

Answer.  By  hoisting  the  call  of  the  calling  ship  or  unit  over 
the  answering  pennant  (1)  at  the  "dip,"  as  soon  as  seen,  and 
until  ready  to  receive;  (2)  two-blocked  when  ready  to  receive. 

Question.  What  should  be  done  to  enable  the  receiver  to 
locate  the  signalman? 

Answer.  The  "  attention "  sign  should  always  be  made  by 
the  transmitting  unit  when  several  signalmen  are  sending  to 
a  large  number  of  units,  to  give  the  receiver  an  opportunity 
to  locate  the  sending  signalman. 

Question.  How  would  you  call  a  ship  or  unit  without  flag 
hoist  for  a  semaphore  signal  or  dispatch? 

Answer.  There  is  no  equivalent  for  the  call  pennants  in  sema- 
phore. When  it  is  not  practicable  to  call  by  flag  hoist,  and  the 


r  May  be  used  in  wigwag  also. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


"  attention  "  sign  is  not  sufficiently  definite,  three  or  four  letters 
abbreviating  the  unit's  name  will  be  used  as  a  call. 

Question.  How  will  the  unit  addressed  answer? 

Answer.  It  makes  the  "answering"  sign,  and  if  that  be  not 
sufficiently  definite,  the  three  or  four  letters  abbreviating  the 
name  of  the  unit  answered. 

Question.  How  may  you  be  assured  that  a  semaphore  mes- 
sage has  been  received? 

Answer.  Any  desired  degree  of  assurance  that  the  signal  has 
been  received  may  be  attained  by  the  use  of  prescribed  pro- 
cedure signs.  Thus,  if  the  call  is  followed  by — 

(1)  G,  the  receiving  unit  will  repeat  back. 

(2)  Y,  the  receiving  unit  will  acknowledge. 

(3)  G  and  Y,  the  receiving  unit  will  repeat  back  and 

acknowledge. 

Question.  What  procedure  signs  are  used  in  semaphore? 

Answer.  The  procedure  signs  prescribed  for  Morse  are  to  be 
used  when  required.  When  used,  their  position  in  the  dispatch 
corresponds  to  their  position  when  used  in  systems  employing 
Morse. 

Question.  What  procedure  is  prescribed  for  the  transmission 
of  dispatches  by  semaphore? 

Answer.  The  procedure  is  as  follows : 

TRANSMITTING    UNIT.  RECEIVING    UNIT. 

(1)  Makes   call,   either   by   flag  (1)   If  the  call  be  by  flag  hoist 
hoist    and    attention,    by    "  atten-  answers   call   by   hoisting  answer- 
tion  "   alone,   or   by   attention   fol-  ing  pennant  under  the  call  of  the 
lowed   by   letter   or   letters   abbre-  transmitting   unit   at   the   dip,   as 
viating  the   name  of  the  unit  for  soon     as     seen,     and     two  blocked 
whom  the  dispatch  is  intended.  when  ready  to  receive  and  record. 

If  the  call  be  other  than  flag 
hoist,  makes  the  "  answering " 
sign,  followed,  if  necessary,  by 
three  of  four  letters  abbreviating 
the  name  of  the  transmitting  unit. 

(2)  When  confusion  might  arise          (2) 
as  to  which  unit  the  dispatch  is 

being  transmitted,  makes  the  let- 
ters abbreviating  the  name  of  the 
receiving  unit.  When  there  is  no 
possibility  of  confusion  this  may 
be  omitted. 

Makes  break.  (3) 

(4)  Makes  G-R  followed  by  num-          (4) 
ber  of  group  or  words. 

(5)  Makes  break.  (5) 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          229 


(6)  Makes      1&T      followed      by 
"  break,"  If  text  is  in  code. 

(7)  Proceeds   with   text   of  dis- 
patch,   all    numbers    being   spelled 
out. 


(8)  Makes  break. 
(0)   Makes  AR,  and  hauls  down 
the  flag  call  if  used. 


(6) 

(7)  When  the  call  and  answer 
is  by  flag  hoist,  the  answering 
pennant  is  to  be  dipped  immedi- 
ately a  word  or  sign  is  missed. 
If  the  call  be  other  jthan  by  flag 
hoist,  makes  repeat  (IMf). 

(8) 

(9)  Acknowledges  the  receipt  of 
the  dispatch  (a),  if  the  call  and 
the  answer  be  by  flag  hoist,  by 
hauling  down  the  answering  pen- 
nant when  the  transmitting  unit 
hauls  down  the  call;  (&)  if  the 
call  and  answer  be  other  than  by 
flag  hoist,  makes  "  R  break  vT." 

Question.  How  is  the  failure  to  receive  a  word  or  sign  indi- 
cated? 

Answer.  (1)  If  the  call  and  answer  be  by  flag  hoist,  by  the 
receiving  unit  dipping  the  answering  pennant. 

(2)  If  the  call  and  answer  be  other  than  by  flag  hoist,  t>y  the 
receiving  unit  making  the  repeat  sign  IM!. 

Question.  On  receipt  of  a  dispatch,  if  the  call  and  answer  be 
by  flag  hoist,  what  does  the  receiving  unit  do? 

Answer.  It  hauls  down  the  answering  hoist. 

Question.  If  during1  the  sending  of  the  dispatch  the  receiving 
unit  fails  to  receive  any  part  of  it  for  any  reason,  such  as  sen- 
der becoming  obscured  by  smoke,  etc.,  what  should  the  receiv- 
ing unit  do? 

Answer.  It  should  dip  the  answering  pennant.  The  sending 
unit  should  then  dip  the  call.  When  the  receiving  unit  is  again 
ready  to  receive,  she  should  two-block  the  answering  pennant. 
The  sending  unit  should  then  two-block  the  call  and  proceed 
with  the  dispatch,  starting  with  and  repeating  the  last  two  or 
three  words  transmitted  before  the  answering  pennant  was 
dipped. 

Question.  If  the  receiving  unit  requires  more  than  the  last 
word  or  sign  to  be  repeated,  what  should  it  do? 

Answer.  It  should  make  the  appropriate  procedure  sign  for 
repeating  the  required  portion. 

WIGWAG. 

Question.  What  alphabet,  etc.,  is  employed  in  wigwag? 
Answer.  The    International   Morse   alphabet,    numerals,    and 
special.  Morse  signs. 


230          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  How  is  a  dot  and  a  dash  represented? 

Answer.  A  motion  through  an  arc  of  90  degrees  to  the  sen- 
der's right  represents  a  "  dot,"  and  a  similar  motion  to  the  left 
a  '*  dash." 

Question.  What  signs  are  peculiar  to  wigwag? 

Answer.  The  only  signs  peculiar  to  wiwag  are : 

(1)  The  "attention"  sign,  i.  e.,  the  flag  waved  back  and 

forward  overhead. 

(2)  The  "  break  "  sign,  i.  e.,  a  motion  to  the  front. 
Question.  What  may  be  used  in  signaling  by  wigwag? 
Answer.  A  hand  flag,  a  hand  light,  or  a  searchlight  beam. 
Question.  What  should  the  sender  do  in  sending  a  message? 
Answer.  He  should  face  the  receiver  squarely.     The  motions 

for  the  dot  and  dash  should  be  made  at  right  angles  to  the  line 
of  transmission,  and  for  the  "  break  "  from  the  vertical  position 
through  an  arc  of  135°  in  the  direction  of  the  line  of  transmis- 
sion. 

Question.  What  should  be  done  to  keep  the  flag  fully  ex- 
posed ? 

Answer.  The  point  of  the  staff  should  be  made  to  describe 
an  elongated  figure  8. 

Question.  What  is  desirable  in  case  a  hand  light  is  used? 

Answer.  It  is  desirable  to  have  a  reference  light  at  the  send- 
er's feet. 

Question.  How  may  an  oil  lantern  be  used? 

Answer.  It  may  more  conveniently  be  swung  outward  and 
upward. 

Question.  What  is  it  important  to  do  in  sending  by  wigwag? 

Answer.  It  is  important  to  obtain  a  good  background  and  to 
select  a  flag  the  colors  of  which  present  the  most  marked  con- 
trast with  the  background. 

Question.  How  may  the  prescribed  calls  be  supplemented? 

Answer.  The  prescribed  calls  may  be  supplemented  by  flag- 
hoist  calls,  as  in  semaphore.  The  procedure  prescribed  for 
semaphore  shall  be  followed. 

Question.  Can  wigwag  be  seen  as  far  as  semaphore? 

Answer.  A  large  wigwag  flag  against  a  good  background  may 
be  read  at  a  greater  distance  than  semaphore. 

SOUND. 

Question.  For  what  is  sound  signaling  prescribed? 
Answer.  For  use  in  thick  weather  under  circumstances  where 
the  use  of  radio  is  inadvisable  and  when  such  signals  \yill  not 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


231 


be  confusing  to  strangers  in  connection  with  the  "  rules  of  the 
road,"  or  confusing  to  our  own  ships  in  connection  with  the 
"  rules  of  the  road  "  or  emergency  signals. 

Question.  How  may  sound  signals  be  made? 

Answer.  On  the  whistle,  fog  horn,  or  similar  sound-producing 
apparatus.  The  Morse  alphabet  and  special  signs  are  used. 

Question.  In  using  the  steam  whistle,  what  is  necessary 
before  starting? 

Answer.  To  see  that  condensed  steam  is  blown  clear. 

Question.  In  sound  signals,  what  represents  a  "dot"  and 
what  a  "  dash"? 

Answer.  A  short  blast  of  the  whistle  or  single  stroke  of  a 
bell  represents  a  "  dot,"  a  longer  blast  or  two  short  strokes  in 
quick  succession  represents  a  "  dash."  Care  must  be  taken  in 
the  spacing  or  interval  between  blasts  or  strokes. 

Question.  Should  two  or  more  ships  within  hearing  of  each 
other  attempt  sound  signaling  at  the  same  time? 

Answer.  Not  if  by  so  doing  they  cause  interference  with  one 
another. 

Question.  What  procedure  is  prescribed  for  signals  by  sound? 

Answer.  When  signaling  to  one  ship  direct  the  following  pro- 
cedure is  prescribed : 


TRANSMITTING  SHIP. 

(1)  Makes  call  of  ship  or  unit 
for   whom   signal  is  intended   sev- 
eral  times,  or  until  repeated. 

(2)  Makes  own  call  several  times, 
or  until  repeated  correctly. 

(3)  Makes  signal  sign  (  .  . ). 

(4)  Makes  complete  signal,  as  a 
group  of  letters,  numerals,  or  signs. 

(5)  Makes      "final"      sign 

(0)   Waits  an  appreciable  Jnter- 
val  for  the  R  or  for  the  IML 


(7)  When  the  R^  has  been  re- 
ceived makes  IX  IX  several  times 
as  a  preliminary  signal  of  execu- 
tion, then  a  10-second  blast,  the 
termination  of  which  is  the  final 
signal  of  execution. 


RECEIVING   SHIP. 

(1)  Repeats    call    as    made    by 
transmitting  ship. 

(2)  Repeats     call    as    made    by 
transmitting     ship      (transmitting 
ship's  call). 

(3) 
(4) 

(5) 

(6)  If  signal  is  understood  makes 
R  (received).  If  signaj_is  not  un- 
derstood makes  repeat  (iMI  )  several 
times  until  signal  is  repeated. 


232          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  What  procedure  is  prescribed  for  the  transmission 
of  dispatches  by  sound? 

Answer.  The  procedure  prescribed  for  the  transmission  of 
dispatches  by  flashing  light  shall  be  followed. 

Question.  Should  the  transmitting  ship  fail  to  receive  the 
acknowledging  blast  after  a  reasonable  wait,  what  should  it  do? 

Answer.  It  shall  repeat  the  word,  group,  or  sign  last  made 
until  acknowledged.  This  procedure  insures  the  receipt  of  a 
dispatch  part  by  part  and  reduces  r  ot  only  the  probability  of  a 
complete  repetition,  but  saves  the  time  required  for  making  the 
requests  for  repetitions. 

Question.  After  the  transmission  of  the  dispatch,  may  the 
receiving  unit  request  a  repetition? 

Answer.  It  may  request  a  repetition  of  any  part  or  all  of 
the  dispatch  by  using  the  "  repeat "  sign. 

SHAPE  SIGNALS. 

Question.  For  what  are  shape  signals  intended  and  when  may 
their  use  become  important? 

Answer.  Shape  signals  are  primarily  long-distance  signals. 
They  may  become  of  importance  when  it  is  inadvisable  to  use 
radio,  and  when  a  ship  is  not  fitted  with  or  can  not  use  search- 
lights, and  when  atmospheric  or  light  conditions  make  it  im- 
possible to  distinguish  the  colors  of  flags. 

Question.  Where  would  you  find  detailed  instructions  for  the 
use  of  shape  signals? 

Answer.  Detailed  instructions  for  the  use  of  shape  signals 
and  a  shape-signal  code  sufficient  for  general  use  are  pre- 
scribed in  the  International  Signal  Book  and  in  the  Allied 
Fleet  Signal  Book. 

INTERNATIONAL  CODE  OF  SIGNALS. 

(The  International  Code  Signal  Book  shall  be  studied  and  con- 
sulted for  complete  detailed  instructions  as  to  the  use  of  the 
International  Code.) 

Question.  What  is  the  International  Code  of  Signals? 

Answer.  A  system  of  signals  which  has  been  adopted  by  all' 
nations  in  order  that  all  vessels  may  "have  a  method  of  signaling 
to  each  other,  each  particular  hoist  having  the  same  meaning  in 
all  languages. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          233 

Question.  Of  how  many  flags  does  the  code  consist? 

Answer.  Of  26  flags — one  for  each  letter  of  the  alphabet — and 
iln-  code  flag/which  is  also  used  as  an  answering  pennant. 

Question.  Of  what  shapes  are  these  flags? 

Answer.  There  are  2  swallowtails,  A  and  B;  5  pennants,  C, 
D,  E,  F,  and  G-;  and  19  square  flags,  representing  the  remain- 
ing letters  of  the  alphabet.  The  code  flag  is  also  a  pennant. 

Question.  Have  these  flags  been  given  other  names  than  the 
letters  they  represent;  and  if  so,  for  what  purpose? 

Answer.  In  the  Navy  and  the  Coast  Guard  each  flag  has  been 
given  a  distinctive  name,  in  order  to  avoid  confusing  the  names 
of  the  various  letters  in  reporting  signals  and  in  calling  out 
signals.  They  must  also  be  used  in  repeating  such  signals  over 
the  telephone. 

Question.  What  are  these  distinctive  names? 

Answer.  They  are  as  follows  : 

A Affirmative         J Jig  S Sail 

B Boy  K King  T Tare 

C Cast  L Love  U Unit 

D Dog  M Mike  V Vice 

E Easy  N Negative  W Watch 

F Fox  0 Optional  X X-ray 

G George  P Preparatory     Y Yoke 

H Have  a Quack  Z Zed 

I Interrogatory     R Roger 

Question.  Into  how  many  parts  is  the  code  book  divided, 
and  what  does  each  contain? 

Answer.  Into  three  parts.  The  first  part  contains  urgent  and 
important  signals,  compass  signals,  the  numeral  table,  and  all 
the  tables  of  moneys,  weights,  measures,  barometric  heights, 
etc.,  together  with  a  geographical  list  and  a  table  of  phrases 
formed  with  auxiliary  verbs.  The  second  part  is  an  index, 
which  consists  of  a  general  vocabulary  and  a  geographical 
index,  and  is  arranged  alphabetically.  The  third  part  gives 
lists  of  the  United  States  storm  warnings,  Coast  Guard,  time 
signal,  radio,  and  radio  time-signal  stations,  and  of  Lloyd's 
signal  stations  of  the  world.  It  also  contains  semaphore  and 
distant  signal  codes,  the  United  States  Army  and  Navy  dot-and- 
dash  and  semaphore  codes,  and  the  Morse  wigwag  code. 

Question.  Explain  the  method  of  signaling  by  the  Interna- 
tional Code. 


234          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  Suppose  a  ship  wishes  to  signal  a  station:  She 
would  first  hoist  her  ensign  with  the  code  flag  under  it.  The 
station  would  reply  by  hoisting  the  code  flag  at  the  "  dip."  r£he 
ship  would  then  hoist  the  first  signal  of  her  message,  first  haul- 
ing down  her  code  flag  if  required  in  making  the  signal.  When 
this  signal  is  looked  up  in  the  code  book,  understood,  and  re- 
corded, the  station  will  then  hoist  the  answering  pennant  (code 
flag)  "  close  up "  and  keep  it  there  until  the  ship  hauls  her 
signal  down,  when  the  station  will  lower  the  answering  pen- 
nant to  the  "  dip  "  again  and  await  the  next  signal. 

Question.  What  do  you  understand  by  the  "dip"? 

Answer.  A  flag  is  at  the  "  dip  "  when  it  is  hoisted  about  two- 
thirds  of  the  way  up ;  that  is,  some  little  distance  below  where 
it  would  be  if  hoisted  "  close  up." 

Question.  W'here  should  the  answering  pennant  be  hoisted? 

Answer.  Where  it  can  best  be  seen. 

Question.  Suppose  the  ship  makes  a  signal  which  is  not  un- 
derstood;  what  would  you  do? 

Answer.  I  would  keep  the  answering  pennant  at  the  "  dip  " 
and  would  hoist  the  signal  OWL  or  WCX  or  such  other  signal 
as  would  meet  the  case  and  keep  it  flying  until  the  ship  has 
rectified  or  repeated  her  signal  and  I  understand  it.  I  would 
then  haul  down  the  signal  OWL  or  WCX  or  other  signal  used 
and  would  hoist  the  answering  pennant  "  close  up." 

Question.  What  do  the  signals  OWL  and  WCX  mean? 

Answer.  OWL  means  "  I  can  not  make  out  the  flags ;  hoist 
the  signal  in  a  better  position  " ;  WCX  means  "  Signal  not  un- 
derstood, though  the  flags  are  distinguished." 

Question.  How  would  you  call  up  a  ship  with  which  you 
wished  to  communicate? 

Answer.  By  hoisting  her  signal  number,  if  known.  If  the 
ship's  signal  number  is  not  known  I  would  make  use  of  one  of 
the  signals  between  DI  and  DQ,  on  page  37  of  the  code  book. 

Question.  How  many  flags  are  there  in  each  hoist  of  the 
International  Code? 

Answer.  From  one  to  four. 

Question.  How  many  and  what  are  the  one-letter  signals? 

Answer.  There  are  seven,  as  follows :  B,  C,  D,  L,  P,  Q,  S. 
Question.  WThat  meaning  has  each  of  the  one-letter  signals? 

Answer.  B — I  am  taking  in  (or  discharging)  explosives. 

C — Yes,  or  affirmative. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          235 

D — No,  or  negative. 

L — I  have  (or  have  had)  some  dangerous  infectious  disease 
on  board. 

P — I  am  about  to  sail ;  all  persons  report  on  board. 

Q. — I  have  a  clean  bill  of  health,  but  am  liable  to  quarantine. 

S — I  want  a  pilot. 

Question.  Is  the  code  flag  ever  hoisted  over  these  one-letter 
signals ;  and  if  so,  does  it  change  the  meaning? 

Answer.  It  may  be  hoisted  over  any  of  them,  but  does  not 
change  its  meaning. 

Question.  Is  the  code  flag  ever  hoisted  under  a  one-letter 
signal? 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  Is  the  code  flag  ever  hoisted  over  any  other  one- 
letter  signal  of  the  alphabet  than  the  seven  named  above? 

Answer.  It  may  be  hoisted  over  any  other  letter  of  the  al- 
phabet, and  the  signal  thus  made  has  the  meaning  given  it  on 
page  7  of  the  code  book. 

Question.  What  do  you  understand  by  the  term  "  code  sig- 
nal"? 

Answer.  A  code  signal  is  any  signal  found  in  the  code  book. 

Question.  Can  any  other  than  code  signals  be  sent  by  the 
International  Code? 

Answer.  Yes ;  numbers  or  words  not  in  the  code  book  may  be 
sent  by  special  signals  which  are  riot  code  signals. 

Question.  How  are  these  special  signals  known? 

Answer.  They  are  preceded  and  followed  by  signals  known  as 
alphabetical  signals  or  numeral  signals,  as  the  case  may  be. 

Question.  Name  the  alphabetical  signals  and  give  their  mean- 
ings. 

Answer.  Code  flag  over  E — Alphabetical  signal  No.  1,  indicat- 
ing that  the  flags  hoisted  after  it  until  alphabetical  signal  No. 
3  or  numeral  signal  No.  1  is  made  do  not  represent  the  signals 
in  the  code,  but  are  to  be  understood  as  having  their  alphabet- 
ical meanings  and  express  individual  letters  of  the  alphabet 
which  are  to  form  words. 

Code  flag  over  F — Alphabetical  signal  No.  2,  indicating  the 
end  of  a  word  made  by  alphabetical  signals  or  a  dot  between 
initials. 

Code  flag  over  G— Alphabetical  signal  No.  3,  indicating  that 
the  alphabetical  signals  are  ended;  the  signals  which  follow 
will  be  found  in  the  code  in  the  usual  manner. 


236          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  Name  the  numeral  signals  and  give  their  meanings. 

Answer.  Code  flag  over  M— Numeral  signal  No.  1,  indicating 
that  the  flags  hoisted  after  it  until  numeral  signal  No.  3  or  al- 
phabetical signal  No.  1  is  made  do  not  represent  the  signals  in 
the  code,  but  express  figures  as  indicated  in  the  table  on  page 
32,  and  have  the  special  numerical  values  there  given  them. 

Code  flag  over  N — Numeral  signal  No.  2,  indicating  the  deci- 
mal point. 

Code  flag  over  0 — Numeral  signa*  No.  3,  indicating  that  the 
numeral  signals  are  ended ;  the  signals  which  follow  will  be 
found  in  the  code  in  the  usual  manner. 

Question.  Where  will  a  signal  be  found  in  the  code  book? 

Answer.  If  it  be  a  three-letter  signal  between  CXA  and  ZNT, 
it  will  be  found  in  the  general  vocabulary,  Part  II  of  the  code 
book;  any  other  code  signal  will  be  found  in  the  proper  table 
in  Part  I  of  the  code  book. 

Question.  How  would  you  proceed  to  find  signals  representing 
the  message  to  be  sent? 

Answer.  I  would  look  for  the  message  under  its  most  impor- 
tant word,  and  if  found  there  I  would  take  the  letters  to  the 
left  and  abreast  the  message  as  the  signal.  For  instance,  in 
the  message  "  I  shall  stand  about  to  see  if  I  can  pick  up  any- 
thing from  the  wreck,"  the  most  important  word  is  "  wreck," 
and  under  it  I  would  find  the  message,  and  abreast  the  latter 
the  letters  ZIT,  which  would  be  the  proper  signal. 

Question.  Suppose  the  word  you  selected  as  the  most  impor- 
tant did  not  give  you  the  information  desired,  what  would  you 
do? 

Answer.  I  would  look  for  it  under  some  other  word  that  I 
considered  important,  such  as  "pick"  or  "stand."  It  would 
be  useless  to  look  for  it  under  such  words  as  "  if."  "  to," 
"  about,"  "  from,"  etc. 

Question.  Suppose  the  message  is  "Vessel  seriously  damaged; 
want  immediate  assistance  "  and  can  not  be  found  as  a  whole 
under  any  of  its  words,  what  would  you  do? 

Answer.  I  would  look  up  the  signal  for  each  separate  word 
if  necessary. 

Question.  Tell  how  you  would  look  up  the  signal  for  a  word. 

Answer.  I  would  look  through  the  words  at  the  tops  of  the 
pages  in  the  general  vocabulary  until  I  found  the  word  or  the 
word  nearest  to  it  and  would  then  look  down  that  page  until 
the  word  was  found.  Abreast  of  it  to  the  left  would  be  the 
signal. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          237 

Question.  What  is  it  necessary  to  know  in  order  that  signals 
may  be  read  quickly  and  correctly? 

Answer.  It  is  necessary  to  know  the  flags  instantly  and  cor- 
rectly;  to  know  the  kind  of  signal  by  the  hoist;  that  is,  by 
the  number  of  flags  in  it  and  the  upper  flag  (or  the  lower  flag, 
if  the  code  penant)  ;  and,  thirdly,  it  is  necessary  to  know  where 
in  the  code  book  the  meaning  of  each  class  of  signals  may  be 
found. 

Question.  What  are  two-letter  signals? 

Answer.  Urgent  and  important  signals. 

Question.  What  letters  are  used  for  these  signals? 

Answer.  From  AB  to  ZY. 

Question.  Is  the  code  flag  ever  hoisted  over  or  under  two- 
letter  signals;  and  if  so,  does  it  change  their  meanings? 

Answer.  Yes.  It  may  be  hoisted  either  over  or  under  two- 
letter  signals,  and  when  so  hoisted  changes  their  meanings 
entirely. 

Question.  Name  the  kinds  of  signals  which  are  made  with  the 
code  flag  over  two-letter  signals.  3  . 

Answer,.  Latitude  and  longitude,  divisions  of  time  and  of  lati- 
tude and  longitude ;  barometer  and  thermometer  signals. 

Question.  What  kind  of  signals  are  made  with  the  code  flag 
under  two-letter  signals? 

Answer.  Numeral  table  signals. 

Question.  What  are  three-letter  signals? 

Answer.  Compass  signals,  moneys,  weights,  and  measures  sig- 
nals, decimals  and  fractions,  auxiliary  phrases,  and  general 
signals. 

Question.    What  letters  represent  compass  signals? 

Answer.  Prom  ABC  to  AQC  are  compass  signals  in  degrees; 
and  from  ACID  to  AST  are  compass  signals  in  points  and  half 
points. 

Question.  Wrhat  letters  are  used  for  moneys  and  for  weights 
and  measures  signals? 
Answer.    ASU  to  BCN. 

Question.  What  letters  are  used  in  signaling  decimals  and 
fractions  ? 

Answer.  From  BCO  to  BDZ. 

Question.  What  letters  are  used  in  signaling  auxiliary 
phrases? 

Answer.  From  BEA  to  CWT. 


238          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS, 

Question.  Where  are  the  three-letter  general  signals  found? 

Answer.  In  the  general  vocabulary  in  Part  II  of  the  code 
book. 

Question.  Between  what  letters  do  they  occur? 

Answer.  From  CXA  to  ZNT. 

Question.  Is  the  code  flag  ever  hoisted  over  or  under  a  three- 
letter  signal? 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  What  signals  are  made  with  four-letter  hoists? 

Answer.  Geographical  signals,  alphabetical  spelling  table,  and 
vessels'  numbers. 

Question.  How  are  these  signals  distinguished  from  one 
another? 

Answer.  By  the  upper  flag  of  the  hoist. 

Question.  What  flag  is  uppermost  in  geographical  signals? 

Answer.  Either  of  the  swallowtails,  A  or  B. 

Question.  What  flag  is  uppermost  in  alphabetical  spelling 
table  signals? 

Answer.  The  pennant  C. 

Question.  What  flag  is  uppermost  in  vessels'  numbers? 

Answer.  The  pennant  G  for  names  of  Government  vessels; 
any  square  flag  for  names  of  merchant  vessels. 

Question.  At  the  present  time  what  square  flags  are  used  for 
the  upper  flag  of  the  hoist  for  American  merchant  vessels  and 
yachts? 

Answer.  The  letters  H,  J,  K,  and  L. 

Question.  Where  would  you  look  for  an  American  merchant 
vessel's  number  if  her  name  is  known? 

Answer.  I  would  look  for  her  official  number  in  the  latest 
"  List  of  Merchant  Vessels  of  the  United  States,"  in  which  the 
names  of  American  merchant  vessels  are  arranged  alphabeti- 
cally under  the  headings :  Sailing,  steam,  and  unrigged  vessels. 

Question.  If  an  American  merchant  vessel's  number  only  is 
known,  \vhere  would  you  look  for  her  name? 

Answer.  In  the  latest  edition  of  the  "  Seagoing  Vessels  of 
the  United  States,"  in  which  the  signal  letters  are  arranged 
alphabetically  under  the  headings :  "  Seagoing  vessels "  and 
"  Yachts." 

Question.  Where  would  you  look  for  the  signal  letters  of 
vessels  belonging  to  the  Government  of  the  United  States? 

Answer.  In  the  latest  edition  of  "  Seagoing  Vessels  of  the 
United  States." 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          239 

Question.  What  vessels  of  the  United  States  Government  have 
signal  letters  assigned  them? 

Answer.  Vessels  of  the  Navy;  of  the  Quartermaster  Corps 
and  of  the  Engineer  Corps  of  the  Army ;  of  the  Coast  Guard; 
of  the  Lighthouse  Service ;  of  the  Coast  and  Geodetic  Survey ; 
of  the  Bureau  of  Fisheries ;  and  of  the  Bureau  of  Navigation 
of  the  Department  of  Commerce. 

Question.  Since  all  of  these  vessels  have  the  pennant  G  for 
the  upper  flag  of  the  hoist,  how  can  you  tell  at  a  glance  to 
which  service  a  vessel  belongs? 

Answer.  By  the  second  or  third  flag  in  the  hoist. 
Question.  What  flag  have  vessels  of  the  Navy  for  the  second 
letter  of  the  hoist? 
Answer.  Either  the  flags  Q,  or  R. 

Question.  What  flag  have  vessels  of  the  Army  for  the  second 
letter  of  the  hoist? 

Answer.  They  have  the  letter  W. 

Question.  What  flag  have  all  other  Government  vessels  for 
the  second  letter  of  the  hoist? 
Answer.  They  have  the  letter  V. 

Question.  How  can  you  distinguish  a  vessel  of  the  Coast 
Guard  by  her  signal  letters? 

Answer.  She  has  for  the  third  letter  of  the  hoist  following 
GV  some  letter  from  B  to  H,  both  inclusive. 

Question.  Where  would  you  look  for  the  radio  call  letters 
of  vessels,  both  Government  and  merchant,  of  the  United  States? 
Answrer.  In  the  publication  "  Seagoing  Vessels  of  the  United 
States." 

Question.  How  many  geographical  lists  are  in  the  code  book? 
Answer.  Two.     One  in  Part  I ;  the  other  in  Part  II. 
Question.  When  is  each  used? 

Answer.  When  reading  a  geographical  signal  which  has  been 
made,  the  list  in  Part  I  is  used,  because  the  signal  letters  are 
there  arranged  alphabetically  and  easily  found.  When  signaling 
the  name  of  a  place  the  list  in  Part  II  is  used,  because  there 
the  names  of  the  places  are  arranged  alphabetically. 

Question.  What  kind  of  letters  are  used  in  alphabetical  spell- 
ing table  signals? 

Answer.  Consonants  only  are  used. 

Question.  How  many  letters  does  any  signal  in  the  alpha- 
betical spelling  table  represent? 

Answer.  Each  signal  represents  either  two  or  three  letters, 
which  are  to  be  used  in  forming  a  word. 


240          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  Where  would  you  find  the  code  signal  for  one 
letter? 

Answer.  In  the  general  vocabulary  in  Part  II  of  the  code 
book.  It  would  be  a  three-letter  signal. 

Question.  How  are  words  or  names  not  found  in  the  general 
vocabulary  sent  by  signals? 

Answer.  They  are  spelled  out. 

.      Question.  In  how  many  ways  can  words  be  spelled  out  by 
signals? 

Answer.  In  two  ways.  They  can  be  spelled  out  either  by  the 
alphabetical  spelling  table,  which  is  the  old  method,  or  by  the 
new  method,  in  which  the  alphabetical  signals  described  on 
page  13  of  the  code  book  are  used. 

Question.  In  how  many  ways  may  numbers  be  sent  by  the 
International  Code? 

Answer.  In  two  ways.  They  can  be  sent  either  by  the  nu- 
meral table  on  page  33  or  by  the  alternative  method  explained 
on  page  32  of  the  code  book. 

Question.  Suppose  you  saw  a  ship  standing  into  danger,  what 
signal  would  you  hoist? 

Answer.  JD. 

Question.  What  next  would  you  do? 

Answer.  After  she  has  acknowledged  that  signal  or  altered 
her  course  in  obedience  to  it,  I  would  hoist  one  of  the  signals 
on  page  39  (Danger  and  Distress  Signals),  directing  her  how 
to  steer  to  avoid  the  danger. 

Question.  Suppose  you  set  the  signal  "  Steer  more  to  star- 
board (or  to  port),"  how  long  do  you  keep  it  flying? 

Answer.  Until  her  course  is  sufficiently  altered  to  clear  the 
danger,  when  I  would  haul  the  signal  down. 

Question.  If  a  vessel  is  so  far  away  that  the  colors  of  the 
flags  of  the  International  Oode  can  not  be  distinguished,  what 
kind  of  signals  would  you  use? 

Answer.  Distant  signals. 

Question.  Under  what  other  conditions  would  distant  signals 
be  used? 

Answer.  In  calms,  when  the  flags  hang  up  and  down,  or  when 
the  wind  is  blowing  toward  or  from  the  observer,  or  when  the 
atmosphere  is  not  clear. 

Question.  How  does  a  ship  ordinarily  communicate  by  distant 
signals? 

Answer.  By  hoisting  certain  shapes. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          241 

Question.  What  shapes  are  used? 

Answer.  A  cone,  point  upward. 

A  ball. 

A  cone,  point  downward. 

A  drum. 

Question.  What  flags  may  be  substituted  for  these  shapes 
when  weather  conditions  are  favorable? 

Answer.  A  square  flag  may  be  substituted  for  the  cone, 
point  upward. 

A  pennant,  for  the  cone,  point  downward. 

A  pennant,  with  the  fly  tied  to  the  halyards,  or  a  wheft,  for 
the  drum.  A  wheft  is  any  flag  tied  in  the  center. 

There  is  no  flag  substitute  for  the  ball. 

Question.  Is  there  a  table  of  urgent  and  important  distant 
signals  in  the  code  book? 

Answer.  Yes;  the  table  of  "Special  Distant  Signals,"  begin- 
ning on  page  583. 

Question.  What  are  the  International  Signals  of  Distress  to 
be  used  in  the  daytime? 

Answer.  A  gun  or  other  explosive  signal  fired  at  intervals  of 
about  a  minute. 

The  International  Code  Signal  of  Distress  indicated  by  NC. 

The  distant  signal,  consisting  of  a  square  flag,  having  either 
above  or  below  it  a  ball  or  anything  resembling  a  ball. 

A  continuous  sounding  with  any  fog-signal  apparatus. 

The  distant  signal,  consisting  of  a  cone,  point  upward,  having 
either  above  it  or  below  it  a  ball  or  anything  resembling  a  ball. 
(This  is  purely  a  code  signal  and  not  one  of  the  signals  of 
distress  given  in  the  rules  of  the  road,  the  needless  exhibition 
of  which  entails  penalties  upon  the  master  of  the  vessel  dis- 
playing it.) 

Question.  What  are  the  International  Signals  of  Distress  to 
be  used  at  night? 

Answer.  A  gun  or  other  explosive  signal  fired  at  intervals  of 
about  a  minute. 

Flames  on  the  vessel  (as  from  a  burning  tar  barrel,  oil  bar- 
rel, etc.). 

Rockets  or  shells  throwing  stars  of  any  color  or  description, 
fired  one  at  a  time  at  short  intervals. 

A  continuous  sounding  with  any  fog-signal  apparatus. 

Question.  Would  the  ensign  hoisted  union  down  be  considered 
a  distress  signal? 

34079—21 16 


242          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  Yes ;  and  when  so  displayed  it  must  be  investigated, 
and  so  must  any  unusual  or  excited  waving  of  the  arms,  flags, 
or  other  articles  not  readily  and  satisfactorily  explainable  as 
other  signals,  particularly  when  made  from  boats  under  cir- 
cumstances in  which  danger  to  the  persons  on  board  is  immi- 
nent or  probable. 

Question.  May  distress  signals  be  used  together? 

Answer.  Yes ;  they  may  be  used  either  together  or  separately. 

Question.  What  are  the  Internal' onal  Signals  for  a  pilot  to 
be  used  in  the  daytime? 

Answer.  The  jack,  hoisted  at  the  fore. 

The  International  Code  pilot  signal  indicated  by  PT. 

The  International  Code  flag  S,  with  or  without  the  code  pen- 
nant over  it. 

The  distant  signal,  consisting  of  a  cone,  point  upward,  having 
above  it  two  balls  or  shapes  resembling  balls. 

Question.  What  are  the  International  Code  signals  for  a  pilot 
to  be  used  at  night? 

Answer.  The  pyrotechnic  light,  commonly  known  as  a  blue 
light,  every  15  minutes. 

A  bright  white  light,  flashed  or  shown  at  short  or  frequent 
intervals  just  above  the  bulwarks  for  about  a  minute  at  a  time. 

RESUSCITATION  OF  THE  APPARENTLY  DROWNED. 

Question.  What  would  you  first  do  in  attempting  to  resus- 
citate an  apparently  drowned  person? 

Answer.  I  would  arouse  the  patient. 

Question.  How  would  you  arouse  the  patient? 

Answer.  I  would  not  move  the  patient  unless  in  danger  of 
freezing;  instantly  expose  the  face  to  the  air,  toward  the  wind, 
if  there  be  any;  wipe  dry  the  mouth  and  nostrils;  rip  the 
clothing  so  as  to  expose  the  chest  and  waist;  give  two  or  three 
quick,  smarting  slaps  on  the  chest  with  the  open  hand. 

Question.  What  do  you  mean  when  you  say  that  you  would 
not  move  the  patient  unless  he  was  in  danger  of  freezing? 

Answer.  I  mean  that  I  would  not  waste  time  by  moving  him, 
to  a  distance  or  to  a  place  of  shelter  unless  he  was  in  danger 
of  freezing.  I  would  move  him  a  few  feet  if  necessary  to  get 
him  out  of  the  water  or  to  place  him  so  that  I  could  work  on 
him  to  better  advantage, 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.          243 

Question.  Why  do  you  take  time  trying  to  arouse  him? 

Answer.  Because  this  might  restore  consciousness  and  render 
further  effort  unnecessary. 

Question.  If  the  patient  does  not  revive  under  the  effort  to 
arouse  him,  what  would  you  do? 

Answer.  I  would  expel  the  water  from  the  stomach  and 
chest. 

Question.  How  would  you  expel  the  water  from  the  stomach 
arid  chest? 

Answer.  Separate  the  jaws  and  keep  them  apart  by  placing 
between  the  teeth  a  cork  or  small  bit  of  wood;  turn  the  patient 
on  his  face,  a  large  bundle  of  tightly  rolled  clothing  being  placed 
beneath  the  stomach ;  press  heavily  on  the  back  over  it  for  half 
a  minute,  or  as  long  as  fluids  flow  freely  from  the  mouth. 

Question.  After  expelling  the  water  from  the  stomach  and 
chest,  what  would  you  next  do? 

Answer.  I  would  attempt  to  produce  breathing. 

Question.  What  is  the  first  step  in  the  attempt  to  produce 
breathing? 

Answer.  To  clear  the  mouth  and  throat  of  mucus  by  intro- 
ducing into  the  throat  the  corner  of  a  handkerchief  wrapped 
closely  about  the  forefinger;  this  should  be  done  before  the 
patient  is  turned  on  his  back. 

Question.  What  is  the  second  step? 

Answer.  To  turn  him  on  his  back,  placing  the  roll  of  clothing 
so  as  to  raise  the  pit  of  the  stomach  above  the  level  of  the  rest 
of  the  body. 

Question.  What  is  done  with  the  tongue? 

Answer.  When  the  mouth  and  throat  are  cleared  of  mucus,  an 
assistant  with  a  handkerchief  or  piece  of  dry  cloth  draws  the 
tip  of  the  tongue  out  of  one  corner  of  the  mouth  and  keeps  it 
projecting  a  little  beyond  the  lips. 

Question.  What  is  the  purpose  of  this? 

Answer.  To  prevent  the  tongue  falling  back  and  choking  the 
entrance  to  the  windpipe,  which  would  prevent  breathing. 

Question.  What  should  be  done  with  the  patient's  arms? 

Answer.  An  assistant  should  grasp  them  just  below  the 
elbows  and  draw  them  steadily  upward  by  the  sides  of  the 
patient's  head  to  the  ground,  the  hands  nearly  meeting. 

Question.  What  is  the  purpose  of  this? 

Answer.  It  is  to  enlarge  the  capacity  of  the  chest  and  induce 
inspiration. 


244          INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  All  these  things  are  being  done  as  quickly  as  possi- 
ble: is  anything  else  being  done  at  the  same  time? 

Answer.  Yes;  a  third  assistant  takes  position  astride  the 
patient's  body,  with  his  elbows  resting  upon  his  own  knees,  his 
luiiKls  extended  ready  for  action. 

Question.  What  is  done  next? 

Answer.  The  assistant  at  the  head  will  turn  the  patient's 
arms  down  to  the  sides  of  the  body,  the  assistant  holding  the 
tongue  changing  hands  if  necessary  to  let  the  arms  pass.  Just 
before  the  patient's  hands  reach  the  ground,  the  man  astride 
the  body  will  grasp  the  body  with  his  hands,  the  balls  of  his 
thumbs  resting  on  either  side  of  the  pit  of  the  stomach,  the 
fingers  falling  into  the  grooves  between  the  short  ribs. 

Question.  What  does  the  man  astride  the  body  do  as  th« 
patient's  hands  touch  the  ground? 

Answer.  Using  his  knees  as  a  pivot,  he  will,  at  the  moment 
the  patient's  hands  touch  the  ground,  throw,  not  too  suddenly, 
all  his  weight  forward  on  his  hands,  and  at  the  same  time 
squeeze  the  waist  between  them  as  if  he  wished  to  force  any- 
thing in  the  chest  upward  out  of  the  mouth ;  he  will  deepen  the 
pressure  while  he  slowly  counts  one,  two,  three,  four,  about 
2  to  2£  seconds,  then  suddenly  let  go  with  a  final  push,  which 
will  spring1  him  back  to  his  first  position. 

Question.  What  does  this  do? 

Answer.  This  completes  expiration. 

Question.  What  care  should  be  taken  in  placing  the  roll  of 
clothing  under  the  patient's  back? 

Answer.  Care  should  be  taken  that  it  is  so  placed  as  not  to 
project  beyond  the  sides  of  the  body  and  interfere  with  the 
patient's  arms  touching  the  ground  when  turned  down  to  the 
sides  of  the  body,  and  that  it  raises  the  pit  of  the  stomach 
above  the  level  of  the  rest  of  the  body. 

Question.  Where  is  the  pit  of  the  stomach? 

Answer.  It  is  the  angle  formed  by  the  short  ribs  just  below 
the  lower  end  of  the  breastbone. 

Question.  How  should  the  arms  be  drawn  upward  and  back- 
ward ? 

Answer.  They  should  describe  an  arc  of  a  circle  in  a  plane 
parallel  to  the  body,  and  should  be  kept  extended  at  all  times  so 
as  to  enlarge  the  capacity  of  the  chest  as  much  as  possible. 

Question.  Of  what  does  breathing  consist? 

Answer.  Of  the  inspiration  and  expiration  of  breath. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST   GUARD  STATIONS.          245 

Question.  What  is  inspiration? 

Answer.  It  is  the  drawing  of  air  into  the  lungs,  and  is  ac- 
complished by  the  elevation  of  the  chest  walls. 

Question.  What  is  expiration? 

Answer.  It  is  the  act  or  process  of  breathing  out,  or  forcing 
air  from  the  lungs  through  the  nose  or  mouth.  It  is  the  oppo- 
site of  inspiration. 

Question.  What  is  respiration? 

Answer.  It  is  the  act  of  breathing,  and  consists  of  taking 
air  into  and  forcing  it  out  from  the  lungs.  It  is  the  combina- 
tion of  inspiration  and  expiration. 

Question.  How  should  pressure  be  applied  over  the  lower 
ribs  in  producing  expiration? 

Answer.  It  should  be  applied  inward  and  upward  and  riot 
downward. 

Question.  Will  it  always  be  found  necessary  to  change  hands 
in  holding  the  tongue? 

Answer.  No ;  after  practice  it  will  not  be  necessary.  The 
tongue  must  not  be  released  in  any  event. 

Question.  How  long  an  interval  is  required  for  inspiration 
and  for  expiration? 

Answer.  Prom  2  to  2£  seconds  each. 

Question.  How  often  should  the  movements  for  inspiration 
and  expiration  be  repeated? 

Answer.  The  combined  movements  should  be  repeated  from 
12  to  15  times  in  every  minute. 

Question.  How  would  you  regulate  these  movements? 

Answer.  Either  by  a  watch  or  by  counting  or  by  rny  o\v?i 
inspiration  and  expiration. 

Question.  When  the  man  astride  the  patient's  body  releases 
the  pressure  and  springs  back  to  his  first  position,  what  is  next 
done? 

Answer.  The  man  at  the  patient's  head  again  draws  the  arms 
steadily  upward  to  the  sides  of  the  patient's  head,  as  before, 
the  assistant  holding  the  tongue,  again  changing  hands  to  let 
the  arms  pass  if  necessary,  holding  them  there  from  2  to  2* 
seconds. 

Question.  If  natural  breathing  be  not  restored  after  about 
four  minutes,  what  would  you  do? 

Answer.  If  natural  breathing  be  not  restored  after  a  trial  of 
the  bellows  movement  for  a  space  of  about  four  minutes,  turn 
the  patient  a  second  time  on  the  stomach,  as  directed  in  Rule 


246         INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

II,  rolling  the  body  in  the  opposite  direction  from  that  in  which 
it  was  first  turned,  for  the  purpose  of  freeing  the  air  passages 
from  any  remaining  water. 

Question.  How  long  should  artificial  respiration  be  continued  ? 

Answer.  From  one  to  four  hours,  or  until  the  patient  breathes. 

Question.  What  would  you  do  upon  the  appearance  of  re- 
turning life? 

Answer.  Carefully  aid  the  first  short  gasps  by  artificial  res- 
piration, timed  with  the  patient's  breathing,  until  deepened  into 
full  breaths. 

Question.  In  addition  to  the  artificial  respiration,  what  other 
aids  should  be  applied? 

Answer.  Drying  and  rubbing  should  be  unceasingly  practiced 
from  the  beginning  by  assistants,  taking  care  not  to  interfere 
with  the  means  employed  to  produce  breathing. 

Question.  How  should  the  limbs  of  the  patient  be  rubbed? 

Answer.  Always  in  an  upwrard  direction  toward  the  body, 
with  firm  grasping  pressure  and  energy,  using  the  bare  hands, 
dry  flannels,  or  handkerchiefs,  continuing  the  friction  under 
blankets  or  over  dry  clothing. 

Question.  How  may  the  warmth  of  the  body  be  promoted? 

Answer.  By  the  application  of  hot  flannels  to  the  stomach 
and  armpits,  bottles  or  bladders  of  hot  water,  heated  bricks, 
etc.,  to  the  limbs  and  soles  of  the  feet. 

Question.  How  should  a  child  or  delicate  person  be  handled? 

Answer.  More  gently  than  a  robust  patient. 

Question.  What  aftertreatment  should  be  employed  exter- 
nally? 

Answer.  As  soon  as  breathing  is  established  the  patient 
should  be  stripped  of  all  wet  clothing,  wrapped  in  blankets  only, 
put  to  bed  comfortably  warm,  but  with  a  free  circulation  of 
fresh  air,  and  left  to  perfect  rest. 

Question.  What  after-treatment  should  be  given  internally? 

Answer.  Give  aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia,  or  hot  tea  or 
coffee,  in  doses  of  a  teaspooriful  to  a  tablespoonful,  according 
to  the  weight  of  the  patient,  or  other  stimulant  at  hand,  every 
10  or  15  minutes  for  the  first  hour,  and  as  often  thereafter  as 
may  seem  expedient. 

Question.  What  danger  is  there  to  the  patient  after  reaction 
is  established? 

Answer.  There  is  great  danger  of  congestion  of  the  lungs,  and 
if  perfect  rest  is  not  maintained  for  at  least  48  hours  it  sonrer 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.         247 

times  occurs  that  the  patient  is  seized  with  great  difficulty  of 
breathing,  and  death  is  liable  to  follow  unless  immediate  relief 
is  afforded. 

Question.  What  would  you  do  in  such  cases? 

Answer.  Apply  a  large  mustard  plaster  over  the  breast.  If 
the  patient  gasps  for  breath  before  the  mustard  takes  effect, 
assist  the  breathing  by  carefully  repeating  the  artificial  respi- 
ration. 

Question.  What  outside  assistance  would  you  call  upon  in 
resuscitating  the  apparently  drowned? 

Answer.  Always  send  for  or  call  a  physician,  if  one  be 
available. 

Question.  If  no  assistance  is  at  hand  and  you  have  to  work 
alone,  what  is  the  first  thing  you  would  do  in  attempting  to 
resuscitate  an  apparently  drowned  person? 

Answer.  I  would  arouse  the  patient  as  prescribed  in  Rule  I. 

Question.  What  would  you  next  do? 

Answer.  I  would  expel  the  water  from  the  stomach  and  chest 
as  prescribed  in  Rule  II. 

Question.  After  expelling  the  water  from  the  stomach  and 
chest  what  would  you  do  before  attempting  artificial  respiration? 

Answer.  I  would  clear  the  mouth  and  throat  of  mucus,  as 
directed  in  Rule  III,  and  turn  the  patient  on  his  back,  the  bundle 
of  clothing  being  placed  so  as  to  raise  the  pit  of  the  stomach 
above  the  level  of  the  rest  of  the  body.  Draw  the  tip  of  the 
tongue  out  of  one  corner  of  the  mouth,  as  directed  in  Rule  III. 
If  the  lower  jaw  be  lifted,  the  teeth  may  be  made  to  retain  the 
tongue  in  place.  It  may  be  necessary  to  pass  a  handkerchief 
under  the  chin  and  tie  it  over  the  head  to  keep  the  tongue 
protruded. 

Question.  How  would  you  produce  artificial  respiration  work- 
ing alone? 

Answer.  Having  secured  the  tongue,  I  would  take  position 
astride  the  patient;  grasp  the  arms  just  below  the  elbows  and 
raise  them  steadily  upward  by  the  sides  of  the  patient's  head 
to  the  ground,  holding  them  there  from  2  to  2£  seconds;  then 
•  raise  and  lower  the  arms  to  the  sides ;  grasp  the  body  with  the 
hands  and  apply  pressure  over  the  lower  ribs  from  2  to  2£ 
seconds  as  directed  in  Rule  III.  Repeat  these  movements  de- 
liberately and  perseveringly  12  to  15  times  in  every  minute. 

Question.  If  natural  breathing  is  not  restored  after  a  space  of 
about. four  minutes,  what  would  you  do? 


248        INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  Turn  the  patient  a  second  time  on  his  stomach,  as 
directed  in  Rule  II,  for  the  purpose  of  freeing  the  air  passages 
of  any  remaining  water. 

Question.  When  working  alone,  how  long  should  artificial 
respiration  be  continued? 

Answer.  From  one  to  four  hours,  or  until  the  patient  breathes. 

Question.  In  practicing  Rule  II  how  would  you  keep  the 
patient's  mouth  out  of  the  sand? 

Answer.  Place  his  face  on  his  .Joreann  so  as  to  keep  the 
mouth  and  nose  free. 

Question.  What  precautions  should  be  taken  to  insure  a  free 
circulation  of  fresh  air? 

Answer.  Prevent  witnesses  crowding  around,  especially  on  the 
weather  side  of  the  patient. 

Question.  What  should  be  taken  from  the  station  when  pro- 
ceeding to  the  place  where  an  apparently  drowned  person  is? 

Answer.  Medicine  chest,  roll,  piece  of  wood  with  lanyard  at- 
tached, hot-water  bottles,  flannel,  handkerchief,  blanket,  bricks. 
and  bucket  of  hot  water  if  the  place  is  near. 

Question.  Where  should  these  articles  be  kept? 

Answer.  In  a  handy  place,  neatly  stowed,  where  they  would 
be  instantly  accessible  at  all  times. 

Question.  Give  Rule  I  for  resuscitating  the  apparently 
drowned. 

Answer.  ( See  directions  for  restoring  the  apparently  drowned.) 

Question.  Give  Rule  II  for  resuscitating  the  apparently 
drowned. 

Answer.  ( See  directions  for  restoring  the  apparently  drowned.) 

Question.  Give  Rule  III  for  resuscitating  the  apparently 
drowned. 

Answer.  ( See  directions  for  restoring  the  apparently  drowned.) 

Question.  Give  Rule  IV  for  resuscitating  the  apparently 
drowned. 

Answer.  ( See  directions  for  restoring  the  apparently  drowned. ) 

Question.  Give  the  rules  for  restoring  the  apparently  drowned 
when  one  person  must  work  alone. 

Answer.  ( See  directions  for  restoring  the  apparently  drowned.') 

SAVING  DROWNING  PERSONS. 

Question.  What  preparation  should  you  make  before  jumping 
in  to  save  a  drowning  person? 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.        249 

Answer.  I  should  divest  myself  as  far  and  as  quickly  as  pos- 
sible of  all  clothing,  tearing  it  off  if  necessary.  If  there  is  not 
time  to  remove  all  of  my  clothing,  I  would  at  least  loosen  the 
feet  of  my  drawers,  if  they  are  tied,  so  they  will  not  fill  with 
water  and  drag  me  down. 

Question.  What  assurance  should  you  give  a  drowning  person 
on  approaching  him? 

Answer.  Assure  him  in  a  loud  voice  that  he  is  safe. 

Question.  Suppose  the  drowning  person  is  struggling,  what 
would  be  your  first  care? 

Answer.  Not  to  get  close  enough  for  him  to  take  hold  of  me, 
as  that  would  be  running  too  great  a  risk,  but  to  keep  off  a 
few  seconds  until  he  gets  quiet. 

Question.  When  he  gets  quiet  what  should  you  do? 

Answer.  Get  close  to  him  and  take  fast  hold  of  the  hair  of 
his  head,  turn  him  as  quickly  as  possible  on  his  back,  and  give 
him  a  sudden  pull  which  will  cause  him  to  float ;  then  I  would 
throw  myself  on  my  back  and  swim,  holding  his  hair  by  both 
hands. 

Question.  What  would  be  the  position,  then,  of  the  person  you 
are  saving  and  of  yourself? 

Answer.  We  would  both  be  on  our  backs,  and  his  back  would 
be  toward  my  stomach. 

Question.  Why  would  you  adopt  this  method? 

Answer.  Because  I  could  get  him  to  safety  by  it  sooner  and 
with  less  danger  than  by  any  other  unaided  method. 

Question.  What  other  advantages  has  this  method? 

Answer.  It  enables  me  to  keep  my  own  head  up  and  his  also, 
and  besides  I  could  float  in  this  position  as  long  as  I  pleased 
or  until  other  assistance  is  at  hand. 

Question.  Is  there  such  a  thing  as  a  death  grasp? 

Answer.  Probably  not;  -but  yet  it  is  dangerous  to  allow  a 
struggling  person  to  take  hold  of  you  in  the  water,  as  both  his 
life  and  yours  might  be  endangered  thereby. 

Question.  What  may  be  necessary  in  order  to  break  the  hold 
of  a  drowning  person? 

Answer.  In  some  cases  it  may  be  necessary  to  stop  his  breath- 
ing by  putting  his  head  under,  by  pinching  his  nose  and  closing 
his  mouth  with  your  hand,  or  by  striking  him  with  your  knee 
;  in  the  pit  of  the  stomach.  These  methods  may  seem  brutal  and 
should  not  be  resorted  to  except  when  necessary  to  save  life. 

Question.  When  is  it  a  mistake  to  try  to  swim  ashore  with  a 
drowning  person? 


250         INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  When  you  have  to  stem  a  strong  outgoing  tide,  or 
when  there  is  a  point  of  safety  which  could  be  reached  with 
less  effort. 

Question.  What  is  the  better  method  in  case  you  can  not  make 
a  point  of  safety? 

Answer.  To  get  on  your  back  and  float  until  assistance  comes. 

Question.  How  may  the  position  of  the  body  of  a  person  which 
has  sunk  to  the  bottom  be  located? 

Answer.  By  the  air  bubbles  wnich  rise  occasionally  to  the 
surface. 

Question.  What  allowance  must  sometimes  be  made  in  locat- 
ing a  body  by  this  means? 

Answer.  An  allowance  for  the  bubbles,  in  coming  to  the  sur- 
face, being  carried  out  of  a  perpendicular  course  by  the  motion 
of  the  water  in  a  tideway  or  stream. 

Question.  How  may  a  body  be  recovered  from  the  bottom? 

Answer.  By  diving  for  it  in  the  direction  indicated  by  the 
bubbles. 

Question.  How  would  you  raise  a  body  from  the  bottom  to 
the  surface? 

Answer.  I  would  seize  the  hair  of  the  head  with  one  hand 
only  and  use  my  other  hand  and  my  feet  in  bringing  the  body 
and  myself  to  the  surface. 

TREATMENT  OF  FEOSTBITE. 

Question.  Into  how  many  degrees  are  the  local  effects  of  cold 
known  as  frostbite  divided? 

Answer.  They  are  usually  divided,  according  to  their  severity, 
into  three  degrees. 

Question.  How  are  these  degrees  distinguished  from  one 
another? 

Answer.  In  the  first  degree  the  affected  part  is  painful  and  the 
skin  is  of  a  dark-red  hue.  In  the  second  degree  the  skin  is 
of  a  bright  red  or  livid  hue  and  blisters  form  on  the  surface. 
In  the  third  degree  the  affected  part  is  pale,  stiff,  and  brittle. 

Question.  What  is  frostbite  of  the  first  degree  commonly 
called  and  among  whom  does  it  chiefly  occur? 

Answer.  The  first  degree  or  condition  is  known  as  chilblain. 
It  occurs*  chiefly  among  children  or  poorly  nourished  persons 
who  are  exposed  to  cold. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.        251 

Question.  What  is  the  effect  of  severe  cold  on  the  blood  ves- 
sels and  tissues  of  the  body? 

Answer.  Severe  cold  causes  constriction  of  the  blood  vessels, 
and  if  continued  long  so  that  the  blood  is  completely  cut  off 
from  the  part  for  a  considerable  time  the  tissues  die. 

Question.  Describe  the  effects  the  application  of  heat  has  on 
each  of  these  cases? 

Answer.  If  heat  be  applied  to  a  part  that  has  been  slightly 
affected  (frostbite,  first  degree),  a  sensation  of  itching  and 
tingling  is  experienced ;  if  applied  to  frostbites  of  the  second 
degree,  it  causes  pain  and  swelling  and  the  skin  may  peel  off 
and  leave  a  raw  surface.  In  frostbites  of  the  third  degree  no 
reaction  takes  place  upon  the  application  of  heat  if  the  part 
is  dead.  The  dead  portion  turns  black  arid  a  line  of  demarca- 
tion appears  between  it  and  the  living  tissue. 

Question.  What  is  the  danger  of  applying  heat  suddenly  to  a 
badly  frozen  part  of  the  body? 

Answer.  The  liability  of  gangrene  (death  of  the  tissue)  is 
increased  on  account  of  the  intense  reaction  that  takes  place  in 
the  tissue  that  is  still  alive. 

Question.  What  results  when  the  whole  body  is  exposed  to 
severe  cold? 

Answer.  The  individual  becomes  benumbed,  exertion  is  diffi- 
cult, and  drowsiness  which  can  not  be  resisted  overtakes  him : 
.the  eyesight  fails ;  he  totters  as  he  walks,  and  then  falls  and 
becomes  unconscious. 

Question.  What  precautions  should  be  taken  to  protect  the 
body  when  exposed  to  severe  cold? 

Answer.  The  body  should  be  warmly  clad  and  all  parts  of  it 
kept  as  dry  as  possible,  as  dampness  increases  the  tendency  to 
frostbite.  The  ears  and  face,  except  the  eyes,  nose,  and  mouth 
should  be  well  covered,  especially  if  snow  is  falling  or  a  brisk 
wind  is  blowing.  The  hands  should  also  be  protected ;  fur- 
lined  gloves  are  the  best  protection,  as  they  are  warmer  than 
woolen  ones. 

Question.  What  special  care  should  be  taken  of  the  feet? 

Answer.  The  shoes  should  be  large.  In  extreme  weather,  in 
case  of  exposure,  it  is  well  to  wear  two  pairs  of  stockings,  a 
woolen  pair  over  a  cotton  pair.  The  feet  should  be  washed 
each  day  and  a  small  quantity  of  oil  rubbed  into  them.  A 
large  quantity  of  oil  is  harmful,  and  only  such  quantity  should 


252        INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

be  used  as  can  be  rubbed  in  well,  leaving  a  dry  surface  when 
the  rubbing  is  completed.  Clean  stockings  should  be  put  on 
each  day.  Wet  stockings  should  be  changed  to  dry  ones  when- 
ever practicable.  The  feet  are  less  liable  to  become  frost- 
bitten if  the  person  keeps  moving.  If  he  has  to  stand  in  one 
place,  the  shoe  strings  should  be  loosened. 

Question.  What  is  the  general  rule  for  the  treatment  of  frost- 
bites if  a  physician  is  present? 

Answer.  To  follow  his  instructions. 

Question.  In  case  no  physician  is  present,  what  treatment 
should  be  given  in  the  case  of  frostbite  of  the  first  degree? 

Answer.  The  part  should  be  rubbed  gently  and  cloths  wrung 
out  of  cold,  fresh  water  applied.  Snow  may  be  rubbed  on  the 
affected  part,  but  it  is  not  as  efficient  as  cold  cloths.  The  rub- 
bing and  the  applications  should  alternate,  rubbing  a  few  min- 
utes and  then  applying  cloths  for  a  few  minutes.  The  tempera- 
ture of  the  water  in  which  the  cloths  are  soaked  should  be 
raised  gradually  until  it  is  lukewarm. 

Question.  In  the  case  of  frostbite  of  the  second  degree? 

Answer.  Rubbing  should  not  be  resorted  to,  as  there  is  danger 
of  increasing  the  ill  effects.  Cold  cloths  should  be  applied, 
but  the  cold  treatment  must  not  be  kept  up  too  long,  as  cold 
prolongs  the  cause  of  the  injury.  The  temperature  of  the 
water  should  be  raised  gradually  a  degree  or .  two  every  few 
minutes,  using  fresh  cloths  each  time  the  temperature  of  the 
water  is  changed. 

Question.  What  should  be  the  temperature  of  the  place  where 
treatment  is  given? 

Answer.  It  should  be  remembered,  that  reaction  takes  place 
naturally  as  soon  as  the  person  is  taken  indoors  out  of  the  cold, 
even  if  he  be  treated  in  a  cold  room,  and  the  object  of  treat- 
ment is  to  prevent  this  reaction  from  taking  place  too  rapidly 
and  at  the  same  time  not  to  retard  unduly  the  restoration  of 
vitality. 

Question.  What  do  you  understand  by  the  term  "  reaction  " 
in  cases  of  frostbite? 

Answer.  The  return  of  blood  to  the  part,  restoring  circulation, 
sensation,  and  function. 

Question.  How  can  you  tell  when  reaction  has  set  in  ? 

Answer.  The  affected  area  begins  to  tingle  and  burn;  the 
blood  vessels  to  dilate,  possibly  causing  swelling  of  the  part; 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.        253 

normal  color  returns;  more  than  likely  there  will  be  intense 
pain. 

Question.  What  treatment  is  prescribed  for  frostbite  of  the 
third  degree? 

Answer.  The  same  method  should  be  followed  in  order  to 
brincr  about  a  reaction  as  in  frostbite  of  the  second  degree;  reac- 
tion, however,  will  not  happen  in  a  part  that  is  dead,  but  the 
adjacent  living  tissue  will  react,  and  a  red  line  will  form  be- 
tween it  and  the  dead  portion. 

Question.  In  what  cases  is  the  above  treatment  unnecessary? 

Answer.  In  cases  where  reaction  has  already  taken  place 
when  the  person  is  first  seen. 

Question.  What  treatment  should  be  followed  after  reaction 
has  taken  place? 

Answer.  After  reaction  has  occurred  the  patient  should  be 
moved  into  a  warm  room  and  an  ointment,  composed  of  vaseline 
1  ounce,  camphor  6  grains,  should  be  applied.  The  part  should 
then  be  surrounded  with  absorbent  cotton  or  wrapped  in  flannel 
cloths. 

Question.  In  this  treatment  what  may  be  used  in  place  of 
vaseline  and  camphor? 

Answer.  Boracic  acid  ointment. 

Question.  What  should  be  done  in  case  blisters  have  formed? 

Answer.  They  should  be  pricked  with  a  needle  and  the  water 
allowed  to  flow  out,  but  the  covering  of  the  blisters  should  not 
be  removed. 

Question.  What  should  be  done  in  case  gangrene  has  set  in? 

Answer.  If  gangrene  occurs,  cloths  wet  with  alcohol  placed 
over  the  part  will  prevent  infection  and  hasten  the  separation 
of  the  dead  part  from  the  living  tissue. 

Question.  What  is  gangrene  and  how  can  you  tell  when  it 
has  set  in? 

Answer.  Gangren6  is  mortification  of  a  part  of  the  body, 
caused  by  interference  with  the  local  nutrition.  It  begins  with 
sharp  pains  and  tenderness  of  the  part,  the  pain  partaking  of  a 
severe  burning  character.  At  first  there  is  a  vivid  red  dis- 
coloration, later  turning  to  purple  and  black,  with  green 
splotches.  Swelling  soon  develops.  Disappearance  of  pain  and 
heat  shows  that  the  part  is  dead,  and  a  fetid  odor  is  soon 
noticed. 


254         INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  What  treatment  should  be  given  a  person  suffering 
from  exposure  to  a  low  temperature  or  from  immersion  in  cold 
water  ? 

Answer.  He  should  be  placed  in  a  cold  room  and  artificial 
respiration  practiced  as  in  the  case  of  an  apparently  drowned 
person.  The  extremities  should  be  rubbed  with  a  solution  com- 
posed of  equal  parts  of  alcohol  and  water. 

Question.  How  would  you  proceed  when  he  begins  to  react? 

Answer.  When  the  patient  begins  to  react  the  temperature  of 
Ihe  room  should  be  raised  slowly  and  the  patient  given  hot 
drinks,  such  as  coffee,  tea,  or  chocolate.  If  the  patient  is  unable 
to  swallow,  a  pint  of  hot  coffee  or  tea  should  be  injected  into  the 
rectum. 

Question.  How  long  should  eiforts  to  restore  animation  be 
continued? 

Answer.  For  a  long  period,  as  instances  are  on  record  of  re- 
covery after  several  hours  of  suspended  animation. 

BOAT  SALUTES  AND  BOAT  ETIQUETTE. 

Question.  You  are  in  charge  of  a  pulling  boat.  How  do  you 
salute  a  flag  officer  of  the  Navy  in  another  boat  with  his  Hag 
flying? 

Answer.  Toss  oars ;  stand  up  and  salute  with  hand ;  remain 
at  salute  until  it  is  returned  or  the  flag  officer  has  passed. 

Question.  Who  is  a  flag  officer  of  the  Navy? 

Answer.  Any  officer  of  the  line  of  the  Navy  above  the  rank 
of  captain. 

Question.  Suppose  the  officer  to  be  saluted  is  a  general  officer 
of  the  Army,  with  his  flag  flying,  how  do  you  salute? 

Answer.  The  same  as  for  a  flag  officer  of  the  Navy? 

Question.  Suppose  you  are  in  charge  of  a  laden  or  of  a  tow- 
ing bont,  how  would  you  salute  a  flag  officer? 

Answer.  Make  the  hand  salute  only;  do  not  stand  up. 

Question.  If  you  are  in  charge  of  a  boat  under  sail,  how  do 
you  salute  a  flag  officer? 

Answer.  Make  the  hand  salute  only ;  do  not  stand  up. 

Question.  What  are  the  instructions  for  saluting  when  you 
are  in  charge  of  a  motor  boat? 

Answer.  In  motor  boats  the  engines  are  to  be  stopped  in  all 
rases  in  which  pulling  boats  "  toss  "  or  "lay  on  "  oars. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.         255 

Question.  Suppose  a  flag  officer  does  not  have  his  distinctive 
flag  flying,  how  do  you  salute  him? 

Answer.  Stand  up  and  salute  with  hand ;  do  not  "  toss  "  oars. 

Question.  You  are  in  charge  of  a  pulling  boat.  How  do  you 
salute  a  division  commander  or  a  commanding  officer  ahove  the 
rank  of  lieutenant  who  passes  in  another  boat  with  his  pennant 
flying? 

Answer.  Lay  on  oars ;  stand  up  and  salute  with  hand. 

Question.  Suppose  you  are  in  charge  of  a  laden  or  a  towing 
boat  or  a  boat  under  sail,  how  would  you  salute  the  officer 
mentioned  in  the  preceding  question. 

Answer.  Salute  with  hand ;  do  not  stand  up. 

Question.  Suppose  the  division  commander  or  commanding 
officer  is  not  flying  his  pennant? 

Answer.  Rise  and  salute  with  hand;  do  not  lay  on  oars. 

Question.  How  would  you  salute  a  commander  without  a 
pennant  flying? 

Answer.  Rise  and  salute  with  hand;  do  not  lay  on  oars. 

Question.  How  do  you  salute  commissioned  officers  other  than 
flag  officers  and  commanding  officers  above  the  grade  of  lieu- 
tenant? 

Answer.  Rise  and  salute  with  hand.  If  in  charge  of  a  laden 
or  lowing  boat  or  boat  under  sail,  do  not  stand  up. 

Question.  How  do  you  salute  a  warrant  officer? 

Answer.  Salute  with  hand. 

Question.  You  are  in  charge  of  a  boat  of  any  type,  what  do 
you  do  when  a  commissioned  officer  enters  or  leaves  your  boat? 

Answer.  Rise  and  salute  him. 

Question.  If  you  are  a  passenger  in  the  stern  sheets  of  a 
boat,  do  you  salute  on  these  occasions? 

Answer.  Yes;  rise  and  salute. 

Question.  If  you  are  one  of  the  crew  of  a  boat  but  not  in 
charge,  do  you  salute? 

Answer.  No;  not  unless  detailed  as  boat  keeper. 

Question.  What  salutes  would  you  render  to  foreign  military 
or  naval  officers  or  officers  of  the  United  States  Army,  Navy, 
Marine  Corps,  Public  Health  Service,  Naval  Militia,  or  National 
Guard? 

Answer.  Salute  them  in  the  same  manner  as  Coast  Guard 
officers  of  the  same  rank,  or  flag  officers  of  the  Navy,  if  of  cor- 
responding rank. 


256        INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  What  is  the  "Position  of  attention  "  in  a  bont? 

Answer.  Sitting  erect  on  the  thwarts  or  in  the  stern  sheets. 

Question.  What  do  the  members  of  the  crew  do  when  officers 
enter  or  leave  the  boat? 

Answer.  Sit  at  attention.    This  takes  the  place  of  a  salute. 

Question.  You  are  a  passenger  in  a  running  boat  which  con- 
tains officers,  what  must  you  remember? 

Answer.  To  keep  quiet. 

Question.  You  are  outside  the  -canopy  of  a  motor  boat  thai 
salutes  another  boat  in  passing,  what  do  you  do? 

Answer.  Stand  at  attention  and  face  the  passing  boat. 

Question.  You  are  in  charge  of  a  motor  boat  containing  ar 
officer  for  whom  a  salute  is  being  fired,  what  do  you  do? 

Answer.  Stop  engine  at  first  gun  of  salute;  head  boat  uj 
parallel  to  saluting  ship ;  see  that  men  outside  of  canopy  stanc 
at  attention  and  face  the  saluting  ship. 

Question.  You  are  in  charge  of  a  boat  overhauling  anothei 
boat  that  contains  officers,  what  do  you  do? 

Answer.  Slow  down ;  never  pass  without  asking  permissior 
to  do  so.  Always  give  way  to  a  senior  boat  at  a  landing  plac( 
or  gangway,  unless  otherwise  directed  by  proper  authority. 

Question.  As  warrant  officer  in  charge  of  a  station  boat,  wha 
reply  would  you  give  to  the  quartermaster's  hail  in  going  along 
side  a  Coast  Guard  or  a  naval  ship  at  night? 

Answer.  "  No,  no." 

Question.  Suppose  you  are  passing  such  a  ship  at  night,  whai 
answer  would  you  make  to  the  quartermaster's  hail? 

Answer.  "  Passing." 

Question.  \Vhat  reply  should  an  enlisted  person  give  to  th< 
quartermaster's  hail  in  going  alongside  a  Coast  Guard  or  t 
naval  ship  at  night? 

Answer.  "  Hello." 

Question.  Suppose  there  are  officers  or  officials  in  the  boat 
what  would  be  the  proper  answer  to  the  quartermaster's  hail?  i 

Answer.  It  would  vary  according  to  the  rank  of  the  senio 
officer  or  official  who  may  be  in  the  boat. 

Question.  Suppose  the  President  of  the  United  States  is  ii 
the  boat? 

Answer.  The  answer  would  be  "  United  States." 

Question.  Suppose  the  Secretary  or  an  Assistant  Secretary  o 
the  Treasury  was  in  the  boat? 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.         257 

Answer.  The  answer  would  be  "  Treasury." 

Question.  Suppose  the  commandant  of  the  Coast  Guard  is  in 
le  boat? 

Answer.  The  answer  would  be  "  Coast  Guard." 

Question.  Suppose  other  officers  than  those  above  mentioned 

ere  in  the  boat? 

Answer.  If  the  senior  officer  in  the  boat  was  a  division  com- 

lander,  the  proper  answer  to  the  hail  would  be  " divi- 

•on  " ;  if  chief  of  a  division  at  headquarters,  the  proper  answer 

ould  be  "  Headquarters " ;  if  the  commanding  officer  of  a 
essel,  the  answer  would  be  the  name  of  the  vessel  under  his 
imand ;  any  other  commissioned  officers  would  answer  "  aye, 
ye." 

Question.  You  are  in  charge  of  a  motor  boat  approaching  a 
oast  Guard  or  a  naval  ship  at  night,  or  during  the  day  when 
ag  or  pennant  is  not  displayed  in  the  bow,  or  when  the  rank 
f  the  passengers  can  not  be  distinguished,  how  would  you 
adicate  their  rank? 

Answer.  By  short  blasts  of  the  whistle,  as  follows : 

resident  of  the  United  States 8  blasts. 

ecretary  of  the  Treasury 7  blasts. 

Assistant  Secretary  of  the  Treasury 6  blasts. 

lommandant 5  blasts. 

)ivision  commander  or  other  officer  of  the  rank  of 

commander 4  blasts. 

Commanding  officer  or  officer  of  the  rank  of  lieutenant 

commander :_ 3  blasts. 

•ther  commissioned  officers 2  blasts. 

Vll  other  persons 1  blast. 

Question.  In  what  order  do  officers  and  enlisted  persons  enter 

boat? 
I    Answer.  Juniors  enter  boats  ahead  of  seniors. 

Question.  In  what  order  do  officers  and  enlisted  persons  leave 
a  boat? 

Answer.  Juniors  leave  boats  after  seniors. 

Question.  Being  in  charge  of  a  boat,  what  is  your  duty  while 
waiting  at  a  shore  landing  or  gangway? 

Answer.  Haul  clear  of  shore  landings  and  gangways. 

Question.    What  is  your  duty  in  regard  to  the  boat's  crew? 

Answer.  Not  to  permit  the  crew  to  leave  the  boat  except  by 
proper  authority. 

34079—21 17 


258        INSTBtfCTIOETS  FOB  COAST  GtTAED  STATIONS. 

Question.  How  would  you  render  the  hand  salute? 

Answer.  <1)  Raise  the  right  hand  smartly  until  the  tip  of 
forefinger  touches  the  lower  part  of  the  headdress  above  the 
right  eye,  thumb  and  fingers  extended  and  joined,  palm  to  the 
left,  forearm  inclined  at  about  45°,  hand  and  wrist  straight. 

(2)  The  salute  being  returned,  or  the  officer  passed  and  the 
salute  unobserved,  drop  the  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 

(3)  The  left  hand  is  used  only  when  the  right  hand  is  en- 
gaged. 

(4)  When  saluting,  turn  tbe  head  and  eyes  toward  the  person 
saluted. 

(5)  The  salute  should  be  rendered  at  6  paces  before  pass- 
ing, or  being  passed  by,  an  officer,  unless  the  nearest  point 
reached  be  greater  than  6  paces,  and  not  more  than  30  paces, 
in  which  case  salute  at  the  point  nearest  the  officer. 

Question.  Do  men  who  are  in  military  or  division  formation 
salute,  even  when  they  are  directly  addressed? 

Answer.  No ;  but  if  at  4l  rest,"  they  come  to  attention. 

Question.  What  are  the  instructions  regarding  personal 
salutes  ashore? 

Answer,  (1)  All  salutes  in  passing  or  approaching  are  begun 
first  by  the  junior  at  6  paces  distance  or  at  6  paces  from  the 
nearest  point  of  passing;  no  salutes,  except  as  otherwise  pre- 
scribed, are  made  at  a  greater  distance  than  30  paces. 

(2)  Officers  in  civilian  dress  are  saluted  in  the  same  manner 
as  when  in  uniform. 

(3)  Officers  will  at  all  times  acknowledge  the  salutes  of  en- 
listed men. 

(4)  When  an  officer  enters  a  room  where  there  are  enlisted 
men  "  attention  "  is  called  by  some  one  who  perceives  him ;  then 
all  rise,  remain  standing  at  attention,  uncovered,  and  preserve 
silence  until  the  officer  leaves  the  room ;  if  at  meals,  they  will 
not  rise. 

(5)  An  enlisted  man,  being  seated  and  without  particular 
occupation,  rises  on  the  approach  of  an  officer,  faces  toward  him, 
and  salutes;  if  standing,  he  faces  toward  the  officer  for  the 
same  purpose.     If  the  parties  remain  in  the  same  place  or  on 
the  same  ground,  such  compliments  need  not  be  repeated. 

(6)  If  actually  at  work,  men  do  not  cease  their  occupation  to 
salute  an  officer  unless  addressed  by  him. 

Question.  What  about  saluting  officers  not  attached  to  your 
own  unit? 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS.        259 

Answer.  Men  at  all  times  in  all  situations  pay  the  same 
compliments  to  officers  of  the  Army,  Navy,  and  Marine  Corps, 
to  officers  of  the  volunteers  and  militia  in  the  service  of  the 
United  States,  and  to  officers  of  foreign  services  as  they  do  to 
the  officers  of  the  ship  or  command  to  which  they  belong. 

Question*  What  is  the  regulation  in  regard  to  the  use  of  the 
ship's  gangway  when  coming  on  hoard? 

Answer.  The  starboard  gangway  shall  be  used  by  all  com- 
missioned officers  and  their  visitors ;  the  port  gangway  shall  be 
used  by  all  other  persons.  If  the  construction  of  a  ship  or 
other  circumstances  make  a  change  in  this  rule  expedient,  the 
change  may  be  made  at  the  discretion  of  the  commanding 
officer. 

Question.  Is  there  any  exception  to  this  rule? 

Answer.  Yes;  in  heavy  weather  the  lee  gangway  shall  be 
used. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  the  "  lee  gangway  "  ? 

Answer.  The  lee  side  of  a  vessel  is  the  side  opposite  to  that 
against  which  the  wind  blows ;  the  latter  is  called  the  weather 
side. 

Question.  What  permission  must  you  obtain  before  leaving 
the  ship  at  any  time? 

Answer.  Permission  from  the  officer  of  the  deck  to  leave  the 
ship. 

Question.  In  going  on  board  ship,  what  report  do  you  make 
to  the  officer  of  the  deck? 

Answer.  After  saluting  the  colors  and  then  the  officer  of  the 
deck,  report,  "  I  request  your  permission  to  come  on  board, 
sir." 

Question.  What  report  on  leaving  the  ship? 

Answer.  "  I  request  your  permission  to  leave  the  ship,  sir." 

Question.  Do  you  always  salute  the  officer  of  the  deck? 

Answer.  Yes ;  always  salute  when  addressing,  or  being  ad- 
dressed by,  the  officer  of  the  deck,  or  any  other  officer. 

Question.  When  you  receive  an  order  from  an  officer,  what 
is  the  proper  reply  to  make? 

Answer.  The  reply,  "Aye,  aye,  sir." 

Question.  What  is  the  meaning  of  "Aye,  aye,  sir"? 

Answer.  The  order  is  understood  and  will  be  obeyed. 

Question.  What  expressions  should  be  avoided  in  replying  to 
an  order  received  from  a  senior? 


260        INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  The  expressions  "Very  good,  sir,"  or  "  Very  well, 
sir."  These  expressions,  although  too  often  used  by  enlisted 
men  in  response  to  an  order  from  an  officer,  do  not  convey  the 
meaning  given  by  the  expression  "Aye,  aye,  sir,"  which  is  the 
answer  that  a  subordinate  has  always  given  in  response  to  an 
order  from  a  senior. 


• 

ARTICLES  IN  COAST  GUARD  REGULATIONS  RELATIVE 
TO  STATIONS. 


Articles. 

Abuses,    correction   of 1906—2 

Allotments i 551-556 

Appointment,  district  superintendent . 209-212 

Appointment,     keeper 213,  430 1-4304  (b) 

Beach-apparatus  drill 1858 

Bedding,  care  of 1761 

Boards',  investigation  loss  of  life 2373-2379 

Boards  of  survey 2306-d-3,  2511-2526 

Boats 1707-1713 

Boat  courtesies 3062-3064 

Boat  drill .—         1852 

Boat  flags : 3093 

Boat  hails  and  answers__  3051 

Boat  salutes 3052-3061 

Books  and  blanks : 3020 

Care  of  stations 2659-2660 

Cartage,  freight,   etc 3344 

Charges  and  specifications 2011-2020 

Clothing,  credit  for 541-545 

Colors 3065^-1 

Commuted    rations 531-532 

Complaints - 1915-1917 

Conduct   grades 759 

Correspondence 3201-3242 

Crews'  quarters 2727-2 

Daily  routine,  reports,  etc 1771 

Deaths  and   burials 2851-2856 

Desertions- , 399-417 

Discharges __. 369-386 

Discipline 1901-1911 

Drills  and  exercises 1801-d-1802 

Emergent   expenditures 3341-4,  3341-6 

Enforcement  of  laws 3501-3504 

Enlisted  persons,  duties  of 1589 

Enlistments 1 301-323,  341-346 

Enlistment  contract  and  record ._  349-354 

Fire  drill 1848 

Flags,  boat 3093 

Flags,   sizes   of 3106 

Flag   ceremonies 3095-3096 

Funeral    ceremonies 3131-3138 

Gasoline 3317-2 

General  muster 1818-c 


261 


262  ARTICLES  RELATIVE  TO  STATIONS. 

Articles. 

Gratuities 546 

Holidays  and  anniversaries 8121-3122 

Imprisonment 2251-2255 

Inflammables 1703 

Invoices 3375-3380 

Keys,  custodian  of 1729 

Key    posts 1760 

Laws,  enforcement  of '. 3501-3504 

Leaves  of  absence 701-743 

Letters,    forms    of 3204-3207.  3218-2 

Liberty 705-784 

Lights 1699 

Loss  of  life,  investigation  of 2373-2379 

Medals    2691 

Mess   bill 1 2720-2,  272.1 

Mess    treasurer '. 2713-2 

Messing    hours 2732-2 

Mineral  oils .     3317-2 

Oath  of  office , 221-224 

Offenses "J , 1941-2001 

Offenses,  reports  of 1921-1933 

Officers  in  charge,  duties  of . 1415-1548 

Orders,  procedure  under 1631-1653 

Painting 2677 

Pay  and  allowances 501-546 

Pay   rolls 561-578 

Pay  rolls  and  pay  vouchers 579-583 

Property,   transfer  4>f 3375-3380 

Proposals  3303-3309 

Punishments 2031-2043 

Punishments,  limitations   to 2221-2224 

Quarters,  crews'- 2727-2 

Ratings,  warrant  officers' , ; 355,  356 

Ratings,   petty   officers' 357-365 

Rations,   commuted 531-532 

Redress    of   wrongs 1935,  1936 

Reenlistments , 324-340 

Regulations,  observance  of 1601 

Repairs  in  general 2667-2676 

Reports  and   returns 3401-3419 

Requisitions    - 3311,  3315 

Resignations 270-272 

Resuscitation  drill 1856-1857 

Retirements / 2SO-282 

Salutes,    personal : 3043-3048 

Sanitary  measures , 1697 

Schedule  of  expenditures 1 3343-3 

Sickness  and  medical  treatment 3801-3806 

Signal   drill , 1853-1855 

Smoking-     -  - 1705 

"  Star-Spangled    Banner  " _ 

Stations,   care  of 2659,2660 

Stations  and  districts 41,  42 


TO  Sf ATlOtfg.  268 

Articles. 

Station    log 1690-1695 

Stationery ______^ 3321 

Telegrams ^_^___^ - 3231-3234,  2T289-3242 

Transfers »..— ~ __^ , 389-395 

Transfer  of  property * ^ ^_^__...-, 3375-3380 

Travel  expense „ ^^ , * 591-605 

Uniforms _  2901-2937 

Vouchers    _— 3351-3372 

Warrant  officers,  appointment  of 213 

Warrant  officers,  how  addressed 811 

Watch  and  patrol  bill 1751-2 


INDEX. 


Accidents  to  buildings,  boats,  or  equipments  to  be  re-  Articles. 

ported 5 

Apparatus,  handling  of,  by  strangers 11 

Assistance  at  wrecks,  employment  of 6 

Beach  apparatus  drills 371  et  seq. 

Beach  cart,  how  to  load . 401-402 

Boarding  of  vessels  stranded  or  afloat  in  a  heavy  sea —          251 
Boat  drill : 

explanation  and  purposes  of  special  commands 

general  instructions  „ 211-215 

going  alongside  vessel,  official  occasion 222  (3) 

leaving  a  station  for  drill  or  service 222  (1) 

leaving  a  vessel  after  official  visit 222  (4) 

leaving  a  vessel  for  the  beach . 222  (2) 

self-bailing  surfboat  at  station  with  inclined  launch- 
ing ways * 224 

self -bailing  surfboat  on  boat  wagon 218-222 

under  sail  —_ : - 226-231 

motor  lifeboat . : 235 

general  rules  for___ 242 

to  douse  sail 241 

to  get  underway  from  heave  to 239 

to  heave  to 238 

to  reef  sail 240 

to  tack 236 

to  wear ' 237 

Boats: 

brasswork  of 173 

classes  of ,-,          140 

equipment  for r 161-165 

general  instructions  regarding 141-150 

marking  of 172 

painting  of •__,. .          171 


26$  INDEX. 

Articles*. 

Boats  in  a  surf,  management  of 243 

Buildings : 

floors,  care  of 125 

gutters  and  down  spouts,  painting  of . 128 

painting 121-122 

plastered  walls,  preparation  of 132-133 

preparation  of  work  for  painting. 130 

puttying___ i 131 

repainting 

scrubbing  and  cleaning. 129 

shingles,  treatment  of 

whitewash,  preparation  of_ 126 

windowsj  care  of 127 

Care  and  preservation  of  property .  91  et  seq. 

Crew  to  reside  at  station 80 

Drills,  when  held__ 191-197 

Drogue,  or  drag . 245-247 

Drowned  persons : 

care  of  bodies  of 43 

description  of,  entered  in  log_ —_ 43 

property  of,  recovered 44 

Dutiable  merchandise,  custody  of 1 25-27 

Enlisted  men : 

how  addressed 

not  required  to  perform  personal  services 15 

Equipment  and  supplies  transferred,  invoices  of 10 

Equipment,  transfer  of 10 

Ether,  use  of ia6 

Fire  drill 201-206 

Flashing  light  signals 301-302 

night  practice  in 303 

standards  of  proficiency  and  expertness 304 

Fog: 

sound  signals  for 261 

speed  in 262 

Frostbite,  treatment  of. 365 

Gasoline  engines 181-183 

laying  up  for  winter 187 

use  of  ether 186 

Gasoline  for  power  boats 1  4 

Hawser  cutter,  use  of 411 , 


INDEX.  267 

Horses.,  carts,  or  tugs:  Articles. 

employment  of 7  (1) 

payment  for ?H  1  (2) 

Infantry  drill,  notes  on 531  et  seq. 

Inspector  of  customs,  duties  of  officer  in  charge  as _  24 

Instructions,  Coast  Guard  stations,  effect  of 1 

International  Code  sigaals 321-827 

drills,  out  of  doors  only  to  be  recorded 325 

standards  of  proficiency  and  expertness 326,  327 

Lookout : 

entries  in  log  by 81  (1) 

manner  of  standing  watch 81  (2)  (3) 

record  kept  by 81  (1) 

Lyle  gun,  charge  of  powder  for . 38 

Motor  surfboat,  landing  in  a  heavy  surf 244 

Muster  at  a  station 421 

Officer  in  charge,  duties  as  inspector  of  customs 24 

Paint : 

brushes,  usje  and  care  of_ 137 

care  of 135 

instructions  for  applying 134 

Patrols  and  lookouts 51-72 

Personal  property,  recovery  of 9 

Pistol,  notes  on  shooting  of 523-529 

Proficiency  of  crew,  responsibility  for 3 

Promotions,  procedure  concerning 12 

Rescuing  people  from  a  drifting  wreck  at  sea 254 

Resuscitation  drill 351  et  seq. 

Resuscitation,  report  of 8 

Rifle  : 

bolt  mechanism,  to  assemble , 515 

to  dismount 514 

breecfr  mechanism,  dismounting  and  assembling 512 

care  and  cleaning  of 517-519 

notes  on 530 

cleaning  solution,  preparation  of 530 

magazine  mechanism,  to  dismount 516 

operation  of  mechanism . 507-512 

precautions  in  handling  mechanism ;_ *       517 

sigltf  setting im ____„_ 520-522 

Saving  drowning  person.s  by  swimming  to  their  relief—  362 

' 

• 


268  INBEX. 

Articles. 

School  of  the  recruit-.. ! 422  et  seq. 

facings 428, 429 

manual  of  arms 447  et  seq. 

position  of  attention 423 

rests 424 

salutes ____ 430, 431 

steps  and  marchings 432-434 

School  of  the  squad 471  et  seq. 

alignments 477 

to  form  the  squad 476 

to  load 495 

to  unload 498 

Semaphore  signals . 305-310 

background 307 

communicating  with  vessels  of  the  United  States 

Navy 315 

failure  to  receive  part  of  a  message 1 

flags  used 306 

numbers  spelled  out 309 

procedure  signs 311 

standards  of  proficiency  and  expertness 

to  call  a  unit__ 312 

Signals : 

accuracy  essential . ___          283 

dot  and  dash  code 285 

drills _.___          27(3 

message,  how  received 282 

how  recorded 281 

what  regarded  as 280 

for  use  at  wrecks 331-336 

answers  to 332 

international  Morse  code  used 275 

methods  used  between  units  of  Coast.  Guard 

methods  used  with  merchant  vessels-. 273 

practice. _ 277 

procedure  signs 285 

proficiency  required . 278 

staffs  for  flags  on  beach  carts 333 

storm  warnings '. . 341 

tests  for  proficiency 279 

torches  on  beach  carts 334 

two  torches  used  together 335 


INDEX.  269 

Articles. 

Sound  signals  for  a  fog 261 

Station  log,  names  and  addresses  entered  in 13 

Stations,  in  commission,  out  of  commission 2 

Steering  and  sailing  rules 263 

Stranded  vessels: 

assistance  to 89 

patrols  and  watched  not  to  be  neglected  for 41 

turned  over  to  wreck  commissioner  or  agent 40 

Surfboat,  self-bailing,  instructions  regarding- 155, 156 

Swimming  practice , 88 

Swimming  qualifications 83-88 

Visitors  to  station,  treatment  of 11 

Wigwag  signals 291-296 

background 292 

error 296 

procedure  prescribed 293 

standards  of  proficiency  and  expertness 297 

to  call  ship  or  station .1 295 

Wrecks : 

action  in  case  of- 31,  32 

action  on  discovery  of 70,  82 

apparatus  to  be  used  at 35 

charge  of  operations, at 34 

establishing  communication  with 37 

preservation  of  life  at 36 

signal  for  assistance  at  night 33 

signals  for  use  at 331-336 

answers  to T  332 

staffs  for  flags  on  beach  carts. 333 

torches  on  beach  carts 334 

two  torches  used  together 335 

working  on,  bad  weather 42 

O 


4 


VK 


YB  78328 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


